diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:33:50 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:33:50 -0700 |
| commit | f665ea7f982483d8a4372108a220f05e975bc51c (patch) | |
| tree | 36dbadf7eba8bc4dafbd3cd8cb8f7907c54ea15f | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10070-0.txt | 3686 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10070-h/10070-h.htm | 5139 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10070-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 458994 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10070-0.txt | 4059 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10070-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 62137 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10070-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 523905 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10070-h/10070-h.htm | 5599 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10070-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 458994 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/10070.txt | 4169 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/10070.zip | bin | 0 -> 62860 bytes |
13 files changed, 22668 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/10070-0.txt b/10070-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a3cec2 --- /dev/null +++ b/10070-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3686 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10070 *** + +[Illustration] + + + + +Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans + +by Edward Eggleston + +AUTHOR OF “TRUE STORIES OF AMERICAN LIFE AND ADVENTURE” +“A FIRST BOOK IN AMERICAN HISTORY” AND “A HISTORY OF THE +UNITED STATES AND ITS PEOPLE FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS” + +1895 + + +Contents + + PREFACE + The First Governor in Boston + Marquette in Iowa + Indian Pictures + William Penn and the Indians + One Little Bag of Rice + The Story of a Wise Woman + Franklin his own Teacher + How Franklin found out Things + Franklin asks the Sunshine something + Franklin and the Kite + Franklin’s Whistle + Too much for the Whistle + John Stark and the Indians + A Great Good Man + Putnam and the Wolf + Washington and his Hatchet + How Benny West learned to be a Painter + Washington’s Christmas Gift + How Washington got out of a Trap + Washington’s Last Battle + Marion’s Tower + Clark and his Men + Daniel Boone and his Grapevine Swing + Daniel Boone’s Daughter and her Friends + Decatur and the Pirates + Stories about Jefferson + A Long Journey + Captain Clark’s Burning Glass + Quicksilver Bob + The First Steamboat + Washington Irving as a Boy + Don’t give up the Ship + Grandfather’s Rhyme + The Star-spangled Banner + How Audubon came to know about Birds + Audubon in the Wild Woods + Hunting a Panther + Some Boys who became Authors + Daniel Webster and his Brother + Webster and the Poor Woman + The India-rubber Man + Doctor Kane in the Frozen Sea + A Dinner on the Ice + Doctor Kane gets out of the Frozen Sea + Longfellow as a Boy + Kit Carson and the Bears + Horace Greeley as a Boy + Horace Greeley learning to Print + A Wonderful Woman + The Author of “Little Women” + My Kingdom + A Song from the Suds + + + + +PREFACE. + + +The primary aim of this book is to furnish the little learner reading +matter that will excite his attention and give him pleasure, and thus +make lighter the difficult task of learning to read. The ruggedness of +this task has often been increased by the use of disconnected +sentences, or lessons as dry and uninteresting as finger exercises on +the piano. It is a sign of promise that the demand for reading matter +of interest to the child has come from teachers. I have endeavored to +meet this requirement in the following stories. + +As far as possible the words chosen have been such as are not difficult +to the little reader, either from their length or their unfamiliarity. +The sentences and paragraphs are short. Learning to read is like +climbing a steep hill, and it is a great relief to the panting child to +find frequent breathing places. + +It is one of the purposes of these stories to make the mind of the +pupil familiar with some of the leading figures in the history of our +country by means of personal anecdote. Some of the stories are those +that every American child ought to know, because they have become a +kind of national folklore. Such, for example, are “Putnam and the Wolf” +and the story of “Franklin’s Whistle.” I have thought it important to +present as great a variety of subjects as possible, so that the pupil +may learn something not only of great warriors and patriots, but also +of great statesmen. The exploits of discoverers, the triumphs of +American inventors, and the achievements of men of letters and men of +science, find place in these stories. All the narratives are +historical, or at least no stories have been told for true that are +deemed fictitious. Every means which the writer’s literary experience +could suggest has been used to make the stories engaging, in the hope +that the interest of the narrative may prove a sufficient spur to +exertion on the part of the pupil, and that this little book will make +green and pleasant a pathway that has so often been dry and laborious. +It will surely serve to excite an early interest in our national +history by giving some of the great personages of that history a place +among the heroes that impress the susceptible imagination of a child. +It is thus that biographical and historical incidents acquire something +of the vitality of folk tales. + +The illustrations that accompany the text have been planned with +special reference to the awakening of the child’s attention. To keep +the mind alert and at its best is more than half the battle in +teaching. The publishers and the author of this little book believe +that in laying the foundation of a child’s education the best work is +none too good. + +The larger words have been divided by hyphens when a separation into +syllables is likely to help the learner. The use of the hyphen has been +regulated entirely with a view to its utility. After a word not too +difficult has been made familiar by its repeated occurrence, the +hyphens are omitted. + + + + +STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS. + + +[Illustration: THE FIRST GOVERNOR IN BOSTON] + +Before the white people came, there were no houses in this country but +the little huts of the In-di-ans. The In-di-an houses were made of +bark, or mats, or skins, spread over poles. + +Some people came to one part of the country. Others started +set-tle-ments in other places. When more people came, some of these +set-tle-ments grew into towns. The woods were cut down. Farms were +planted. Roads were made. But it took many years for the country to +fill with people. + +The first white people that came to live in the woods where Boston is +now, settled there a long time ago. They had a gov-ern-or over them. He +was a good man, and did much for the people. His name was John +Win-throp. + +The first thing the people had to do was to cut down the trees. After +that they could plant corn. But at first they could not raise any-thing +to eat. They had brought flour and oat-meal from England. But they +found that it was not enough to last till they could raise corn on +their new ground. + +Win-throp sent a ship to get more food for them. The ship was gone a +long time. The people ate up all their food. They were hungry. They +went to the sea-shore, and found clams and mussels. They were glad to +get these to eat. + +At last they set a day for every-body to fast and pray for food. The +gov-ern-or had a little flour left. Nearly all of this was made into +bread, and put into the oven to bake. He did not know when he would get +any more. + +Soon after this a poor man came along. His flour was all gone. His +bread had all been eaten up. His family were hungry. The gov-ern-or +gave the poor man the very last flour that he had in the barrel. + +Just then a ship was seen. It sailed up toward Boston. It was loaded +with food for all the people. + +The time for the fast day came. But there was now plenty of food. The +fast day was turned into a thanks-giving day. + +One day a man sent a very cross letter to Gov-ern-or Win-throp. +Win-throp sent it back to him. He said, “I cannot keep a letter that +might make me angry.” Then the man that had written the cross letter +wrote to Win-throp, “By con-quer-ing yourself, you have con-quered me.” + + + + +MARQUETTE IN IOWA. + + +The first white men to go into the middle of our country were +French-men. The French had settled in Can-a-da. They sent +mis-sion-a-ries to preach to the Indians in the West. They also sent +traders to buy furs from the Indians. + +The French-men heard the Indians talk about a great river in the West. +But no French-man had ever gone far enough to see the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +Mar-quette was a priest. Jo-li-et was a trader. These two men were sent +to find the great river that the Indians talked about. + +They trav-eled in two birch canoes. They took five men to paddle the +canoes. They took some smoked meat to eat on the way. They also took +some Indian corn. They had trinkets to trade to the Indians. Hatchets, +and beads, and bits of cloth were the money they used to pay the +Indians for what they wanted. + +The friendly Indians in Wis-con-sin tried to per-suade them not to go. +They told them that the Indians on the great river would kill them. + +The friendly Indians also told them that there was a demon in one part +of the river. They said that this demon roared so loud that he could be +heard a long way off. They said that the demon would draw the +trav-el-ers down into the water. Then they told about great monsters +that ate up men and their canoes. + +But Mar-quette and the men with him thought they would risk the +journey. They would not turn back for fear of the demon or the +monsters. + +The two little canoes went down the Wis-con-sin River. After some days +they came to the Mis-sis-sip-pi. More than a hundred years before, the +Spaniards had seen the lower part of this river. But no white man had +ever seen this part of the great river. Mar-quette did not know that +any white man had ever seen any part of the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +The two little canoes now turned their bows down the river. Some-times +they saw great herds of buf-fa-loes. Some of these came to the bank of +the river to look at the men in the canoes. They had long, shaggy +manes, which hung down over their eyes. + +For two weeks the trav-el-ers paddled down the river. In all this time +they did not see any Indians. After they had gone hundreds of miles in +this way, they came to a place where they saw tracks in the mud. It was +in what is now the State of I-o-wa. + +Mar-quette and Jo-li-et left the men in their canoes, and followed the +tracks. After walking two hours, they came to an Indian village. The +Frenchmen came near enough to hear the Indians talking. The Indians did +not see them. + +Jo-li-et and Mar-quette did not know whether the Indians would kill +them or not. They said a short prayer. Then they stood out in full +view, and gave a loud shout. + +The Indians came out of their tents like bees. They stared at the +strangers. Then four Indians came toward them. These Indians carried a +peace pipe. They held this up toward the sun. This meant that they were +friendly. + +The Indians now offered the peace pipe to the French-men. The +French-men took it, and smoked with the Indians. This was the Indian +way of saying, “We are friends.” + +[Illustration: Marquette and Joliet] + +Mar-quette asked the Indians what tribe they belonged to. They told him +that they were of the tribe called the Il-li-nois. + +They took Jo-li-et and Mar-quette into their village. They came to the +door of a large wig-wam. A chief stood in the door. He shaded his eyes +with both hands, as if the sun were shining in his face. Then he made a +little speech. + +He said, “French-men, how bright the sun shines when you come to see +us! We are all waiting for you. You shall now come into our houses in +peace.” + +The Il-li-nois Indians made a feast for their new friends. First they +had mush of corn meal, with fat meat in it. One of the Indians fed the +Frenchmen as though they were babies. He put mush into their mouths +with a large spoon. + +Then came some fish. The Indian that fed the vis-it-ors picked out the +bones with his fingers. Then he put the pieces of fish into their +mouths. After they had some roasted dog. The French-men did not like +this. Last, they were fed with buf-fa-lo meat. + +The next morning six hundred Indians went to the canoes to tell the +Frenchmen good-by. They gave Mar-quette a young Indian slave. And they +gave him a peace pipe to carry with him. + + + + +INDIAN PICTURES. + + +When Mar-quette and his men left the Il-li-nois, they went on down the +river. The friendly Il-li-nois had told them that the Indians they +would see were bad, and that they would kill any one who came into +their country. + +The Frenchmen had heard before this that there were demons and monsters +in the river. One day they saw some high rocks with pictures painted on +them. The ugly pictures made them think of these monsters. They were +painted in red, black, and green colors. They were pictures of two +Indian demons or gods. + +Each one of these monsters was about the size of a calf. They had horns +as long as those of a deer. Their eyes were red. Their faces were like +a man’s, but they were ugly and frightful. They had beards like a +tiger’s. Their bodies were covered with scales like those on a fish. +Their long tails were wound round their bodies, and over their heads, +and down between their legs. The end of each tail was like that of a +fish. + +The Indians prayed to these ugly gods when they passed in their canoes. +Even Mar-quette and his men were a little frightened when they saw such +pictures in a place so lonely. The Frenchmen went down the river about +twelve hundred miles. Some-times the Indians tried to kill them, but by +showing the peace pipe they made friends. At last they turned back. +Jo-li-et went to Can-a-da. Mar-quette preached to the Indians in the +West till he died. + + + + +WILLIAM PENN AND THE INDIANS. + + +The King of England gave all the land in Penn-syl-va-ni-a to William +Penn. The King made Penn a kind of king over Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Penn +could make the laws of this new country. But he let the people make +their own laws. + +Penn wanted to be friendly with the Indians. He paid them for all the +land his people wanted to live on. Before he went to Penn-syl-va-ni-a +he wrote a letter to the Indians. He told them in this letter that he +would not let any of his people do any harm to the Indians. He said he +would punish any-body that did any wrong to an Indian. This letter was +read to the Indians in their own lan-guage. + +Soon after this Penn got into a ship and sailed from England. He sailed +to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. When he came there, he sent word to the tribes of +Indians to come to meet him. + +The Indians met under a great elm tree on the bank of the river. +Indians like to hold their solemn meetings out of doors. They sit on +the ground. They say that the earth is the Indian’s mother. + +When Penn came to the place of meeting, he found the woods full of +Indians. As far as he could see, there were crowds of Indians. Penn’s +friends were few. They had no guns. + +Penn had a bright blue sash round his waist. One of the Indian chiefs, +who was the great chief, put on a kind of cap or crown. In the middle +of this was a small horn. The head chief wore this only at such great +meetings as this one. + +When the great chief had put on his horn, all the other chiefs and +great men of the Indians put down their guns. Then they sat down in +front of Penn in the form of a half-moon. Then the great chief told +Penn that the Indians were ready to hear what he had to say. + +Penn had a large paper in which he had written all the things that he +and his friends had promised to the Indians. He had written all the +promises that the Indians were to make to the white people. This was to +make them friends. When Penn had read this to them, it was explained to +them in their own lan-guage. Penn told them that they might stay in the +country that they had sold to the white people. The land would belong +to both the Indians and the white people. + +Then Penn laid the large paper down on the ground. That was to show +them, he said, that the ground was to belong to the Indians and the +white people to-geth-er. + +He said that there might be quarrels between some of the white people +and some of the Indians. But they would settle any quarrels without +fighting. When-ever there should be a quarrel, the Indians were to pick +out six Indians. The white people should also pick out six of their +men. These were to meet, and settle the quarrel. + +Penn said, “I will not call you my children, because fathers some-times +whip their children. I will not call you brothers, because brothers +sometimes fall out. But I will call you the same person as the white +people. We are the two parts of the same body.” + +The Indians could not write. But they had their way of putting down +things that they wished to have re-mem-bered. They gave Penn a belt of +shell beads. These beads are called wam-pum. Some wam-pum is white. +Some is purple. + +They made this belt for Penn of white beads. In the middle of the belt +they made a picture of purple beads. It is a picture of a white man and +an Indian. They have hold of each other’s hands. When they gave this +belt to Penn, they said, “We will live with William Penn and his +children as long as the sun and moon shall last.” + +[Illustration: Penn jumping with the Indians.] + +Penn took up the great paper from the ground. He handed it to the great +chief that wore the horn on his head. He told the Indians to keep it +and hand it to their children’s children, that they might know what he +had said. Then he gave them many presents of such things as they liked. +They gave Penn a name in their own language. They named him “O-nas.” +That was their word for a feather. As the white people used a pen made +out of a quill or feather, they called a pen “o-nas.” That is why they +called William Penn “Brother O-nas.” + +Penn sometimes went to see the Indians. He talked to them, and gave +them friendly advice. Once he saw some of them jumping. They were +trying to see who could jump the farthest. + +Penn had been a very active boy. He knew how to jump very well. He went +to the place where the Indians were jumping. He jumped farther than any +of them. + +When the great gov-ern-or took part in their sport, the Indians were +pleased. They loved Brother O-nas more than ever. + + + + +ONE LITTLE BAG OF RICE + + +The first white people that came to this country hardly knew how to get +their living here. They did not know what would grow best in this +country. + +Many of the white people learned to hunt. All the land was covered with +trees. In the woods were many animals whose flesh was good to eat. +There were deer, and bears, and great shaggy buf-fa-loes. There were +rabbits and squirrels. And there were many kinds of birds. The hunters +shot wild ducks, wild turkeys, wild geese, and pigeons. The people also +caught many fishes out of the rivers. + +Then there were animals with fur on their backs. The people killed +these and sold their skins. In this way many made their living. + +Other people spent their time in cutting down the trees. They sawed the +trees into timbers and boards. Some of it they split into staves to +make barrels. They sent the staves and other sorts of timber to other +countries to be sold. In South Car-o-li-na men made tar and pitch out +of the pine trees. + +But there was a wise man in South Car-o-li-na. He was one of those men +that find out better ways of doing. His name was Thomas Smith. + +Thomas Smith had once lived in a large island thousands of miles away +from South Car-o-li-na. In that island he had seen the people raising +rice. He saw that it was planted in wet ground. He said that he would +like to try it in South Car-o-li-na. But he could not get any seed rice +to plant. The rice that people eat is not fit to sow. + +One day a ship came to Charles-ton, where Thomas Smith lived. It had +been driven there by storms. The ship came from the large island where +Smith had seen rice grow. The captain of this ship was an old friend of +Smith. + +The two old friends met once more. Thomas Smith told the captain that +he wanted some rice for seed. The captain called the cook of his ship, +and asked him if he had any. The cook had one little bag of seed rice. +The captain gave this to his friend. + +There was some wet ground at the back of Smith’s garden. In this wet +ground he sowed some of the rice. It grew finely. + +He gathered a good deal of rice in his garden that year. He gave part +of this to his friends. They all sowed it. The next year there was a +great deal of rice. + +After a while the wet land in South Car-o-li-na was turned to rice +fields. Every year many thousands of barrels of rice were sent away to +be sold. + +All this came from one little bag of rice and one wise man. + +[Illustration: Rice Plant.] + + + + +THE STORY OF A WISE WOMAN. + + +You have read how Thomas Smith first raised rice in Car-o-li-na. After +his death there lived in South Car-o-li-na a wise young woman. She +showed the people how to raise another plant. Her name was Eliza Lucas. + +The father of Miss Lucas did not live in Car-o-li-na. He was gov-ern-or +of one of the islands of the West Indies. Miss Lucas was fond of trying +new things. She often got seeds from her father. These she planted in +South Carolina. + +Her father sent her some seeds of the in-di-go plant. She sowed some of +these in March. But there came a frost. The in-di-go plant cannot stand +frost. Her plants all died. + +But Miss Lucas did not give up. She sowed some more seeds in April. +These grew very well until a cut-worm found them. The worm wished to +try new things, too. So he ate off the in-di-go plants. + +But Miss Lucas was one of the people who try, try again. She had lost +her indigo plants twice. Once more she sowed some of the seed. This +time the plants grew very well. + +Miss Lucas wrote to her father about it. He sent her a man who knew how +to get the indigo out of the plant. + +The man tried not to show Miss Lucas how to make the indigo. He did not +wish the people in South Carolina to learn how to make it. He was +afraid his own people would not get so much for their indigo. + +So he would not explain just how it ought to be done. He spoiled the +indigo on purpose. + +But Miss Lucas watched him closely. She found out how the indigo ought +to be made. Some of her father’s land in South Carolina was now planted +with the indigo plants. + +[Illustration: Indigo Plant.] + +Then Miss Lucas was married. She became Mrs. Pinck-ney. Her father gave +her all the indigo growing on his land in South Carolina. It was all +saved for seed. Some of the seed Mrs. Pinck-ney gave to her friends. +Some of it her husband sowed. It all grew, and was made into that blue +dye that we call indigo. When it is used in washing clothes, it is +called bluing. + +In a few years, more than a million pounds of indigo were made in South +Carolina every year. Many people got rich by it. And it was all because +Miss Lucas did not give up. + + + + +FRANKLIN HIS OWN TEACHER. + + +Few people ever knew so many things as Franklin. Men said, “How did he +ever learn so many things?” For he had been a poor boy who had to work +for a living. He could not go to school at all after he was ten years +old. + +His father made soap and candles. Little Ben Frank-lin had to cut wicks +for the candles. He also filled the candle molds. And he sold soap and +candles, and ran on errands. But when he was not at work he spent his +time in reading good books. What little money he got he used to buy +books with. + +He read the old story of “Pil-grim’s Prog-ress,” and liked it so well +that he bought all the other stories by the same man. But as he wanted +more books, and had not money to buy them, he sold all of these books. +The next he bought were some little his-to-ry books. These were made to +sell very cheap, and they were sold by peddlers. He managed to buy +forty or fifty of these little books of his-to-ry. + +Another way that he had of learning was by seeing things with his own +eyes. His father took him to see car-pen-ters at work with their saws +and planes. He also saw masons laying bricks. And he went to see men +making brass and copper kettles. And he saw a man with a turning lathe +making the round legs of chairs. Other men were at work making knives. +Some things people learn out of books, and some things they have to see +for them-selves. + +As he was fond of books, Ben’s father thought that it would be a good +plan to send him to learn to print them. So the boy went to work in his +brother’s printing office. Here he passed his spare time in reading. He +borrowed some books out of the stores where books were sold. He would +sit up a great part of the night sometimes to read one of these books. +He wished to return it when the book-store opened in the morning. One +man who had many books lent to Ben such of his books as he wanted. + +It was part of the bargain that Ben’s brother should pay his board. The +boy offered to board himself if his brother would give him half what it +cost to pay for his board. + +[Illustration: Franklin at Study.] + +His brother was glad to do this, and Ben saved part of the money and +bought books with it. He was a healthy boy, and it did not hurt him to +live mostly on bread and butter. Sometimes he bought a little pie or a +handful of raisins. + +Long before he was a man, people said, “How much the boy knows!” This +was because— + +He did not waste his time. + +He read good books. + +He saw things for himself. + + + + +HOW FRANKLIN FOUND OUT THINGS. + + +Frank-lin thought that ants know how to tell things to one another. He +thought that they talk by some kind of signs. When an ant has found a +dead fly too big for him to drag away, he will run off and get some +other ant to help him. Frank-lin thought that ants have some way of +telling other ants that there is work to do. + +One day he found some ants eating mo-las-ses out of a little jar in a +closet. He shook them out. Then he tied a string to the jar, and hung +it on a nail in the ceiling. But he had not got all the ants out of the +jar. One little ant liked sweet things so well that he staid in the +jar, and kept on eating like a greedy boy. + +[Illustration: Ants talking (magnified)] + +At last when this greedy ant had eaten all that he could, he started to +go home. Frank-lin saw him climb over the rim of the jar. Then the ant +ran down the outside of the jar. But when he got to the bottom, he did +not find any shelf there. He went all round the jar. There was no way +to get down to the floor. The ant ran this way and that way, but he +could not get down. + +[Illustration: An Ants Feeler (magnified)] + +At last the greedy ant thought he would see if he could go up. He +climbed up the string to the ceiling. Then he went down the wall. He +came to his own hole at last, no doubt. + +After a while he got hungry again, perhaps. He thought about that jar +of sweets at the end of a string. Then perhaps he told the other ants. +Maybe he let them know that there was a string by which they could get +down to the jar. + +In about half an hour after the ant had gone up the string, Franklin +saw a swarm of ants going down the string. They marched in a line, one +after another. Soon there were two lines of ants on the string. The +ants in one line were going down to get at the sweet food. The ants in +the other line were marching up the other side of the string to go +home. Do you think that the greedy ant told the other ants about the +jar? + +And did he tell them that there was a string by which an ant could get +there? + +And did he tell it by speaking, or by signs that he made with his +feelers? + +If you watch two ants when they meet, you will see that they touch +their feelers together, as if they said “Good-morning!” + +[Illustration] + + + + +FRANKLIN ASKS THE SUNSHINE SOMETHING. + + +One day Franklin was eating dinner at the house of a friend. The lady +of the house, when she poured out the coffee, found that it was not +hot. + +She said, “I am sorry that the coffee is cold. It is because the +servant forgot to scour the coffee-pot. Coffee gets cold more quickly +when the coffee-pot is not bright.” + +This set Franklin to thinking. He thought that a black or dull thing +would cool more quickly than a white or bright one. That made him think +that a black thing would take in heat more quickly than a white one. + +He wanted to find out if this were true or not. There was no-body who +knew, so there was no-body to ask. But Franklin thought that he would +ask the sunshine. Maybe the sunshine would tell him whether a black +thing would heat more quickly than a white thing. + +But how could he ask the sunshine? + +There was snow on the ground. Franklin spread a white cloth on the +snow. Then he spread a black cloth on the snow near the white one. When +he came to look at them, he saw that the snow under the black cloth +melted away much sooner than that under the white cloth. + +That is the way that the sunshine told him that black would take in +heat more quickly than white. After he had found this out, many people +got white hats to wear in the summer time. A white hat is cooler than a +black one. + +Some time when there is snow on the ground, you can take a white and a +black cloth and ask the sunshine the same question. + + + + +FRANKLIN AND THE KITE. + + +When Franklin wanted to know whether the ants could talk or not, he +asked the ants, and they told him. When he wanted to know some-thing +else, he asked the sunshine about it, as you have read in another +story. That is the way that Franklin came to know so many things. He +knew how to ask questions of every-thing. + +Once he asked the light-ning a question. And the light-ning gave him an +answer. + +Before the time of Franklin, people did not know what light-ning was. +They did not know what made the thunder. Franklin thought much about +it. At last he proved what it was. He asked the lightning a question, +and made it tell what it was. To tell you this story, I shall have to +use one big word. Maybe it is too big for some of my little friends +that will read this book. Let us divide it into parts. Then you will +not be afraid of it. The big word is e-lec-tric-i-ty. + +Those of you who live in towns have seen the streets lighted by +e-lec-tric-i-ty. But in Franklin’s time there were no such lights. +People knew very little about this strange thing with a big name. + +But Franklin found out many things about it that nobody had ever known +before. He began to think that the little sparks he got from +e-lec-tric-i-ty were small flashes of lightning. He thought that the +little cracking sound of these sparks was a kind of baby thunder. + +So he thought that he would try to catch a little bit of lightning. +Perhaps he could put it into one of the little bottles used to hold +e-lec-tric-i-ty. Then if it behaved like e-lec-tric-i-ty, he would know +what it was. But catching lightning is not easy. How do you think he +did it? + +First he made a kite. It was not a kite just like a boy’s kite. He +wanted a kite that would fly when it rained. Rain would spoil a paper +kite in a minute. So Franklin used a silk hand-ker-chief to cover his +kite, instead of paper. + +[Illustration: Franklin’s Discovery.] + +He put a little sharp-pointed wire at the top of his kite. This was a +kind of lightning rod to draw the lightning into the kite. His kite +string was a common hemp string. To this he tied a key, because +lightning will follow metal. The end of the string that he held in his +hand was a silk ribbon, which was tied to the hemp string of the kite. +E-lec-tric-ity will not follow silk. + +One night when there was a storm coming, he went out with his son. They +stood under a cow shed, and he sent his kite up in the air. + +[Illustration] + +After a while he held his knuckle to the key. A tiny spark flashed +between the key and his knuckle. It was a little flash of lightning. + +Then he took his little bottle fixed to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. He filled +it with the e-lec-tric-i-ty that came from the key. He carried home a +bottle of lightning. So he found out what made it thunder and lighten. + +After that he used to bring the lightning into his house on rods and +wires. He made the lightning ring bells and do many other strange +things. + + + + +FRANKLIN’S WHISTLE. + + +When Franklin was an old man, he wrote a cu-ri-ous letter. In that +letter he told a story. It was about some-thing that happened to him +when he was a boy. + +[Illustration] + +Here is the story put into verses, so that you will re-member it +better. Some day you can read the story as Franklin told it himself. +You will hear people say, “He paid too much for the whistle.” The +saying came from this story. + + + + +TOO MUCH FOR THE WHISTLE + + + As Ben with pennies in his pocket + Went strolling down the street, + “Toot-toot! toot-toot!” there came a whistle + From a boy he chanced to meet, + + Whistling fit to burst his buttons, + Blowing hard and stepping high. + Then Benny said, “I’ll buy your whistle;” + But “Toot! toot-toot!” was the reply. + + But Benny counted out his pennies, + The whistling boy began to smile; + With one last toot he gave the whistle + To Ben, and took his penny pile. + + Now homeward goes the whistling Benny, + As proud as any foolish boy, + And in his pockets not a penny, + But in his mouth a noisy toy. + + “Ah, Benny, Benny!” cries his mother, + “I cannot stand your ugly noise.” + “Stop, Benny, Benny!” says his father, + “I cannot talk, you drown my voice.” + + At last the whistling boy re-mem-bers + How much his money might have bought + “Too many pennies for a whistle,” + Is little Benny’s ugly thought. + + Too many pennies for a whistle + Is what we all pay, you and I, + Just for a little foolish pleasure + Pay a price that’s quite too high. + + + + +JOHN STARK AND THE INDIANS. + + +John Stark was a famous gen-er-al in the Rev-o-lu-tion. But this story +is not about the Rev-o-lu-tion. It is about Stark before he became a +soldier. + +When he was a young man, Stark went into the woods. His brother and two +other young men were with him. They lived in a camp. It was far away +from any houses. + +The young men set traps for animals in many places. They wanted to +catch the animals that have fur on them. They wanted to get the skins +to sell. + +The Indians were at war with the white people. One day the young men +saw the tracks of Indians. Then they knew that it was not safe for them +to stay in the woods any longer. They began to get ready to go home. + +John Stark went out to bring in the traps set for animals. The Indians +found him, and made him a pris-on-er. They asked him where his friends +were. + +Stark did not wish his friends to be taken. So he pointed the wrong +way. He took the Indians a long way from the other young men. + +But John Stark’s friends did not know that he was a pris-on-er. When he +did not come back, they thought that he had lost his way. They fired +their guns to let him know where they were. + +When the Indians heard the guns, they knew where the other hunters +were. They went down to the river, and waited for them. When one of the +men came down, they caught him. + +Then John Stark’s brother and the other man came down the river in a +boat. The Indians told Stark to call them. They wanted them to come +over where the Indians were. Then they could take them. + +John knew that the Indians were cruel. He knew that if he did not do +what they told him to, they might kill him. But he wished to save his +brother. He called to his brother to row for the other shore. + +When they turned toward the other shore, the Indians fired at them. But +Stark knocked up two of their guns. They did not hit the white men. +Then some of the other Indians fired. Stark knocked up their guns also. +But the man that was with his brother was killed. + +John now called to his brother, “Run! for all the Indians’ guns are +empty.” + +His brother got away. The Indians were very angry with John. They did +not kill him. But they gave him a good beating. These Indians were from +Can-a-da. They took their pris-on-ers to their own village. When they +were coming home, they shouted to let the people know that they had +prisoners. + +[Illustration: Stark running the Gauntlet] + +The young Indian war-ri-ors stood in two rows in the village. Each +prisoner had to run between these two rows of Indians. As he passed, +every one of the Indians hit him as hard as he could with a stick, or a +club, or a stone. + +The young man who was with Stark was badly hurt in running between +these lines. But John Stark knew the Indians. He knew that they liked a +brave man. + +When it came his turn to run, he snatched a club from one of the +Indians. With this club he fought his way down the lines. He hit hard, +now on this side, and now on that. The young Indians got out of his +way. The old Indians who were looking on sat and laughed at the others. +They said that Stark was a brave man. + +One day the Indians gave him a hoe and told him to hoe corn. He knew +that the Indian war-ri-ors would not work. They think it a shame for a +man to work. Their work is left for slaves and women. So Stark +pre-tend-ed that he did not know how to hoe. He dug up the corn instead +of the weeds. Then he threw the hoe into the river. He said, “That is +work for slaves and women.” + +Then the Indians were pleased with him. They called him the young +chief. + +After a while some white men paid the Indians a hundred and three +dollars to let Stark go home. They charged more for him than for the +other man, because they thought that he must be a young chief. Stark +went hunting again. He had to get some furs to pay back the money the +men had paid the Indians for him. He took good care that the Indians +should not catch him again. + +He af-ter-wards became a great fighter against the Indians. He had +learned their ways while he was among them. He knew better how to fight +them than almost any-body else. + +In the Rev-o-lu-tion he was a gen-er-al. He fought the British at +Ben-ning-ton, and won a great vic-to-ry. + + + + +A GREAT GOOD MAN. + + +Some men are great soldiers. Some are great law-makers. Some men write +great books. Some men make great in-ven-tions. Some men are great +speakers. + +Now you are going to read about a man that was great in none of these +things. He was not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. He was never +rich. He was a poor school-teacher. He never held any office. + +And yet he was a great man. He was great for his goodness. + +He was born in France. But most of his life was passed in +Phil-a-del-phi-a before the Rev-o-lu-tion. + +He was twenty-five years old when he became a school-teacher. He +thought that he could do more good in teaching than in any other way. + +School-masters in his time were not like our teachers. Children were +treated like little animals. In old times the school-master was a +little king. He walked and talked as if he knew every-thing. He wanted +all the children to be afraid of him. + +But Ben-e-zet was not that kind of man. He was very gentle. He treated +the children more kindly than their fathers and mothers did. Nobody in +this country had ever seen a teacher like him. + +He built a play-room for the children of his school. He used to take +them to this room during school time for a little a-muse-ment. He +man-aged each child as he found best. Some he could persuade to be +good. Some he shamed into being good. But this was very dif-fer-ent +from the cruel beatings that other teachers of that time gave their +pupils. + +Of course the children came to love him very much. After they grew to +be men and women, they kept their love for the good little +schoolmaster. As long as they lived they listened to his advice. + +There were no good school-books in his time. He wrote some little books +to make learning easier to his pupils. He taught them many things not +in their books. He taught them to be kind to brutes, and gentle with +one another. He taught them to be noble. He made them despise every +kind of meanness. + +He was a great teacher. That is better than being a great soldier. + +Ben-e-zet was a good man in many ways. He was the friend of all poor +people. Once he found a poor man suf-fer-ing with cold for want of a +coat. He took off his own coat in the street and put it on the poor +man, and then went home in his shirt sleeves. + +In those days negroes were stolen from Af-ri-ca to be sold into +A-mer-i-ca. Ben-e-zet wrote little books against this wrong. He sent +these books over all the world almost. He also tried to persuade the +white men of his own country to be honest and kind with the Indians. +Great men in other countries were pleased with his books. They wrote +him letters. When any of them came to this country, they went to see +him. They wanted to see a man that was good to everybody. His house was +a plain one. But great men liked to sit at the table of the good +schoolmaster. + +There was war between the English and French at that time. Can-a-da +belonged to the French. Our country belonged to the English. There was +a country called A-ca-di-a. It was a part of what is now No-va +Sco-ti-a. The people of A-ca-di-a were French. + +[Illustration: Departure of the Acadians] + +The English took the A-ca-di-ans away from their homes. They sent them +to various places. Many families were divided. The poor A-ca-di-ans +lost their homes and all that they had. + +Many hundreds of these people were sent to Phil-a-del-phi-a. Benezet +became their friend. As he was born in France, he could speak their +lan-guage. He got a large house built for some of them to stay in. He +got food and clothing for them. He helped them to get work, and did +them good in many other ways. + +One day Benezet’s wife came to him with a troubled face. She said, +“There have been thieves in the house. Two of my blankets have been +stolen.” + +“Never mind, my dear,” said Benezet, “I gave them to some of the poor +A-ca-di-ans.” + +One old Acadian was afraid of Benezet. He did not see why Benezet +should take so much trouble for other people. He thought that Benezet +was only trying to get a chance to sell the Acadians for slaves. When +Benezet heard this, he had a good laugh. + +Many years after this the Rev-o-lu-tion broke out. It brought trouble +to many people. Benezet helped as many as he could. + +After a while the British army took Phil-a-del-phi-a. They sent their +soldiers to stay in the houses of the people. The people had to take +care of the soldiers. This was very hard for the poor people. + +One day Benezet saw a poor woman. Her face showed that she was in +trouble. + +“Friend, what is the matter?” Benezet said to her. She told him that +six soldiers of the British army had been sent to stay in her house. +She was a washer-woman. But while the soldiers filled up the house she +could not do any washing. She and her children were in want. + +Benezet went right away to see the gen-er-al that was in command of the +soldiers. The good man was in such a hurry that he forgot to get a +pass. The soldiers at the gen-er-al’s door would not let him go in. + +At last some one told the gen-er-al that a queer-looking fellow wanted +to see him. + +“Let him come up,” said the general. + +The odd little man came in. He told the general all about the troubles +of the poor washer-woman. The general sent word that the soldiers must +not stay any longer in her house. + +The general liked the kind little man. He told him to come to see him +again. He told the soldiers at his door to let Benezet come in +when-ever he wished to. + +Soon after the Rev-o-lu-tion was over, Benezet was taken ill. When the +people of Phil-a-del-phi-a heard that he was ill, they gathered in +crowds about his house. Every-body loved him. Every-body wanted to know +whether he was better or not. At last the doctors said he could not get +well. Then the people wished to see the good man once more. The doors +were opened. The rooms and halls of his house were filled with people +coming to say good-bye to Benezet, and going away again. + +When he was buried, it seemed as if all Phil-a-del-phi-a had come to +his fu-ner-al. The rich and the poor, the black and the white, crowded +the streets. The city had never seen so great a fu-ner-al. + +In the company was an A-mer-i-can general. He said, “I would rather be +An-tho-ny Benezet in that coffin than General Wash-ing-ton in all his +glory.” + + + + +PUTNAM AND THE WOLF. + + +Putnam was a brave soldier. He fought many battles against the Indians. +After that he became a general in the Revolution. But this is a story +of his battle with a wolf. It took place when he was a young man, +before he was a soldier. + +Putnam lived in Con-nect-i-cut. In the woods there were still a few +wolves. One old wolf came to Putnam’s neigh-bor-hood every winter. She +always brought a family of young wolves with her. + +The hunters would always kill the young wolves. But they could not find +the old mother wolf. She knew how to keep out of the way. + +The farmers tried to catch her in their traps. But she was too cunning. +She had had one good lesson when she was young. She had put the toes of +one foot into a steel trap. The trap had snipped them off. After that +she was more careful. + +One winter night she went out to get some meat. She came to Putnam’s +flock of sheep and goats. She killed some of them. She found it great +fun. + +There were no dogs about. The poor sheep had nobody to protect them. So +the old wolf kept on killing. One sheep was enough for her supper. But +she killed the rest just for sport. She killed seventy sheep and goats +that night. + +Putnam and his friends set out to find the old sheep killer. There were +six men of them. They agreed that two of them should hunt for her at a +time. Then another two should begin as soon as the first two should +stop. So she would be hunted day and night. + +The hunters found her track in the snow. There could be no mistake +about it. The track made by one of her feet was shorter than those made +by the other feet. That was because one of her feet had been caught in +a trap. + +The hunters found that the old wolf had gone a long way off. Perhaps +she felt guilty. She must have thought that she would be hunted. She +had trotted away for a whole night. + +Then she turned and went back again. She was getting hungry by this +time. She wanted some more sheep. + +The men followed her tracks back again. The dogs drove her into a hole. +It was not far from Putnam’s house. + +All the farmers came to help catch her. They sent the dogs into the +cave where the wolf was. But the wolf bit the dogs, and drove them out +again. + +Then the men put a pile of straw in the mouth of the cave. They set the +straw on fire. It filled the cave with smoke. But Mrs. Wolf did not +come out. + +Then they burned brim-stone in the cave. It must have made the wolf +sneeze. But the cave was deep. She went as far in as she could, and +staid there. She thought that the smell of brimstone was not so bad as +the dogs and men who wanted to kill her. + +Putnam wanted to send his negro into the cave to drive out the wolf. +But the negro thought that he would rather stay out. + +Then Putnam said that he would go in himself. He tied a rope to his +legs. Then he got some pieces of birch-bark. He set fire to these. He +knew that wild animals do not like to face a fire. + +He got down on his hands and knees. He held the blazing bark in his +hand. He crawled through the small hole into the cave. There was not +room for him to stand up. + +At first the cave went downward into the ground. Then it was level a +little way. Then it went upward. At the very back of this part of the +cave was the wolf. Putnam crawled up until he could see the wolf’s +eyes. + +When the wolf saw the fire, she gave a sudden growl. Putnam jerked the +rope that was tied to his leg. The men outside thought that the wolf +had caught him. They pulled on the other end of the rope. + +The men pulled as fast as they could. When they had drawn Putnam out, +his clothes were torn. He was badly scratched by the rocks. + +He now got his gun. He held it in one hand. He held the burning +birch-bark in the other. He crawled into the cave again. + +When the wolf saw him coming again, she was very angry. She snapped her +teeth. She got ready to spring on him. She meant to kill him as she had +killed his sheep. Putnam fired at her head. As soon as his gun went +off, he jerked the rope. His friends pulled him out. + +He waited awhile for the smoke of his gun to clear up. Then he went in +once more. He wanted to see if the wolf was dead. + +He found her lying down. He tapped her nose with his birch-bark. She +did not move. He took hold of her. Then he jerked the rope. + +This time the men saw him come out, bringing the dead wolf. Now the +sheep would have some peace. + +[Illustration] + + + + +WASHINGTON AND HIS HATCHET + + +It was Ar-bor Day in the Mos-sy Hill School, Johnny Little-john had to +speak a piece that had some-thing to do with trees. He thought it would +be a good plan to say some-thing about the little cherry tree that +Washington spoiled with his hatch-et, when he was a little boy. This is +what he said: + +[Illustration] + +He had a hatch-et—little George— + A hatch-et bright and new, +And sharp enough to cut a stick— + A little stick—in two. + +He hacked and whacked and whacked and hacked, + This sturd-y little man; +He hacked a log and hacked a fence, + As round about he ran. + +He hacked his father’s cher-ry tree + And made an ug-ly spot; +The bark was soft, the hatch-et sharp, + And little George forgot. + +You know the rest. The father frowned + And asked the rea-son why; +You know the good old story runs + He could not tell a lie. + +The boy that chopped that cher-ry tree + Soon grew to be a youth; +At work and books he hacked away, + And still he told the truth: + +The youth became a fa-mous man, + Above six feet in height, +And when he had good work to do + He hacked with all his might. + +He fought the ar-mies that the king + Had sent across the sea; +He bat-tled up and down the land + To set his country free. + +For seven long years he, hacked and whacked + With all his might and main +Until the Brit-ish sailed away + And did not come again. + + +[Illustration] + + + + +HOW BENNY WEST LEARNED TO BE A PAINTER. + + +In old times there lived in Penn-syl-va-ni-a a little fellow whose name +was Ben-ja-min West. He lived in a long stone house. + +[Illustration: Painting Baby’s Portrait] + +He had never seen a picture. The country was new, and there were not +many pictures in it. Benny’s father was a Friend or Quaker. The Friends +of that day did not think that pictures were useful things to make or +to have. Before he was seven years old, this little boy began to draw +pictures. One day he was watching the cradle of his sister’s child. The +baby smiled. Benny was so pleased with her beauty, that he made a +picture of her in red and black ink. The picture of the baby pleased +his mother when she saw it. That was very pleasant to the boy. + +He made other pictures. At school he used to draw with a pen before he +could write. He made pictures of birds and of animals. Sometimes he +would draw flowers. + +[Illustration: Flower and Fruit of the Poke-Berry.] + +He liked to draw so well, that sometimes he forgot to do his work. His +father sent him to work in the field one day. The father went out to +see how well he was doing his work. Benny was no-where to be found. At +last his father saw him sitting under a large poke-weed. He was making +pictures. He had squeezed the juice out of some poke-berries. The juice +of poke-berries is deep red. With this the boy had made his pictures. +When the father looked at them, he was surprised. There were portraits +of every member of the family. His father knew every picture. + +Up to this time Benny had no paints nor any brushes. The Indians had +not all gone away from that neigh-bor-hood. The Indians paint their +faces with red and yellow colors. These colors they make them-selves. +Sometimes they prepare them from the juice of some plant. Sometimes +they get them by finding red or yellow earth. Some of the Indians can +make rough pictures with these colors. + +The Indians near the house of Benny’s father must have liked the boy. +They showed him how to make red and yellow colors for himself. He got +some of his mother’s indigo to make blue. He now had red, yellow, and +blue. By mixing these three, the other colors that he wanted could be +made. + +But he had no brush to paint with. He took some long hairs from the +cat’s tail. Of these he made his brushes. He used so many of the cat’s +hairs, that her tail began to look bare. Everybody in the house began +to wonder what was the matter with pussy’s tail. At last Benny told +where he got his brushes. + +[Illustration: Making a Paint Brush.] + +A cousin of Benny’s came from the city on a visit. He saw some of the +boy’s drawings. When he went home, he sent Benny a box of paints. With +the paints were some brushes. And there was some canvas such as +pictures are painted on. And that was not all. There were in the box +six beautiful en-grav-ings. + +The little painter now felt himself rich. He was so happy that he could +hardly sleep at all. At night he put the box that held his treasures on +a chair by his bed. As soon as daylight came, he carried the precious +box to the garret. The garret of the long stone house was his stu-di-o. +Here he worked away all day long. He did not go to school at all. +Perhaps he forgot that there was any school. Perhaps the little artist +could not tear himself away from his work. + +But the schoolmaster missed him. He came to ask if Benny was ill. The +mother was vexed when she found that he had staid away from school. She +went to look for the naughty boy. After a while she found the little +truant. He was hard at work in his garret. She saw what he had been +doing. He had not copied any of his new en-grav-ings. He had made up a +new picture by taking one person out of one en-grav-ing, and another +out of another. He had copied these so that they made a picture that he +had thought of for himself. + +His mother could not find it in her heart to punish him. She was too +much pleased with the picture he was making. This picture was not +finished. But his mother would not let him finish it. She was afraid he +would spoil it if he did anything more on it. + +The good people called Friends did not like the making of pictures, as +I said. But they thought that Benny West had a talent that he ought to +use. So he went to Phil-a-del-phi-a to study his art. After a while he +sailed away to It-a-ly to see the pictures that great artists had +painted. + +At last he settled in England. The King of England was at that time the +king of this country too. The king liked West’s pictures. West became +the king’s painter. He came to be the most famous painter in England. + +He liked to remember his boyish work. He liked to remember the time +when he was a little Quaker boy making his paints of poke-juice and +Indian colors. + + + + +WASHINGTON’S CHRISTMAS GIFT. + + +Washington was fighting to set this country free. But the army that the +King of England sent to fight him was stronger than Washington’s army. +Washington was beaten and driven out of Brook-lyn. Then he had to leave +New York. After that, he marched away into New Jersey to save his army +from being taken. At last he crossed the Del-a-ware River. Here he was +safe for a while. + +Some of the Hes-sian soldiers that the king had hired to fight against +the Americans came to Trenton. Trenton is on the Del-a-ware River. + +Washington and his men were on the other side of the Del-a-ware River +from the Hes-sians. Washington’s men were dis-cour-aged. They had been +driven back all the way from Brook-lyn. It was winter, and they had no +warm houses to stay in. They had not even warm clothes. They were +dressed in old clothes that people had given them. Some of them were +bare-footed in this cold weather. + +The Hes-sians and other soldiers of the king were waiting for the river +to freeze over. Then they would march across on the ice. They meant to +fight Washington once more, and break up his army. But Washington was +thinking about something too. + +He was waiting for Christmas. He knew that the Hessian soldiers on the +other side of the river would eat and drink a great deal on Christmas +Day. + +[Illustration: Marching to Trenton.] + +The afternoon of Christmas came. The Hessians were singing and drinking +in Trenton. But Washington was marching up the river bank. Some of his +bare-foot men left blood marks on the snow as they marched. + +The men and cannons were put into flat boats. These boats were pushed +across the river with poles. There were many great pieces of ice in the +river. But all night long the flat boats were pushed across and then +back again for more men. It was three o’clock on the morning after +Christmas when the last Americans crossed the river. It was hailing and +snowing, and it was very cold. Two or three of the soldiers were frozen +to death. + +It was eight o’clock in the morning when Washington got to Trenton. The +Hessians were sleeping soundly. The sound of the American drums waked +them. They jumped out of their beds. They ran into the streets. They +tried to fight the Americans. + +But it was too late. Washington had already taken their cannons. His +men were firing these at the Hessians. The Hessians ran into the fields +to get away. But the Americans caught them. + +The battle was soon over. Washington had taken nine hundred prisoners. + +This was called the battle of Trenton. It gave great joy to all the +Americans. It was Washington’s Christmas gift to the country. + + + + +HOW WASHINGTON GOT OUT OF A TRAP. + + +After the battle of Trenton, Washington went back across the Delaware +River. He had not men enough to fight the whole British army. + +But the Americans were glad when they heard that he had beaten the +Hessians. They sent him more soldiers. Then he went back across the +river to Trenton again. + +There was a British general named Corn-wal-lis. He marched to Trenton. +He fought against Washington. Corn-wal-lis had more men than Washington +had. Night came, and they could not see to fight. There was a little +creek between the two armies. + +Washington had not boats enough to carry his men across the river. +Corn-wal-lis was sure to beat him if they should fight a battle the +next morning. + +Cornwallis said, “I will catch the fox in the morning.” + +He called Washington a fox. He thought he had him in a trap. Cornwallis +sent for some more soldiers to come from Prince-ton in the morning. He +wanted them to help him catch the fox. + +But foxes sometimes get out of traps. + +When it was dark, Washington had all his camp fires lighted. He put men +to digging where the British could hear them. He made Cornwallis think +that he was throwing up banks of earth and getting ready to fight in +the morning. + +But Washington did not stay in Trenton. He did not wish to be caught +like a fox in a trap. He could not get across the river. But he knew a +road that went round the place where Cornwallis and his army were. He +took that road and got behind the British army. + +It was just like John waiting to catch James. James is in the house. +John is waiting at the front door to catch James when he comes out. But +James slips out by the back way. John hears him call “Hello!” James has +gone round behind him and got away. + +Washington went out of Trenton in the darkness. You might say that he +marched out by the back door. He left Cornwallis watching the front +door. The Americans went away quietly. They left a few men to keep up +the fires, and make a noise like digging. Before morning these slipped +away too. + +When morning came, Cornwallis went to catch his fox. But the fox was +not there. He looked for the Americans. There was the place where they +had been digging. Their camp fires were still burning. But where had +they gone? + +Cornwallis thought that Washington had crossed the river by some means. +But soon he heard guns firing away back toward Princeton. He thought +that it must be thunder. But he found that it was a battle. Then he +knew that Washington had gone to Princeton. + +Washington had marched all night. When he got to Princeton, he met the +British coming out to go to Trenton. They were going to help Cornwallis +to catch Washington. But Washington had come to Princeton to catch +them. He had a hard fight with the British at Princeton. But at last he +beat them. + +When Cornwallis knew that the Americans had gone to Princeton, he +hurried there to help his men. But it was too late. Washington had +beaten the British at Princeton, and had gone on into the hills, where +he was safe. + +The fox had got out of the trap. + + + + +WASHINGTON’S LAST BATTLE. + + +Washington had been fighting for seven years to drive the British +soldiers out of this country. But there were still two strong British +armies in America. + +One of these armies was in New York. It had been there for years. The +other army was far away at Yorktown in Virginia. The British general at +Yorktown was Cornwallis. You have read how Washington got away from him +at Trenton. + +The King of France had sent ships and soldiers to help the Americans. +But still Washington had not enough men to take New York from the +British. Yet he went on getting ready to attack the British in New +York. He had ovens built to bake bread for his men. He bought hay for +his horses. He had roads built to draw his cannons on. + +He knew that the British in New York would hear about what he was +doing. He wanted them to think that he meant to come to New York and +fight them. When the British heard what the Americans were doing, they +got ready for the coming of Washington and the French. All at once they +found that Washington had gone. He and his men had marched away. The +French soldiers that had come to help him had gone with him. + +Nobody knew what it meant. Washington’s own men did not know where they +were going. They went from New Jersey into Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they +marched across Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they went into Mary-land. They +marched across that State, and then they went into Vir-gin-i-a. + +By this time everybody could tell where Washington was going. People +could see that he was going straight to York-town. They knew that +Washington was going to fight his old enemy at York-town. + +But he had kept his secret long enough. The British in New York could +not send help to Cornwallis. It was too late. The French ships sailed +to Vir-gin-i-a, and shut up Yorktown on the side of the sea. +Washington’s men shut it up on the side of the land. They built great +banks of earth round it. On these banks of earth they put cannons. + +The British could not get away. They fought bravely. But the Americans +and French came closer and closer. + +Then the British tried to fight their way out. But they were driven +back. Then Cornwallis tried to get his men across the river. He wanted +to get out by the back door, as Washington had done. But the Americans +on the other side of the river drove them back again. Washington had +now caught Cornwallis in a trap. + +The Americans fired red-hot cannon balls into Yorktown. These set the +houses on fire. At last Cornwallis had to give up. The British marched +out and laid down their guns and swords. + +The British army in New York could not fight the Americans by itself. +So the British gave it up. Then there was peace after the long war. The +British pulled down the British flag and sailed away. The country was +free at last. + + + + +MARION’S TOWER. + + +General Mar-i-on was one of the best fighters in the Revolution. He was +a homely little man. He was also a very good man. Another general said, +“Mar-i-on is good all over.” + +The American army had been beaten in South Car-o-li-na. Mar-i-on was +sent there to keep the British from taking the whole country. + +Marion got to-geth-er a little army. His men had nothing but rough +clothes to wear. They had no guns but the old ones they had used to +shoot wild ducks and deer with. + +Marion’s men wanted swords. There were no swords to be had. But Marion +sent men to take the long saws out of the saw mills. These were taken +to black-smiths. The black-smiths cut the saws into pieces. These +pieces they hammered out into long, sharp swords. + +Marion had not so many men as the British. He had no cannon. He could +not build forts. He could not stay long in one place, for fear the +British should come with a strong army and take him. He and his men hid +in the dark woods. Sometimes he changed his hiding place suddenly. Even +his own friends had hard work to find him. + +From the dark woods he would come out suddenly. He would attack some +party of British soldiers. When the battle was over, he would go back +to the woods again. + +When the British sent a strong army to catch him, he could not be +found. But soon he would be fighting the British in some new place. He +was always playing hide and seek. + +The British called him the Swamp Fox. That was because he was so hard +to catch. They could not conquer the country until they could catch +Marion. And they never could catch the Swamp Fox. At one time Marion +came out of the woods to take a little British fort. This fort was on +the top of a high mound. It was one of the mounds built a long time ago +by the Indians. + +Marion put his men all round the fort, so that the men in the fort +could not get out to get water. He thought that they would have to give +up. But the men in the fort dug a well inside the fort. Then Marion had +to think of another plan. + +Marion’s men went to the woods and cut down stout poles. They got a +great many poles. When night came, they laid a row of poles along-side +one another on the ground. Then they laid another row across these. +Then they laid another row on top of the last ones, and across the +other way again. + +[Illustration: Marion’s Tower.] + +They laid a great many rows of poles one on top of another. They +crossed them this way and that. As the night went on, the pile grew +higher. Still they handed poles to top of the pile. + +Before morning came, they had built a kind of tower. It was higher than +the Indian mound. + +As soon as it was light, the men on Marion’s tower began to shoot. The +British looked out. They saw a great tower with men on it. The men +could shoot down into the fort. The British could not stand it. They +had to give up. They were taken prisoners. + + + + +CLARK AND HIS MEN. + + +At the time of the Revolution there were but few people living on the +north side of the O-hi-o River. But there were many Indians there. +These Indians killed a great many white people in Ken-tuck-y. + +The Indians were sent by British officers to do this killing. There was +a British fort at Vincennes in what is now In-di-an-a. There was +another British fort or post at Kas-kas-ki-a in what is now the State +of Il-li-nois. + +George Rogers Clark was an American colonel. He wanted to stop the +murder of the settlers by the Indians. He thought that he could do it +by taking the British posts. + +He had three hundred men. They went down the O-hi-o River in boats. +They landed near the mouth of the O-hi-o River. Then they marched a +hundred and thirty miles to Kas-kas-ki-a. + +Kas-kas-ki-a was far away from the Americans. The people there did not +think that the Americans would come so far to attack them. When Clark +got there, they were all asleep. He marched in and took the town before +they waked up. + +The people living in Kaskaskia were French. By treating them well, +Clark made them all friendly to the Americans. + +When the British at Vin-cennes heard that Clark had taken Kaskaskia, +they thought that they would take it back again. But it was winter. All +the streams were full of water. They could not march till spring. Then +they would gather the Indians to help them, and take Clark and his men. + +But Clark thought that he would not wait to be taken. He thought that +he would just go and take the British. If he could manage to get to +Vin-cennes in the winter, he would not be expected. + +Clark started with a hundred and seventy men. The country was nearly +all covered with water. The men were in the wet almost all the time. +Clark had hard work to keep his men cheerful. He did everything he +could to amuse them. + +They had to wade through deep rivers. The water was icy cold. But Clark +made a joke of it. He kept them laughing whenever he could. + +At one place the men refused to go through the freezing water. Clark +could not per-suade them to cross the river. He called to him a tall +sol-dier. He was the very tallest man in Clark’s little army. Clark +said to him, “Take the little drummer boy on your shoulders.” + +The little drummer was soon seated high on the shoulders of the tall +man. “Now go ahead!” said Clark. + +The soldier marched into the water. The little drummer beat a march on +his drum. Clark cried out, “Forward!” Then he plunged into the water +after the tall soldier. All the men went in after him. They were soon +safe on the other side. + +[Illustration] + +At another river the little drummer was floated over on the top of his +drum. At last the men drew near to Vin-cennes. They could hear the +morning and evening gun in the British fort. But the worst of the way +was yet to pass. The Wa-bash River had risen over its banks. The water +was five miles wide. The men marched from one high ground to another +through the cold water. They caught an Indian with a canoe. In this +they got across the main river. But there was more water to cross. The +men were so hungry that some of them fell down in the water. They had +to be carried out. + +Clark’s men got frightened at last, and then they had no heart to go +any farther. But Clark remembered what the Indians did when they went +to war. He took a little gun-powder in his hand. He poured water on it. +Then he rubbed it on his face. It made his face black. + +With his face blackened like an Indian’s, he gave an Indian war-whoop. +The men followed him again. + +The men were tired and hungry. But they soon reached dry ground. They +were now in sight of the fort. Clark marched his little army round and +round in such a way as to make it seem that he had many men with him. +He wrote a fierce letter to the British com-mand-er. He behaved like a +general with a large army. + +After some fighting, the British com-mand-er gave up. Clark’s little +army took the British fort. This brave action saved to our country the +land that lies between the Ohio River and the Lakes. It stopped the +sending of Indians to kill the settlers in the West. + + + + +DANIEL BOONE AND HIS GRAPEVINE SWING. + + +Daniel Boone was the first settler of Ken-tuck-y. He knew all about +living in the woods. He knew how to hunt the wild animals. He knew how +to fight Indians, and how to get away from them. + +Nearly all the men that came with him to Kentucky the first time were +killed. One was eaten by wolves. Some of them were killed by Indians. +Some of them went into the woods and never came back. Nobody knows what +killed them. + +Only Boone and his brother were left alive. They needed some powder and +some bullets. They wanted some horses. Boone’s brother went back across +the mountains to get these things. Boone staid in his little cabin all +alone. + +Boone could hear the wolves howl near his cabin at night. He heard the +panthers scream in the woods. But he did not mind being left all alone +in these dark forests. The Indians came to his cabin when he was away. +He did not want to see these vis-it-ors. He did not dare to sleep in +his cabin all the time. Sometimes he slept under a rocky cliff. +Sometimes he slept in a cane-brake. A cane-brake is a large patch of +growing canes such as fishing rods are made of. + +Once a mother bear tried to kill him. He fired his gun at her, but the +bullet did not kill her. The bear ran at him. He held his long knife +out in his hand. The bear ran against it and was killed. + +He made long journeys alone in the woods. One day he looked back +through the trees and saw four Indians. They were fol-low-ing Boone’s +tracks. They did not see him. He turned this way and that. But the +Indians still fol-lowed his tracks. + +He went over a little hill. Here he found a wild grape-vine. It was a +very long vine, reaching to the top of a high tree. There are many such +vines in the Southern woods. Children cut such vines off near the +roots. Then they use them for swings. + +Boone had swung on grape-vines when he was a boy. He now thought of a +way to break his tracks. He cut the wild grape-vine off near the root. +Then he took hold of it. He sprang out into the air with all his might. +The great swing carried him far out as it swung. Then he let go. He +fell to the ground, and then he ran away in a dif-fer-ent di-rec-tion +from that in which he had been going. + +When the Indians came to the place, they could not find his tracks. +They could not tell which way he had gone. He got to his cabin in +safety. + +Boone had now been alone for many months. His brother did not get back +at the time he had set for coming. Boone thought that his brother might +have been killed. Boone had not tasted anything but meat since he left +home. He had to get his food by shooting animals in the woods. By this +time he had hardly any powder or bullets left. + +[Illustration: Boone on the Grapevine Swing] + +One evening he sat by his cabin. He heard some one coming. He thought +that it might be Indians. He heard the steps of horses. He looked +through the trees. He saw his brother riding on one horse, and leading +another. The other horse was loaded with powder and bullets and +clothes, and other things that Boone needed. + + + + +DANIEL BOONE’S DAUGHTER AND HER FRIENDS. + + +Daniel Boone and his brother picked out a good place in Ken-tuck-y to +settle. Then they went home to North Car-o-li-na. They took with them +such things as were cu-ri-ous and val-u-a-ble. These were the skins of +animals they had killed, and no doubt some of the heads and tails. + +Boone was restless. He had seen Kentucky and he did not wish to settle +down to the life of North Carolina. + +In two years Boone sold his farm in North Carolina and set out for +Kentucky. He took with him his wife and children and two brothers. Some +of their neighbors went with them. They trav-eled by pack train. All +their goods were packed on horses. + +When they reached the place on the Kentucky River that Boone had chosen +for a home they built a fort of log houses. These cabins all stood +round a square. The backs of the houses were outward. There was no door +or window in the back of a house. The outer walls were thus shut up. +They made the place a fort. The houses at the four corners were a +little taller and stronger than the others. There were gates leading +into the fort. These gates were kept shut at night. + +In the evening the people danced and amused themselves in the square. +Indians could not creep up and attack them. + +When the men went out to feed the horses and cows they carried their +guns. They walked softly and turned their eyes quickly from point to +point to see if Indians were hiding near. They held their guns so they +could shoot quickly. + +The women and children had to stay very near the fort so they could run +in if an Indian came in sight. + +Daniel Boone had a daughter named Je-mi-ma. She was about fourteen +years old. She had two friends named Frances and Betsey Cal-lo-way. +Frances Galloway was about the same age as Jemima. + +One summer afternoon these three girls went out of the fort. They went +to the river and got into a canoe. It was not far from the fort. They +felt safe. They laughed and talked and splashed the water with their +paddles. + +The cur-rent carried them slowly near the other shore. They could still +see the fort. They did not think of danger. + +Trees and bushes grew thick down to the edge of the river. Five strong +Indians were hiding in the bushes. + +One Indian crept care-ful-ly through the bushes. He made no more noise +than a snake. When he got to the edge of the water he put out his long +arm and caught hold of the rope that hung down from the canoe. In a +moment he had turned the boat around and drawn it out of sight from the +fort. The girls screamed when they saw the Indian. Their friends heard +them but could not cross the river to help them. The girls had taken +the only canoe. + +Boone and Cal-lo-way were both gone from the fort. They got home too +late to start that day. No sleep came to their eyes while they waited +for light to travel by. + +As soon as there was a glim-mer of light they and a party of their +friends set out. It was in July and they could start early. + +They crossed the river and easily found the Indians’ tracks where they +started. The brush was broken down there. + +The Indians were cun-ning. They did not keep close together after they +set out. Each Indian walked by himself through the tall canes. Three of +the Indians took the captives. + +Boone and his friends tried in vain to follow them. Sometimes they +would find a track but it would soon be lost in the thick canes. + +Boone’s party gave up trying to find their path. They noticed which way +the Indians were going. Then they walked as fast as they could the same +way for thirty miles. They thought the Indians would grow careless +about their tracks after traveling so far. + +They turned so as to cross the path they thought the Indians had taken. +They looked carefully at the ground and at the bushes to see if any one +had gone by. + +Before long they found the Indians’ tracks in a buffalo path. Buffaloes +and other animals go often to lick salt from the rocks round salt +springs. They beat down the brush and make great roads. These roads run +to the salt springs. The hunters call them streets. + +The Indians took one of these roads after they got far from the fort. +They could travel more easily in it. They did not take pains to hide +their tracks. + +As fast as their feet could carry them, Boone and his friends traveled +along the trail. When they had gone about ten miles they saw the +Indians. + +The Indians had stopped to rest and to eat. It was very warm and they +had put off their moc-ca-sins and laid down their arms. They were +kindling a fire to cook by. + +In a moment the Indians saw the white men. Boone and Galloway were +afraid the Indians would kill the girls. + +Four of the white men shot at the Indians. Then all rushed at them. + +The Indians ran away as fast as they could. They did not stop to pick +up their guns or knives or hatchets. They had no time to put on their +moccasins. + +The poor worn-out girls were soon safe in their fathers’ arms. + +Back to Boones-bor-ough they went, not minding their tired feet. When +they got to the fort there was great joy to see them alive. + +I do not believe they ever played in the water again. + + + + +DECATUR AND THE PIRATES. + + +Nearly a hundred years have passed since the ship “Phil-a-del-phi-a” +was burned. But the brave sailors who did it will never be for-got-ten. + +The people of Trip-o-li in Af-ri-ca were pirates. They took the ships +of other nations at sea. They made slaves of their prisoners. The +friends of these slaves sometimes sent money to buy their freedom. Some +countries paid money to these pirates to let their ships go safe. + +Our country had trouble with the pirates. This trouble brought on a +war. Our ships were sent to fight against Trip-o-li. + +One of the ships fighting against the pirates was called the +“Phil-a-del-phi-a.” One day she was chasing a ship of Trip-o-li. The +“Phil-a-del-phi-a” ran on the rocks. The sailors could not get her off. +The pirates came and fought her as she lay on the rocks. They took her +men prisoners. Then they went to work to get her off. After a long time +they got her into deep water. They took her to Tripoli. Our ships could +not go there after her, because there were so many great cannons on the +shore near the ship. + +The pirates got the “Philadelphia” ready to go to sea. They loaded her +cannons. They meant to slip out past our ships of war. Then they would +take a great many smaller American ships. + +But the Americans laid a plan to burn the “Philadelphia.” It was a very +dan-ger-ous thing to try to do. The pirates had ships of war near the +“Philadelphia.” They had great guns on the shore. There was no way to +do it in the day-time. It could only be done by stealing into the Bay +of Tripoli at night. + +The Americans had taken a little vessel from the pirates. She was of +the kind that is called a ketch. She had sails. She also had long oars. +When there was no wind to sail with, the sailors could row her with the +oars. + +This little ketch was sent one night to burn the “Philadelphia.” The +captain of this boat was Ste-phen De-ca-tur. He was a young man, and +very brave. + +De-ca-tur made his men lie down, so that the pirates would not know how +many men he had on his ketch. Only about ten men were in sight. The +rest were lying hidden on the boat. + +They came near to the “Philadelphia.” It was about ten o’clock at +night. The pirates called to them. The pilot of the ketch told them +that he was from Mal-ta. He told them that he had come to sell things +to the people of Tripoli. He said that the ketch had lost her anchor. +He asked them to let him tie her to the big ship till morning. + +The pirates sent out a rope to them. But when the ketch came nearer, +the pirates saw that they had been fooled. They cried out, “Americans, +Americans!” + +Then the Americans lying down took hold of the rope and pulled with all +their might, and drew the ketch close to the ship. They were so close, +that the ship’s cannons were over their heads. The pirates could not +fire at them. + +The men who had been lying still now rose up. There were eighty of +them. In a minute they were scram-bling up the sides of the big ship. +Some went in one way, some another. They did not shoot. They fought +with swords and pikes, or short spears. + +Soon they drove the pirates to one side of the ship. Then they could +hear the pirates jumping over into the water. In a few minutes the +pirates had all gone. + +But the Americans could not stay long. They must burn the ship before +the pirates on the shore should find out what they were doing. + +They had brought a lot of kin-dling on the ketch. They built fires in +all parts of the ship. The fire ran so fast, that some of the men had +trouble to get off the ship. + +When the Americans got back on the ketch, they could not untie the rope +that held the ketch to the ship. The big ship was bursting into flames. +The ketch would soon take fire. + +They took swords and hacked the big rope in two. Then they pushed hard +to get away from the fire. The ketch began to move. The sailors took +the large oars and rowed. They were soon safe from the fire. + +All this they had done without any noise. But, now that they had got +away, they looked back. The fire was shooting up toward the sky. The +men stopped rowing, and they gave three cheers. They were so glad, that +they could not help it. + +By this time the pirates on shore had waked up. They began to fire +great cannon balls at the little ketch. One of the balls went through +her sails. Ah! how the sailors rowed! + +The whole sky was now lighted up by the fire. The pirates’ cannons were +thundering. The cannon balls were splashing the water all round the +ketch. But the Americans got away. At last they were safe in their own +ships. + + + + +STORIES ABOUT JEFFERSON. + + +Thomas Jef-fer-son was one of the great men of the Revolution. He was +not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. But he was a great thinker. +And he was a great writer. + +He wrote a paper that was the very beginning of the United States. It +was a paper that said that we would be free from England, and be a +coun-try by our-selves. We call that paper the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence. + +When he was a boy, Jef-fer-son was fond of boyish plays. But when he +was tired of play, he took up a book. It pleased him to learn things. +From the time when he was a boy he never sat down to rest without a +book. + +At school he learned what other boys did. But the dif-fer-ence between +him and most other boys was this: he did not stop with knowing just +what the other boys knew. Most boys want to learn what other boys +learn. Most girls would like to know what their school-mates know. But +Jef-fer-son wanted to know a great deal more. + +As a young man, Jefferson knew Latin and Greek. He also knew French and +Span-ish and I-tal-ian. + +He did not talk to show off what he knew. He tried to learn what other +people knew. When he talked to a wagon maker, he asked him about such +things as a wagon maker knows most about. He would sometimes ask how a +wagon maker would go to work to make a wheel. + +When Jefferson talked to a learn-ed man, he asked him about those +things that this man knew most about. When he talked with Indians, he +got them to tell him about their lan-guage. That is the way he came to +know so much about so many things. Whenever anybody told him anything +worth while, he wrote it down as soon as he could. + +One day Jefferson was trav-el-ing. He went on horse-back. That was a +common way of trav-el-ing at that time. He stopped at a country tavern. +At this tavern he talked with a stranger who was staying there. + +After a while Jefferson rode away. Then the stranger said to the +land-lord, “Who is that man? He knew so much about law, that I was sure +he was a lawyer. But when we talked about med-i-cine, he knew so much +about that, that I thought he must be a doctor. And after a while he +seemed to know so much about re-li-gion, that I was sure he was a +min-is-ter. Who is he?” + +The stranger was very much surprised to hear that the man he had talked +with was Thomas Jefferson. + +Jefferson was a very polite man. One day his grand-son was riding with +him. They met a negro. The negro lifted his cap and bowed. Jefferson +bowed to the negro. But his grand-son did not think it worth while to +bow. + +Then Jefferson said to his grand-son, “Do not let a poor negro be more +of a gen-tle-man than you are.” In the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence, Jefferson wrote these words: “All men are created +equal.” He also said that the poor man had the same right as the rich +man to live, and to be free, and to try to make himself happy. + + + + +A LONG JOURNEY. + + +A long time ago, when Thomas Jefferson was Pres-i-dent, most of the +people in this country lived in the East. Nobody knew anything about +the Far West. The only people that lived there were Indians. Many of +these Indians had never seen a white man. + +[Illustration: An Elk] + +The Pres-i-dent sent men to travel into this wild part of the country. +He told them to go up to the upper end of the Mis-sou-ri River. Then +they were to go across the Rocky Mountains. They were to keep on till +they got to the Pa-cif-ic O-cean. Then they were to come back again. +They were to find out the best way to get through the mountains. And +they were to find out what kind of people the Indians in that country +were. They were also to tell about the animals. + +There were two captains of this company. Their names were Lewis and +Clark. There were forty-five men in the party. + +They were gone two years and four months. For most of that time they +did not see any white men but their own party. They did not hear a word +from home for more than two years. + +They got their food mostly by hunting. They killed a great many +buf-fa-loes and elks and deer. They also shot wild geese and other +large birds. Sometimes they had nothing but fish to eat. Sometimes they +had to eat wolves. When they had no other meat, they were glad to buy +dogs from the Indians and eat them. Sometimes they ate horses. They +became fond of the meat of dogs and horses. + +When they were very hungry, they had to live on roots if they could get +them. Some of the Indians made a kind of bread out of roots. The white +men bought this when they could not get meat. But there were days when +they did not have anything to eat. + +They were very friendly with the Indians. One day some of the men went +to make a visit to an Indian village. The Indians gave them something +to eat. + +In the Indian wig-wam where they were, there was a head of a dead +buffalo. When dinner was over, the Indians filled a bowl full of meat. +They set this down in front of the head. Then they said to the head, +“Eat that.” + +[Illustration: Feeding the Spirit of the Buffalo.] + +The Indians believed, that, if they treated this buffalo head politely, +the live buffaloes would come to their hunting ground. Then they would +have plenty of meat. They think the spirit of the buffalo is a kind of +a god. They are very careful to please this god. + + + + +CAPTAIN CLARK’S BURNING GLASS. + + +The Indians among whom Captain Clark and Captain Lewis traveled had +many strange ways of doing things. They had nothing like our matches +for making fire. One tribe of Indians had this way of lighting a fire. +An Indian would lay down a dry stick. He would rub this stick with the +end of another stick. After a while this rubbing would make something +like saw-dust on the stick that was lying down. The Indian would keep +on rubbing till the wood grew hot. Then the fine wood dust would smoke. +Then it would burn. The Indian would put a little kin-dling wood on it. +Soon he would have a large fire. + +In that time the white people had not yet found out how to make +matches. They lighted a fire by striking a piece of flint against a +piece of steel. This would make a spark of fire. By letting this spark +fall on something that would burn easily, they started a fire. + +White men had another way of lighting a fire when the sun was shining. +They used what was called a burning glass. This was a round piece of +glass. It was thick in the middle, and thin at the edge. When you held +up a burning glass in the sun, it drew the sun’s heat so as to make a +little hot spot. If you put paper under this spot of hot sunshine, it +would burn. Men could light the to-bac-co in their pipes with one of +these glasses. + +Captain Clark had something funny happen to him on account of his +burning glass. He had walked ahead of the rest of his men. He sat down +on a rock. There were some Indians on the other side of the river. They +did not see the captain. Captain Clark saw a large bird called a crane +flying over his head. He raised his gun and shot it. + +[Illustration: Cranes] + +The Indians on the other side of the river had never seen a white man +in their lives. They had never heard a gun. They used bows and arrows. + +They heard the sound of Clark’s gun. They looked up and saw the large +bird falling from the sky. It fell close to where Captain Clark sat. +Just as it fell they caught sight of Captain Clark sitting on the +rocks. They thought they had seen him fall out of the sky. They thought +that the sound of his gun was a sound like thunder that was made when +he came down. + +The Indians all ran away as fast as they could. They went into their +wig-warns and closed them. + +Captain Clark wished to be friendly with them. So he got a canoe and +paddled to the other side of the river. He came to the Indian houses. +He found the flaps which they use for doors shut. He opened one of them +and went in. The Indians were sitting down, and they were all crying +and trembling. + +Among the Indians the sign of peace is to smoke to-geth-er. Captain +Clark held out his pipe to them. That was to say, “I am your friend.” +He shook hands with them and gave some of them presents. Then they were +not so much afraid. + +[Illustration: Lighting a Pipe with a Burning Glass.] + +He wished to light his pipe for them to smoke. So he took out his +burning glass. He held it in the sun. He held his pipe under it. The +sunshine was drawn together into a bright little spot on the tobacco. +Soon the pipe began to smoke. + +Then he held out his pipe for the Indians to smoke with him. That is +their way of making friends. But none of the Indians would touch the +pipe. They thought that he had brought fire down from heaven to light +his pipe. They were now sure that he fell down from the sky. They were +more afraid of him than ever. + +At last Captain Clark’s Indian man came. He told the other Indians that +the white man did not come out of the sky. Then they smoked the pipe, +and were not afraid. + + + + +QUICKSILVER BOB. + + +Robert Fulton was the man who set steam-boats to running on the rivers. +Other men had made such boats before. But Fulton made the first good +one. + +When he was a boy, he lived in the town of Lan-cas-ter in +Penn-syl-van-ia. Many guns were made in Lancaster. The men who made +these guns put little pictures on them. That was to make them sell to +the hunters who liked a gun with pictures. Little Robert Fulton could +draw very well for a boy. He made some pretty little drawings. These +the gun makers put on their guns. + +Fulton went to the gun shops a great deal. He liked to see how things +were made. He tried to make a small air gun for himself. + +He was always trying to make things. He got some quick-sil-ver. He was +trying to do something with it. But he would not tell what he wanted to +do. So the gun-smiths called him Quick-sil-ver Bob. + +He was so much in-ter-est-ed in such things, that he sometimes +neg-lect-ed his lessons. He said that his head was so full of new +notions, that he had not much room left for school learning. + +One morning he came to school late. + +“What makes you so late?” asked the teacher. + +“I went to one of the shops to make myself a lead pencil,” said little +Bob. “Here it is. It is the best one I ever had.” + +The teacher tried it, and found it very good. Lead pencils in that day +were made of a long piece of lead sharpened at the end. + +Quick-sil-ver Bob was a very odd little boy. He said many cu-ri-ous +things. Once the teacher punished him for not getting his lessons. He +rapped Robert on the knuckles with a fer-ule. Robert did not like this +any more than any other boy would. + +“Sir,” said the boy, “I came here to have something beaten into my +head, not into my knuckles.” + +In that day people used to light candles and stand them in the window +on the Fourth of July. These candles in every window lighted up the +whole town. But one year candles were scarce and high. The city asked +the people not to light up their windows on the Fourth. + +Bob did not like to miss the fun of his Fourth of July. He went to work +to make something like rockets or Roman candles. It was a very +dan-ger-ous business for a boy. + +“What are you doing, Bob?” some one asked him. + +“The city does not want us to burn our candles on the Fourth,” he said. +“I am going to shoot mine into the air.” + +[Illustration] + +He used to go fishing with a boy named Chris Gumpf. The father of Chris +went with them. They fished from a flat boat. The two boys had to push +the boat to the fishing place with poles. + +“I am tired of poling that boat,” said Robert to Chris one day when +they came home. + +So he set to work to think out a plan to move the boat in an easier way +than by poles. He whittled out the model of a tiny paddle wheel. Then +he went to work with Chris Gumpf, and they made a larger paddle wheel. +This they set up in the fishing boat. The wheel was turned by the boys +with a crank. They did not use the poles any more. + + + + +THE FIRST STEAMBOAT. + + +The first good steam-boat was built in New York. She was built by +Robert Fulton. Her name was “Clermont.” When the people saw her, they +laughed. They said that such a boat would never go. For thousands of +years boat-men had made their boats go by using sails and oars. People +had never seen any such boat as this. It seemed foolish to believe that +a boat could be pushed along by steam. + +The time came for Fulton to start his boat. A crowd of people were +standing on the shore. The black smoke was coming out of the +smoke-stack. The people were laughing at the boat. They were sure that +it would not go. At last the boat’s wheels began to turn round. Then +the boat began to move. There were no oars. There were no sails. But +still the boat kept moving. Faster and faster she went. All the people +now saw that she could go by steam. They did not laugh any more. They +began to cheer. + +[Illustration: Seeing the First Steam boat] + +The little steam-boat ran up to Al-ba-ny. The people who lived on the +river did not know what to make of it. They had never heard of a +steam-boat. They could not see what made the boat go. + +There were many sailing vessels on the river. Fulton’s boat passed some +of these in the night. The sailors were afraid when they saw the fire +and smoke. The sound of the steam seemed dreadful to them. Some of them +went down-stairs in their ships for fear. Some of them went ashore. +Perhaps they thought it was a living animal that would eat them up. + +But soon there were steam-boats on all the large rivers. + + + + +WASHINGTON IRVING AS A BOY. + + +The Revolution was about over. Americans were very happy. Their country +was to be free. + +At this time a little boy was born in New York. His family was named +Ir-ving. What should this little boy be named? + +His mother said, “Washington’s work is done. Let us name the baby +Washington.” So he was called Washington Ir-ving. + +When this baby grew to be a little boy, he was one day walking with his +nurse. The nurse was a Scotch girl. She saw General Washington go into +a shop. She led the little boy into the shop also. + +The nurse said to General Washington, “Please, your Honor, here is a +bairn that is named for you.” + +“Bairn” is a Scotch word for child. Washington put his hand on the +little boy’s head and gave him his blessing. When Irving became an +author, he wrote a life of Washington. + +Little Irving was a merry, playful boy. He was full of mischief. + +Sometimes he would climb out of a window to the roof of his father’s +house. From this he would go to roofs of other houses. Then the little +rascal would drop a pebble down a neighbor’s chimney. Then he would +hurry back and get into the window again. He would wonder what the +people thought when the pebble came rattling down their chimney. Of +course he was punished when his tricks were found out. But he was a +favorite with his teacher. With all his faults, he would not tell a +lie. The teacher called the little fellow “General.” + +[Illustration: Irving in Mischief.] + +In those days naughty school-boys were whipped. Irving could not bear +to see another boy suffer. When a boy was to be whipped, the girls were +sent out. Irving always asked the schoolmaster to let him go out with +the girls. + +Like other boys, Irving was fond of stories. He liked to read about +Sind-bad the Sailor, and Rob-in-son Cru-soe. But most of all he liked +to read about other countries. He had twenty small volumes called “The +World Dis-played.” They told about the people and countries of the +world. Irving read these little books a great deal. + +One day the schoolmaster caught him reading in school. The master +slipped behind him and grabbed the book. Then he told Irving to stay +after school. + +Irving expected a pun-ish-ment. But the master told him he was pleased +to find that he liked to read such good books. He told him not to read +them in school. + +Reading about other countries made Irving wish to see them. He thought +he would like to travel. Like other wild boys, he thought of running +away. He wanted to go to sea. + +But he knew that sailors had to eat salt pork. He did not like salt +pork. He thought he would learn to like it. When he got a chance, he +ate pork. And sometimes he would sleep all night on the floor. He +wanted to get used to a hard bed. + +But the more he ate pork, the more he disliked it. And the more he +slept on the floor, the more he liked a good bed. So he gave up his +foolish notion of being a sailor boy. + +Some day you will read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” You will find some +famous stories in it. There is the story of Rip Van Win-kle, who slept +twenty years. And there is the funny story of the Head-less Horse-man. +When you read these a-mus-ing stories, you will remember the playful +boy who became a great author. + +[Illustration: Rip Van Winkle wakes up] + + + + +DON’T GIVE UP THE SHIP. + + +Fred was talking to his sister one day. He said,— + +“Alice, what makes people say, ‘Don’t give up the ship’?” + +Alice said, “I don’t know. That’s what the teacher said to me +yes-ter-day when I thought that I could not get my lesson.” + +“Yes,” said Fred, “and that’s what father said to me. I told him I +never could learn to write well.” He only said, “You must not give up +the ship, my boy.” + +“I haven’t any ship to give up,” said Alice. + +“And what has a ship to do with my writing?” said Fred. + +“There must be some story about a ship,” Alice said. + +“Maybe grand-father would know,” said Fred. “Let’s ask him.” + +They found their grand-father writing in the next room. They did not +wish to disturb him. They turned to leave the room. + +But grand-father looked up just then. He smiled, and laid down his pen. + +“Did you want something?” he asked. “We wanted to ask you a question,” +said Alice. “We want to know why people say, ‘Don’t give up the ship.’” + +“We thought maybe there is a story to it,” said Fred. + +“Yes, there is,” said their grandfather. “And I know a little rhyme +that tells the story.” + +“Could you say it to us?” asked Alice. + +“Yes, if I can think of it. Let me see. How does it begin?” + +Grandfather leaned his head back in the chair. He shut his eyes for a +moment. He was trying to remember. + +“Oh, now I remember it!” he said. + +Then he said to them these little verses:— + + + + +GRANDFATHER’S RHYME. + + +When I was but a boy, + I heard the people tell +How gallant Captain Law-rence + So bravely fought and fell. + +The ships lay close together, + I heard the people say, +And many guns were roaring + Upon that battle day. + +A grape-shot struck the captain, + He laid him down to die: +They say the smoke of powder + Made dark the sea and sky. + +The sailors heard a whisper + Upon the captain’s lip: +The last command of Law-rence + Was, “Don’t give up the ship.” + +And ever since that battle + The people like to tell +How gallant Captain Lawrence + So bravely fought and fell. + +When disappointment happens, + And fear your heart annoys, +Be brave, like Captain Lawrence— + And don’t give up, my boys! + + + + +THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER. + + +Everybody in the United States has heard the song about the +star-span-gled banner. Nearly everybody has sung it. It was written by +Francis Scott Key. + +Key was a young lawyer. In the War of 1812 he fought with the American +army. The British landed soldiers in Mary-land. At Bla-dens-burg they +fought and beat the Americans. Key was in this battle on the American +side. + +After the battle the British army took Washington, and burned the +public buildings. Key had a friend who was taken prisoner by the +British. He was on one of the British ships. Key went to the ships with +a flag of truce. A flag of truce is a white flag. It is carried in war +when one side sends a message to the other. + +When Key got to the British ships, they were sailing to Bal-ti-more. +They were going to try to take Bal-ti-more. The British com-mand-er +would not let Key go back. He was afraid that he would let the +Americans know where the ships were going. + +Key was kept a kind of prisoner while the ships attacked Bal-ti-more. +The ships tried to take the city by firing at it from the water. The +British army tried to take the city on the land side. + +The ships did their worst firing at night. They tried to take the +little fort near the city. + +Key could see the battle. He watched the little fort. He was afraid +that the men in it would give up. He was afraid that the fort would be +broken down by the cannon balls. + +The British fired bomb-shells and rockets at the fort. When these +burst, they made a light. By this light Key could see that the little +fort was still standing. He could see the flag still waving over it. He +tells this in his song in these words:— + +“And the rocket’s red glare, the bombs bursting in air +Gave proof through the night that our flag was still there.” + + +[Illustration] + +But after many hours of fighting the British became dis-cour-aged. They +found that they could not take the city. The ships almost ceased to +fire. + +Key did not know whether the fort had been knocked down or not. He +could not see whether the flag was still flying or not. He thought that +the Americans might have given up. He felt what he wrote in the song:— + +“Oh! say, does that star-span-gled banner yet wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave?” + + +When the break of day came, Key looked toward the fort. It was still +standing. There was a flag flying over it. It grew lighter. He could +see that it was the American flag. His feelings are told in two lines +of the song:— + +“’Tis the star spangled banner, oh, long may it wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave!” + + +Key was full of joy. He took an old letter from his pocket. The back of +this letter had no writing on it. Here he wrote the song about the +star-spangled banner. + +The British com-mand-er now let Key go ashore. When he got to +Baltimore, he wrote out his song. He gave it to a friend. This friend +took it to a printing office. But the printers had all turned soldiers. +They had all gone to defend the city. + +[Illustration] + +There was one boy left in the office. He knew how to print. He took the +verses and printed them on a broad sheet of paper. + +The printed song was soon in the hands of the soldiers around +Baltimore. It was sung in the streets. It was sung in the the-a-ters. +It traveled all over the country. Everybody learned to sing:— + +“Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just; +And this be our motto—‘In God is our trust’— +And the star-span-gled banner in triumph shall wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave.” + + + + +HOW AUDUBON CAME TO KNOW ABOUT BIRDS. + + +John James Au-du-bon knew more about the birds of this country than any +man had ever known before. He was born in the State of Lou-is-i-a-na. +His father took him to France when he was a boy. He went to school in +France. + +The little John James was fond of stud-y-ing about wild animals. But +most of all he wished to know about birds. Seeing that the boy liked +such things, his father took pains to get birds and flowers for him. + +While he was yet a boy at school, he began to gather birds and other +animals for himself. He learned to skin and stuff them. But his stuffed +birds did not please him. Their feathers did not look bright, like +those of live birds. He wanted living birds to study. + +His father told him that he could not keep so many birds alive. To +please the boy he got him a book with pictures in it. Looking at these +pictures made John James wish to draw. He thought that he could make +pictures that would look like the live birds. + +But when he tried to paint a picture of a bird, it looked worse than +his stuffed birds. The birds he drew were not much like real birds. He +called them a “family of cripples.” As often as his birthday came +round, he made a bon-fire of his bad pictures. Then he would begin over +again. + +All this time he was learning to draw birds. But he was not willing to +make pictures that were not just like the real birds. So when he grew +to be a man he went to a great French painter whose name was David. +David taught him to draw and paint things as they are. + +Then he came back to this country, and lived awhile in Pennsylvania. +Here his chief study was the wild creatures of the woods. + +He gathered many eggs of birds. He made pictures of these eggs. He did +not take birds’ eggs to break up the nests. He was not cruel. He took +only what he needed to study. + +He would make two little holes in each egg. Then he would shake the +egg, or stir it up with a little stick or straw, or a long pin. This +would break up the inside of the egg. Then he would blow into one of +the holes. That would blow the inside of the egg out through the other +hole. + +These egg shells he strung together by running strings through the +holes. He hung these strings of egg shells all over the walls of his +room. On the man-tel-piece he put the stuffed skins of squirrels, +raccoons, o-pos-sums, and other small animals. On the shelves his +friends could see frogs, snakes, and other animals. + +He married a young lady, and brought her to live in this mu-se-um with +his dead snakes, frogs, and strings of birds’ eggs. She liked what he +did, and was sure that he would come to be a great man. + +He made up his mind to write a great book about American birds. He +meant to tell all about the birds in one book. Then in another book he +would print pictures of the birds, just as large as the birds +them-selves. He meant to have them look just like the birds. + +To do this he must travel many thousands of miles. He must live for +years almost all of the time in the woods. He would have to find and +shoot the birds, in order to make pictures of them. And he must see how +the birds lived, and how they built their nests, so that he could tell +all about them. It would take a great deal of work and trouble. But he +was not afraid of trouble. + +That was many years ago. Much of our country was then covered with +great trees. Au-du-bon sometimes went in a boat down a lone-some river. +Sometimes he rode on horse-back. Often he had to travel on foot through +woods where there were no roads. Many a time he had to sleep out of +doors. + +He lost his money and became poor. Sometimes he had to paint portraits +to get money to live on. Once he turned dancing master for a while. But +he did not give up his great idea. He still studied birds, and worked +to make his books about American birds. His wife went to teaching to +help make a living. + +After years of hard work, he made paintings of nearly a thousand birds. +That was almost enough for his books. But, while he was traveling, two +large rats got into the box in which he kept his pictures. They cut up +all his paintings with their teeth, and made a nest of the pieces. This +almost broke his heart for a while. For many nights he could not sleep, +because he had lost all his work. + +But he did not give up. After some days he took his gun, and went into +the woods. He said to himself, “I will begin over again. I can make +better paintings than those that the rats spoiled.” But it took him +four long years and a half to find the birds, and make the pictures +again. + +He was so careful to have his drawings just like the birds, that he +would measure them in every way. Thus he made his pictures just the +size of the birds themselves. + +At last the great books were printed. In this country, in France, and +in England, people praised the won-der-ful books. They knew that +Au-du-bon was indeed a great man. + + + + +AUDUBON IN THE WILD WOODS. + + +When Au-du-bon was making his great book about birds, he had to live +much in the woods. Sometimes he lived among the Indians. He once saw an +Indian go into a hollow tree. There was a bear in the tree. The Indian +had a knife in his hand. He fought with the bear in the tree, and +killed it. + +Au-du-bon could shoot very well. A friend of his one day threw up his +cap in the air. He told Au-du-bon to shoot at it. When the cap came +down, it had a hole in it. + +But the hunters who lived in the woods could shoot better. They would +light a candle. Then one of the hunters would take his gun, and go a +hundred steps away from the candle. He would then shoot at the candle. +He would shoot so as to snuff it. He would not put out the candle. He +would only cut off a bit of the wick with the bullet. But he would +leave the candle burning. + +[Illustration: Snuffing the Candle.] + +Once Audubon came near being killed by some robbers. He stopped at a +cabin where lived an old white woman. He found a young Indian in the +house. The Indian had hurt himself with an arrow. He had come to the +house to spend the night. + +The old woman saw Audubon’s fine gold watch. She asked him to let her +look at it. He put it into her hands for a minute. Then the Indian +passed by Audubon, and pinched him two or three times. That was to let +him know that the woman was bad, and that she might rob him. + +Audubon went and lay down with his hand on his gun. After a while two +men came in. They were the sons of the old woman. Then the old woman +sharpened a large knife. She told the young men to kill the Indian +first, and then to kill Audubon and take his watch. She thought that +Audubon was asleep. But he drew up his gun ready to fire. + +Just then two hunters came to the cabin. Audubon told them what the +robbers were going to do. They took the old woman and her sons, and +tied their hands and feet. The Indian, though he was in pain from his +hurt, danced for joy when he saw that the robbers were caught. The +woman and her sons were afterward punished. + + + + +HUNTING A PANTHER. + + +Audubon was traveling in the woods in Mis-sis-sip-pi. He found the +little cabin of a settler. He staid there for the night. The settler +told him that there was a panther in the swamp near his house. A +panther is a very large and fierce animal. It is large enough to kill a +man. This was a very bad panther. It had killed some of the settler’s +dogs. + +Audubon said, “Let us hunt this panther, and kill it.” + +So the settler sent out for his neigh-bors to come and help kill the +panther. Five men came. Audubon and the settler made seven. They were +all on horse-back. + +When they came to the edge of the swamp, each man went a dif-fer-ent +way. They each took their dogs with them to find the track of the wild +beast. All of the hunters carried horns. Who-ever should find the track +first was to blow his horn to let the others know. + +In about two hours after they had started, they heard the sound of a +horn. It told them that the track had been found. Every man now went +toward the sound of the horn. Soon all the yelping dogs were +fol-low-ing the track of the fierce panther. The panther was running +into the swamp farther and farther. + +I suppose that the panther thought that there were too many dogs and +men for him to fight. All the hunters came after the dogs. They held +their guns ready to shoot if the panther should make up his mind to +fight them. + +After a while the sound of the dogs’ voices changed. The hunters knew +from this that the panther had stopped running, and gone up into a +tree. + +At last the men came to the place where the dogs were. They were all +barking round a tree. Far up in the tree was the dan-ger-ous beast. The +hunters came up care-ful-ly. One of them fired. The bullet hit the +panther, but did not kill him. + +[Illustration] + +The panther sprang to the ground, and ran off again. The dogs ran +after. The men got on their horses, and rode after. + +But the horses were tired, and the men had to get down, and follow the +dogs on foot. + +The hunters now had to wade through little ponds of water. Sometimes +they had to climb over fallen trees. Their clothes were badly torn by +the bushes. After two hours more, they came to a place where the +panther had again gone up into a tree. + +This time three of the hunters shot at him. The fierce panther came +tumbling to the ground. But he was still able to fight. The men fought +the savage beast on all sides. At last they killed him. Then they gave +his skin to the settler. They wanted him to know that his en-e-my was +dead. + + + + +SOME BOYS WHO BECAME AUTHORS. + + +Wil-liam Cul-len Bry-ant was the first great poet in this country. He +was a small man. When he was a baby, his head was too big for his body. +His father used to send the baby to be dipped in a cold spring every +day. The father thought that putting his head into cold water would +keep it from growing. + +Bry-ant knew his letters before he was a year and a half old. He began +to write rhymes when he was a very little fellow. He wanted to be a +poet. He used to pray that he might be a poet. His father printed some +verses of his when he was only ten years old. + +Bry-ant wrote many fine poems. Here are some lines of his about the +bird we call a bob-o-link:— + +Rob-ert of Lin-coln is gayly dressed, + Wearing a bright black wedding coat, +White are his shoulders and white his crest. + Hear him call in his merry note: + Bob-o’-link, bob-o’-link, + Spink, spank, spink; +Look, what a nice new coat is mine, +Sure there was never a bird so fine. + Chee, chee, chee. + + +[Illustration] + +Haw-thorne was one of our greatest writers of stories. He was a pretty +boy with golden curls. He was fond of all the great poets, and he read +Shake-speare and Mil-ton and many other poets as soon as he was old +enough to un-der-stand them. + +Haw-thorne grew up a very hand-some young fellow. One day he was +walking in the woods. He met an old gypsy woman. She had never seen +anybody so fine-looking. + +“Are you a man, or an angel?” she asked him. + +Some of Haw-thorne’s best books are written for girls and boys. One of +these is called “The Won-der Book.” Another of his books for young +people is “Tan-gle-wood Tales.” + + +Pres-cott wrote beautiful his-to-ries. When Pres-cott was a boy, a +school-mate threw a crust of bread at him. It hit him in the eye. He +became almost blind. + +He had to do his writing with a machine. This machine was made for the +use of the blind. There were no type-writ-ers in those days. + +It was hard work to write his-to-ry without good eyes. But Pres-cott +did not give up. He had a man to read to him. It took him ten years to +write his first book. + +When Prescott had finished his book, he was afraid to print it. But his +father said, “The man who writes a book, and is afraid to print it, is +a cow-ard.” + +Then Prescott printed his book. Everybody praised it. When you are +older, you will like to read his his-to-ries. + +Doctor Holmes, the poet, was a boy full of fancies. He lived in an old +house. Soldiers had staid in the house at the time of the Revolution. +The floor of one room was all battered by the butts of the soldiers’ +muskets. + +[Illustration] + +Little Ol-i-ver Holmes used to think he could hear soldiers in the +house. He thought he could hear their spurs rattling in the dark +passages. Sometimes he thought he could hear their swords clanking. + +The little boy was afraid of a sign that hung over the sidewalk. It was +a great, big, wooden hand. It was the sign of a place where gloves were +made. This big hand swung in the air. Little Ol-i-ver Holmes had to +walk under it on his way to school. He thought the great fingers would +grab him some day. Then he thought he would never get home again. He +even thought that his other pair of shoes would be put away till his +little brother grew big enough to wear them. + +But the big wooden hand never caught him. + +Here are some verses that Doctor Holmes wrote about a very old man:— + +“My grand-mam-ma has said— +Poor old lady, she is dead + Long ago— +That he had a Roman nose, +And his cheek was like a rose + In the snow. + +“But now his nose is thin, +And it rests upon his chin + Like a staff; +And a crook is in his back, +And a mel-an-chol-y crack + In his laugh. + +“I know it is a sin +For me to sit and grin + At him here; +But the old three-cor-nered hat, +And the breeches, and all that, + Are so queer! + +“And if I should live to be +The last leaf upon the tree + In the spring, +Let them smile, as I do now, +At the old for-sak-en bough + Where I cling.” + + +[Illustration] + + + + +DANIEL WEBSTER AND HIS BROTHER. + + +Dan-iel Web-ster was a great states-man. As a little boy he was called +“Little Black Dan.” When he grew larger, he was thin and +sickly-looking. But he had large, dark eyes. People called him “All +Eyes.” + +He was very fond of his brother E-ze-ki-el. E-ze-ki-el was a little +older than Dan-iel. Both the boys had fine minds. They wanted to go to +college. But their father was poor. + +Dan-iel had not much strength for work on the farm. So little “All +Eyes” was sent to school, and then to college. E-ze-ki-el staid at +home, and worked on the farm. + +While Daniel was at school, he was unhappy to think that Ezekiel could +not go to college also. He went home on a visit. He talked to Ezekiel +about going to college. The brothers talked about it all night. The +next day Daniel talked to his father about it. The father said he was +too poor to send both of his sons to college. He said he would lose all +his little property if he tried to send Ezekiel to college. But he +said, that, if their mother and sisters were willing to be poor, he +would send the other son to college. + +So the mother and sisters were asked. It seemed hard to risk the loss +of all they had. It seemed hard not to give Ezekiel a chance. They all +shed tears over it. + +The boys promised to take care of their mother and sisters if the +property should be lost. Then they all agreed that Ezekiel should go to +college too. + +Daniel taught school while he was studying. That helped to pay the +expenses. After Daniel was through his studies in college, he taught a +school in order to help his brother. When his school closed, he went +home. On his way he went round to the college to see his brother. +Finding that Ezekiel needed money, he gave him a hundred dollars. He +kept but three dollars to get home with. + +The father’s property was not sold. The two boys helped the family. +Daniel soon began to make money as a lawyer. He knew that his father +was in debt. He went home to see him. He said, “Father, I am going to +pay your debts.” + +The father said, “You cannot do it, Daniel. You have not money enough.” + +“I can do it,” said Daniel; “and I will do it before Monday evening.” + +When Monday evening came round, the father’s debts were all paid. + +When Daniel became a famous man, it made Ezekiel very happy. But +Ezekiel died first. When Daniel Web-ster made his greatest speech, all +the people praised him. + +But Web-ster said, “I wish that my poor brother had lived to this time. +It would have made him very happy.” + + + + +WEBSTER AND THE POOR WOMAN. + + +When Daniel Webster was a young lawyer, he was going home one night. +There was snow on the ground. It was very cold. It was late, and there +was nobody to be seen. + +But after a while he saw a poor woman. She was ahead of him. He +wondered what had brought her out on so cold a night. + +Sometimes she stopped and looked around. Then she would stand and +listen. Then she would go on again. [Illustration: Webster and the Poor +Woman] + +Webster kept out of her sight. But he watched her. After looking +around, she turned down the street in which Webster lived. She stopped +in front of Webster’s house. She looked around and listened. + +Webster had put down some loose boards to walk on. They reached from +the gate to the door of his house. After standing still a minute, the +woman took one of the boards, and went off quickly. + +Webster followed her. But he kept out of her sight. She went to a +distant part of the town. She went into a poor little house. + +Webster went home without saying anything to the woman. He knew that +she had stolen the board for fire-wood. + +The next day the poor woman got a present It was a nice load of wood. + +Can you guess who sent it to her? + + + + +THE INDIA-RUBBER MAN. + + +Many years ago a strange-looking man was sometimes seen in the streets +of New York. His cap was made of In-di-a rubber. So was his coat. He +wore a rubber waist-coat. Even his cravat was of In-di-a rubber. He +wore rubber shoes in dry weather. People called this man “The +In-di-a-rubber man.” + +His name was Charles Good-year. He was very poor. He was trying to find +out how to make India rubber useful. + +India-rubber trees grow in South America. The juice of these trees is +something like milk or cream. By drying this juice, India rubber is +made. + +The Indians in Bra-zil have no glass to make bottles with. A long time +ago they learned to make bottles out of rubber. More than a hundred +years ago some of these rubber bottles were brought to this country. +The people in this country had never seen India rubber before. They +thought the bottles made out of it by the Indians very cu-ri-ous. + +In this country, rubber was used only to rub out pencil marks. That is +why we call it rubber. People in South America learned to make a kind +of heavy shoe out of it. But these shoes were hard to make. They cost a +great deal when they were sold in this country. + +Men tried to make rubber shoes in this country. They got the rubber +from Bra-zil. Rubber shoes made in this country were cheaper than those +brought from South America. But they were not good. They would freeze +till they were as hard as stones in winter. That was not the worst of +it. In summer they would melt. Goodyear was trying to find out a way to +make rubber better. He wanted to get it so that it would not melt in +summer. He wanted to get a rubber that would not get hard in cold +weather. The first rubber coats that were made were so hard in cold +weather, that they would stand alone, and look like a man. + +Goodyear wanted to try his rubber. That is why he wore a rubber coat +and a rubber waist-coat and a rubber cravat. That is why he wore a +rubber cap and rubber shoes when it was not raining. He made paper out +of rubber, and wrote a book on it. He had a door-plate made of it. He +even carried a cane made of India rubber. It is no wonder people called +him the India-rubber man. + +He was very poor. Sometimes he had to borrow money to buy rubber with. +Sometimes his friends gave him money to keep his family from starving. +Sometimes there was no wood and no coal in the house in cold weather. + +But Goodyear kept on trying. He thought that he was just going to find +out. Years went by, and still he kept on trying. + +One day he was mixing some rubber with sulphur. It slipped out of his +hand. It fell on the hot stove. But it did not melt. Goodyear was happy +at last. That night it was cold. Goodyear took the burned piece of +rubber out of doors, and nailed it to the kitchen door. When morning +came, he went and got it. It had not frozen. + +He was now sure that he was on the right track. But he had to find out +how to mix and heat his rubber and sulphur. He was too poor to buy +rubber to try with. Nobody would lend him any more money. His family +had to live by the help of his friends. He had already sold almost +everything that he had. Now he had to sell his children’s school-books +to get money to buy rubber with. + +At last his rubber goods were made and sold. Poor men who had to stand +in the rain could now keep themselves dry. People could walk in the wet +with dry feet. A great many people are alive who would have died if +they had not been kept dry by India rubber. + +You may count up, if you can, how many useful things are made of +rubber. We owe them all to one man. People laughed at Goodyear once. +But at last they praised him. To be “The India-rubber man” was +something to be proud of. + + + + +DOCTOR KANE IN THE FROZEN SEA. + + +[Illustration] + +Kane was a doctor in one of the war ships of the United States. He had +sailed about the world a great deal. + +When he heard that ships were to be sent into the icy seas of the +north, he asked to be sent along. He went the first time as a doctor. +Then he wanted to find out more about the frozen ocean. So he went +again as captain of a ship. His ship was called the “Advance.” + +Kane sailed into the icy seas. His ship was driven far into the ice by +a fu-ri-ous storm. She was crowded by ice-bergs. At one time she was +lifted clear out of the water. The ship seemed ready to fall over on +her side. But the ice let her down again. Then she was squeezed till +the men thought that she would be crushed like an egg shell At last the +storm stopped. Then came the awful cold. The ship was frozen into the +ice. The ice never let go of her. She was farther north than any ship +had ever been before. But she was so fast in the ice that she never +could get away. + +In that part of the world it is night nearly all winter. For months +there was no sun at all. Daylight came again. It was now summer, but it +did not get warm. Doctor Kane took sleds, and went about on the ice to +see what he could see. The sleds were drawn by large dogs. But nearly +all of the dogs died in the long winter night. + +[Illustration: A Dog Sled] + +Doctor Kane thought that the ice would melt. He wanted to get the ship +out. But the ice did not melt at all. + +At last the summer passed away. Another awful winter came. The sun did +not rise any more. It was dark for months and months. The men were ill. +Some of them died. They were much dis-cour-aged. But Kane kept up his +heart, and did the best he could. + +At last the least little streak of light could be seen. It got a little +lighter each day. But the sick men down in the cabin of the ship could +not see the light. + +Doctor Kane said to himself, “If my poor men could see this sunlight, +it would cheer them up. It might save their lives.” But they were too +ill to get out where they could see the sun. It would be many days +before the sun would shine into the cabin of the ship. The men might +die before that time. + +So Doctor Kane took some looking glasses up to the deck or top of the +ship. He fixed one of these so it would catch the light of the sun. +Then he fixed another so that the first one would throw the light on +this one. The last one would throw the sunlight down into the cabin +where the sick men were. + +One day the poor fellows were ready to give up. Then the sun fell on +the looking glasses, and flashed down into the cabin. It was the first +daylight the sick men had seen for months. The long winter night was +over. Think how happy they were! + + + + +A DINNER ON THE ICE. + + +After two winters of cold and darkness, Doctor Kane made up his mind to +leave the ship fast in the ice. He wanted to get to a place in +Green-land where there were people living. Then he might find some way +of getting home again. + +The men started out, drawing the boats on sleds. Whenever they came to +open water, they put the boats into the water, and took the sleds in +the boats. When they came to the ice again, they had to draw out their +boats, and carry them on the sleds. At first they could travel only +about a mile a day. + +It was a hard journey. Some of the men were ill. These had to be drawn +on the sleds by the rest. They had not enough food. At one time they +rested three days in a kind of cave. Here they found many birds’ eggs. +These made very good food for them. At another place they staid a week. +They staid just to eat the eggs of the wild birds. + +After they left this place, they were hungry. The men grew thinner and +thinner. It seemed that they must die for want of food. But one day +they saw a large seal. He was floating on a piece of ice. The hungry +men thought, “What a fine din-ner he would make for us!” If they could +get the seal, they would not die of hunger. + +Every one of the poor fellows trembled for fear the seal would wake up. +A man named Pe-ter-sen took a gun, and got ready to shoot. The men +rowed the boat toward the seal. They rowed slowly and quietly. But the +seal waked up. He raised his head. The men thought that he would jump +off into the water. Then they might all die for want of food. + +Doctor Kane made a motion to Pe-ter-sen. That was to tell him to shoot +quickly. But Peter-sen did not shoot. He was so much afraid that the +seal would get away, that he could not shoot. The seal now raised +himself a little more. He was getting ready to jump into the water. +Just then Petersen fired. The seal fell dead on the ice. + +[Illustration: A Seal] + +The men were wild with joy. They rowed the boats with all their might. +When they got to the seal, they dragged it farther away from the water. +They were so happy, that they danced on the ice. Some of them laughed. +Some were so glad, that they cried. [Illustration: Shooting the Seal.] + +Then they took their knives and began to cut up the seal. They had no +fire on the ice, and they were too hungry to think of lighting one. So +they ate the meat of the seal without waiting to cook it. + + + + +DOCTOR KANE GETS OUT OF THE FROZEN SEA. + + +After they got the seal, Doctor Kane and his men traveled on. Sometimes +they were on the ice. Sometimes they were in the boats. The men were so +weak, that they could hardly row the boats. They were so hungry, that +they could not sleep well at night. + +One day they were rowing, when they heard a sound. It came to them +across the water. It did not sound like the cry of sea birds. It +sounded like people’s voices. + +“Listen!” Doctor Kane said to Pe-ter-sen. + +Petersen spoke the same language as the people of Greenland. He +listened. The sound came again. Pe-ter-sen was so glad, that he could +hardly speak. He told Kane in a half whisper, that it was the voice of +some one speaking his own language. It was some Greenland men in a +boat. + +The next day they got to a Greenland town. Then they got into a little +ship going to England. They knew that they could get home from England. +But the ship stopped at another Green-land town. While they were there, +a steamer was seen. It came nearer. They could see the stars and +stripes flying from her mast. It was an American steamer sent to find +Doctor Kane. + +Doctor Kane and his men were full of joy. They pushed their little boat +into the water once more. This little boat was called the “Faith.” It +had carried Kane and his men hundreds of miles in icy seas. + +Once more the men took their oars, and rowed. This time they rowed with +all their might. They held up the little flag that they had carried +farther north than anybody had ever been before. They rowed straight to +the steamer. + +In the bow of the boat was a little man with a tattered red shirt. He +could see that the captain of the boat was looking at him through a +spy-glass. + +The captain shouted to the little man, “Is that Doctor Kane?” + +The little man in the red shirt shouted back, “Yes!” + +Doctor Kane and his men had been gone more than two years. People had +begun to think that they had all died. This steamer had been sent to +find out what had become of them. When the men on the steamer heard +that this little man in the red shirt was Doctor Kane himself, they +sent up cheer after cheer. In a few minutes more, Doctor Kane and his +men were on the steamer. They were now safe among friends. They were +sailing away toward their homes. + + + + +LONGFELLOW AS A BOY. + + +[Illustration: Longfellow and the Bird] + +Long-fel-low was a noble boy. He always wanted to do right. He could +not bear to see one person do any wrong to another. + +He was very tender-hearted. One day he took a gun and went shooting. He +killed a robin. Then he felt sorry for the robin He came home with +tears in his eyes. He was so grieved, that he never went shooting +again. + +He liked to read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” Its strange stories about +Sleepy Hollow and Rip Van Win-kle pleased his fancy. + +When he was thirteen he wrote a poem. It was about Love-well’s fight +with the Indians. He sent his verses to a news-paper. He wondered if +the ed-i-tor would print them. He could not think of anything else. He +walked up and down in front of the printing office. He thought that his +poem might be in the printer’s hands. + +When the paper came out, there was his poem. It was signed “Henry.” +Long-fel-low read it. He thought it a good poem. + +But a judge who did not know whose poem it was talked about it that +evening. He said to young Long-fel-low, “Did you see that poem in the +paper? It was stiff. And all taken from other poets, too.” + +This made Henry Long-fel-low feel bad. But he kept on trying. After +many years, he became a famous poet. + +For more than fifty years, young people have liked to read his poem +called “A Psalm of Life.” Here are three stanzas of it:— + +“Lives of great men all remind us + We can make our lives sub-lime, +And, de-part-ing, leave behind us + Foot-prints on the sands of time,— + +“Foot-prints, that perhaps another, + Sailing o’er life’s solemn main, +A forlorn and ship-wrecked brother, + Seeing, may take heart again. + +“Let us, then, be up and doing, + With a heart for any fate; +Still a-chiev-ing, still pur-su-ing, + Learn to labor and to wait.” + + + + +KIT CARSON AND THE BEARS. + + +Great men of one kind are known only in new countries like ours. These +men dis-cov-er new regions. They know how to manage the Indians. They +show other people how to live in a wild country. + +One of the most famous of such men was Kit Car-son. He knew all about +the wild animals. He was a great hunter. He learned the languages of +the Indians. The Indians liked him. He was a great guide. He showed +soldiers and settlers how to travel where they wished to go. + +Once he was marching through the wild country with other men. Evening +came. He left the others, and went to shoot something to eat. It was +the only way to get meat for supper. When he had gone about a mile, he +saw the tracks of some elks. He followed these tracks. He came in sight +of the elks. They were eating grass on a hill, as cows do. + +Kit Car-son crept up behind some bushes. But elks are very timid +animals. Before the hunter got very near, they began to run away. So +Carson fired at one of them as it was running. The elk fell dead. + +But just at that moment he heard a roar. He turned to see what made +this ugly noise. Two huge bears were running toward him. They wanted +some meat for supper, too. + +Kit Carson’s gun was empty. He threw it down. Then he ran as fast as he +could. He wanted to find a tree. + +Just as the bears were about to seize him, he got to a tree. He caught +hold of a limb. He swung himself up into the tree. The bears just +missed getting him. + +But bears know how to climb trees. Carson knew that they would soon be +after him. He pulled out his knife, and began to cut off a limb. He +wanted to make a club. + +A bear is much larger and stronger than a man. He cannot be killed with +a club. But every bear has one tender spot. It is his nose. He does not +like to be hit on the nose. A sharp blow on the nose hurts him a great +deal. + +Kit Carson got his club cut just in time. The bears were coming after +him. Kit got up into the very top of the tree. He drew up his feet, and +made himself as small as he could. + +When the bears came near, one of them reached for Kit. Whack! went the +stick on the end of his nose. The bear drew back, and whined with pain. + +First one bear tried to get him, and then the other. But which-ever one +tried, Kit was ready. The bear was sure to get his nose hurt. + +[Illustration] + +The bears grew tired, and rested awhile. But they kept up their +screeching and roaring. When their noses felt better, they tried again. +And then they tried again. But every time they came away with sore +noses. At last they both tried at once. But Carson pounded faster than +ever. One of the bears cried like a baby. The tears ran out of his +eyes. It hurt his feelings to have his nose treated in this rude way. + +After a long time one of the bears got tired. He went away. After +awhile the other went away too. Kit Carson staid in the tree a long +time. Then he came down. The first thing he did was to get his gun. He +loaded it. But the bears did not come back. They were too busy rubbing +noses. + + + + +HORACE GREELEY AS A BOY. + + +Hor-ace Gree-ley was the son of a poor farmer. He was always fond of +books. He learned to read almost as soon as he could talk. He could +read easy books when he was three years old. When he was four, he could +read any book that he could get. + +He went to an old-fashioned school. Twice a day all the children stood +up to spell. They were in two classes. Little Hor-ace was in the class +with the grown-up young people. He was the best speller in the class. +It was funny to see the little midget at the head of this class of +older people. But he was only a little boy in his feelings. If he +missed a word, he would cry. The one that spelled a word that he missed +would have a right to take the head of the class. Sometimes when he +missed, the big boys would not take the head. They did not like to make +the little fellow cry. He was the pet of all the school. + +People in that day were fond of spelling. They used to hold meetings at +night to spell. They called these “spelling schools.” + +At a spelling school two captains were picked out. These chose their +spellers. Then they tried to see which side could beat the other at +spelling. + +Little Hor-ace was always chosen first. The side that got him got the +best speller in the school. Sometimes the little fellow would go to +sleep. When it came his turn to spell, some-body would wake him up. He +would rub his eyes, and spell the word. He would spell it right, too. + +When he was four or five years old, he would lie under a tree, and +read. He would lie there, and forget all about his dinner or his +supper. He would not move until some-body stumbled over him or called +him. + +People had not found out how to burn ker-o-sene oil in lamps then. They +used candles. But poor people like the Gree-leys could not afford to +burn many candles. Hor-ace gathered pine knots to read by at night. + +[Illustration: Greeley Reading] + +He would light a pine knot Then he would throw it on top of the large +log at the back of the fire. This would make a bright flick-er-ing +light. + +Horace would lay all the books he wanted on the hearth. Then he would +lie down by them. His head was toward the fire. His feet were drawn up +out of the way. + +The first thing that he did was to study all his lessons for the next +day. Then he would read other books. He never seemed to know when +anybody came or went. He kept on with his reading. His father did not +want him to read too late. He was afraid that he would hurt his eyes. +And he wanted to have him get up early in the morning to help with the +work. So when nine o’clock came, he would call, “Horace, Horace, +Horace!” But it took many callings to rouse him. + +When he got to bed, he would say his lessons over to his brother. He +would tell his brother what he had been reading. But his brother would +fall asleep while Horace was talking. + +Horace liked to read better than he liked to work. But when he had a +task to do, he did it faith-ful-ly. His brother would say, “Let us go +fishing.” But Horace would answer, “Let us get our work done first.” + +Horace Gree-ley’s father grew poorer and poorer. When Horace was ten +years old, his land was sold. The family were now very poor. They moved +from New Hamp-shire. They settled in Ver-mont. They lived in a poor +little cabin. + +Horace had to work hard like all the rest of the family. But he +borrowed all the books he could get. Sometimes he walked seven miles to +borrow a book. + +A rich man who lived near the Greeleys used to lend books to Horace. +Horace had grown tall. His hair was white. He was poorly dressed. He +was a strange-looking boy. One day he went to the house of the rich man +to borrow books. Some one said to the owner of the house, “Do you lend +books to such a fellow as that?” + +But the gen-tle-man said, “That boy will be a great man some day.” + +This made all the com-pa-ny laugh. It seemed funny that anybody should +think of this poor boy becoming a great man. But it came true. The poor +white-headed boy came to be a great man. + +Horace Greeley learned all that he could learn in the country schools. +When he was thirteen, one teacher said to his father,— + +“Mr. Greeley, Horace knows more than I do. It is not of any use to send +him to school any more.” + + + + +HORACE GREELEY LEARNING TO PRINT. + + +Horace Greeley had always wanted to be a printer. He liked books and +papers. He thought it would be a fine thing to learn to make them. + +One day he heard that the news-paper at East Poult-ney wanted a boy to +learn the printer’s trade. He walked many long miles to see about it. +He went to see Mr. Bliss. Mr. Bliss was one of the owners of the paper. +Horace found him working in his garden. Mr. Bliss looked up. He saw a +big boy coming toward him. The boy had on a white felt hat with a +narrow brim. It looked like a half-peck measure. His hair was white. +His trousers were too short for him. All his clothes were coarse and +poor. He was such a strange-looking boy, that Mr. Bliss wanted to +laugh. + +“I heard that you wanted a boy,” Horace said. + +“Do you want to learn to print?” Mr. Bliss said. + +“Yes,” said Horace. + +“But a printer ought to know a good many things,” said Mr. Bliss. “Have +you been to school much?” + +“No,” said Horace. “I have not had much chance at school. But I have +read some.” + +“What have you read?” asked Mr. Bliss. + +“Well, I have read some his-to-ry, and some travels, and a little of +everything.” + +Mr. Bliss had ex-am-ined a great many schoolteachers. He liked to +puzzle teachers with hard questions. He thought he would try Horace +with these. But the gawky boy answered them all. This tow-headed boy +seemed to know everything. + +Mr. Bliss took a piece of paper from his pocket. He wrote on it, “Guess +we’d better try him.” + +He gave this paper to Horace, and told him to take it to the printing +office. Horace, with his little white hat and strange ways, went into +the printing office. The boys in the office laughed at him. But the +foreman said he would try him. + +That night the boys in the office said to Mr. Bliss, “You are not going +to take that tow head, are you?” + +Mr. Bliss said, “There is something in that tow-head. You boys will +find it out soon.” + +[Illustration: Greeley setting Type] + +A few days after this, Horace came to East Poult-ney to begin his work. +He carried a little bundle of clothes tied up in a hand-ker-chief. + +The fore-man showed him how to begin. From that time he did not once +look around. All day he worked at his type. He learned more in a day +than some boys do in a month. + +Day after day he worked, and said nothing. The other boys joked him. +But he did not seem to hear them. He only kept on at his work. They +threw type at him. But he did not look up. + +The largest boy in the office thought he could find a way to tease him. +One day he said that Horace’s hair was too white. He went and got the +ink ball. He stained Horace’s hair black in four places. This ink stain +would not wash out. But Horace did not once look up. + +After that, the boys did not try to tease him any more. They all liked +the good-hearted Horace. And everybody in the town wondered that the +boy knew so much. + +Horace’s father had moved away to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Horace sent him all +the money he could spare. He soon became a good printer. He started a +paper of his own. He became a famous news-paper man. + + + + +A WONDERFUL WOMAN. + + +Little Dor-o-thy Dix was poor. Her father did not know how to make a +living. Her mother did not know how to bring up her children. + +The father moved from place to place. Sometimes he printed little +tracts to do good. But he let his own children grow up poor and +wretched. + +Dor-o-thy wanted to learn. She wanted to become a teacher. She wanted +to get money to send her little brothers to school. + +Dor-o-thy was a girl of strong will and temper. When she was twelve +years old, she left her wretched home. She went to her grand-mother. +Her grand-mother Dix lived in a large house in Boston. She sent Dorothy +to school. + +Dorothy learned fast. But she wanted to make money. She wanted to help +her brothers. When she was fourteen, she taught a school. She tried to +make herself look like a woman. She made her dresses longer. + +She soon went back to her grand-mother. She went to school again. Then +she taught school. She soon had a school in her grandmother’s house. It +was a very good school. Many girls were sent to her school. Miss Dix +was often ill. But when she was well enough, she worked away. She was +able to send her brothers to school until they grew up. + +Besides helping her brothers, she wanted to help other poor children. +She started a school for poor children in her grandmother’s barn. + +After a while she left off teaching. She was not well. She had made all +the money she needed. + +But she was not idle. She went one day to teach some poor women in an +alms-house. Then she went to see the place where the crazy people were +kept. These insane people had no fire in the coldest weather. + +Miss Dix tried to get the man-a-gers to put up a stove in the room. But +they would not do it. Then she went to the court. She told the judge +about it. The judge said that the insane people ought to have a fire. +He made the man-a-gers put up a stove in the place where they were +kept. + +Then Miss Dix went to other towns. She wanted to see how the insane +people were treated. Some of them were shut up in dark, damp cells. One +young man was chained up with an iron collar about his neck. + +Miss Dix got new laws made about the insane. She per-suad-ed the States +to build large houses for keeping the insane. She spent most of her +life at this work. The Civil War broke out. There were many sick and +wounded soldiers to be taken care of. + +All of the nurses in the hos-pi-tals were put under Miss Dix. She +worked at this as long as the war lasted. Then she spent the rest of +her life doing all that she could for insane people. + + + + +THE AUTHOR OF “LITTLE WOMEN.” + + +Lou-i-sa Al-cott was a wild little girl. When she was very little, she +would run away from home. She liked to play with beggar children. + +One day she wandered so far away from her home, she could not find the +way back again. It was growing dark. The little girl’s feet were tired. +She sat down on a door-step. A big dog was lying on the step. He wagged +his tail. That was his way of saying, “I am glad to see you.” + +Little Lou-i-sa grew sleepy. She laid her head on the curly head of the +big dog. Then she fell asleep. + +Lou-i-sa’s father and mother could not find her. They sent out the town +crier to look for her. + +The town crier went along the street. As he went, he rang his bell. +Every now and then he would tell that a little girl was lost. At last +the man with the bell came to the place where Louisa was asleep. He +rang his bell. That waked her up. She heard him call out in a loud +voice,— + +“Lost, lost! a little girl six years old. She wore a pink frock, a +white hat, and new green shoes.” + +When the crier had said that, he heard a small voice coming out of the +darkness. It said, “Why, dat’s me.” The crier went to the voice, and +found Louisa sitting by the big dog on the door-step. The next day she +was tied to the sofa to punish her for running away. + +She and her sisters learned to sew well. Louisa set up as a doll’s +dress-maker. She was then twelve years old. She hung out a little sign. +She put some pretty dresses in the window to show how well she could +do. + +Other girls liked the little dresses that she made. They came to her to +get dresses made for their dolls. They liked the little doll’s hats she +made better than all. Louisa chased the chickens to get soft feathers +for these hats. + +She turned the old fairy tales into little plays. The children played +these plays in the barn. + +One of these plays was Jack and the Bean-stalk. A squash vine was put +up in the barn. This was the bean-stalk. When it was cut down, the boy +who played giant would come tumbling out of the hay-loft. + +Louisa found it hard to be good and o-be-di-ent. She wrote some verses +about being good. She was fourteen years old when she wrote them. Here +they are:— + + + + +MY KINGDOM. + + +A little kingdom I possess + Where thoughts and feelings dwell, +And very hard I find the task + Of gov-ern-ing it well. + +For passion tempts and troubles me, + A wayward will misleads, +And sel-fish-ness its shadow casts + On all my words and deeds. + +I do not ask for any crown + But that which all may win, +Nor seek to conquer any world + Except the one within. + + +The Al-cott family were very poor. Louisa made up her mind to do +something to make money when she got big. She did not like being so +very poor. + +[Illustration] + +One day she was sitting on a cart-wheel thinking. She was thinking how +poor her father was. There was a crow up in the air over her head. The +crow was cawing. There was nobody to tell her thoughts to but the crow. +She shook her fist at the big bird, and said,— + +“I will do something by and by. Don’t care what. I’ll teach, sew, act, +write, do anything to help the family. And I’ll be rich and famous +before I die. See if I don’t.” + +The crow did not make any answer. But Louisa kept thinking about the +work she was going to do. The other children got work to do that made +money. But Louisa was left at home to do housework. She had to do the +washing. She made a little song about it. Here are some of the verses +of this song:— + +[Illustration] + + + + +A SONG FROM THE SUDS. + + +Queen of my tub, I merrily sing, + While the white foam rises high, +And stur-di-ly wash and rinse and wring, + And fasten the clothes to dry; +Then out in the free fresh air they swing, + Under the sunny sky. + +I am glad a task to me is given, + To labor at day by day; +For it brings me health and strength and hope, + And I cheer-ful-ly learn to say, +“Head you may think, Heart you may feel, + But Hand you shall work alway.” + + +Louisa grew to be a woman at last. She went to nurse soldiers in the +war. She wrote books. When she wrote the book called “Little Women,” +all the young people were de-light-ed. What she had said to the crow +came true at last. She became famous. She had money enough to make the +family com-fort-a-ble. + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10070 *** diff --git a/10070-h/10070-h.htm b/10070-h/10070-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89e173b --- /dev/null +++ b/10070-h/10070-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5139 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans, by Edward Eggleston</title> +<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> +<style type="text/css"> + +body { margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + text-align: justify; } + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight: +normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 300%; + margin-top: 0.6em; + margin-bottom: 0.6em; + letter-spacing: 0.12em; + word-spacing: 0.2em; + text-indent: 0em;} +h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;} +h4 {font-size: 120%;} +h5 {font-size: 110%;} + +.no-break {page-break-before: avoid;} /* for epubs */ + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} + +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + +p {text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: 0.25em; + margin-bottom: 0.25em; } + +p.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: 90%; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +div.fig { display:block; + margin:0 auto; + text-align:center; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em;} + +a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:hover {color:red} + +</style> + +</head> + +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10070 ***</div> + +<div class="fig" style="width:55%;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" style="width:100%;" alt="[Illustration]" /> +</div> + +<h1>Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans</h1> + +<h2 class="no-break">by Edward Eggleston</h2> + +<h5>AUTHOR OF “TRUE STORIES OF AMERICAN LIFE AND ADVENTURE” +“A FIRST BOOK IN AMERICAN HISTORY” AND “A HISTORY OF THE +UNITED STATES AND ITS PEOPLE FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS”</h5> + +<h4>1895</h4> + +<hr /> + +<h2>Contents</h2> + +<table summary="" style=""> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#pref01">PREFACE</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap01">The First Governor in Boston</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap02">Marquette in Iowa</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap03">Indian Pictures</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap04">William Penn and the Indians</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap05">One Little Bag of Rice</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap06">The Story of a Wise Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap07">Franklin his own Teacher</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap08">How Franklin found out Things</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap09">Franklin asks the Sunshine something</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap10">Franklin and the Kite</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap11">Franklin’s Whistle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap12">Too much for the Whistle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap13">John Stark and the Indians</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap14">A Great Good Man</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap15">Putnam and the Wolf</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap16">Washington and his Hatchet</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap17">How Benny West learned to be a Painter</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap18">Washington’s Christmas Gift</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap19">How Washington got out of a Trap</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap20">Washington’s Last Battle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap21">Marion’s Tower</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap22">Clark and his Men</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap23">Daniel Boone and his Grapevine Swing</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap24">Daniel Boone’s Daughter and her Friends</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap25">Decatur and the Pirates</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap26">Stories about Jefferson</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap27">A Long Journey</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap28">Captain Clark’s Burning Glass</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap29">Quicksilver Bob</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap30">The First Steamboat</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap31">Washington Irving as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap32">Don’t give up the Ship</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap33">Grandfather’s Rhyme</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap34">The Star-spangled Banner</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap35">How Audubon came to know about Birds</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap36">Audubon in the Wild Woods</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap37">Hunting a Panther</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap38">Some Boys who became Authors</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap39">Daniel Webster and his Brother</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap40">Webster and the Poor Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap41">The India-rubber Man</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap42">Doctor Kane in the Frozen Sea</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap43">A Dinner on the Ice</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap44">Doctor Kane gets out of the Frozen Sea</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap45">Longfellow as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap46">Kit Carson and the Bears</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap47">Horace Greeley as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap48">Horace Greeley learning to Print</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap49">A Wonderful Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap50">The Author of “Little Women”</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap51">My Kingdom</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap52">A Song from the Suds</a></td> +</tr> + +</table> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="pref01"></a>PREFACE.</h2> + +<p> +The primary aim of this book is to furnish the little learner reading matter +that will excite his attention and give him pleasure, and thus make lighter the +difficult task of learning to read. The ruggedness of this task has often been +increased by the use of disconnected sentences, or lessons as dry and +uninteresting as finger exercises on the piano. It is a sign of promise that +the demand for reading matter of interest to the child has come from teachers. +I have endeavored to meet this requirement in the following stories. +</p> + +<p> +As far as possible the words chosen have been such as are not difficult to the +little reader, either from their length or their unfamiliarity. The sentences +and paragraphs are short. Learning to read is like climbing a steep hill, and +it is a great relief to the panting child to find frequent breathing places. +</p> + +<p> +It is one of the purposes of these stories to make the mind of the pupil +familiar with some of the leading figures in the history of our country by +means of personal anecdote. Some of the stories are those that every American +child ought to know, because they have become a kind of national folklore. +Such, for example, are “Putnam and the Wolf” and the story of +“Franklin’s Whistle.” I have thought it important to present +as great a variety of subjects as possible, so that the pupil may learn +something not only of great warriors and patriots, but also of great statesmen. +The exploits of discoverers, the triumphs of American inventors, and the +achievements of men of letters and men of science, find place in these stories. +All the narratives are historical, or at least no stories have been told for +true that are deemed fictitious. Every means which the writer’s literary +experience could suggest has been used to make the stories engaging, in the +hope that the interest of the narrative may prove a sufficient spur to exertion +on the part of the pupil, and that this little book will make green and +pleasant a pathway that has so often been dry and laborious. It will surely +serve to excite an early interest in our national history by giving some of the +great personages of that history a place among the heroes that impress the +susceptible imagination of a child. It is thus that biographical and historical +incidents acquire something of the vitality of folk tales. +</p> + +<p> +The illustrations that accompany the text have been planned with special +reference to the awakening of the child’s attention. To keep the mind +alert and at its best is more than half the battle in teaching. The publishers +and the author of this little book believe that in laying the foundation of a +child’s education the best work is none too good. +</p> + +<p> +The larger words have been divided by hyphens when a separation into syllables +is likely to help the learner. The use of the hyphen has been regulated +entirely with a view to its utility. After a word not too difficult has been +made familiar by its repeated occurrence, the hyphens are omitted. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap01"></a>STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration: THE FIRST GOVERNOR IN BOSTON] +</p> + +<p> +Before the white people came, there were no houses in this country but the +little huts of the In-di-ans. The In-di-an houses were made of bark, or mats, +or skins, spread over poles. +</p> + +<p> +Some people came to one part of the country. Others started set-tle-ments in +other places. When more people came, some of these set-tle-ments grew into +towns. The woods were cut down. Farms were planted. Roads were made. But it +took many years for the country to fill with people. +</p> + +<p> +The first white people that came to live in the woods where Boston is now, +settled there a long time ago. They had a gov-ern-or over them. He was a good +man, and did much for the people. His name was John Win-throp. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing the people had to do was to cut down the trees. After that they +could plant corn. But at first they could not raise any-thing to eat. They had +brought flour and oat-meal from England. But they found that it was not enough +to last till they could raise corn on their new ground. +</p> + +<p> +Win-throp sent a ship to get more food for them. The ship was gone a long time. +The people ate up all their food. They were hungry. They went to the sea-shore, +and found clams and mussels. They were glad to get these to eat. +</p> + +<p> +At last they set a day for every-body to fast and pray for food. The gov-ern-or +had a little flour left. Nearly all of this was made into bread, and put into +the oven to bake. He did not know when he would get any more. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after this a poor man came along. His flour was all gone. His bread had +all been eaten up. His family were hungry. The gov-ern-or gave the poor man the +very last flour that he had in the barrel. +</p> + +<p> +Just then a ship was seen. It sailed up toward Boston. It was loaded with food +for all the people. +</p> + +<p> +The time for the fast day came. But there was now plenty of food. The fast day +was turned into a thanks-giving day. +</p> + +<p> +One day a man sent a very cross letter to Gov-ern-or Win-throp. Win-throp sent +it back to him. He said, “I cannot keep a letter that might make me +angry.” Then the man that had written the cross letter wrote to +Win-throp, “By con-quer-ing yourself, you have con-quered me.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap02"></a>MARQUETTE IN IOWA.</h2> + +<p> +The first white men to go into the middle of our country were French-men. The +French had settled in Can-a-da. They sent mis-sion-a-ries to preach to the +Indians in the West. They also sent traders to buy furs from the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +The French-men heard the Indians talk about a great river in the West. But no +French-man had ever gone far enough to see the Mis-sis-sip-pi. +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette was a priest. Jo-li-et was a trader. These two men were sent to find +the great river that the Indians talked about. +</p> + +<p> +They trav-eled in two birch canoes. They took five men to paddle the canoes. +They took some smoked meat to eat on the way. They also took some Indian corn. +They had trinkets to trade to the Indians. Hatchets, and beads, and bits of +cloth were the money they used to pay the Indians for what they wanted. +</p> + +<p> +The friendly Indians in Wis-con-sin tried to per-suade them not to go. They +told them that the Indians on the great river would kill them. +</p> + +<p> +The friendly Indians also told them that there was a demon in one part of the +river. They said that this demon roared so loud that he could be heard a long +way off. They said that the demon would draw the trav-el-ers down into the +water. Then they told about great monsters that ate up men and their canoes. +</p> + +<p> +But Mar-quette and the men with him thought they would risk the journey. They +would not turn back for fear of the demon or the monsters. +</p> + +<p> +The two little canoes went down the Wis-con-sin River. After some days they +came to the Mis-sis-sip-pi. More than a hundred years before, the Spaniards had +seen the lower part of this river. But no white man had ever seen this part of +the great river. Mar-quette did not know that any white man had ever seen any +part of the Mis-sis-sip-pi. +</p> + +<p> +The two little canoes now turned their bows down the river. Some-times they saw +great herds of buf-fa-loes. Some of these came to the bank of the river to look +at the men in the canoes. They had long, shaggy manes, which hung down over +their eyes. +</p> + +<p> +For two weeks the trav-el-ers paddled down the river. In all this time they did +not see any Indians. After they had gone hundreds of miles in this way, they +came to a place where they saw tracks in the mud. It was in what is now the +State of I-o-wa. +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette and Jo-li-et left the men in their canoes, and followed the tracks. +After walking two hours, they came to an Indian village. The Frenchmen came +near enough to hear the Indians talking. The Indians did not see them. +</p> + +<p> +Jo-li-et and Mar-quette did not know whether the Indians would kill them or +not. They said a short prayer. Then they stood out in full view, and gave a +loud shout. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians came out of their tents like bees. They stared at the strangers. +Then four Indians came toward them. These Indians carried a peace pipe. They +held this up toward the sun. This meant that they were friendly. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians now offered the peace pipe to the French-men. The French-men took +it, and smoked with the Indians. This was the Indian way of saying, “We +are friends.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marquette and Joliet] +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette asked the Indians what tribe they belonged to. They told him that +they were of the tribe called the Il-li-nois. +</p> + +<p> +They took Jo-li-et and Mar-quette into their village. They came to the door of +a large wig-wam. A chief stood in the door. He shaded his eyes with both hands, +as if the sun were shining in his face. Then he made a little speech. +</p> + +<p> +He said, “French-men, how bright the sun shines when you come to see us! +We are all waiting for you. You shall now come into our houses in peace.” +</p> + +<p> +The Il-li-nois Indians made a feast for their new friends. First they had mush +of corn meal, with fat meat in it. One of the Indians fed the Frenchmen as +though they were babies. He put mush into their mouths with a large spoon. +</p> + +<p> +Then came some fish. The Indian that fed the vis-it-ors picked out the bones +with his fingers. Then he put the pieces of fish into their mouths. After they +had some roasted dog. The French-men did not like this. Last, they were fed +with buf-fa-lo meat. +</p> + +<p> +The next morning six hundred Indians went to the canoes to tell the Frenchmen +good-by. They gave Mar-quette a young Indian slave. And they gave him a peace +pipe to carry with him. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap03"></a>INDIAN PICTURES.</h2> + +<p> +When Mar-quette and his men left the Il-li-nois, they went on down the river. +The friendly Il-li-nois had told them that the Indians they would see were bad, +and that they would kill any one who came into their country. +</p> + +<p> +The Frenchmen had heard before this that there were demons and monsters in the +river. One day they saw some high rocks with pictures painted on them. The ugly +pictures made them think of these monsters. They were painted in red, black, +and green colors. They were pictures of two Indian demons or gods. +</p> + +<p> +Each one of these monsters was about the size of a calf. They had horns as long +as those of a deer. Their eyes were red. Their faces were like a man’s, +but they were ugly and frightful. They had beards like a tiger’s. Their +bodies were covered with scales like those on a fish. Their long tails were +wound round their bodies, and over their heads, and down between their legs. +The end of each tail was like that of a fish. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians prayed to these ugly gods when they passed in their canoes. Even +Mar-quette and his men were a little frightened when they saw such pictures in +a place so lonely. The Frenchmen went down the river about twelve hundred +miles. Some-times the Indians tried to kill them, but by showing the peace pipe +they made friends. At last they turned back. Jo-li-et went to Can-a-da. +Mar-quette preached to the Indians in the West till he died. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap04"></a>WILLIAM PENN AND THE INDIANS.</h2> + +<p> +The King of England gave all the land in Penn-syl-va-ni-a to William Penn. The +King made Penn a kind of king over Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Penn could make the laws +of this new country. But he let the people make their own laws. +</p> + +<p> +Penn wanted to be friendly with the Indians. He paid them for all the land his +people wanted to live on. Before he went to Penn-syl-va-ni-a he wrote a letter +to the Indians. He told them in this letter that he would not let any of his +people do any harm to the Indians. He said he would punish any-body that did +any wrong to an Indian. This letter was read to the Indians in their own +lan-guage. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after this Penn got into a ship and sailed from England. He sailed to +Penn-syl-va-ni-a. When he came there, he sent word to the tribes of Indians to +come to meet him. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians met under a great elm tree on the bank of the river. Indians like +to hold their solemn meetings out of doors. They sit on the ground. They say +that the earth is the Indian’s mother. +</p> + +<p> +When Penn came to the place of meeting, he found the woods full of Indians. As +far as he could see, there were crowds of Indians. Penn’s friends were +few. They had no guns. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had a bright blue sash round his waist. One of the Indian chiefs, who was +the great chief, put on a kind of cap or crown. In the middle of this was a +small horn. The head chief wore this only at such great meetings as this one. +</p> + +<p> +When the great chief had put on his horn, all the other chiefs and great men of +the Indians put down their guns. Then they sat down in front of Penn in the +form of a half-moon. Then the great chief told Penn that the Indians were ready +to hear what he had to say. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had a large paper in which he had written all the things that he and his +friends had promised to the Indians. He had written all the promises that the +Indians were to make to the white people. This was to make them friends. When +Penn had read this to them, it was explained to them in their own lan-guage. +Penn told them that they might stay in the country that they had sold to the +white people. The land would belong to both the Indians and the white people. +</p> + +<p> +Then Penn laid the large paper down on the ground. That was to show them, he +said, that the ground was to belong to the Indians and the white people +to-geth-er. +</p> + +<p> +He said that there might be quarrels between some of the white people and some +of the Indians. But they would settle any quarrels without fighting. When-ever +there should be a quarrel, the Indians were to pick out six Indians. The white +people should also pick out six of their men. These were to meet, and settle +the quarrel. +</p> + +<p> +Penn said, “I will not call you my children, because fathers some-times +whip their children. I will not call you brothers, because brothers sometimes +fall out. But I will call you the same person as the white people. We are the +two parts of the same body.” +</p> + +<p> +The Indians could not write. But they had their way of putting down things that +they wished to have re-mem-bered. They gave Penn a belt of shell beads. These +beads are called wam-pum. Some wam-pum is white. Some is purple. +</p> + +<p> +They made this belt for Penn of white beads. In the middle of the belt they +made a picture of purple beads. It is a picture of a white man and an Indian. +They have hold of each other’s hands. When they gave this belt to Penn, +they said, “We will live with William Penn and his children as long as +the sun and moon shall last.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Penn jumping with the Indians.] +</p> + +<p> +Penn took up the great paper from the ground. He handed it to the great chief +that wore the horn on his head. He told the Indians to keep it and hand it to +their children’s children, that they might know what he had said. Then he +gave them many presents of such things as they liked. They gave Penn a name in +their own language. They named him “O-nas.” That was their word for +a feather. As the white people used a pen made out of a quill or feather, they +called a pen “o-nas.” That is why they called William Penn +“Brother O-nas.” +</p> + +<p> +Penn sometimes went to see the Indians. He talked to them, and gave them +friendly advice. Once he saw some of them jumping. They were trying to see who +could jump the farthest. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had been a very active boy. He knew how to jump very well. He went to the +place where the Indians were jumping. He jumped farther than any of them. +</p> + +<p> +When the great gov-ern-or took part in their sport, the Indians were pleased. +They loved Brother O-nas more than ever. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap05"></a>ONE LITTLE BAG OF RICE</h2> + +<p> +The first white people that came to this country hardly knew how to get their +living here. They did not know what would grow best in this country. +</p> + +<p> +Many of the white people learned to hunt. All the land was covered with trees. +In the woods were many animals whose flesh was good to eat. There were deer, +and bears, and great shaggy buf-fa-loes. There were rabbits and squirrels. And +there were many kinds of birds. The hunters shot wild ducks, wild turkeys, wild +geese, and pigeons. The people also caught many fishes out of the rivers. +</p> + +<p> +Then there were animals with fur on their backs. The people killed these and +sold their skins. In this way many made their living. +</p> + +<p> +Other people spent their time in cutting down the trees. They sawed the trees +into timbers and boards. Some of it they split into staves to make barrels. +They sent the staves and other sorts of timber to other countries to be sold. +In South Car-o-li-na men made tar and pitch out of the pine trees. +</p> + +<p> +But there was a wise man in South Car-o-li-na. He was one of those men that +find out better ways of doing. His name was Thomas Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Thomas Smith had once lived in a large island thousands of miles away from +South Car-o-li-na. In that island he had seen the people raising rice. He saw +that it was planted in wet ground. He said that he would like to try it in +South Car-o-li-na. But he could not get any seed rice to plant. The rice that +people eat is not fit to sow. +</p> + +<p> +One day a ship came to Charles-ton, where Thomas Smith lived. It had been +driven there by storms. The ship came from the large island where Smith had +seen rice grow. The captain of this ship was an old friend of Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The two old friends met once more. Thomas Smith told the captain that he wanted +some rice for seed. The captain called the cook of his ship, and asked him if +he had any. The cook had one little bag of seed rice. The captain gave this to +his friend. +</p> + +<p> +There was some wet ground at the back of Smith’s garden. In this wet +ground he sowed some of the rice. It grew finely. +</p> + +<p> +He gathered a good deal of rice in his garden that year. He gave part of this +to his friends. They all sowed it. The next year there was a great deal of +rice. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the wet land in South Car-o-li-na was turned to rice fields. +Every year many thousands of barrels of rice were sent away to be sold. +</p> + +<p> +All this came from one little bag of rice and one wise man. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Rice Plant.] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap06"></a>THE STORY OF A WISE WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +You have read how Thomas Smith first raised rice in Car-o-li-na. After his +death there lived in South Car-o-li-na a wise young woman. She showed the +people how to raise another plant. Her name was Eliza Lucas. +</p> + +<p> +The father of Miss Lucas did not live in Car-o-li-na. He was gov-ern-or of one +of the islands of the West Indies. Miss Lucas was fond of trying new things. +She often got seeds from her father. These she planted in South Carolina. +</p> + +<p> +Her father sent her some seeds of the in-di-go plant. She sowed some of these +in March. But there came a frost. The in-di-go plant cannot stand frost. Her +plants all died. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas did not give up. She sowed some more seeds in April. These grew +very well until a cut-worm found them. The worm wished to try new things, too. +So he ate off the in-di-go plants. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas was one of the people who try, try again. She had lost her +indigo plants twice. Once more she sowed some of the seed. This time the plants +grew very well. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Lucas wrote to her father about it. He sent her a man who knew how to get +the indigo out of the plant. +</p> + +<p> +The man tried not to show Miss Lucas how to make the indigo. He did not wish +the people in South Carolina to learn how to make it. He was afraid his own +people would not get so much for their indigo. +</p> + +<p> +So he would not explain just how it ought to be done. He spoiled the indigo on +purpose. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas watched him closely. She found out how the indigo ought to be +made. Some of her father’s land in South Carolina was now planted with +the indigo plants. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Indigo Plant.] +</p> + +<p> +Then Miss Lucas was married. She became Mrs. Pinck-ney. Her father gave her all +the indigo growing on his land in South Carolina. It was all saved for seed. +Some of the seed Mrs. Pinck-ney gave to her friends. Some of it her husband +sowed. It all grew, and was made into that blue dye that we call indigo. When +it is used in washing clothes, it is called bluing. +</p> + +<p> +In a few years, more than a million pounds of indigo were made in South +Carolina every year. Many people got rich by it. And it was all because Miss +Lucas did not give up. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap07"></a>FRANKLIN HIS OWN TEACHER.</h2> + +<p> +Few people ever knew so many things as Franklin. Men said, “How did he +ever learn so many things?” For he had been a poor boy who had to work +for a living. He could not go to school at all after he was ten years old. +</p> + +<p> +His father made soap and candles. Little Ben Frank-lin had to cut wicks for the +candles. He also filled the candle molds. And he sold soap and candles, and ran +on errands. But when he was not at work he spent his time in reading good +books. What little money he got he used to buy books with. +</p> + +<p> +He read the old story of “Pil-grim’s Prog-ress,” and liked it +so well that he bought all the other stories by the same man. But as he wanted +more books, and had not money to buy them, he sold all of these books. The next +he bought were some little his-to-ry books. These were made to sell very cheap, +and they were sold by peddlers. He managed to buy forty or fifty of these +little books of his-to-ry. +</p> + +<p> +Another way that he had of learning was by seeing things with his own eyes. His +father took him to see car-pen-ters at work with their saws and planes. He also +saw masons laying bricks. And he went to see men making brass and copper +kettles. And he saw a man with a turning lathe making the round legs of chairs. +Other men were at work making knives. Some things people learn out of books, +and some things they have to see for them-selves. +</p> + +<p> +As he was fond of books, Ben’s father thought that it would be a good +plan to send him to learn to print them. So the boy went to work in his +brother’s printing office. Here he passed his spare time in reading. He +borrowed some books out of the stores where books were sold. He would sit up a +great part of the night sometimes to read one of these books. He wished to +return it when the book-store opened in the morning. One man who had many books +lent to Ben such of his books as he wanted. +</p> + +<p> +It was part of the bargain that Ben’s brother should pay his board. The +boy offered to board himself if his brother would give him half what it cost to +pay for his board. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Franklin at Study.] +</p> + +<p> +His brother was glad to do this, and Ben saved part of the money and bought +books with it. He was a healthy boy, and it did not hurt him to live mostly on +bread and butter. Sometimes he bought a little pie or a handful of raisins. +</p> + +<p> +Long before he was a man, people said, “How much the boy knows!” +This was because— +</p> + +<p> +He did not waste his time. +</p> + +<p> +He read good books. +</p> + +<p> +He saw things for himself. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap08"></a>HOW FRANKLIN FOUND OUT THINGS.</h2> + +<p> +Frank-lin thought that ants know how to tell things to one another. He thought +that they talk by some kind of signs. When an ant has found a dead fly too big +for him to drag away, he will run off and get some other ant to help him. +Frank-lin thought that ants have some way of telling other ants that there is +work to do. +</p> + +<p> +One day he found some ants eating mo-las-ses out of a little jar in a closet. +He shook them out. Then he tied a string to the jar, and hung it on a nail in +the ceiling. But he had not got all the ants out of the jar. One little ant +liked sweet things so well that he staid in the jar, and kept on eating like a +greedy boy. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Ants talking (magnified)] +</p> + +<p> +At last when this greedy ant had eaten all that he could, he started to go +home. Frank-lin saw him climb over the rim of the jar. Then the ant ran down +the outside of the jar. But when he got to the bottom, he did not find any +shelf there. He went all round the jar. There was no way to get down to the +floor. The ant ran this way and that way, but he could not get down. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: An Ants Feeler (magnified)] +</p> + +<p> +At last the greedy ant thought he would see if he could go up. He climbed up +the string to the ceiling. Then he went down the wall. He came to his own hole +at last, no doubt. +</p> + +<p> +After a while he got hungry again, perhaps. He thought about that jar of sweets +at the end of a string. Then perhaps he told the other ants. Maybe he let them +know that there was a string by which they could get down to the jar. +</p> + +<p> +In about half an hour after the ant had gone up the string, Franklin saw a +swarm of ants going down the string. They marched in a line, one after another. +Soon there were two lines of ants on the string. The ants in one line were +going down to get at the sweet food. The ants in the other line were marching +up the other side of the string to go home. Do you think that the greedy ant +told the other ants about the jar? +</p> + +<p> +And did he tell them that there was a string by which an ant could get there? +</p> + +<p> +And did he tell it by speaking, or by signs that he made with his feelers? +</p> + +<p> +If you watch two ants when they meet, you will see that they touch their +feelers together, as if they said “Good-morning!” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap09"></a>FRANKLIN ASKS THE SUNSHINE SOMETHING.</h2> + +<p> +One day Franklin was eating dinner at the house of a friend. The lady of the +house, when she poured out the coffee, found that it was not hot. +</p> + +<p> +She said, “I am sorry that the coffee is cold. It is because the servant +forgot to scour the coffee-pot. Coffee gets cold more quickly when the +coffee-pot is not bright.” +</p> + +<p> +This set Franklin to thinking. He thought that a black or dull thing would cool +more quickly than a white or bright one. That made him think that a black thing +would take in heat more quickly than a white one. +</p> + +<p> +He wanted to find out if this were true or not. There was no-body who knew, so +there was no-body to ask. But Franklin thought that he would ask the sunshine. +Maybe the sunshine would tell him whether a black thing would heat more quickly +than a white thing. +</p> + +<p> +But how could he ask the sunshine? +</p> + +<p> +There was snow on the ground. Franklin spread a white cloth on the snow. Then +he spread a black cloth on the snow near the white one. When he came to look at +them, he saw that the snow under the black cloth melted away much sooner than +that under the white cloth. +</p> + +<p> +That is the way that the sunshine told him that black would take in heat more +quickly than white. After he had found this out, many people got white hats to +wear in the summer time. A white hat is cooler than a black one. +</p> + +<p> +Some time when there is snow on the ground, you can take a white and a black +cloth and ask the sunshine the same question. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap10"></a>FRANKLIN AND THE KITE.</h2> + +<p> +When Franklin wanted to know whether the ants could talk or not, he asked the +ants, and they told him. When he wanted to know some-thing else, he asked the +sunshine about it, as you have read in another story. That is the way that +Franklin came to know so many things. He knew how to ask questions of +every-thing. +</p> + +<p> +Once he asked the light-ning a question. And the light-ning gave him an answer. +</p> + +<p> +Before the time of Franklin, people did not know what light-ning was. They did +not know what made the thunder. Franklin thought much about it. At last he +proved what it was. He asked the lightning a question, and made it tell what it +was. To tell you this story, I shall have to use one big word. Maybe it is too +big for some of my little friends that will read this book. Let us divide it +into parts. Then you will not be afraid of it. The big word is e-lec-tric-i-ty. +</p> + +<p> +Those of you who live in towns have seen the streets lighted by +e-lec-tric-i-ty. But in Franklin’s time there were no such lights. People +knew very little about this strange thing with a big name. +</p> + +<p> +But Franklin found out many things about it that nobody had ever known before. +He began to think that the little sparks he got from e-lec-tric-i-ty were small +flashes of lightning. He thought that the little cracking sound of these sparks +was a kind of baby thunder. +</p> + +<p> +So he thought that he would try to catch a little bit of lightning. Perhaps he +could put it into one of the little bottles used to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. Then +if it behaved like e-lec-tric-i-ty, he would know what it was. But catching +lightning is not easy. How do you think he did it? +</p> + +<p> +First he made a kite. It was not a kite just like a boy’s kite. He wanted +a kite that would fly when it rained. Rain would spoil a paper kite in a +minute. So Franklin used a silk hand-ker-chief to cover his kite, instead of +paper. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Franklin’s Discovery.] +</p> + +<p> +He put a little sharp-pointed wire at the top of his kite. This was a kind of +lightning rod to draw the lightning into the kite. His kite string was a common +hemp string. To this he tied a key, because lightning will follow metal. The +end of the string that he held in his hand was a silk ribbon, which was tied to +the hemp string of the kite. E-lec-tric-ity will not follow silk. +</p> + +<p> +One night when there was a storm coming, he went out with his son. They stood +under a cow shed, and he sent his kite up in the air. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +After a while he held his knuckle to the key. A tiny spark flashed between the +key and his knuckle. It was a little flash of lightning. +</p> + +<p> +Then he took his little bottle fixed to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. He filled it with +the e-lec-tric-i-ty that came from the key. He carried home a bottle of +lightning. So he found out what made it thunder and lighten. +</p> + +<p> +After that he used to bring the lightning into his house on rods and wires. He +made the lightning ring bells and do many other strange things. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap11"></a>FRANKLIN’S WHISTLE.</h2> + +<p> +When Franklin was an old man, he wrote a cu-ri-ous letter. In that letter he +told a story. It was about some-thing that happened to him when he was a boy. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Here is the story put into verses, so that you will re-member it better. Some +day you can read the story as Franklin told it himself. You will hear people +say, “He paid too much for the whistle.” The saying came from this +story. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap12"></a>TOO MUCH FOR THE WHISTLE</h2> + +<p class="poem"> + As Ben with pennies in his pocket<br/> + Went strolling down the street,<br/> + “Toot-toot! toot-toot!” there came a whistle<br/> + From a boy he chanced to meet,<br/> +<br/> + Whistling fit to burst his buttons,<br/> + Blowing hard and stepping high.<br/> + Then Benny said, “I’ll buy your whistle;”<br/> + But “Toot! toot-toot!” was the reply.<br/> +<br/> + But Benny counted out his pennies,<br/> + The whistling boy began to smile;<br/> + With one last toot he gave the whistle<br/> + To Ben, and took his penny pile.<br/> +<br/> + Now homeward goes the whistling Benny,<br/> + As proud as any foolish boy,<br/> + And in his pockets not a penny,<br/> + But in his mouth a noisy toy.<br/> +<br/> + “Ah, Benny, Benny!” cries his mother,<br/> + “I cannot stand your ugly noise.”<br/> + “Stop, Benny, Benny!” says his father,<br/> + “I cannot talk, you drown my voice.”<br/> +<br/> + At last the whistling boy re-mem-bers<br/> + How much his money might have bought<br/> + “Too many pennies for a whistle,”<br/> + Is little Benny’s ugly thought.<br/> +<br/> + Too many pennies for a whistle<br/> + Is what we all pay, you and I,<br/> + Just for a little foolish pleasure<br/> + Pay a price that’s quite too high. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap13"></a>JOHN STARK AND THE INDIANS.</h2> + +<p> +John Stark was a famous gen-er-al in the Rev-o-lu-tion. But this story is not +about the Rev-o-lu-tion. It is about Stark before he became a soldier. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a young man, Stark went into the woods. His brother and two other +young men were with him. They lived in a camp. It was far away from any houses. +</p> + +<p> +The young men set traps for animals in many places. They wanted to catch the +animals that have fur on them. They wanted to get the skins to sell. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were at war with the white people. One day the young men saw the +tracks of Indians. Then they knew that it was not safe for them to stay in the +woods any longer. They began to get ready to go home. +</p> + +<p> +John Stark went out to bring in the traps set for animals. The Indians found +him, and made him a pris-on-er. They asked him where his friends were. +</p> + +<p> +Stark did not wish his friends to be taken. So he pointed the wrong way. He +took the Indians a long way from the other young men. +</p> + +<p> +But John Stark’s friends did not know that he was a pris-on-er. When he +did not come back, they thought that he had lost his way. They fired their guns +to let him know where they were. +</p> + +<p> +When the Indians heard the guns, they knew where the other hunters were. They +went down to the river, and waited for them. When one of the men came down, +they caught him. +</p> + +<p> +Then John Stark’s brother and the other man came down the river in a +boat. The Indians told Stark to call them. They wanted them to come over where +the Indians were. Then they could take them. +</p> + +<p> +John knew that the Indians were cruel. He knew that if he did not do what they +told him to, they might kill him. But he wished to save his brother. He called +to his brother to row for the other shore. +</p> + +<p> +When they turned toward the other shore, the Indians fired at them. But Stark +knocked up two of their guns. They did not hit the white men. Then some of the +other Indians fired. Stark knocked up their guns also. But the man that was +with his brother was killed. +</p> + +<p> +John now called to his brother, “Run! for all the Indians’ guns are +empty.” +</p> + +<p> +His brother got away. The Indians were very angry with John. They did not kill +him. But they gave him a good beating. These Indians were from Can-a-da. They +took their pris-on-ers to their own village. When they were coming home, they +shouted to let the people know that they had prisoners. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Stark running the Gauntlet] +</p> + +<p> +The young Indian war-ri-ors stood in two rows in the village. Each prisoner had +to run between these two rows of Indians. As he passed, every one of the +Indians hit him as hard as he could with a stick, or a club, or a stone. +</p> + +<p> +The young man who was with Stark was badly hurt in running between these lines. +But John Stark knew the Indians. He knew that they liked a brave man. +</p> + +<p> +When it came his turn to run, he snatched a club from one of the Indians. With +this club he fought his way down the lines. He hit hard, now on this side, and +now on that. The young Indians got out of his way. The old Indians who were +looking on sat and laughed at the others. They said that Stark was a brave man. +</p> + +<p> +One day the Indians gave him a hoe and told him to hoe corn. He knew that the +Indian war-ri-ors would not work. They think it a shame for a man to work. +Their work is left for slaves and women. So Stark pre-tend-ed that he did not +know how to hoe. He dug up the corn instead of the weeds. Then he threw the hoe +into the river. He said, “That is work for slaves and women.” +</p> + +<p> +Then the Indians were pleased with him. They called him the young chief. +</p> + +<p> +After a while some white men paid the Indians a hundred and three dollars to +let Stark go home. They charged more for him than for the other man, because +they thought that he must be a young chief. Stark went hunting again. He had to +get some furs to pay back the money the men had paid the Indians for him. He +took good care that the Indians should not catch him again. +</p> + +<p> +He af-ter-wards became a great fighter against the Indians. He had learned +their ways while he was among them. He knew better how to fight them than +almost any-body else. +</p> + +<p> +In the Rev-o-lu-tion he was a gen-er-al. He fought the British at Ben-ning-ton, +and won a great vic-to-ry. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap14"></a>A GREAT GOOD MAN.</h2> + +<p> +Some men are great soldiers. Some are great law-makers. Some men write great +books. Some men make great in-ven-tions. Some men are great speakers. +</p> + +<p> +Now you are going to read about a man that was great in none of these things. +He was not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. He was never rich. He was a +poor school-teacher. He never held any office. +</p> + +<p> +And yet he was a great man. He was great for his goodness. +</p> + +<p> +He was born in France. But most of his life was passed in Phil-a-del-phi-a +before the Rev-o-lu-tion. +</p> + +<p> +He was twenty-five years old when he became a school-teacher. He thought that +he could do more good in teaching than in any other way. +</p> + +<p> +School-masters in his time were not like our teachers. Children were treated +like little animals. In old times the school-master was a little king. He +walked and talked as if he knew every-thing. He wanted all the children to be +afraid of him. +</p> + +<p> +But Ben-e-zet was not that kind of man. He was very gentle. He treated the +children more kindly than their fathers and mothers did. Nobody in this country +had ever seen a teacher like him. +</p> + +<p> +He built a play-room for the children of his school. He used to take them to +this room during school time for a little a-muse-ment. He man-aged each child +as he found best. Some he could persuade to be good. Some he shamed into being +good. But this was very dif-fer-ent from the cruel beatings that other teachers +of that time gave their pupils. +</p> + +<p> +Of course the children came to love him very much. After they grew to be men +and women, they kept their love for the good little schoolmaster. As long as +they lived they listened to his advice. +</p> + +<p> +There were no good school-books in his time. He wrote some little books to make +learning easier to his pupils. He taught them many things not in their books. +He taught them to be kind to brutes, and gentle with one another. He taught +them to be noble. He made them despise every kind of meanness. +</p> + +<p> +He was a great teacher. That is better than being a great soldier. +</p> + +<p> +Ben-e-zet was a good man in many ways. He was the friend of all poor people. +Once he found a poor man suf-fer-ing with cold for want of a coat. He took off +his own coat in the street and put it on the poor man, and then went home in +his shirt sleeves. +</p> + +<p> +In those days negroes were stolen from Af-ri-ca to be sold into A-mer-i-ca. +Ben-e-zet wrote little books against this wrong. He sent these books over all +the world almost. He also tried to persuade the white men of his own country to +be honest and kind with the Indians. Great men in other countries were pleased +with his books. They wrote him letters. When any of them came to this country, +they went to see him. They wanted to see a man that was good to everybody. His +house was a plain one. But great men liked to sit at the table of the good +schoolmaster. +</p> + +<p> +There was war between the English and French at that time. Can-a-da belonged to +the French. Our country belonged to the English. There was a country called +A-ca-di-a. It was a part of what is now No-va Sco-ti-a. The people of A-ca-di-a +were French. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Departure of the Acadians] +</p> + +<p> +The English took the A-ca-di-ans away from their homes. They sent them to +various places. Many families were divided. The poor A-ca-di-ans lost their +homes and all that they had. +</p> + +<p> +Many hundreds of these people were sent to Phil-a-del-phi-a. Benezet became +their friend. As he was born in France, he could speak their lan-guage. He got +a large house built for some of them to stay in. He got food and clothing for +them. He helped them to get work, and did them good in many other ways. +</p> + +<p> +One day Benezet’s wife came to him with a troubled face. She said, +“There have been thieves in the house. Two of my blankets have been +stolen.” +</p> + +<p> +“Never mind, my dear,” said Benezet, “I gave them to some of +the poor A-ca-di-ans.” +</p> + +<p> +One old Acadian was afraid of Benezet. He did not see why Benezet should take +so much trouble for other people. He thought that Benezet was only trying to +get a chance to sell the Acadians for slaves. When Benezet heard this, he had a +good laugh. +</p> + +<p> +Many years after this the Rev-o-lu-tion broke out. It brought trouble to many +people. Benezet helped as many as he could. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the British army took Phil-a-del-phi-a. They sent their soldiers +to stay in the houses of the people. The people had to take care of the +soldiers. This was very hard for the poor people. +</p> + +<p> +One day Benezet saw a poor woman. Her face showed that she was in trouble. +</p> + +<p> +“Friend, what is the matter?” Benezet said to her. She told him +that six soldiers of the British army had been sent to stay in her house. She +was a washer-woman. But while the soldiers filled up the house she could not do +any washing. She and her children were in want. +</p> + +<p> +Benezet went right away to see the gen-er-al that was in command of the +soldiers. The good man was in such a hurry that he forgot to get a pass. The +soldiers at the gen-er-al’s door would not let him go in. +</p> + +<p> +At last some one told the gen-er-al that a queer-looking fellow wanted to see +him. +</p> + +<p> +“Let him come up,” said the general. +</p> + +<p> +The odd little man came in. He told the general all about the troubles of the +poor washer-woman. The general sent word that the soldiers must not stay any +longer in her house. +</p> + +<p> +The general liked the kind little man. He told him to come to see him again. He +told the soldiers at his door to let Benezet come in when-ever he wished to. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after the Rev-o-lu-tion was over, Benezet was taken ill. When the people +of Phil-a-del-phi-a heard that he was ill, they gathered in crowds about his +house. Every-body loved him. Every-body wanted to know whether he was better or +not. At last the doctors said he could not get well. Then the people wished to +see the good man once more. The doors were opened. The rooms and halls of his +house were filled with people coming to say good-bye to Benezet, and going away +again. +</p> + +<p> +When he was buried, it seemed as if all Phil-a-del-phi-a had come to his +fu-ner-al. The rich and the poor, the black and the white, crowded the streets. +The city had never seen so great a fu-ner-al. +</p> + +<p> +In the company was an A-mer-i-can general. He said, “I would rather be +An-tho-ny Benezet in that coffin than General Wash-ing-ton in all his +glory.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap15"></a>PUTNAM AND THE WOLF.</h2> + +<p> +Putnam was a brave soldier. He fought many battles against the Indians. After +that he became a general in the Revolution. But this is a story of his battle +with a wolf. It took place when he was a young man, before he was a soldier. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam lived in Con-nect-i-cut. In the woods there were still a few wolves. One +old wolf came to Putnam’s neigh-bor-hood every winter. She always brought +a family of young wolves with her. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters would always kill the young wolves. But they could not find the old +mother wolf. She knew how to keep out of the way. +</p> + +<p> +The farmers tried to catch her in their traps. But she was too cunning. She had +had one good lesson when she was young. She had put the toes of one foot into a +steel trap. The trap had snipped them off. After that she was more careful. +</p> + +<p> +One winter night she went out to get some meat. She came to Putnam’s +flock of sheep and goats. She killed some of them. She found it great fun. +</p> + +<p> +There were no dogs about. The poor sheep had nobody to protect them. So the old +wolf kept on killing. One sheep was enough for her supper. But she killed the +rest just for sport. She killed seventy sheep and goats that night. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam and his friends set out to find the old sheep killer. There were six men +of them. They agreed that two of them should hunt for her at a time. Then +another two should begin as soon as the first two should stop. So she would be +hunted day and night. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters found her track in the snow. There could be no mistake about it. +The track made by one of her feet was shorter than those made by the other +feet. That was because one of her feet had been caught in a trap. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters found that the old wolf had gone a long way off. Perhaps she felt +guilty. She must have thought that she would be hunted. She had trotted away +for a whole night. +</p> + +<p> +Then she turned and went back again. She was getting hungry by this time. She +wanted some more sheep. +</p> + +<p> +The men followed her tracks back again. The dogs drove her into a hole. It was +not far from Putnam’s house. +</p> + +<p> +All the farmers came to help catch her. They sent the dogs into the cave where +the wolf was. But the wolf bit the dogs, and drove them out again. +</p> + +<p> +Then the men put a pile of straw in the mouth of the cave. They set the straw +on fire. It filled the cave with smoke. But Mrs. Wolf did not come out. +</p> + +<p> +Then they burned brim-stone in the cave. It must have made the wolf sneeze. But +the cave was deep. She went as far in as she could, and staid there. She +thought that the smell of brimstone was not so bad as the dogs and men who +wanted to kill her. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam wanted to send his negro into the cave to drive out the wolf. But the +negro thought that he would rather stay out. +</p> + +<p> +Then Putnam said that he would go in himself. He tied a rope to his legs. Then +he got some pieces of birch-bark. He set fire to these. He knew that wild +animals do not like to face a fire. +</p> + +<p> +He got down on his hands and knees. He held the blazing bark in his hand. He +crawled through the small hole into the cave. There was not room for him to +stand up. +</p> + +<p> +At first the cave went downward into the ground. Then it was level a little +way. Then it went upward. At the very back of this part of the cave was the +wolf. Putnam crawled up until he could see the wolf’s eyes. +</p> + +<p> +When the wolf saw the fire, she gave a sudden growl. Putnam jerked the rope +that was tied to his leg. The men outside thought that the wolf had caught him. +They pulled on the other end of the rope. +</p> + +<p> +The men pulled as fast as they could. When they had drawn Putnam out, his +clothes were torn. He was badly scratched by the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +He now got his gun. He held it in one hand. He held the burning birch-bark in +the other. He crawled into the cave again. +</p> + +<p> +When the wolf saw him coming again, she was very angry. She snapped her teeth. +She got ready to spring on him. She meant to kill him as she had killed his +sheep. Putnam fired at her head. As soon as his gun went off, he jerked the +rope. His friends pulled him out. +</p> + +<p> +He waited awhile for the smoke of his gun to clear up. Then he went in once +more. He wanted to see if the wolf was dead. +</p> + +<p> +He found her lying down. He tapped her nose with his birch-bark. She did not +move. He took hold of her. Then he jerked the rope. +</p> + +<p> +This time the men saw him come out, bringing the dead wolf. Now the sheep would +have some peace. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap16"></a>WASHINGTON AND HIS HATCHET</h2> + +<p> +It was Ar-bor Day in the Mos-sy Hill School, Johnny Little-john had to speak a +piece that had some-thing to do with trees. He thought it would be a good plan +to say some-thing about the little cherry tree that Washington spoiled with his +hatch-et, when he was a little boy. This is what he said: +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +He had a hatch-et—little George—<br/> + A hatch-et bright and new,<br/> +And sharp enough to cut a stick—<br/> + A little stick—in two.<br/> +<br/> +He hacked and whacked and whacked and hacked,<br/> + This sturd-y little man;<br/> +He hacked a log and hacked a fence,<br/> + As round about he ran.<br/> +<br/> +He hacked his father’s cher-ry tree<br/> + And made an ug-ly spot;<br/> +The bark was soft, the hatch-et sharp,<br/> + And little George forgot.<br/> +<br/> +You know the rest. The father frowned<br/> + And asked the rea-son why;<br/> +You know the good old story runs<br/> + He could not tell a lie.<br/> +<br/> +The boy that chopped that cher-ry tree<br/> + Soon grew to be a youth;<br/> +At work and books he hacked away,<br/> + And still he told the truth:<br/> +<br/> +The youth became a fa-mous man,<br/> + Above six feet in height,<br/> +And when he had good work to do<br/> + He hacked with all his might.<br/> +<br/> +He fought the ar-mies that the king<br/> + Had sent across the sea;<br/> +He bat-tled up and down the land<br/> + To set his country free.<br/> +<br/> +For seven long years he, hacked and whacked<br/> + With all his might and main<br/> +Until the Brit-ish sailed away<br/> + And did not come again. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap17"></a>HOW BENNY WEST LEARNED TO BE A PAINTER.</h2> + +<p> +In old times there lived in Penn-syl-va-ni-a a little fellow whose name was +Ben-ja-min West. He lived in a long stone house. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Painting Baby’s Portrait] +</p> + +<p> +He had never seen a picture. The country was new, and there were not many +pictures in it. Benny’s father was a Friend or Quaker. The Friends of +that day did not think that pictures were useful things to make or to have. +Before he was seven years old, this little boy began to draw pictures. One day +he was watching the cradle of his sister’s child. The baby smiled. Benny +was so pleased with her beauty, that he made a picture of her in red and black +ink. The picture of the baby pleased his mother when she saw it. That was very +pleasant to the boy. +</p> + +<p> +He made other pictures. At school he used to draw with a pen before he could +write. He made pictures of birds and of animals. Sometimes he would draw +flowers. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Flower and Fruit of the Poke-Berry.] +</p> + +<p> +He liked to draw so well, that sometimes he forgot to do his work. His father +sent him to work in the field one day. The father went out to see how well he +was doing his work. Benny was no-where to be found. At last his father saw him +sitting under a large poke-weed. He was making pictures. He had squeezed the +juice out of some poke-berries. The juice of poke-berries is deep red. With +this the boy had made his pictures. When the father looked at them, he was +surprised. There were portraits of every member of the family. His father knew +every picture. +</p> + +<p> +Up to this time Benny had no paints nor any brushes. The Indians had not all +gone away from that neigh-bor-hood. The Indians paint their faces with red and +yellow colors. These colors they make them-selves. Sometimes they prepare them +from the juice of some plant. Sometimes they get them by finding red or yellow +earth. Some of the Indians can make rough pictures with these colors. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians near the house of Benny’s father must have liked the boy. +They showed him how to make red and yellow colors for himself. He got some of +his mother’s indigo to make blue. He now had red, yellow, and blue. By +mixing these three, the other colors that he wanted could be made. +</p> + +<p> +But he had no brush to paint with. He took some long hairs from the cat’s +tail. Of these he made his brushes. He used so many of the cat’s hairs, +that her tail began to look bare. Everybody in the house began to wonder what +was the matter with pussy’s tail. At last Benny told where he got his +brushes. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Making a Paint Brush.] +</p> + +<p> +A cousin of Benny’s came from the city on a visit. He saw some of the +boy’s drawings. When he went home, he sent Benny a box of paints. With +the paints were some brushes. And there was some canvas such as pictures are +painted on. And that was not all. There were in the box six beautiful +en-grav-ings. +</p> + +<p> +The little painter now felt himself rich. He was so happy that he could hardly +sleep at all. At night he put the box that held his treasures on a chair by his +bed. As soon as daylight came, he carried the precious box to the garret. The +garret of the long stone house was his stu-di-o. Here he worked away all day +long. He did not go to school at all. Perhaps he forgot that there was any +school. Perhaps the little artist could not tear himself away from his work. +</p> + +<p> +But the schoolmaster missed him. He came to ask if Benny was ill. The mother +was vexed when she found that he had staid away from school. She went to look +for the naughty boy. After a while she found the little truant. He was hard at +work in his garret. She saw what he had been doing. He had not copied any of +his new en-grav-ings. He had made up a new picture by taking one person out of +one en-grav-ing, and another out of another. He had copied these so that they +made a picture that he had thought of for himself. +</p> + +<p> +His mother could not find it in her heart to punish him. She was too much +pleased with the picture he was making. This picture was not finished. But his +mother would not let him finish it. She was afraid he would spoil it if he did +anything more on it. +</p> + +<p> +The good people called Friends did not like the making of pictures, as I said. +But they thought that Benny West had a talent that he ought to use. So he went +to Phil-a-del-phi-a to study his art. After a while he sailed away to It-a-ly +to see the pictures that great artists had painted. +</p> + +<p> +At last he settled in England. The King of England was at that time the king of +this country too. The king liked West’s pictures. West became the +king’s painter. He came to be the most famous painter in England. +</p> + +<p> +He liked to remember his boyish work. He liked to remember the time when he was +a little Quaker boy making his paints of poke-juice and Indian colors. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap18"></a>WASHINGTON’S CHRISTMAS GIFT.</h2> + +<p> +Washington was fighting to set this country free. But the army that the King of +England sent to fight him was stronger than Washington’s army. Washington +was beaten and driven out of Brook-lyn. Then he had to leave New York. After +that, he marched away into New Jersey to save his army from being taken. At +last he crossed the Del-a-ware River. Here he was safe for a while. +</p> + +<p> +Some of the Hes-sian soldiers that the king had hired to fight against the +Americans came to Trenton. Trenton is on the Del-a-ware River. +</p> + +<p> +Washington and his men were on the other side of the Del-a-ware River from the +Hes-sians. Washington’s men were dis-cour-aged. They had been driven back +all the way from Brook-lyn. It was winter, and they had no warm houses to stay +in. They had not even warm clothes. They were dressed in old clothes that +people had given them. Some of them were bare-footed in this cold weather. +</p> + +<p> +The Hes-sians and other soldiers of the king were waiting for the river to +freeze over. Then they would march across on the ice. They meant to fight +Washington once more, and break up his army. But Washington was thinking about +something too. +</p> + +<p> +He was waiting for Christmas. He knew that the Hessian soldiers on the other +side of the river would eat and drink a great deal on Christmas Day. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marching to Trenton.] +</p> + +<p> +The afternoon of Christmas came. The Hessians were singing and drinking in +Trenton. But Washington was marching up the river bank. Some of his bare-foot +men left blood marks on the snow as they marched. +</p> + +<p> +The men and cannons were put into flat boats. These boats were pushed across +the river with poles. There were many great pieces of ice in the river. But all +night long the flat boats were pushed across and then back again for more men. +It was three o’clock on the morning after Christmas when the last +Americans crossed the river. It was hailing and snowing, and it was very cold. +Two or three of the soldiers were frozen to death. +</p> + +<p> +It was eight o’clock in the morning when Washington got to Trenton. The +Hessians were sleeping soundly. The sound of the American drums waked them. +They jumped out of their beds. They ran into the streets. They tried to fight +the Americans. +</p> + +<p> +But it was too late. Washington had already taken their cannons. His men were +firing these at the Hessians. The Hessians ran into the fields to get away. But +the Americans caught them. +</p> + +<p> +The battle was soon over. Washington had taken nine hundred prisoners. +</p> + +<p> +This was called the battle of Trenton. It gave great joy to all the Americans. +It was Washington’s Christmas gift to the country. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap19"></a>HOW WASHINGTON GOT OUT OF A TRAP.</h2> + +<p> +After the battle of Trenton, Washington went back across the Delaware River. He +had not men enough to fight the whole British army. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans were glad when they heard that he had beaten the Hessians. +They sent him more soldiers. Then he went back across the river to Trenton +again. +</p> + +<p> +There was a British general named Corn-wal-lis. He marched to Trenton. He +fought against Washington. Corn-wal-lis had more men than Washington had. Night +came, and they could not see to fight. There was a little creek between the two +armies. +</p> + +<p> +Washington had not boats enough to carry his men across the river. Corn-wal-lis +was sure to beat him if they should fight a battle the next morning. +</p> + +<p> +Cornwallis said, “I will catch the fox in the morning.” +</p> + +<p> +He called Washington a fox. He thought he had him in a trap. Cornwallis sent +for some more soldiers to come from Prince-ton in the morning. He wanted them +to help him catch the fox. +</p> + +<p> +But foxes sometimes get out of traps. +</p> + +<p> +When it was dark, Washington had all his camp fires lighted. He put men to +digging where the British could hear them. He made Cornwallis think that he was +throwing up banks of earth and getting ready to fight in the morning. +</p> + +<p> +But Washington did not stay in Trenton. He did not wish to be caught like a fox +in a trap. He could not get across the river. But he knew a road that went +round the place where Cornwallis and his army were. He took that road and got +behind the British army. +</p> + +<p> +It was just like John waiting to catch James. James is in the house. John is +waiting at the front door to catch James when he comes out. But James slips out +by the back way. John hears him call “Hello!” James has gone round +behind him and got away. +</p> + +<p> +Washington went out of Trenton in the darkness. You might say that he marched +out by the back door. He left Cornwallis watching the front door. The Americans +went away quietly. They left a few men to keep up the fires, and make a noise +like digging. Before morning these slipped away too. +</p> + +<p> +When morning came, Cornwallis went to catch his fox. But the fox was not there. +He looked for the Americans. There was the place where they had been digging. +Their camp fires were still burning. But where had they gone? +</p> + +<p> +Cornwallis thought that Washington had crossed the river by some means. But +soon he heard guns firing away back toward Princeton. He thought that it must +be thunder. But he found that it was a battle. Then he knew that Washington had +gone to Princeton. +</p> + +<p> +Washington had marched all night. When he got to Princeton, he met the British +coming out to go to Trenton. They were going to help Cornwallis to catch +Washington. But Washington had come to Princeton to catch them. He had a hard +fight with the British at Princeton. But at last he beat them. +</p> + +<p> +When Cornwallis knew that the Americans had gone to Princeton, he hurried there +to help his men. But it was too late. Washington had beaten the British at +Princeton, and had gone on into the hills, where he was safe. +</p> + +<p> +The fox had got out of the trap. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap20"></a>WASHINGTON’S LAST BATTLE.</h2> + +<p> +Washington had been fighting for seven years to drive the British soldiers out +of this country. But there were still two strong British armies in America. +</p> + +<p> +One of these armies was in New York. It had been there for years. The other +army was far away at Yorktown in Virginia. The British general at Yorktown was +Cornwallis. You have read how Washington got away from him at Trenton. +</p> + +<p> +The King of France had sent ships and soldiers to help the Americans. But still +Washington had not enough men to take New York from the British. Yet he went on +getting ready to attack the British in New York. He had ovens built to bake +bread for his men. He bought hay for his horses. He had roads built to draw his +cannons on. +</p> + +<p> +He knew that the British in New York would hear about what he was doing. He +wanted them to think that he meant to come to New York and fight them. When the +British heard what the Americans were doing, they got ready for the coming of +Washington and the French. All at once they found that Washington had gone. He +and his men had marched away. The French soldiers that had come to help him had +gone with him. +</p> + +<p> +Nobody knew what it meant. Washington’s own men did not know where they +were going. They went from New Jersey into Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they marched +across Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they went into Mary-land. They marched across +that State, and then they went into Vir-gin-i-a. +</p> + +<p> +By this time everybody could tell where Washington was going. People could see +that he was going straight to York-town. They knew that Washington was going to +fight his old enemy at York-town. +</p> + +<p> +But he had kept his secret long enough. The British in New York could not send +help to Cornwallis. It was too late. The French ships sailed to Vir-gin-i-a, +and shut up Yorktown on the side of the sea. Washington’s men shut it up +on the side of the land. They built great banks of earth round it. On these +banks of earth they put cannons. +</p> + +<p> +The British could not get away. They fought bravely. But the Americans and +French came closer and closer. +</p> + +<p> +Then the British tried to fight their way out. But they were driven back. Then +Cornwallis tried to get his men across the river. He wanted to get out by the +back door, as Washington had done. But the Americans on the other side of the +river drove them back again. Washington had now caught Cornwallis in a trap. +</p> + +<p> +The Americans fired red-hot cannon balls into Yorktown. These set the houses on +fire. At last Cornwallis had to give up. The British marched out and laid down +their guns and swords. +</p> + +<p> +The British army in New York could not fight the Americans by itself. So the +British gave it up. Then there was peace after the long war. The British pulled +down the British flag and sailed away. The country was free at last. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap21"></a>MARION’S TOWER.</h2> + +<p> +General Mar-i-on was one of the best fighters in the Revolution. He was a +homely little man. He was also a very good man. Another general said, +“Mar-i-on is good all over.” +</p> + +<p> +The American army had been beaten in South Car-o-li-na. Mar-i-on was sent there +to keep the British from taking the whole country. +</p> + +<p> +Marion got to-geth-er a little army. His men had nothing but rough clothes to +wear. They had no guns but the old ones they had used to shoot wild ducks and +deer with. +</p> + +<p> +Marion’s men wanted swords. There were no swords to be had. But Marion +sent men to take the long saws out of the saw mills. These were taken to +black-smiths. The black-smiths cut the saws into pieces. These pieces they +hammered out into long, sharp swords. +</p> + +<p> +Marion had not so many men as the British. He had no cannon. He could not build +forts. He could not stay long in one place, for fear the British should come +with a strong army and take him. He and his men hid in the dark woods. +Sometimes he changed his hiding place suddenly. Even his own friends had hard +work to find him. +</p> + +<p> +From the dark woods he would come out suddenly. He would attack some party of +British soldiers. When the battle was over, he would go back to the woods +again. +</p> + +<p> +When the British sent a strong army to catch him, he could not be found. But +soon he would be fighting the British in some new place. He was always playing +hide and seek. +</p> + +<p> +The British called him the Swamp Fox. That was because he was so hard to catch. +They could not conquer the country until they could catch Marion. And they +never could catch the Swamp Fox. At one time Marion came out of the woods to +take a little British fort. This fort was on the top of a high mound. It was +one of the mounds built a long time ago by the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +Marion put his men all round the fort, so that the men in the fort could not +get out to get water. He thought that they would have to give up. But the men +in the fort dug a well inside the fort. Then Marion had to think of another +plan. +</p> + +<p> +Marion’s men went to the woods and cut down stout poles. They got a great +many poles. When night came, they laid a row of poles along-side one another on +the ground. Then they laid another row across these. Then they laid another row +on top of the last ones, and across the other way again. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marion’s Tower.] +</p> + +<p> +They laid a great many rows of poles one on top of another. They crossed them +this way and that. As the night went on, the pile grew higher. Still they +handed poles to top of the pile. +</p> + +<p> +Before morning came, they had built a kind of tower. It was higher than the +Indian mound. +</p> + +<p> +As soon as it was light, the men on Marion’s tower began to shoot. The +British looked out. They saw a great tower with men on it. The men could shoot +down into the fort. The British could not stand it. They had to give up. They +were taken prisoners. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap22"></a>CLARK AND HIS MEN.</h2> + +<p> +At the time of the Revolution there were but few people living on the north +side of the O-hi-o River. But there were many Indians there. These Indians +killed a great many white people in Ken-tuck-y. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were sent by British officers to do this killing. There was a +British fort at Vincennes in what is now In-di-an-a. There was another British +fort or post at Kas-kas-ki-a in what is now the State of Il-li-nois. +</p> + +<p> +George Rogers Clark was an American colonel. He wanted to stop the murder of +the settlers by the Indians. He thought that he could do it by taking the +British posts. +</p> + +<p> +He had three hundred men. They went down the O-hi-o River in boats. They landed +near the mouth of the O-hi-o River. Then they marched a hundred and thirty +miles to Kas-kas-ki-a. +</p> + +<p> +Kas-kas-ki-a was far away from the Americans. The people there did not think +that the Americans would come so far to attack them. When Clark got there, they +were all asleep. He marched in and took the town before they waked up. +</p> + +<p> +The people living in Kaskaskia were French. By treating them well, Clark made +them all friendly to the Americans. +</p> + +<p> +When the British at Vin-cennes heard that Clark had taken Kaskaskia, they +thought that they would take it back again. But it was winter. All the streams +were full of water. They could not march till spring. Then they would gather +the Indians to help them, and take Clark and his men. +</p> + +<p> +But Clark thought that he would not wait to be taken. He thought that he would +just go and take the British. If he could manage to get to Vin-cennes in the +winter, he would not be expected. +</p> + +<p> +Clark started with a hundred and seventy men. The country was nearly all +covered with water. The men were in the wet almost all the time. Clark had hard +work to keep his men cheerful. He did everything he could to amuse them. +</p> + +<p> +They had to wade through deep rivers. The water was icy cold. But Clark made a +joke of it. He kept them laughing whenever he could. +</p> + +<p> +At one place the men refused to go through the freezing water. Clark could not +per-suade them to cross the river. He called to him a tall sol-dier. He was the +very tallest man in Clark’s little army. Clark said to him, “Take +the little drummer boy on your shoulders.” +</p> + +<p> +The little drummer was soon seated high on the shoulders of the tall man. +“Now go ahead!” said Clark. +</p> + +<p> +The soldier marched into the water. The little drummer beat a march on his +drum. Clark cried out, “Forward!” Then he plunged into the water +after the tall soldier. All the men went in after him. They were soon safe on +the other side. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +At another river the little drummer was floated over on the top of his drum. At +last the men drew near to Vin-cennes. They could hear the morning and evening +gun in the British fort. But the worst of the way was yet to pass. The Wa-bash +River had risen over its banks. The water was five miles wide. The men marched +from one high ground to another through the cold water. They caught an Indian +with a canoe. In this they got across the main river. But there was more water +to cross. The men were so hungry that some of them fell down in the water. They +had to be carried out. +</p> + +<p> +Clark’s men got frightened at last, and then they had no heart to go any +farther. But Clark remembered what the Indians did when they went to war. He +took a little gun-powder in his hand. He poured water on it. Then he rubbed it +on his face. It made his face black. +</p> + +<p> +With his face blackened like an Indian’s, he gave an Indian war-whoop. +The men followed him again. +</p> + +<p> +The men were tired and hungry. But they soon reached dry ground. They were now +in sight of the fort. Clark marched his little army round and round in such a +way as to make it seem that he had many men with him. He wrote a fierce letter +to the British com-mand-er. He behaved like a general with a large army. +</p> + +<p> +After some fighting, the British com-mand-er gave up. Clark’s little army +took the British fort. This brave action saved to our country the land that +lies between the Ohio River and the Lakes. It stopped the sending of Indians to +kill the settlers in the West. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap23"></a>DANIEL BOONE AND HIS GRAPEVINE SWING.</h2> + +<p> +Daniel Boone was the first settler of Ken-tuck-y. He knew all about living in +the woods. He knew how to hunt the wild animals. He knew how to fight Indians, +and how to get away from them. +</p> + +<p> +Nearly all the men that came with him to Kentucky the first time were killed. +One was eaten by wolves. Some of them were killed by Indians. Some of them went +into the woods and never came back. Nobody knows what killed them. +</p> + +<p> +Only Boone and his brother were left alive. They needed some powder and some +bullets. They wanted some horses. Boone’s brother went back across the +mountains to get these things. Boone staid in his little cabin all alone. +</p> + +<p> +Boone could hear the wolves howl near his cabin at night. He heard the panthers +scream in the woods. But he did not mind being left all alone in these dark +forests. The Indians came to his cabin when he was away. He did not want to see +these vis-it-ors. He did not dare to sleep in his cabin all the time. Sometimes +he slept under a rocky cliff. Sometimes he slept in a cane-brake. A cane-brake +is a large patch of growing canes such as fishing rods are made of. +</p> + +<p> +Once a mother bear tried to kill him. He fired his gun at her, but the bullet +did not kill her. The bear ran at him. He held his long knife out in his hand. +The bear ran against it and was killed. +</p> + +<p> +He made long journeys alone in the woods. One day he looked back through the +trees and saw four Indians. They were fol-low-ing Boone’s tracks. They +did not see him. He turned this way and that. But the Indians still fol-lowed +his tracks. +</p> + +<p> +He went over a little hill. Here he found a wild grape-vine. It was a very long +vine, reaching to the top of a high tree. There are many such vines in the +Southern woods. Children cut such vines off near the roots. Then they use them +for swings. +</p> + +<p> +Boone had swung on grape-vines when he was a boy. He now thought of a way to +break his tracks. He cut the wild grape-vine off near the root. Then he took +hold of it. He sprang out into the air with all his might. The great swing +carried him far out as it swung. Then he let go. He fell to the ground, and +then he ran away in a dif-fer-ent di-rec-tion from that in which he had been +going. +</p> + +<p> +When the Indians came to the place, they could not find his tracks. They could +not tell which way he had gone. He got to his cabin in safety. +</p> + +<p> +Boone had now been alone for many months. His brother did not get back at the +time he had set for coming. Boone thought that his brother might have been +killed. Boone had not tasted anything but meat since he left home. He had to +get his food by shooting animals in the woods. By this time he had hardly any +powder or bullets left. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Boone on the Grapevine Swing] +</p> + +<p> +One evening he sat by his cabin. He heard some one coming. He thought that it +might be Indians. He heard the steps of horses. He looked through the trees. He +saw his brother riding on one horse, and leading another. The other horse was +loaded with powder and bullets and clothes, and other things that Boone needed. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap24"></a>DANIEL BOONE’S DAUGHTER AND HER FRIENDS.</h2> + +<p> +Daniel Boone and his brother picked out a good place in Ken-tuck-y to settle. +Then they went home to North Car-o-li-na. They took with them such things as +were cu-ri-ous and val-u-a-ble. These were the skins of animals they had +killed, and no doubt some of the heads and tails. +</p> + +<p> +Boone was restless. He had seen Kentucky and he did not wish to settle down to +the life of North Carolina. +</p> + +<p> +In two years Boone sold his farm in North Carolina and set out for Kentucky. He +took with him his wife and children and two brothers. Some of their neighbors +went with them. They trav-eled by pack train. All their goods were packed on +horses. +</p> + +<p> +When they reached the place on the Kentucky River that Boone had chosen for a +home they built a fort of log houses. These cabins all stood round a square. +The backs of the houses were outward. There was no door or window in the back +of a house. The outer walls were thus shut up. They made the place a fort. The +houses at the four corners were a little taller and stronger than the others. +There were gates leading into the fort. These gates were kept shut at night. +</p> + +<p> +In the evening the people danced and amused themselves in the square. Indians +could not creep up and attack them. +</p> + +<p> +When the men went out to feed the horses and cows they carried their guns. They +walked softly and turned their eyes quickly from point to point to see if +Indians were hiding near. They held their guns so they could shoot quickly. +</p> + +<p> +The women and children had to stay very near the fort so they could run in if +an Indian came in sight. +</p> + +<p> +Daniel Boone had a daughter named Je-mi-ma. She was about fourteen years old. +She had two friends named Frances and Betsey Cal-lo-way. Frances Galloway was +about the same age as Jemima. +</p> + +<p> +One summer afternoon these three girls went out of the fort. They went to the +river and got into a canoe. It was not far from the fort. They felt safe. They +laughed and talked and splashed the water with their paddles. +</p> + +<p> +The cur-rent carried them slowly near the other shore. They could still see the +fort. They did not think of danger. +</p> + +<p> +Trees and bushes grew thick down to the edge of the river. Five strong Indians +were hiding in the bushes. +</p> + +<p> +One Indian crept care-ful-ly through the bushes. He made no more noise than a +snake. When he got to the edge of the water he put out his long arm and caught +hold of the rope that hung down from the canoe. In a moment he had turned the +boat around and drawn it out of sight from the fort. The girls screamed when +they saw the Indian. Their friends heard them but could not cross the river to +help them. The girls had taken the only canoe. +</p> + +<p> +Boone and Cal-lo-way were both gone from the fort. They got home too late to +start that day. No sleep came to their eyes while they waited for light to +travel by. +</p> + +<p> +As soon as there was a glim-mer of light they and a party of their friends set +out. It was in July and they could start early. +</p> + +<p> +They crossed the river and easily found the Indians’ tracks where they +started. The brush was broken down there. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were cun-ning. They did not keep close together after they set out. +Each Indian walked by himself through the tall canes. Three of the Indians took +the captives. +</p> + +<p> +Boone and his friends tried in vain to follow them. Sometimes they would find a +track but it would soon be lost in the thick canes. +</p> + +<p> +Boone’s party gave up trying to find their path. They noticed which way +the Indians were going. Then they walked as fast as they could the same way for +thirty miles. They thought the Indians would grow careless about their tracks +after traveling so far. +</p> + +<p> +They turned so as to cross the path they thought the Indians had taken. They +looked carefully at the ground and at the bushes to see if any one had gone by. +</p> + +<p> +Before long they found the Indians’ tracks in a buffalo path. Buffaloes +and other animals go often to lick salt from the rocks round salt springs. They +beat down the brush and make great roads. These roads run to the salt springs. +The hunters call them streets. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians took one of these roads after they got far from the fort. They +could travel more easily in it. They did not take pains to hide their tracks. +</p> + +<p> +As fast as their feet could carry them, Boone and his friends traveled along +the trail. When they had gone about ten miles they saw the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians had stopped to rest and to eat. It was very warm and they had put +off their moc-ca-sins and laid down their arms. They were kindling a fire to +cook by. +</p> + +<p> +In a moment the Indians saw the white men. Boone and Galloway were afraid the +Indians would kill the girls. +</p> + +<p> +Four of the white men shot at the Indians. Then all rushed at them. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians ran away as fast as they could. They did not stop to pick up their +guns or knives or hatchets. They had no time to put on their moccasins. +</p> + +<p> +The poor worn-out girls were soon safe in their fathers’ arms. +</p> + +<p> +Back to Boones-bor-ough they went, not minding their tired feet. When they got +to the fort there was great joy to see them alive. +</p> + +<p> +I do not believe they ever played in the water again. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap25"></a>DECATUR AND THE PIRATES.</h2> + +<p> +Nearly a hundred years have passed since the ship +“Phil-a-del-phi-a” was burned. But the brave sailors who did it +will never be for-got-ten. +</p> + +<p> +The people of Trip-o-li in Af-ri-ca were pirates. They took the ships of other +nations at sea. They made slaves of their prisoners. The friends of these +slaves sometimes sent money to buy their freedom. Some countries paid money to +these pirates to let their ships go safe. +</p> + +<p> +Our country had trouble with the pirates. This trouble brought on a war. Our +ships were sent to fight against Trip-o-li. +</p> + +<p> +One of the ships fighting against the pirates was called the +“Phil-a-del-phi-a.” One day she was chasing a ship of Trip-o-li. +The “Phil-a-del-phi-a” ran on the rocks. The sailors could not get +her off. The pirates came and fought her as she lay on the rocks. They took her +men prisoners. Then they went to work to get her off. After a long time they +got her into deep water. They took her to Tripoli. Our ships could not go there +after her, because there were so many great cannons on the shore near the ship. +</p> + +<p> +The pirates got the “Philadelphia” ready to go to sea. They loaded +her cannons. They meant to slip out past our ships of war. Then they would take +a great many smaller American ships. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans laid a plan to burn the “Philadelphia.” It was a +very dan-ger-ous thing to try to do. The pirates had ships of war near the +“Philadelphia.” They had great guns on the shore. There was no way +to do it in the day-time. It could only be done by stealing into the Bay of +Tripoli at night. +</p> + +<p> +The Americans had taken a little vessel from the pirates. She was of the kind +that is called a ketch. She had sails. She also had long oars. When there was +no wind to sail with, the sailors could row her with the oars. +</p> + +<p> +This little ketch was sent one night to burn the “Philadelphia.” +The captain of this boat was Ste-phen De-ca-tur. He was a young man, and very +brave. +</p> + +<p> +De-ca-tur made his men lie down, so that the pirates would not know how many +men he had on his ketch. Only about ten men were in sight. The rest were lying +hidden on the boat. +</p> + +<p> +They came near to the “Philadelphia.” It was about ten +o’clock at night. The pirates called to them. The pilot of the ketch told +them that he was from Mal-ta. He told them that he had come to sell things to +the people of Tripoli. He said that the ketch had lost her anchor. He asked +them to let him tie her to the big ship till morning. +</p> + +<p> +The pirates sent out a rope to them. But when the ketch came nearer, the +pirates saw that they had been fooled. They cried out, “Americans, +Americans!” +</p> + +<p> +Then the Americans lying down took hold of the rope and pulled with all their +might, and drew the ketch close to the ship. They were so close, that the +ship’s cannons were over their heads. The pirates could not fire at them. +</p> + +<p> +The men who had been lying still now rose up. There were eighty of them. In a +minute they were scram-bling up the sides of the big ship. Some went in one +way, some another. They did not shoot. They fought with swords and pikes, or +short spears. +</p> + +<p> +Soon they drove the pirates to one side of the ship. Then they could hear the +pirates jumping over into the water. In a few minutes the pirates had all gone. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans could not stay long. They must burn the ship before the +pirates on the shore should find out what they were doing. +</p> + +<p> +They had brought a lot of kin-dling on the ketch. They built fires in all parts +of the ship. The fire ran so fast, that some of the men had trouble to get off +the ship. +</p> + +<p> +When the Americans got back on the ketch, they could not untie the rope that +held the ketch to the ship. The big ship was bursting into flames. The ketch +would soon take fire. +</p> + +<p> +They took swords and hacked the big rope in two. Then they pushed hard to get +away from the fire. The ketch began to move. The sailors took the large oars +and rowed. They were soon safe from the fire. +</p> + +<p> +All this they had done without any noise. But, now that they had got away, they +looked back. The fire was shooting up toward the sky. The men stopped rowing, +and they gave three cheers. They were so glad, that they could not help it. +</p> + +<p> +By this time the pirates on shore had waked up. They began to fire great cannon +balls at the little ketch. One of the balls went through her sails. Ah! how the +sailors rowed! +</p> + +<p> +The whole sky was now lighted up by the fire. The pirates’ cannons were +thundering. The cannon balls were splashing the water all round the ketch. But +the Americans got away. At last they were safe in their own ships. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap26"></a>STORIES ABOUT JEFFERSON.</h2> + +<p> +Thomas Jef-fer-son was one of the great men of the Revolution. He was not a +soldier. He was not a great speaker. But he was a great thinker. And he was a +great writer. +</p> + +<p> +He wrote a paper that was the very beginning of the United States. It was a +paper that said that we would be free from England, and be a coun-try by +our-selves. We call that paper the Dec-la-ra-tion of In-de-pend-ence. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a boy, Jef-fer-son was fond of boyish plays. But when he was tired +of play, he took up a book. It pleased him to learn things. From the time when +he was a boy he never sat down to rest without a book. +</p> + +<p> +At school he learned what other boys did. But the dif-fer-ence between him and +most other boys was this: he did not stop with knowing just what the other boys +knew. Most boys want to learn what other boys learn. Most girls would like to +know what their school-mates know. But Jef-fer-son wanted to know a great deal +more. +</p> + +<p> +As a young man, Jefferson knew Latin and Greek. He also knew French and +Span-ish and I-tal-ian. +</p> + +<p> +He did not talk to show off what he knew. He tried to learn what other people +knew. When he talked to a wagon maker, he asked him about such things as a +wagon maker knows most about. He would sometimes ask how a wagon maker would go +to work to make a wheel. +</p> + +<p> +When Jefferson talked to a learn-ed man, he asked him about those things that +this man knew most about. When he talked with Indians, he got them to tell him +about their lan-guage. That is the way he came to know so much about so many +things. Whenever anybody told him anything worth while, he wrote it down as +soon as he could. +</p> + +<p> +One day Jefferson was trav-el-ing. He went on horse-back. That was a common way +of trav-el-ing at that time. He stopped at a country tavern. At this tavern he +talked with a stranger who was staying there. +</p> + +<p> +After a while Jefferson rode away. Then the stranger said to the land-lord, +“Who is that man? He knew so much about law, that I was sure he was a +lawyer. But when we talked about med-i-cine, he knew so much about that, that I +thought he must be a doctor. And after a while he seemed to know so much about +re-li-gion, that I was sure he was a min-is-ter. Who is he?” +</p> + +<p> +The stranger was very much surprised to hear that the man he had talked with +was Thomas Jefferson. +</p> + +<p> +Jefferson was a very polite man. One day his grand-son was riding with him. +They met a negro. The negro lifted his cap and bowed. Jefferson bowed to the +negro. But his grand-son did not think it worth while to bow. +</p> + +<p> +Then Jefferson said to his grand-son, “Do not let a poor negro be more of +a gen-tle-man than you are.” In the Dec-la-ra-tion of In-de-pend-ence, +Jefferson wrote these words: “All men are created equal.” He also +said that the poor man had the same right as the rich man to live, and to be +free, and to try to make himself happy. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap27"></a>A LONG JOURNEY.</h2> + +<p> +A long time ago, when Thomas Jefferson was Pres-i-dent, most of the people in +this country lived in the East. Nobody knew anything about the Far West. The +only people that lived there were Indians. Many of these Indians had never seen +a white man. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: An Elk] +</p> + +<p> +The Pres-i-dent sent men to travel into this wild part of the country. He told +them to go up to the upper end of the Mis-sou-ri River. Then they were to go +across the Rocky Mountains. They were to keep on till they got to the Pa-cif-ic +O-cean. Then they were to come back again. They were to find out the best way +to get through the mountains. And they were to find out what kind of people the +Indians in that country were. They were also to tell about the animals. +</p> + +<p> +There were two captains of this company. Their names were Lewis and Clark. +There were forty-five men in the party. +</p> + +<p> +They were gone two years and four months. For most of that time they did not +see any white men but their own party. They did not hear a word from home for +more than two years. +</p> + +<p> +They got their food mostly by hunting. They killed a great many buf-fa-loes and +elks and deer. They also shot wild geese and other large birds. Sometimes they +had nothing but fish to eat. Sometimes they had to eat wolves. When they had no +other meat, they were glad to buy dogs from the Indians and eat them. Sometimes +they ate horses. They became fond of the meat of dogs and horses. +</p> + +<p> +When they were very hungry, they had to live on roots if they could get them. +Some of the Indians made a kind of bread out of roots. The white men bought +this when they could not get meat. But there were days when they did not have +anything to eat. +</p> + +<p> +They were very friendly with the Indians. One day some of the men went to make +a visit to an Indian village. The Indians gave them something to eat. +</p> + +<p> +In the Indian wig-wam where they were, there was a head of a dead buffalo. When +dinner was over, the Indians filled a bowl full of meat. They set this down in +front of the head. Then they said to the head, “Eat that.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Feeding the Spirit of the Buffalo.] +</p> + +<p> +The Indians believed, that, if they treated this buffalo head politely, the +live buffaloes would come to their hunting ground. Then they would have plenty +of meat. They think the spirit of the buffalo is a kind of a god. They are very +careful to please this god. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap28"></a>CAPTAIN CLARK’S BURNING GLASS.</h2> + +<p> +The Indians among whom Captain Clark and Captain Lewis traveled had many +strange ways of doing things. They had nothing like our matches for making +fire. One tribe of Indians had this way of lighting a fire. An Indian would lay +down a dry stick. He would rub this stick with the end of another stick. After +a while this rubbing would make something like saw-dust on the stick that was +lying down. The Indian would keep on rubbing till the wood grew hot. Then the +fine wood dust would smoke. Then it would burn. The Indian would put a little +kin-dling wood on it. Soon he would have a large fire. +</p> + +<p> +In that time the white people had not yet found out how to make matches. They +lighted a fire by striking a piece of flint against a piece of steel. This +would make a spark of fire. By letting this spark fall on something that would +burn easily, they started a fire. +</p> + +<p> +White men had another way of lighting a fire when the sun was shining. They +used what was called a burning glass. This was a round piece of glass. It was +thick in the middle, and thin at the edge. When you held up a burning glass in +the sun, it drew the sun’s heat so as to make a little hot spot. If you +put paper under this spot of hot sunshine, it would burn. Men could light the +to-bac-co in their pipes with one of these glasses. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Clark had something funny happen to him on account of his burning +glass. He had walked ahead of the rest of his men. He sat down on a rock. There +were some Indians on the other side of the river. They did not see the captain. +Captain Clark saw a large bird called a crane flying over his head. He raised +his gun and shot it. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Cranes] +</p> + +<p> +The Indians on the other side of the river had never seen a white man in their +lives. They had never heard a gun. They used bows and arrows. +</p> + +<p> +They heard the sound of Clark’s gun. They looked up and saw the large +bird falling from the sky. It fell close to where Captain Clark sat. Just as it +fell they caught sight of Captain Clark sitting on the rocks. They thought they +had seen him fall out of the sky. They thought that the sound of his gun was a +sound like thunder that was made when he came down. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians all ran away as fast as they could. They went into their wig-warns +and closed them. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Clark wished to be friendly with them. So he got a canoe and paddled to +the other side of the river. He came to the Indian houses. He found the flaps +which they use for doors shut. He opened one of them and went in. The Indians +were sitting down, and they were all crying and trembling. +</p> + +<p> +Among the Indians the sign of peace is to smoke to-geth-er. Captain Clark held +out his pipe to them. That was to say, “I am your friend.” He shook +hands with them and gave some of them presents. Then they were not so much +afraid. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Lighting a Pipe with a Burning Glass.] +</p> + +<p> +He wished to light his pipe for them to smoke. So he took out his burning +glass. He held it in the sun. He held his pipe under it. The sunshine was drawn +together into a bright little spot on the tobacco. Soon the pipe began to +smoke. +</p> + +<p> +Then he held out his pipe for the Indians to smoke with him. That is their way +of making friends. But none of the Indians would touch the pipe. They thought +that he had brought fire down from heaven to light his pipe. They were now sure +that he fell down from the sky. They were more afraid of him than ever. +</p> + +<p> +At last Captain Clark’s Indian man came. He told the other Indians that +the white man did not come out of the sky. Then they smoked the pipe, and were +not afraid. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap29"></a>QUICKSILVER BOB.</h2> + +<p> +Robert Fulton was the man who set steam-boats to running on the rivers. Other +men had made such boats before. But Fulton made the first good one. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a boy, he lived in the town of Lan-cas-ter in Penn-syl-van-ia. Many +guns were made in Lancaster. The men who made these guns put little pictures on +them. That was to make them sell to the hunters who liked a gun with pictures. +Little Robert Fulton could draw very well for a boy. He made some pretty little +drawings. These the gun makers put on their guns. +</p> + +<p> +Fulton went to the gun shops a great deal. He liked to see how things were +made. He tried to make a small air gun for himself. +</p> + +<p> +He was always trying to make things. He got some quick-sil-ver. He was trying +to do something with it. But he would not tell what he wanted to do. So the +gun-smiths called him Quick-sil-ver Bob. +</p> + +<p> +He was so much in-ter-est-ed in such things, that he sometimes neg-lect-ed his +lessons. He said that his head was so full of new notions, that he had not much +room left for school learning. +</p> + +<p> +One morning he came to school late. +</p> + +<p> +“What makes you so late?” asked the teacher. +</p> + +<p> +“I went to one of the shops to make myself a lead pencil,” said +little Bob. “Here it is. It is the best one I ever had.” +</p> + +<p> +The teacher tried it, and found it very good. Lead pencils in that day were +made of a long piece of lead sharpened at the end. +</p> + +<p> +Quick-sil-ver Bob was a very odd little boy. He said many cu-ri-ous things. +Once the teacher punished him for not getting his lessons. He rapped Robert on +the knuckles with a fer-ule. Robert did not like this any more than any other +boy would. +</p> + +<p> +“Sir,” said the boy, “I came here to have something beaten +into my head, not into my knuckles.” +</p> + +<p> +In that day people used to light candles and stand them in the window on the +Fourth of July. These candles in every window lighted up the whole town. But +one year candles were scarce and high. The city asked the people not to light +up their windows on the Fourth. +</p> + +<p> +Bob did not like to miss the fun of his Fourth of July. He went to work to make +something like rockets or Roman candles. It was a very dan-ger-ous business for +a boy. +</p> + +<p> +“What are you doing, Bob?” some one asked him. +</p> + +<p> +“The city does not want us to burn our candles on the Fourth,” he +said. “I am going to shoot mine into the air.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +He used to go fishing with a boy named Chris Gumpf. The father of Chris went +with them. They fished from a flat boat. The two boys had to push the boat to +the fishing place with poles. +</p> + +<p> +“I am tired of poling that boat,” said Robert to Chris one day when +they came home. +</p> + +<p> +So he set to work to think out a plan to move the boat in an easier way than by +poles. He whittled out the model of a tiny paddle wheel. Then he went to work +with Chris Gumpf, and they made a larger paddle wheel. This they set up in the +fishing boat. The wheel was turned by the boys with a crank. They did not use +the poles any more. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap30"></a>THE FIRST STEAMBOAT.</h2> + +<p> +The first good steam-boat was built in New York. She was built by Robert +Fulton. Her name was “Clermont.” When the people saw her, they +laughed. They said that such a boat would never go. For thousands of years +boat-men had made their boats go by using sails and oars. People had never seen +any such boat as this. It seemed foolish to believe that a boat could be pushed +along by steam. +</p> + +<p> +The time came for Fulton to start his boat. A crowd of people were standing on +the shore. The black smoke was coming out of the smoke-stack. The people were +laughing at the boat. They were sure that it would not go. At last the +boat’s wheels began to turn round. Then the boat began to move. There +were no oars. There were no sails. But still the boat kept moving. Faster and +faster she went. All the people now saw that she could go by steam. They did +not laugh any more. They began to cheer. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Seeing the First Steam boat] +</p> + +<p> +The little steam-boat ran up to Al-ba-ny. The people who lived on the river did +not know what to make of it. They had never heard of a steam-boat. They could +not see what made the boat go. +</p> + +<p> +There were many sailing vessels on the river. Fulton’s boat passed some +of these in the night. The sailors were afraid when they saw the fire and +smoke. The sound of the steam seemed dreadful to them. Some of them went +down-stairs in their ships for fear. Some of them went ashore. Perhaps they +thought it was a living animal that would eat them up. +</p> + +<p> +But soon there were steam-boats on all the large rivers. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap31"></a>WASHINGTON IRVING AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +The Revolution was about over. Americans were very happy. Their country was to +be free. +</p> + +<p> +At this time a little boy was born in New York. His family was named Ir-ving. +What should this little boy be named? +</p> + +<p> +His mother said, “Washington’s work is done. Let us name the baby +Washington.” So he was called Washington Ir-ving. +</p> + +<p> +When this baby grew to be a little boy, he was one day walking with his nurse. +The nurse was a Scotch girl. She saw General Washington go into a shop. She led +the little boy into the shop also. +</p> + +<p> +The nurse said to General Washington, “Please, your Honor, here is a +bairn that is named for you.” +</p> + +<p> +“Bairn” is a Scotch word for child. Washington put his hand on the +little boy’s head and gave him his blessing. When Irving became an +author, he wrote a life of Washington. +</p> + +<p> +Little Irving was a merry, playful boy. He was full of mischief. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes he would climb out of a window to the roof of his father’s +house. From this he would go to roofs of other houses. Then the little rascal +would drop a pebble down a neighbor’s chimney. Then he would hurry back +and get into the window again. He would wonder what the people thought when the +pebble came rattling down their chimney. Of course he was punished when his +tricks were found out. But he was a favorite with his teacher. With all his +faults, he would not tell a lie. The teacher called the little fellow +“General.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Irving in Mischief.] +</p> + +<p> +In those days naughty school-boys were whipped. Irving could not bear to see +another boy suffer. When a boy was to be whipped, the girls were sent out. +Irving always asked the schoolmaster to let him go out with the girls. +</p> + +<p> +Like other boys, Irving was fond of stories. He liked to read about Sind-bad +the Sailor, and Rob-in-son Cru-soe. But most of all he liked to read about +other countries. He had twenty small volumes called “The World +Dis-played.” They told about the people and countries of the world. +Irving read these little books a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +One day the schoolmaster caught him reading in school. The master slipped +behind him and grabbed the book. Then he told Irving to stay after school. +</p> + +<p> +Irving expected a pun-ish-ment. But the master told him he was pleased to find +that he liked to read such good books. He told him not to read them in school. +</p> + +<p> +Reading about other countries made Irving wish to see them. He thought he would +like to travel. Like other wild boys, he thought of running away. He wanted to +go to sea. +</p> + +<p> +But he knew that sailors had to eat salt pork. He did not like salt pork. He +thought he would learn to like it. When he got a chance, he ate pork. And +sometimes he would sleep all night on the floor. He wanted to get used to a +hard bed. +</p> + +<p> +But the more he ate pork, the more he disliked it. And the more he slept on the +floor, the more he liked a good bed. So he gave up his foolish notion of being +a sailor boy. +</p> + +<p> +Some day you will read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” You will find +some famous stories in it. There is the story of Rip Van Win-kle, who slept +twenty years. And there is the funny story of the Head-less Horse-man. When you +read these a-mus-ing stories, you will remember the playful boy who became a +great author. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Rip Van Winkle wakes up] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap32"></a>DON’T GIVE UP THE SHIP.</h2> + +<p> +Fred was talking to his sister one day. He said,— +</p> + +<p> +“Alice, what makes people say, ‘Don’t give up the +ship’?” +</p> + +<p> +Alice said, “I don’t know. That’s what the teacher said to me +yes-ter-day when I thought that I could not get my lesson.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Fred, “and that’s what father said to me. I +told him I never could learn to write well.” He only said, “You +must not give up the ship, my boy.” +</p> + +<p> +“I haven’t any ship to give up,” said Alice. +</p> + +<p> +“And what has a ship to do with my writing?” said Fred. +</p> + +<p> +“There must be some story about a ship,” Alice said. +</p> + +<p> +“Maybe grand-father would know,” said Fred. “Let’s ask +him.” +</p> + +<p> +They found their grand-father writing in the next room. They did not wish to +disturb him. They turned to leave the room. +</p> + +<p> +But grand-father looked up just then. He smiled, and laid down his pen. +</p> + +<p> +“Did you want something?” he asked. “We wanted to ask you a +question,” said Alice. “We want to know why people say, +‘Don’t give up the ship.’” +</p> + +<p> +“We thought maybe there is a story to it,” said Fred. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, there is,” said their grandfather. “And I know a little +rhyme that tells the story.” +</p> + +<p> +“Could you say it to us?” asked Alice. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, if I can think of it. Let me see. How does it begin?” +</p> + +<p> +Grandfather leaned his head back in the chair. He shut his eyes for a moment. +He was trying to remember. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, now I remember it!” he said. +</p> + +<p> +Then he said to them these little verses:— +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap33"></a>GRANDFATHER’S RHYME.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +When I was but a boy,<br/> + I heard the people tell<br/> +How gallant Captain Law-rence<br/> + So bravely fought and fell.<br/> +<br/> +The ships lay close together,<br/> + I heard the people say,<br/> +And many guns were roaring<br/> + Upon that battle day.<br/> +<br/> +A grape-shot struck the captain,<br/> + He laid him down to die:<br/> +They say the smoke of powder<br/> + Made dark the sea and sky.<br/> +<br/> +The sailors heard a whisper<br/> + Upon the captain’s lip:<br/> +The last command of Law-rence<br/> + Was, “Don’t give up the ship.”<br/> +<br/> +And ever since that battle<br/> + The people like to tell<br/> +How gallant Captain Lawrence<br/> + So bravely fought and fell.<br/> +<br/> +When disappointment happens,<br/> + And fear your heart annoys,<br/> +Be brave, like Captain Lawrence—<br/> + And don’t give up, my boys! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap34"></a>THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER.</h2> + +<p> +Everybody in the United States has heard the song about the star-span-gled +banner. Nearly everybody has sung it. It was written by Francis Scott Key. +</p> + +<p> +Key was a young lawyer. In the War of 1812 he fought with the American army. +The British landed soldiers in Mary-land. At Bla-dens-burg they fought and beat +the Americans. Key was in this battle on the American side. +</p> + +<p> +After the battle the British army took Washington, and burned the public +buildings. Key had a friend who was taken prisoner by the British. He was on +one of the British ships. Key went to the ships with a flag of truce. A flag of +truce is a white flag. It is carried in war when one side sends a message to +the other. +</p> + +<p> +When Key got to the British ships, they were sailing to Bal-ti-more. They were +going to try to take Bal-ti-more. The British com-mand-er would not let Key go +back. He was afraid that he would let the Americans know where the ships were +going. +</p> + +<p> +Key was kept a kind of prisoner while the ships attacked Bal-ti-more. The ships +tried to take the city by firing at it from the water. The British army tried +to take the city on the land side. +</p> + +<p> +The ships did their worst firing at night. They tried to take the little fort +near the city. +</p> + +<p> +Key could see the battle. He watched the little fort. He was afraid that the +men in it would give up. He was afraid that the fort would be broken down by +the cannon balls. +</p> + +<p> +The British fired bomb-shells and rockets at the fort. When these burst, they +made a light. By this light Key could see that the little fort was still +standing. He could see the flag still waving over it. He tells this in his song +in these words:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“And the rocket’s red glare, the bombs bursting in air<br/> +Gave proof through the night that our flag was still there.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +But after many hours of fighting the British became dis-cour-aged. They found +that they could not take the city. The ships almost ceased to fire. +</p> + +<p> +Key did not know whether the fort had been knocked down or not. He could not +see whether the flag was still flying or not. He thought that the Americans +might have given up. He felt what he wrote in the song:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Oh! say, does that star-span-gled banner yet wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave?” +</p> + +<p> +When the break of day came, Key looked toward the fort. It was still standing. +There was a flag flying over it. It grew lighter. He could see that it was the +American flag. His feelings are told in two lines of the song:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“’Tis the star spangled banner, oh, long may it wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave!” +</p> + +<p> +Key was full of joy. He took an old letter from his pocket. The back of this +letter had no writing on it. Here he wrote the song about the star-spangled +banner. +</p> + +<p> +The British com-mand-er now let Key go ashore. When he got to Baltimore, he +wrote out his song. He gave it to a friend. This friend took it to a printing +office. But the printers had all turned soldiers. They had all gone to defend +the city. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +There was one boy left in the office. He knew how to print. He took the verses +and printed them on a broad sheet of paper. +</p> + +<p> +The printed song was soon in the hands of the soldiers around Baltimore. It was +sung in the streets. It was sung in the the-a-ters. It traveled all over the +country. Everybody learned to sing:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just;<br/> +And this be our motto—‘In God is our trust’—<br/> +And the star-span-gled banner in triumph shall wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap35"></a>HOW AUDUBON CAME TO KNOW ABOUT BIRDS.</h2> + +<p> +John James Au-du-bon knew more about the birds of this country than any man had +ever known before. He was born in the State of Lou-is-i-a-na. His father took +him to France when he was a boy. He went to school in France. +</p> + +<p> +The little John James was fond of stud-y-ing about wild animals. But most of +all he wished to know about birds. Seeing that the boy liked such things, his +father took pains to get birds and flowers for him. +</p> + +<p> +While he was yet a boy at school, he began to gather birds and other animals +for himself. He learned to skin and stuff them. But his stuffed birds did not +please him. Their feathers did not look bright, like those of live birds. He +wanted living birds to study. +</p> + +<p> +His father told him that he could not keep so many birds alive. To please the +boy he got him a book with pictures in it. Looking at these pictures made John +James wish to draw. He thought that he could make pictures that would look like +the live birds. +</p> + +<p> +But when he tried to paint a picture of a bird, it looked worse than his +stuffed birds. The birds he drew were not much like real birds. He called them +a “family of cripples.” As often as his birthday came round, he +made a bon-fire of his bad pictures. Then he would begin over again. +</p> + +<p> +All this time he was learning to draw birds. But he was not willing to make +pictures that were not just like the real birds. So when he grew to be a man he +went to a great French painter whose name was David. David taught him to draw +and paint things as they are. +</p> + +<p> +Then he came back to this country, and lived awhile in Pennsylvania. Here his +chief study was the wild creatures of the woods. +</p> + +<p> +He gathered many eggs of birds. He made pictures of these eggs. He did not take +birds’ eggs to break up the nests. He was not cruel. He took only what he +needed to study. +</p> + +<p> +He would make two little holes in each egg. Then he would shake the egg, or +stir it up with a little stick or straw, or a long pin. This would break up the +inside of the egg. Then he would blow into one of the holes. That would blow +the inside of the egg out through the other hole. +</p> + +<p> +These egg shells he strung together by running strings through the holes. He +hung these strings of egg shells all over the walls of his room. On the +man-tel-piece he put the stuffed skins of squirrels, raccoons, o-pos-sums, and +other small animals. On the shelves his friends could see frogs, snakes, and +other animals. +</p> + +<p> +He married a young lady, and brought her to live in this mu-se-um with his dead +snakes, frogs, and strings of birds’ eggs. She liked what he did, and was +sure that he would come to be a great man. +</p> + +<p> +He made up his mind to write a great book about American birds. He meant to +tell all about the birds in one book. Then in another book he would print +pictures of the birds, just as large as the birds them-selves. He meant to have +them look just like the birds. +</p> + +<p> +To do this he must travel many thousands of miles. He must live for years +almost all of the time in the woods. He would have to find and shoot the birds, +in order to make pictures of them. And he must see how the birds lived, and how +they built their nests, so that he could tell all about them. It would take a +great deal of work and trouble. But he was not afraid of trouble. +</p> + +<p> +That was many years ago. Much of our country was then covered with great trees. +Au-du-bon sometimes went in a boat down a lone-some river. Sometimes he rode on +horse-back. Often he had to travel on foot through woods where there were no +roads. Many a time he had to sleep out of doors. +</p> + +<p> +He lost his money and became poor. Sometimes he had to paint portraits to get +money to live on. Once he turned dancing master for a while. But he did not +give up his great idea. He still studied birds, and worked to make his books +about American birds. His wife went to teaching to help make a living. +</p> + +<p> +After years of hard work, he made paintings of nearly a thousand birds. That +was almost enough for his books. But, while he was traveling, two large rats +got into the box in which he kept his pictures. They cut up all his paintings +with their teeth, and made a nest of the pieces. This almost broke his heart +for a while. For many nights he could not sleep, because he had lost all his +work. +</p> + +<p> +But he did not give up. After some days he took his gun, and went into the +woods. He said to himself, “I will begin over again. I can make better +paintings than those that the rats spoiled.” But it took him four long +years and a half to find the birds, and make the pictures again. +</p> + +<p> +He was so careful to have his drawings just like the birds, that he would +measure them in every way. Thus he made his pictures just the size of the birds +themselves. +</p> + +<p> +At last the great books were printed. In this country, in France, and in +England, people praised the won-der-ful books. They knew that Au-du-bon was +indeed a great man. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap36"></a>AUDUBON IN THE WILD WOODS.</h2> + +<p> +When Au-du-bon was making his great book about birds, he had to live much in +the woods. Sometimes he lived among the Indians. He once saw an Indian go into +a hollow tree. There was a bear in the tree. The Indian had a knife in his +hand. He fought with the bear in the tree, and killed it. +</p> + +<p> +Au-du-bon could shoot very well. A friend of his one day threw up his cap in +the air. He told Au-du-bon to shoot at it. When the cap came down, it had a +hole in it. +</p> + +<p> +But the hunters who lived in the woods could shoot better. They would light a +candle. Then one of the hunters would take his gun, and go a hundred steps away +from the candle. He would then shoot at the candle. He would shoot so as to +snuff it. He would not put out the candle. He would only cut off a bit of the +wick with the bullet. But he would leave the candle burning. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Snuffing the Candle.] +</p> + +<p> +Once Audubon came near being killed by some robbers. He stopped at a cabin +where lived an old white woman. He found a young Indian in the house. The +Indian had hurt himself with an arrow. He had come to the house to spend the +night. +</p> + +<p> +The old woman saw Audubon’s fine gold watch. She asked him to let her +look at it. He put it into her hands for a minute. Then the Indian passed by +Audubon, and pinched him two or three times. That was to let him know that the +woman was bad, and that she might rob him. +</p> + +<p> +Audubon went and lay down with his hand on his gun. After a while two men came +in. They were the sons of the old woman. Then the old woman sharpened a large +knife. She told the young men to kill the Indian first, and then to kill +Audubon and take his watch. She thought that Audubon was asleep. But he drew up +his gun ready to fire. +</p> + +<p> +Just then two hunters came to the cabin. Audubon told them what the robbers +were going to do. They took the old woman and her sons, and tied their hands +and feet. The Indian, though he was in pain from his hurt, danced for joy when +he saw that the robbers were caught. The woman and her sons were afterward +punished. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap37"></a>HUNTING A PANTHER.</h2> + +<p> +Audubon was traveling in the woods in Mis-sis-sip-pi. He found the little cabin +of a settler. He staid there for the night. The settler told him that there was +a panther in the swamp near his house. A panther is a very large and fierce +animal. It is large enough to kill a man. This was a very bad panther. It had +killed some of the settler’s dogs. +</p> + +<p> +Audubon said, “Let us hunt this panther, and kill it.” +</p> + +<p> +So the settler sent out for his neigh-bors to come and help kill the panther. +Five men came. Audubon and the settler made seven. They were all on horse-back. +</p> + +<p> +When they came to the edge of the swamp, each man went a dif-fer-ent way. They +each took their dogs with them to find the track of the wild beast. All of the +hunters carried horns. Who-ever should find the track first was to blow his +horn to let the others know. +</p> + +<p> +In about two hours after they had started, they heard the sound of a horn. It +told them that the track had been found. Every man now went toward the sound of +the horn. Soon all the yelping dogs were fol-low-ing the track of the fierce +panther. The panther was running into the swamp farther and farther. +</p> + +<p> +I suppose that the panther thought that there were too many dogs and men for +him to fight. All the hunters came after the dogs. They held their guns ready +to shoot if the panther should make up his mind to fight them. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the sound of the dogs’ voices changed. The hunters knew +from this that the panther had stopped running, and gone up into a tree. +</p> + +<p> +At last the men came to the place where the dogs were. They were all barking +round a tree. Far up in the tree was the dan-ger-ous beast. The hunters came up +care-ful-ly. One of them fired. The bullet hit the panther, but did not kill +him. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +The panther sprang to the ground, and ran off again. The dogs ran after. The +men got on their horses, and rode after. +</p> + +<p> +But the horses were tired, and the men had to get down, and follow the dogs on +foot. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters now had to wade through little ponds of water. Sometimes they had +to climb over fallen trees. Their clothes were badly torn by the bushes. After +two hours more, they came to a place where the panther had again gone up into a +tree. +</p> + +<p> +This time three of the hunters shot at him. The fierce panther came tumbling to +the ground. But he was still able to fight. The men fought the savage beast on +all sides. At last they killed him. Then they gave his skin to the settler. +They wanted him to know that his en-e-my was dead. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap38"></a>SOME BOYS WHO BECAME AUTHORS.</h2> + +<p> +Wil-liam Cul-len Bry-ant was the first great poet in this country. He was a +small man. When he was a baby, his head was too big for his body. His father +used to send the baby to be dipped in a cold spring every day. The father +thought that putting his head into cold water would keep it from growing. +</p> + +<p> +Bry-ant knew his letters before he was a year and a half old. He began to write +rhymes when he was a very little fellow. He wanted to be a poet. He used to +pray that he might be a poet. His father printed some verses of his when he was +only ten years old. +</p> + +<p> +Bry-ant wrote many fine poems. Here are some lines of his about the bird we +call a bob-o-link:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +Rob-ert of Lin-coln is gayly dressed,<br/> + Wearing a bright black wedding coat,<br/> +White are his shoulders and white his crest.<br/> + Hear him call in his merry note:<br/> + Bob-o’-link, bob-o’-link,<br/> + Spink, spank, spink;<br/> +Look, what a nice new coat is mine,<br/> +Sure there was never a bird so fine.<br/> + Chee, chee, chee. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Haw-thorne was one of our greatest writers of stories. He was a pretty boy with +golden curls. He was fond of all the great poets, and he read Shake-speare and +Mil-ton and many other poets as soon as he was old enough to un-der-stand them. +</p> + +<p> +Haw-thorne grew up a very hand-some young fellow. One day he was walking in the +woods. He met an old gypsy woman. She had never seen anybody so fine-looking. +</p> + +<p> +“Are you a man, or an angel?” she asked him. +</p> + +<p> +Some of Haw-thorne’s best books are written for girls and boys. One of +these is called “The Won-der Book.” Another of his books for young +people is “Tan-gle-wood Tales.” +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p> +Pres-cott wrote beautiful his-to-ries. When Pres-cott was a boy, a school-mate +threw a crust of bread at him. It hit him in the eye. He became almost blind. +</p> + +<p> +He had to do his writing with a machine. This machine was made for the use of +the blind. There were no type-writ-ers in those days. +</p> + +<p> +It was hard work to write his-to-ry without good eyes. But Pres-cott did not +give up. He had a man to read to him. It took him ten years to write his first +book. +</p> + +<p> +When Prescott had finished his book, he was afraid to print it. But his father +said, “The man who writes a book, and is afraid to print it, is a +cow-ard.” +</p> + +<p> +Then Prescott printed his book. Everybody praised it. When you are older, you +will like to read his his-to-ries. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Holmes, the poet, was a boy full of fancies. He lived in an old house. +Soldiers had staid in the house at the time of the Revolution. The floor of one +room was all battered by the butts of the soldiers’ muskets. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Little Ol-i-ver Holmes used to think he could hear soldiers in the house. He +thought he could hear their spurs rattling in the dark passages. Sometimes he +thought he could hear their swords clanking. +</p> + +<p> +The little boy was afraid of a sign that hung over the sidewalk. It was a +great, big, wooden hand. It was the sign of a place where gloves were made. +This big hand swung in the air. Little Ol-i-ver Holmes had to walk under it on +his way to school. He thought the great fingers would grab him some day. Then +he thought he would never get home again. He even thought that his other pair +of shoes would be put away till his little brother grew big enough to wear +them. +</p> + +<p> +But the big wooden hand never caught him. +</p> + +<p> +Here are some verses that Doctor Holmes wrote about a very old man:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“My grand-mam-ma has said—<br/> +Poor old lady, she is dead<br/> + Long ago—<br/> +That he had a Roman nose,<br/> +And his cheek was like a rose<br/> + In the snow.<br/> +<br/> +“But now his nose is thin,<br/> +And it rests upon his chin<br/> + Like a staff;<br/> +And a crook is in his back,<br/> +And a mel-an-chol-y crack<br/> + In his laugh.<br/> +<br/> +“I know it is a sin<br/> +For me to sit and grin<br/> + At him here;<br/> +But the old three-cor-nered hat,<br/> +And the breeches, and all that,<br/> + Are so queer!<br/> +<br/> +“And if I should live to be<br/> +The last leaf upon the tree<br/> + In the spring,<br/> +Let them smile, as I do now,<br/> +At the old for-sak-en bough<br/> + Where I cling.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap39"></a>DANIEL WEBSTER AND HIS BROTHER.</h2> + +<p> +Dan-iel Web-ster was a great states-man. As a little boy he was called +“Little Black Dan.” When he grew larger, he was thin and +sickly-looking. But he had large, dark eyes. People called him “All +Eyes.” +</p> + +<p> +He was very fond of his brother E-ze-ki-el. E-ze-ki-el was a little older than +Dan-iel. Both the boys had fine minds. They wanted to go to college. But their +father was poor. +</p> + +<p> +Dan-iel had not much strength for work on the farm. So little “All +Eyes” was sent to school, and then to college. E-ze-ki-el staid at home, +and worked on the farm. +</p> + +<p> +While Daniel was at school, he was unhappy to think that Ezekiel could not go +to college also. He went home on a visit. He talked to Ezekiel about going to +college. The brothers talked about it all night. The next day Daniel talked to +his father about it. The father said he was too poor to send both of his sons +to college. He said he would lose all his little property if he tried to send +Ezekiel to college. But he said, that, if their mother and sisters were willing +to be poor, he would send the other son to college. +</p> + +<p> +So the mother and sisters were asked. It seemed hard to risk the loss of all +they had. It seemed hard not to give Ezekiel a chance. They all shed tears over +it. +</p> + +<p> +The boys promised to take care of their mother and sisters if the property +should be lost. Then they all agreed that Ezekiel should go to college too. +</p> + +<p> +Daniel taught school while he was studying. That helped to pay the expenses. +After Daniel was through his studies in college, he taught a school in order to +help his brother. When his school closed, he went home. On his way he went +round to the college to see his brother. Finding that Ezekiel needed money, he +gave him a hundred dollars. He kept but three dollars to get home with. +</p> + +<p> +The father’s property was not sold. The two boys helped the family. +Daniel soon began to make money as a lawyer. He knew that his father was in +debt. He went home to see him. He said, “Father, I am going to pay your +debts.” +</p> + +<p> +The father said, “You cannot do it, Daniel. You have not money +enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“I can do it,” said Daniel; “and I will do it before Monday +evening.” +</p> + +<p> +When Monday evening came round, the father’s debts were all paid. +</p> + +<p> +When Daniel became a famous man, it made Ezekiel very happy. But Ezekiel died +first. When Daniel Web-ster made his greatest speech, all the people praised +him. +</p> + +<p> +But Web-ster said, “I wish that my poor brother had lived to this time. +It would have made him very happy.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap40"></a>WEBSTER AND THE POOR WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +When Daniel Webster was a young lawyer, he was going home one night. There was +snow on the ground. It was very cold. It was late, and there was nobody to be +seen. +</p> + +<p> +But after a while he saw a poor woman. She was ahead of him. He wondered what +had brought her out on so cold a night. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes she stopped and looked around. Then she would stand and listen. Then +she would go on again. [Illustration: Webster and the Poor Woman] +</p> + +<p> +Webster kept out of her sight. But he watched her. After looking around, she +turned down the street in which Webster lived. She stopped in front of +Webster’s house. She looked around and listened. +</p> + +<p> +Webster had put down some loose boards to walk on. They reached from the gate +to the door of his house. After standing still a minute, the woman took one of +the boards, and went off quickly. +</p> + +<p> +Webster followed her. But he kept out of her sight. She went to a distant part +of the town. She went into a poor little house. +</p> + +<p> +Webster went home without saying anything to the woman. He knew that she had +stolen the board for fire-wood. +</p> + +<p> +The next day the poor woman got a present It was a nice load of wood. +</p> + +<p> +Can you guess who sent it to her? +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap41"></a>THE INDIA-RUBBER MAN.</h2> + +<p> +Many years ago a strange-looking man was sometimes seen in the streets of New +York. His cap was made of In-di-a rubber. So was his coat. He wore a rubber +waist-coat. Even his cravat was of In-di-a rubber. He wore rubber shoes in dry +weather. People called this man “The In-di-a-rubber man.” +</p> + +<p> +His name was Charles Good-year. He was very poor. He was trying to find out how +to make India rubber useful. +</p> + +<p> +India-rubber trees grow in South America. The juice of these trees is something +like milk or cream. By drying this juice, India rubber is made. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians in Bra-zil have no glass to make bottles with. A long time ago they +learned to make bottles out of rubber. More than a hundred years ago some of +these rubber bottles were brought to this country. The people in this country +had never seen India rubber before. They thought the bottles made out of it by +the Indians very cu-ri-ous. +</p> + +<p> +In this country, rubber was used only to rub out pencil marks. That is why we +call it rubber. People in South America learned to make a kind of heavy shoe +out of it. But these shoes were hard to make. They cost a great deal when they +were sold in this country. +</p> + +<p> +Men tried to make rubber shoes in this country. They got the rubber from +Bra-zil. Rubber shoes made in this country were cheaper than those brought from +South America. But they were not good. They would freeze till they were as hard +as stones in winter. That was not the worst of it. In summer they would melt. +Goodyear was trying to find out a way to make rubber better. He wanted to get +it so that it would not melt in summer. He wanted to get a rubber that would +not get hard in cold weather. The first rubber coats that were made were so +hard in cold weather, that they would stand alone, and look like a man. +</p> + +<p> +Goodyear wanted to try his rubber. That is why he wore a rubber coat and a +rubber waist-coat and a rubber cravat. That is why he wore a rubber cap and +rubber shoes when it was not raining. He made paper out of rubber, and wrote a +book on it. He had a door-plate made of it. He even carried a cane made of +India rubber. It is no wonder people called him the India-rubber man. +</p> + +<p> +He was very poor. Sometimes he had to borrow money to buy rubber with. +Sometimes his friends gave him money to keep his family from starving. +Sometimes there was no wood and no coal in the house in cold weather. +</p> + +<p> +But Goodyear kept on trying. He thought that he was just going to find out. +Years went by, and still he kept on trying. +</p> + +<p> +One day he was mixing some rubber with sulphur. It slipped out of his hand. It +fell on the hot stove. But it did not melt. Goodyear was happy at last. That +night it was cold. Goodyear took the burned piece of rubber out of doors, and +nailed it to the kitchen door. When morning came, he went and got it. It had +not frozen. +</p> + +<p> +He was now sure that he was on the right track. But he had to find out how to +mix and heat his rubber and sulphur. He was too poor to buy rubber to try with. +Nobody would lend him any more money. His family had to live by the help of his +friends. He had already sold almost everything that he had. Now he had to sell +his children’s school-books to get money to buy rubber with. +</p> + +<p> +At last his rubber goods were made and sold. Poor men who had to stand in the +rain could now keep themselves dry. People could walk in the wet with dry feet. +A great many people are alive who would have died if they had not been kept dry +by India rubber. +</p> + +<p> +You may count up, if you can, how many useful things are made of rubber. We owe +them all to one man. People laughed at Goodyear once. But at last they praised +him. To be “The India-rubber man” was something to be proud of. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap42"></a>DOCTOR KANE IN THE FROZEN SEA.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Kane was a doctor in one of the war ships of the United States. He had sailed +about the world a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +When he heard that ships were to be sent into the icy seas of the north, he +asked to be sent along. He went the first time as a doctor. Then he wanted to +find out more about the frozen ocean. So he went again as captain of a ship. +His ship was called the “Advance.” +</p> + +<p> +Kane sailed into the icy seas. His ship was driven far into the ice by a +fu-ri-ous storm. She was crowded by ice-bergs. At one time she was lifted clear +out of the water. The ship seemed ready to fall over on her side. But the ice +let her down again. Then she was squeezed till the men thought that she would +be crushed like an egg shell At last the storm stopped. Then came the awful +cold. The ship was frozen into the ice. The ice never let go of her. She was +farther north than any ship had ever been before. But she was so fast in the +ice that she never could get away. +</p> + +<p> +In that part of the world it is night nearly all winter. For months there was +no sun at all. Daylight came again. It was now summer, but it did not get warm. +Doctor Kane took sleds, and went about on the ice to see what he could see. The +sleds were drawn by large dogs. But nearly all of the dogs died in the long +winter night. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: A Dog Sled] +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane thought that the ice would melt. He wanted to get the ship out. But +the ice did not melt at all. +</p> + +<p> +At last the summer passed away. Another awful winter came. The sun did not rise +any more. It was dark for months and months. The men were ill. Some of them +died. They were much dis-cour-aged. But Kane kept up his heart, and did the +best he could. +</p> + +<p> +At last the least little streak of light could be seen. It got a little lighter +each day. But the sick men down in the cabin of the ship could not see the +light. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane said to himself, “If my poor men could see this sunlight, it +would cheer them up. It might save their lives.” But they were too ill to +get out where they could see the sun. It would be many days before the sun +would shine into the cabin of the ship. The men might die before that time. +</p> + +<p> +So Doctor Kane took some looking glasses up to the deck or top of the ship. He +fixed one of these so it would catch the light of the sun. Then he fixed +another so that the first one would throw the light on this one. The last one +would throw the sunlight down into the cabin where the sick men were. +</p> + +<p> +One day the poor fellows were ready to give up. Then the sun fell on the +looking glasses, and flashed down into the cabin. It was the first daylight the +sick men had seen for months. The long winter night was over. Think how happy +they were! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap43"></a>A DINNER ON THE ICE.</h2> + +<p> +After two winters of cold and darkness, Doctor Kane made up his mind to leave +the ship fast in the ice. He wanted to get to a place in Green-land where there +were people living. Then he might find some way of getting home again. +</p> + +<p> +The men started out, drawing the boats on sleds. Whenever they came to open +water, they put the boats into the water, and took the sleds in the boats. When +they came to the ice again, they had to draw out their boats, and carry them on +the sleds. At first they could travel only about a mile a day. +</p> + +<p> +It was a hard journey. Some of the men were ill. These had to be drawn on the +sleds by the rest. They had not enough food. At one time they rested three days +in a kind of cave. Here they found many birds’ eggs. These made very good +food for them. At another place they staid a week. They staid just to eat the +eggs of the wild birds. +</p> + +<p> +After they left this place, they were hungry. The men grew thinner and thinner. +It seemed that they must die for want of food. But one day they saw a large +seal. He was floating on a piece of ice. The hungry men thought, “What a +fine din-ner he would make for us!” If they could get the seal, they +would not die of hunger. +</p> + +<p> +Every one of the poor fellows trembled for fear the seal would wake up. A man +named Pe-ter-sen took a gun, and got ready to shoot. The men rowed the boat +toward the seal. They rowed slowly and quietly. But the seal waked up. He +raised his head. The men thought that he would jump off into the water. Then +they might all die for want of food. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane made a motion to Pe-ter-sen. That was to tell him to shoot quickly. +But Peter-sen did not shoot. He was so much afraid that the seal would get +away, that he could not shoot. The seal now raised himself a little more. He +was getting ready to jump into the water. Just then Petersen fired. The seal +fell dead on the ice. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: A Seal] +</p> + +<p> +The men were wild with joy. They rowed the boats with all their might. When +they got to the seal, they dragged it farther away from the water. They were so +happy, that they danced on the ice. Some of them laughed. Some were so glad, +that they cried. [Illustration: Shooting the Seal.] +</p> + +<p> +Then they took their knives and began to cut up the seal. They had no fire on +the ice, and they were too hungry to think of lighting one. So they ate the +meat of the seal without waiting to cook it. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap44"></a>DOCTOR KANE GETS OUT OF THE FROZEN SEA.</h2> + +<p> +After they got the seal, Doctor Kane and his men traveled on. Sometimes they +were on the ice. Sometimes they were in the boats. The men were so weak, that +they could hardly row the boats. They were so hungry, that they could not sleep +well at night. +</p> + +<p> +One day they were rowing, when they heard a sound. It came to them across the +water. It did not sound like the cry of sea birds. It sounded like +people’s voices. +</p> + +<p> +“Listen!” Doctor Kane said to Pe-ter-sen. +</p> + +<p> +Petersen spoke the same language as the people of Greenland. He listened. The +sound came again. Pe-ter-sen was so glad, that he could hardly speak. He told +Kane in a half whisper, that it was the voice of some one speaking his own +language. It was some Greenland men in a boat. +</p> + +<p> +The next day they got to a Greenland town. Then they got into a little ship +going to England. They knew that they could get home from England. But the ship +stopped at another Green-land town. While they were there, a steamer was seen. +It came nearer. They could see the stars and stripes flying from her mast. It +was an American steamer sent to find Doctor Kane. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane and his men were full of joy. They pushed their little boat into +the water once more. This little boat was called the “Faith.” It +had carried Kane and his men hundreds of miles in icy seas. +</p> + +<p> +Once more the men took their oars, and rowed. This time they rowed with all +their might. They held up the little flag that they had carried farther north +than anybody had ever been before. They rowed straight to the steamer. +</p> + +<p> +In the bow of the boat was a little man with a tattered red shirt. He could see +that the captain of the boat was looking at him through a spy-glass. +</p> + +<p> +The captain shouted to the little man, “Is that Doctor Kane?” +</p> + +<p> +The little man in the red shirt shouted back, “Yes!” +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane and his men had been gone more than two years. People had begun to +think that they had all died. This steamer had been sent to find out what had +become of them. When the men on the steamer heard that this little man in the +red shirt was Doctor Kane himself, they sent up cheer after cheer. In a few +minutes more, Doctor Kane and his men were on the steamer. They were now safe +among friends. They were sailing away toward their homes. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap45"></a>LONGFELLOW AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration: Longfellow and the Bird] +</p> + +<p> +Long-fel-low was a noble boy. He always wanted to do right. He could not bear +to see one person do any wrong to another. +</p> + +<p> +He was very tender-hearted. One day he took a gun and went shooting. He killed +a robin. Then he felt sorry for the robin He came home with tears in his eyes. +He was so grieved, that he never went shooting again. +</p> + +<p> +He liked to read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” Its strange stories +about Sleepy Hollow and Rip Van Win-kle pleased his fancy. +</p> + +<p> +When he was thirteen he wrote a poem. It was about Love-well’s fight with +the Indians. He sent his verses to a news-paper. He wondered if the ed-i-tor +would print them. He could not think of anything else. He walked up and down in +front of the printing office. He thought that his poem might be in the +printer’s hands. +</p> + +<p> +When the paper came out, there was his poem. It was signed “Henry.” +Long-fel-low read it. He thought it a good poem. +</p> + +<p> +But a judge who did not know whose poem it was talked about it that evening. He +said to young Long-fel-low, “Did you see that poem in the paper? It was +stiff. And all taken from other poets, too.” +</p> + +<p> +This made Henry Long-fel-low feel bad. But he kept on trying. After many years, +he became a famous poet. +</p> + +<p> +For more than fifty years, young people have liked to read his poem called +“A Psalm of Life.” Here are three stanzas of it:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Lives of great men all remind us<br/> + We can make our lives sub-lime,<br/> +And, de-part-ing, leave behind us<br/> + Foot-prints on the sands of time,—<br/> +<br/> +“Foot-prints, that perhaps another,<br/> + Sailing o’er life’s solemn main,<br/> +A forlorn and ship-wrecked brother,<br/> + Seeing, may take heart again.<br/> +<br/> +“Let us, then, be up and doing,<br/> + With a heart for any fate;<br/> +Still a-chiev-ing, still pur-su-ing,<br/> + Learn to labor and to wait.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap46"></a>KIT CARSON AND THE BEARS.</h2> + +<p> +Great men of one kind are known only in new countries like ours. These men +dis-cov-er new regions. They know how to manage the Indians. They show other +people how to live in a wild country. +</p> + +<p> +One of the most famous of such men was Kit Car-son. He knew all about the wild +animals. He was a great hunter. He learned the languages of the Indians. The +Indians liked him. He was a great guide. He showed soldiers and settlers how to +travel where they wished to go. +</p> + +<p> +Once he was marching through the wild country with other men. Evening came. He +left the others, and went to shoot something to eat. It was the only way to get +meat for supper. When he had gone about a mile, he saw the tracks of some elks. +He followed these tracks. He came in sight of the elks. They were eating grass +on a hill, as cows do. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Car-son crept up behind some bushes. But elks are very timid animals. +Before the hunter got very near, they began to run away. So Carson fired at one +of them as it was running. The elk fell dead. +</p> + +<p> +But just at that moment he heard a roar. He turned to see what made this ugly +noise. Two huge bears were running toward him. They wanted some meat for +supper, too. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Carson’s gun was empty. He threw it down. Then he ran as fast as he +could. He wanted to find a tree. +</p> + +<p> +Just as the bears were about to seize him, he got to a tree. He caught hold of +a limb. He swung himself up into the tree. The bears just missed getting him. +</p> + +<p> +But bears know how to climb trees. Carson knew that they would soon be after +him. He pulled out his knife, and began to cut off a limb. He wanted to make a +club. +</p> + +<p> +A bear is much larger and stronger than a man. He cannot be killed with a club. +But every bear has one tender spot. It is his nose. He does not like to be hit +on the nose. A sharp blow on the nose hurts him a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Carson got his club cut just in time. The bears were coming after him. Kit +got up into the very top of the tree. He drew up his feet, and made himself as +small as he could. +</p> + +<p> +When the bears came near, one of them reached for Kit. Whack! went the stick on +the end of his nose. The bear drew back, and whined with pain. +</p> + +<p> +First one bear tried to get him, and then the other. But which-ever one tried, +Kit was ready. The bear was sure to get his nose hurt. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +The bears grew tired, and rested awhile. But they kept up their screeching and +roaring. When their noses felt better, they tried again. And then they tried +again. But every time they came away with sore noses. At last they both tried +at once. But Carson pounded faster than ever. One of the bears cried like a +baby. The tears ran out of his eyes. It hurt his feelings to have his nose +treated in this rude way. +</p> + +<p> +After a long time one of the bears got tired. He went away. After awhile the +other went away too. Kit Carson staid in the tree a long time. Then he came +down. The first thing he did was to get his gun. He loaded it. But the bears +did not come back. They were too busy rubbing noses. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap47"></a>HORACE GREELEY AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +Hor-ace Gree-ley was the son of a poor farmer. He was always fond of books. He +learned to read almost as soon as he could talk. He could read easy books when +he was three years old. When he was four, he could read any book that he could +get. +</p> + +<p> +He went to an old-fashioned school. Twice a day all the children stood up to +spell. They were in two classes. Little Hor-ace was in the class with the +grown-up young people. He was the best speller in the class. It was funny to +see the little midget at the head of this class of older people. But he was +only a little boy in his feelings. If he missed a word, he would cry. The one +that spelled a word that he missed would have a right to take the head of the +class. Sometimes when he missed, the big boys would not take the head. They did +not like to make the little fellow cry. He was the pet of all the school. +</p> + +<p> +People in that day were fond of spelling. They used to hold meetings at night +to spell. They called these “spelling schools.” +</p> + +<p> +At a spelling school two captains were picked out. These chose their spellers. +Then they tried to see which side could beat the other at spelling. +</p> + +<p> +Little Hor-ace was always chosen first. The side that got him got the best +speller in the school. Sometimes the little fellow would go to sleep. When it +came his turn to spell, some-body would wake him up. He would rub his eyes, and +spell the word. He would spell it right, too. +</p> + +<p> +When he was four or five years old, he would lie under a tree, and read. He +would lie there, and forget all about his dinner or his supper. He would not +move until some-body stumbled over him or called him. +</p> + +<p> +People had not found out how to burn ker-o-sene oil in lamps then. They used +candles. But poor people like the Gree-leys could not afford to burn many +candles. Hor-ace gathered pine knots to read by at night. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Greeley Reading] +</p> + +<p> +He would light a pine knot Then he would throw it on top of the large log at +the back of the fire. This would make a bright flick-er-ing light. +</p> + +<p> +Horace would lay all the books he wanted on the hearth. Then he would lie down +by them. His head was toward the fire. His feet were drawn up out of the way. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing that he did was to study all his lessons for the next day. Then +he would read other books. He never seemed to know when anybody came or went. +He kept on with his reading. His father did not want him to read too late. He +was afraid that he would hurt his eyes. And he wanted to have him get up early +in the morning to help with the work. So when nine o’clock came, he would +call, “Horace, Horace, Horace!” But it took many callings to rouse +him. +</p> + +<p> +When he got to bed, he would say his lessons over to his brother. He would tell +his brother what he had been reading. But his brother would fall asleep while +Horace was talking. +</p> + +<p> +Horace liked to read better than he liked to work. But when he had a task to +do, he did it faith-ful-ly. His brother would say, “Let us go +fishing.” But Horace would answer, “Let us get our work done +first.” +</p> + +<p> +Horace Gree-ley’s father grew poorer and poorer. When Horace was ten +years old, his land was sold. The family were now very poor. They moved from +New Hamp-shire. They settled in Ver-mont. They lived in a poor little cabin. +</p> + +<p> +Horace had to work hard like all the rest of the family. But he borrowed all +the books he could get. Sometimes he walked seven miles to borrow a book. +</p> + +<p> +A rich man who lived near the Greeleys used to lend books to Horace. Horace had +grown tall. His hair was white. He was poorly dressed. He was a strange-looking +boy. One day he went to the house of the rich man to borrow books. Some one +said to the owner of the house, “Do you lend books to such a fellow as +that?” +</p> + +<p> +But the gen-tle-man said, “That boy will be a great man some day.” +</p> + +<p> +This made all the com-pa-ny laugh. It seemed funny that anybody should think of +this poor boy becoming a great man. But it came true. The poor white-headed boy +came to be a great man. +</p> + +<p> +Horace Greeley learned all that he could learn in the country schools. When he +was thirteen, one teacher said to his father,— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Greeley, Horace knows more than I do. It is not of any use to send +him to school any more.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap48"></a>HORACE GREELEY LEARNING TO PRINT.</h2> + +<p> +Horace Greeley had always wanted to be a printer. He liked books and papers. He +thought it would be a fine thing to learn to make them. +</p> + +<p> +One day he heard that the news-paper at East Poult-ney wanted a boy to learn +the printer’s trade. He walked many long miles to see about it. He went +to see Mr. Bliss. Mr. Bliss was one of the owners of the paper. Horace found +him working in his garden. Mr. Bliss looked up. He saw a big boy coming toward +him. The boy had on a white felt hat with a narrow brim. It looked like a +half-peck measure. His hair was white. His trousers were too short for him. All +his clothes were coarse and poor. He was such a strange-looking boy, that Mr. +Bliss wanted to laugh. +</p> + +<p> +“I heard that you wanted a boy,” Horace said. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you want to learn to print?” Mr. Bliss said. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Horace. +</p> + +<p> +“But a printer ought to know a good many things,” said Mr. Bliss. +“Have you been to school much?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” said Horace. “I have not had much chance at school. But +I have read some.” +</p> + +<p> +“What have you read?” asked Mr. Bliss. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, I have read some his-to-ry, and some travels, and a little of +everything.” +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss had ex-am-ined a great many schoolteachers. He liked to puzzle +teachers with hard questions. He thought he would try Horace with these. But +the gawky boy answered them all. This tow-headed boy seemed to know everything. +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss took a piece of paper from his pocket. He wrote on it, “Guess +we’d better try him.” +</p> + +<p> +He gave this paper to Horace, and told him to take it to the printing office. +Horace, with his little white hat and strange ways, went into the printing +office. The boys in the office laughed at him. But the foreman said he would +try him. +</p> + +<p> +That night the boys in the office said to Mr. Bliss, “You are not going +to take that tow head, are you?” +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss said, “There is something in that tow-head. You boys will find +it out soon.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Greeley setting Type] +</p> + +<p> +A few days after this, Horace came to East Poult-ney to begin his work. He +carried a little bundle of clothes tied up in a hand-ker-chief. +</p> + +<p> +The fore-man showed him how to begin. From that time he did not once look +around. All day he worked at his type. He learned more in a day than some boys +do in a month. +</p> + +<p> +Day after day he worked, and said nothing. The other boys joked him. But he did +not seem to hear them. He only kept on at his work. They threw type at him. But +he did not look up. +</p> + +<p> +The largest boy in the office thought he could find a way to tease him. One day +he said that Horace’s hair was too white. He went and got the ink ball. +He stained Horace’s hair black in four places. This ink stain would not +wash out. But Horace did not once look up. +</p> + +<p> +After that, the boys did not try to tease him any more. They all liked the +good-hearted Horace. And everybody in the town wondered that the boy knew so +much. +</p> + +<p> +Horace’s father had moved away to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Horace sent him all +the money he could spare. He soon became a good printer. He started a paper of +his own. He became a famous news-paper man. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap49"></a>A WONDERFUL WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +Little Dor-o-thy Dix was poor. Her father did not know how to make a living. +Her mother did not know how to bring up her children. +</p> + +<p> +The father moved from place to place. Sometimes he printed little tracts to do +good. But he let his own children grow up poor and wretched. +</p> + +<p> +Dor-o-thy wanted to learn. She wanted to become a teacher. She wanted to get +money to send her little brothers to school. +</p> + +<p> +Dor-o-thy was a girl of strong will and temper. When she was twelve years old, +she left her wretched home. She went to her grand-mother. Her grand-mother Dix +lived in a large house in Boston. She sent Dorothy to school. +</p> + +<p> +Dorothy learned fast. But she wanted to make money. She wanted to help her +brothers. When she was fourteen, she taught a school. She tried to make herself +look like a woman. She made her dresses longer. +</p> + +<p> +She soon went back to her grand-mother. She went to school again. Then she +taught school. She soon had a school in her grandmother’s house. It was a +very good school. Many girls were sent to her school. Miss Dix was often ill. +But when she was well enough, she worked away. She was able to send her +brothers to school until they grew up. +</p> + +<p> +Besides helping her brothers, she wanted to help other poor children. She +started a school for poor children in her grandmother’s barn. +</p> + +<p> +After a while she left off teaching. She was not well. She had made all the +money she needed. +</p> + +<p> +But she was not idle. She went one day to teach some poor women in an +alms-house. Then she went to see the place where the crazy people were kept. +These insane people had no fire in the coldest weather. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Dix tried to get the man-a-gers to put up a stove in the room. But they +would not do it. Then she went to the court. She told the judge about it. The +judge said that the insane people ought to have a fire. He made the man-a-gers +put up a stove in the place where they were kept. +</p> + +<p> +Then Miss Dix went to other towns. She wanted to see how the insane people were +treated. Some of them were shut up in dark, damp cells. One young man was +chained up with an iron collar about his neck. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Dix got new laws made about the insane. She per-suad-ed the States to +build large houses for keeping the insane. She spent most of her life at this +work. The Civil War broke out. There were many sick and wounded soldiers to be +taken care of. +</p> + +<p> +All of the nurses in the hos-pi-tals were put under Miss Dix. She worked at +this as long as the war lasted. Then she spent the rest of her life doing all +that she could for insane people. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap50"></a>THE AUTHOR OF “LITTLE WOMEN.”</h2> + +<p> +Lou-i-sa Al-cott was a wild little girl. When she was very little, she would +run away from home. She liked to play with beggar children. +</p> + +<p> +One day she wandered so far away from her home, she could not find the way back +again. It was growing dark. The little girl’s feet were tired. She sat +down on a door-step. A big dog was lying on the step. He wagged his tail. That +was his way of saying, “I am glad to see you.” +</p> + +<p> +Little Lou-i-sa grew sleepy. She laid her head on the curly head of the big +dog. Then she fell asleep. +</p> + +<p> +Lou-i-sa’s father and mother could not find her. They sent out the town +crier to look for her. +</p> + +<p> +The town crier went along the street. As he went, he rang his bell. Every now +and then he would tell that a little girl was lost. At last the man with the +bell came to the place where Louisa was asleep. He rang his bell. That waked +her up. She heard him call out in a loud voice,— +</p> + +<p> +“Lost, lost! a little girl six years old. She wore a pink frock, a white +hat, and new green shoes.” +</p> + +<p> +When the crier had said that, he heard a small voice coming out of the +darkness. It said, “Why, dat’s me.” The crier went to the +voice, and found Louisa sitting by the big dog on the door-step. The next day +she was tied to the sofa to punish her for running away. +</p> + +<p> +She and her sisters learned to sew well. Louisa set up as a doll’s +dress-maker. She was then twelve years old. She hung out a little sign. She put +some pretty dresses in the window to show how well she could do. +</p> + +<p> +Other girls liked the little dresses that she made. They came to her to get +dresses made for their dolls. They liked the little doll’s hats she made +better than all. Louisa chased the chickens to get soft feathers for these +hats. +</p> + +<p> +She turned the old fairy tales into little plays. The children played these +plays in the barn. +</p> + +<p> +One of these plays was Jack and the Bean-stalk. A squash vine was put up in the +barn. This was the bean-stalk. When it was cut down, the boy who played giant +would come tumbling out of the hay-loft. +</p> + +<p> +Louisa found it hard to be good and o-be-di-ent. She wrote some verses about +being good. She was fourteen years old when she wrote them. Here they +are:— +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap51"></a>MY KINGDOM.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +A little kingdom I possess<br/> + Where thoughts and feelings dwell,<br/> +And very hard I find the task<br/> + Of gov-ern-ing it well.<br/> +<br/> +For passion tempts and troubles me,<br/> + A wayward will misleads,<br/> +And sel-fish-ness its shadow casts<br/> + On all my words and deeds.<br/> +<br/> +I do not ask for any crown<br/> + But that which all may win,<br/> +Nor seek to conquer any world<br/> + Except the one within. +</p> + +<p> +The Al-cott family were very poor. Louisa made up her mind to do something to +make money when she got big. She did not like being so very poor. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +One day she was sitting on a cart-wheel thinking. She was thinking how poor her +father was. There was a crow up in the air over her head. The crow was cawing. +There was nobody to tell her thoughts to but the crow. She shook her fist at +the big bird, and said,— +</p> + +<p> +“I will do something by and by. Don’t care what. I’ll teach, +sew, act, write, do anything to help the family. And I’ll be rich and +famous before I die. See if I don’t.” +</p> + +<p> +The crow did not make any answer. But Louisa kept thinking about the work she +was going to do. The other children got work to do that made money. But Louisa +was left at home to do housework. She had to do the washing. She made a little +song about it. Here are some of the verses of this song:— +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap52"></a>A SONG FROM THE SUDS.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +Queen of my tub, I merrily sing,<br/> + While the white foam rises high,<br/> +And stur-di-ly wash and rinse and wring,<br/> + And fasten the clothes to dry;<br/> +Then out in the free fresh air they swing,<br/> + Under the sunny sky.<br/> +<br/> +I am glad a task to me is given,<br/> + To labor at day by day;<br/> +For it brings me health and strength and hope,<br/> + And I cheer-ful-ly learn to say,<br/> +“Head you may think, Heart you may feel,<br/> + But Hand you shall work alway.” +</p> + +<p> +Louisa grew to be a woman at last. She went to nurse soldiers in the war. She +wrote books. When she wrote the book called “Little Women,” all the +young people were de-light-ed. What she had said to the crow came true at last. +She became famous. She had money enough to make the family com-fort-a-ble. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10070 ***</div> +</body> + +</html> + + diff --git a/10070-h/images/cover.jpg b/10070-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8f85393 --- /dev/null +++ b/10070-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1063465 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #10070 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/10070) diff --git a/old/10070-0.txt b/old/10070-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bf132e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10070-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4059 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans, by Edward Eggleston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at +www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you +will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before +using this eBook. + +Title: Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans + +Author: Edward Eggleston + +Release Date: November 12, 2003 [eBook #10070] +[Most recently updated: July 26, 2021] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +Produced by: Juliet Sutherland, Michael Lockey and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS FOR LITTLE AMERICANS *** + +[Illustration] + + + + +Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans + +by Edward Eggleston + +AUTHOR OF “TRUE STORIES OF AMERICAN LIFE AND ADVENTURE” +“A FIRST BOOK IN AMERICAN HISTORY” AND “A HISTORY OF THE +UNITED STATES AND ITS PEOPLE FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS” + +1895 + + +Contents + + PREFACE + The First Governor in Boston + Marquette in Iowa + Indian Pictures + William Penn and the Indians + One Little Bag of Rice + The Story of a Wise Woman + Franklin his own Teacher + How Franklin found out Things + Franklin asks the Sunshine something + Franklin and the Kite + Franklin’s Whistle + Too much for the Whistle + John Stark and the Indians + A Great Good Man + Putnam and the Wolf + Washington and his Hatchet + How Benny West learned to be a Painter + Washington’s Christmas Gift + How Washington got out of a Trap + Washington’s Last Battle + Marion’s Tower + Clark and his Men + Daniel Boone and his Grapevine Swing + Daniel Boone’s Daughter and her Friends + Decatur and the Pirates + Stories about Jefferson + A Long Journey + Captain Clark’s Burning Glass + Quicksilver Bob + The First Steamboat + Washington Irving as a Boy + Don’t give up the Ship + Grandfather’s Rhyme + The Star-spangled Banner + How Audubon came to know about Birds + Audubon in the Wild Woods + Hunting a Panther + Some Boys who became Authors + Daniel Webster and his Brother + Webster and the Poor Woman + The India-rubber Man + Doctor Kane in the Frozen Sea + A Dinner on the Ice + Doctor Kane gets out of the Frozen Sea + Longfellow as a Boy + Kit Carson and the Bears + Horace Greeley as a Boy + Horace Greeley learning to Print + A Wonderful Woman + The Author of “Little Women” + My Kingdom + A Song from the Suds + + + + +PREFACE. + + +The primary aim of this book is to furnish the little learner reading +matter that will excite his attention and give him pleasure, and thus +make lighter the difficult task of learning to read. The ruggedness of +this task has often been increased by the use of disconnected +sentences, or lessons as dry and uninteresting as finger exercises on +the piano. It is a sign of promise that the demand for reading matter +of interest to the child has come from teachers. I have endeavored to +meet this requirement in the following stories. + +As far as possible the words chosen have been such as are not difficult +to the little reader, either from their length or their unfamiliarity. +The sentences and paragraphs are short. Learning to read is like +climbing a steep hill, and it is a great relief to the panting child to +find frequent breathing places. + +It is one of the purposes of these stories to make the mind of the +pupil familiar with some of the leading figures in the history of our +country by means of personal anecdote. Some of the stories are those +that every American child ought to know, because they have become a +kind of national folklore. Such, for example, are “Putnam and the Wolf” +and the story of “Franklin’s Whistle.” I have thought it important to +present as great a variety of subjects as possible, so that the pupil +may learn something not only of great warriors and patriots, but also +of great statesmen. The exploits of discoverers, the triumphs of +American inventors, and the achievements of men of letters and men of +science, find place in these stories. All the narratives are +historical, or at least no stories have been told for true that are +deemed fictitious. Every means which the writer’s literary experience +could suggest has been used to make the stories engaging, in the hope +that the interest of the narrative may prove a sufficient spur to +exertion on the part of the pupil, and that this little book will make +green and pleasant a pathway that has so often been dry and laborious. +It will surely serve to excite an early interest in our national +history by giving some of the great personages of that history a place +among the heroes that impress the susceptible imagination of a child. +It is thus that biographical and historical incidents acquire something +of the vitality of folk tales. + +The illustrations that accompany the text have been planned with +special reference to the awakening of the child’s attention. To keep +the mind alert and at its best is more than half the battle in +teaching. The publishers and the author of this little book believe +that in laying the foundation of a child’s education the best work is +none too good. + +The larger words have been divided by hyphens when a separation into +syllables is likely to help the learner. The use of the hyphen has been +regulated entirely with a view to its utility. After a word not too +difficult has been made familiar by its repeated occurrence, the +hyphens are omitted. + + + + +STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS. + + +[Illustration: THE FIRST GOVERNOR IN BOSTON] + +Before the white people came, there were no houses in this country but +the little huts of the In-di-ans. The In-di-an houses were made of +bark, or mats, or skins, spread over poles. + +Some people came to one part of the country. Others started +set-tle-ments in other places. When more people came, some of these +set-tle-ments grew into towns. The woods were cut down. Farms were +planted. Roads were made. But it took many years for the country to +fill with people. + +The first white people that came to live in the woods where Boston is +now, settled there a long time ago. They had a gov-ern-or over them. He +was a good man, and did much for the people. His name was John +Win-throp. + +The first thing the people had to do was to cut down the trees. After +that they could plant corn. But at first they could not raise any-thing +to eat. They had brought flour and oat-meal from England. But they +found that it was not enough to last till they could raise corn on +their new ground. + +Win-throp sent a ship to get more food for them. The ship was gone a +long time. The people ate up all their food. They were hungry. They +went to the sea-shore, and found clams and mussels. They were glad to +get these to eat. + +At last they set a day for every-body to fast and pray for food. The +gov-ern-or had a little flour left. Nearly all of this was made into +bread, and put into the oven to bake. He did not know when he would get +any more. + +Soon after this a poor man came along. His flour was all gone. His +bread had all been eaten up. His family were hungry. The gov-ern-or +gave the poor man the very last flour that he had in the barrel. + +Just then a ship was seen. It sailed up toward Boston. It was loaded +with food for all the people. + +The time for the fast day came. But there was now plenty of food. The +fast day was turned into a thanks-giving day. + +One day a man sent a very cross letter to Gov-ern-or Win-throp. +Win-throp sent it back to him. He said, “I cannot keep a letter that +might make me angry.” Then the man that had written the cross letter +wrote to Win-throp, “By con-quer-ing yourself, you have con-quered me.” + + + + +MARQUETTE IN IOWA. + + +The first white men to go into the middle of our country were +French-men. The French had settled in Can-a-da. They sent +mis-sion-a-ries to preach to the Indians in the West. They also sent +traders to buy furs from the Indians. + +The French-men heard the Indians talk about a great river in the West. +But no French-man had ever gone far enough to see the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +Mar-quette was a priest. Jo-li-et was a trader. These two men were sent +to find the great river that the Indians talked about. + +They trav-eled in two birch canoes. They took five men to paddle the +canoes. They took some smoked meat to eat on the way. They also took +some Indian corn. They had trinkets to trade to the Indians. Hatchets, +and beads, and bits of cloth were the money they used to pay the +Indians for what they wanted. + +The friendly Indians in Wis-con-sin tried to per-suade them not to go. +They told them that the Indians on the great river would kill them. + +The friendly Indians also told them that there was a demon in one part +of the river. They said that this demon roared so loud that he could be +heard a long way off. They said that the demon would draw the +trav-el-ers down into the water. Then they told about great monsters +that ate up men and their canoes. + +But Mar-quette and the men with him thought they would risk the +journey. They would not turn back for fear of the demon or the +monsters. + +The two little canoes went down the Wis-con-sin River. After some days +they came to the Mis-sis-sip-pi. More than a hundred years before, the +Spaniards had seen the lower part of this river. But no white man had +ever seen this part of the great river. Mar-quette did not know that +any white man had ever seen any part of the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +The two little canoes now turned their bows down the river. Some-times +they saw great herds of buf-fa-loes. Some of these came to the bank of +the river to look at the men in the canoes. They had long, shaggy +manes, which hung down over their eyes. + +For two weeks the trav-el-ers paddled down the river. In all this time +they did not see any Indians. After they had gone hundreds of miles in +this way, they came to a place where they saw tracks in the mud. It was +in what is now the State of I-o-wa. + +Mar-quette and Jo-li-et left the men in their canoes, and followed the +tracks. After walking two hours, they came to an Indian village. The +Frenchmen came near enough to hear the Indians talking. The Indians did +not see them. + +Jo-li-et and Mar-quette did not know whether the Indians would kill +them or not. They said a short prayer. Then they stood out in full +view, and gave a loud shout. + +The Indians came out of their tents like bees. They stared at the +strangers. Then four Indians came toward them. These Indians carried a +peace pipe. They held this up toward the sun. This meant that they were +friendly. + +The Indians now offered the peace pipe to the French-men. The +French-men took it, and smoked with the Indians. This was the Indian +way of saying, “We are friends.” + +[Illustration: Marquette and Joliet] + +Mar-quette asked the Indians what tribe they belonged to. They told him +that they were of the tribe called the Il-li-nois. + +They took Jo-li-et and Mar-quette into their village. They came to the +door of a large wig-wam. A chief stood in the door. He shaded his eyes +with both hands, as if the sun were shining in his face. Then he made a +little speech. + +He said, “French-men, how bright the sun shines when you come to see +us! We are all waiting for you. You shall now come into our houses in +peace.” + +The Il-li-nois Indians made a feast for their new friends. First they +had mush of corn meal, with fat meat in it. One of the Indians fed the +Frenchmen as though they were babies. He put mush into their mouths +with a large spoon. + +Then came some fish. The Indian that fed the vis-it-ors picked out the +bones with his fingers. Then he put the pieces of fish into their +mouths. After they had some roasted dog. The French-men did not like +this. Last, they were fed with buf-fa-lo meat. + +The next morning six hundred Indians went to the canoes to tell the +Frenchmen good-by. They gave Mar-quette a young Indian slave. And they +gave him a peace pipe to carry with him. + + + + +INDIAN PICTURES. + + +When Mar-quette and his men left the Il-li-nois, they went on down the +river. The friendly Il-li-nois had told them that the Indians they +would see were bad, and that they would kill any one who came into +their country. + +The Frenchmen had heard before this that there were demons and monsters +in the river. One day they saw some high rocks with pictures painted on +them. The ugly pictures made them think of these monsters. They were +painted in red, black, and green colors. They were pictures of two +Indian demons or gods. + +Each one of these monsters was about the size of a calf. They had horns +as long as those of a deer. Their eyes were red. Their faces were like +a man’s, but they were ugly and frightful. They had beards like a +tiger’s. Their bodies were covered with scales like those on a fish. +Their long tails were wound round their bodies, and over their heads, +and down between their legs. The end of each tail was like that of a +fish. + +The Indians prayed to these ugly gods when they passed in their canoes. +Even Mar-quette and his men were a little frightened when they saw such +pictures in a place so lonely. The Frenchmen went down the river about +twelve hundred miles. Some-times the Indians tried to kill them, but by +showing the peace pipe they made friends. At last they turned back. +Jo-li-et went to Can-a-da. Mar-quette preached to the Indians in the +West till he died. + + + + +WILLIAM PENN AND THE INDIANS. + + +The King of England gave all the land in Penn-syl-va-ni-a to William +Penn. The King made Penn a kind of king over Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Penn +could make the laws of this new country. But he let the people make +their own laws. + +Penn wanted to be friendly with the Indians. He paid them for all the +land his people wanted to live on. Before he went to Penn-syl-va-ni-a +he wrote a letter to the Indians. He told them in this letter that he +would not let any of his people do any harm to the Indians. He said he +would punish any-body that did any wrong to an Indian. This letter was +read to the Indians in their own lan-guage. + +Soon after this Penn got into a ship and sailed from England. He sailed +to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. When he came there, he sent word to the tribes of +Indians to come to meet him. + +The Indians met under a great elm tree on the bank of the river. +Indians like to hold their solemn meetings out of doors. They sit on +the ground. They say that the earth is the Indian’s mother. + +When Penn came to the place of meeting, he found the woods full of +Indians. As far as he could see, there were crowds of Indians. Penn’s +friends were few. They had no guns. + +Penn had a bright blue sash round his waist. One of the Indian chiefs, +who was the great chief, put on a kind of cap or crown. In the middle +of this was a small horn. The head chief wore this only at such great +meetings as this one. + +When the great chief had put on his horn, all the other chiefs and +great men of the Indians put down their guns. Then they sat down in +front of Penn in the form of a half-moon. Then the great chief told +Penn that the Indians were ready to hear what he had to say. + +Penn had a large paper in which he had written all the things that he +and his friends had promised to the Indians. He had written all the +promises that the Indians were to make to the white people. This was to +make them friends. When Penn had read this to them, it was explained to +them in their own lan-guage. Penn told them that they might stay in the +country that they had sold to the white people. The land would belong +to both the Indians and the white people. + +Then Penn laid the large paper down on the ground. That was to show +them, he said, that the ground was to belong to the Indians and the +white people to-geth-er. + +He said that there might be quarrels between some of the white people +and some of the Indians. But they would settle any quarrels without +fighting. When-ever there should be a quarrel, the Indians were to pick +out six Indians. The white people should also pick out six of their +men. These were to meet, and settle the quarrel. + +Penn said, “I will not call you my children, because fathers some-times +whip their children. I will not call you brothers, because brothers +sometimes fall out. But I will call you the same person as the white +people. We are the two parts of the same body.” + +The Indians could not write. But they had their way of putting down +things that they wished to have re-mem-bered. They gave Penn a belt of +shell beads. These beads are called wam-pum. Some wam-pum is white. +Some is purple. + +They made this belt for Penn of white beads. In the middle of the belt +they made a picture of purple beads. It is a picture of a white man and +an Indian. They have hold of each other’s hands. When they gave this +belt to Penn, they said, “We will live with William Penn and his +children as long as the sun and moon shall last.” + +[Illustration: Penn jumping with the Indians.] + +Penn took up the great paper from the ground. He handed it to the great +chief that wore the horn on his head. He told the Indians to keep it +and hand it to their children’s children, that they might know what he +had said. Then he gave them many presents of such things as they liked. +They gave Penn a name in their own language. They named him “O-nas.” +That was their word for a feather. As the white people used a pen made +out of a quill or feather, they called a pen “o-nas.” That is why they +called William Penn “Brother O-nas.” + +Penn sometimes went to see the Indians. He talked to them, and gave +them friendly advice. Once he saw some of them jumping. They were +trying to see who could jump the farthest. + +Penn had been a very active boy. He knew how to jump very well. He went +to the place where the Indians were jumping. He jumped farther than any +of them. + +When the great gov-ern-or took part in their sport, the Indians were +pleased. They loved Brother O-nas more than ever. + + + + +ONE LITTLE BAG OF RICE + + +The first white people that came to this country hardly knew how to get +their living here. They did not know what would grow best in this +country. + +Many of the white people learned to hunt. All the land was covered with +trees. In the woods were many animals whose flesh was good to eat. +There were deer, and bears, and great shaggy buf-fa-loes. There were +rabbits and squirrels. And there were many kinds of birds. The hunters +shot wild ducks, wild turkeys, wild geese, and pigeons. The people also +caught many fishes out of the rivers. + +Then there were animals with fur on their backs. The people killed +these and sold their skins. In this way many made their living. + +Other people spent their time in cutting down the trees. They sawed the +trees into timbers and boards. Some of it they split into staves to +make barrels. They sent the staves and other sorts of timber to other +countries to be sold. In South Car-o-li-na men made tar and pitch out +of the pine trees. + +But there was a wise man in South Car-o-li-na. He was one of those men +that find out better ways of doing. His name was Thomas Smith. + +Thomas Smith had once lived in a large island thousands of miles away +from South Car-o-li-na. In that island he had seen the people raising +rice. He saw that it was planted in wet ground. He said that he would +like to try it in South Car-o-li-na. But he could not get any seed rice +to plant. The rice that people eat is not fit to sow. + +One day a ship came to Charles-ton, where Thomas Smith lived. It had +been driven there by storms. The ship came from the large island where +Smith had seen rice grow. The captain of this ship was an old friend of +Smith. + +The two old friends met once more. Thomas Smith told the captain that +he wanted some rice for seed. The captain called the cook of his ship, +and asked him if he had any. The cook had one little bag of seed rice. +The captain gave this to his friend. + +There was some wet ground at the back of Smith’s garden. In this wet +ground he sowed some of the rice. It grew finely. + +He gathered a good deal of rice in his garden that year. He gave part +of this to his friends. They all sowed it. The next year there was a +great deal of rice. + +After a while the wet land in South Car-o-li-na was turned to rice +fields. Every year many thousands of barrels of rice were sent away to +be sold. + +All this came from one little bag of rice and one wise man. + +[Illustration: Rice Plant.] + + + + +THE STORY OF A WISE WOMAN. + + +You have read how Thomas Smith first raised rice in Car-o-li-na. After +his death there lived in South Car-o-li-na a wise young woman. She +showed the people how to raise another plant. Her name was Eliza Lucas. + +The father of Miss Lucas did not live in Car-o-li-na. He was gov-ern-or +of one of the islands of the West Indies. Miss Lucas was fond of trying +new things. She often got seeds from her father. These she planted in +South Carolina. + +Her father sent her some seeds of the in-di-go plant. She sowed some of +these in March. But there came a frost. The in-di-go plant cannot stand +frost. Her plants all died. + +But Miss Lucas did not give up. She sowed some more seeds in April. +These grew very well until a cut-worm found them. The worm wished to +try new things, too. So he ate off the in-di-go plants. + +But Miss Lucas was one of the people who try, try again. She had lost +her indigo plants twice. Once more she sowed some of the seed. This +time the plants grew very well. + +Miss Lucas wrote to her father about it. He sent her a man who knew how +to get the indigo out of the plant. + +The man tried not to show Miss Lucas how to make the indigo. He did not +wish the people in South Carolina to learn how to make it. He was +afraid his own people would not get so much for their indigo. + +So he would not explain just how it ought to be done. He spoiled the +indigo on purpose. + +But Miss Lucas watched him closely. She found out how the indigo ought +to be made. Some of her father’s land in South Carolina was now planted +with the indigo plants. + +[Illustration: Indigo Plant.] + +Then Miss Lucas was married. She became Mrs. Pinck-ney. Her father gave +her all the indigo growing on his land in South Carolina. It was all +saved for seed. Some of the seed Mrs. Pinck-ney gave to her friends. +Some of it her husband sowed. It all grew, and was made into that blue +dye that we call indigo. When it is used in washing clothes, it is +called bluing. + +In a few years, more than a million pounds of indigo were made in South +Carolina every year. Many people got rich by it. And it was all because +Miss Lucas did not give up. + + + + +FRANKLIN HIS OWN TEACHER. + + +Few people ever knew so many things as Franklin. Men said, “How did he +ever learn so many things?” For he had been a poor boy who had to work +for a living. He could not go to school at all after he was ten years +old. + +His father made soap and candles. Little Ben Frank-lin had to cut wicks +for the candles. He also filled the candle molds. And he sold soap and +candles, and ran on errands. But when he was not at work he spent his +time in reading good books. What little money he got he used to buy +books with. + +He read the old story of “Pil-grim’s Prog-ress,” and liked it so well +that he bought all the other stories by the same man. But as he wanted +more books, and had not money to buy them, he sold all of these books. +The next he bought were some little his-to-ry books. These were made to +sell very cheap, and they were sold by peddlers. He managed to buy +forty or fifty of these little books of his-to-ry. + +Another way that he had of learning was by seeing things with his own +eyes. His father took him to see car-pen-ters at work with their saws +and planes. He also saw masons laying bricks. And he went to see men +making brass and copper kettles. And he saw a man with a turning lathe +making the round legs of chairs. Other men were at work making knives. +Some things people learn out of books, and some things they have to see +for them-selves. + +As he was fond of books, Ben’s father thought that it would be a good +plan to send him to learn to print them. So the boy went to work in his +brother’s printing office. Here he passed his spare time in reading. He +borrowed some books out of the stores where books were sold. He would +sit up a great part of the night sometimes to read one of these books. +He wished to return it when the book-store opened in the morning. One +man who had many books lent to Ben such of his books as he wanted. + +It was part of the bargain that Ben’s brother should pay his board. The +boy offered to board himself if his brother would give him half what it +cost to pay for his board. + +[Illustration: Franklin at Study.] + +His brother was glad to do this, and Ben saved part of the money and +bought books with it. He was a healthy boy, and it did not hurt him to +live mostly on bread and butter. Sometimes he bought a little pie or a +handful of raisins. + +Long before he was a man, people said, “How much the boy knows!” This +was because— + +He did not waste his time. + +He read good books. + +He saw things for himself. + + + + +HOW FRANKLIN FOUND OUT THINGS. + + +Frank-lin thought that ants know how to tell things to one another. He +thought that they talk by some kind of signs. When an ant has found a +dead fly too big for him to drag away, he will run off and get some +other ant to help him. Frank-lin thought that ants have some way of +telling other ants that there is work to do. + +One day he found some ants eating mo-las-ses out of a little jar in a +closet. He shook them out. Then he tied a string to the jar, and hung +it on a nail in the ceiling. But he had not got all the ants out of the +jar. One little ant liked sweet things so well that he staid in the +jar, and kept on eating like a greedy boy. + +[Illustration: Ants talking (magnified)] + +At last when this greedy ant had eaten all that he could, he started to +go home. Frank-lin saw him climb over the rim of the jar. Then the ant +ran down the outside of the jar. But when he got to the bottom, he did +not find any shelf there. He went all round the jar. There was no way +to get down to the floor. The ant ran this way and that way, but he +could not get down. + +[Illustration: An Ants Feeler (magnified)] + +At last the greedy ant thought he would see if he could go up. He +climbed up the string to the ceiling. Then he went down the wall. He +came to his own hole at last, no doubt. + +After a while he got hungry again, perhaps. He thought about that jar +of sweets at the end of a string. Then perhaps he told the other ants. +Maybe he let them know that there was a string by which they could get +down to the jar. + +In about half an hour after the ant had gone up the string, Franklin +saw a swarm of ants going down the string. They marched in a line, one +after another. Soon there were two lines of ants on the string. The +ants in one line were going down to get at the sweet food. The ants in +the other line were marching up the other side of the string to go +home. Do you think that the greedy ant told the other ants about the +jar? + +And did he tell them that there was a string by which an ant could get +there? + +And did he tell it by speaking, or by signs that he made with his +feelers? + +If you watch two ants when they meet, you will see that they touch +their feelers together, as if they said “Good-morning!” + +[Illustration] + + + + +FRANKLIN ASKS THE SUNSHINE SOMETHING. + + +One day Franklin was eating dinner at the house of a friend. The lady +of the house, when she poured out the coffee, found that it was not +hot. + +She said, “I am sorry that the coffee is cold. It is because the +servant forgot to scour the coffee-pot. Coffee gets cold more quickly +when the coffee-pot is not bright.” + +This set Franklin to thinking. He thought that a black or dull thing +would cool more quickly than a white or bright one. That made him think +that a black thing would take in heat more quickly than a white one. + +He wanted to find out if this were true or not. There was no-body who +knew, so there was no-body to ask. But Franklin thought that he would +ask the sunshine. Maybe the sunshine would tell him whether a black +thing would heat more quickly than a white thing. + +But how could he ask the sunshine? + +There was snow on the ground. Franklin spread a white cloth on the +snow. Then he spread a black cloth on the snow near the white one. When +he came to look at them, he saw that the snow under the black cloth +melted away much sooner than that under the white cloth. + +That is the way that the sunshine told him that black would take in +heat more quickly than white. After he had found this out, many people +got white hats to wear in the summer time. A white hat is cooler than a +black one. + +Some time when there is snow on the ground, you can take a white and a +black cloth and ask the sunshine the same question. + + + + +FRANKLIN AND THE KITE. + + +When Franklin wanted to know whether the ants could talk or not, he +asked the ants, and they told him. When he wanted to know some-thing +else, he asked the sunshine about it, as you have read in another +story. That is the way that Franklin came to know so many things. He +knew how to ask questions of every-thing. + +Once he asked the light-ning a question. And the light-ning gave him an +answer. + +Before the time of Franklin, people did not know what light-ning was. +They did not know what made the thunder. Franklin thought much about +it. At last he proved what it was. He asked the lightning a question, +and made it tell what it was. To tell you this story, I shall have to +use one big word. Maybe it is too big for some of my little friends +that will read this book. Let us divide it into parts. Then you will +not be afraid of it. The big word is e-lec-tric-i-ty. + +Those of you who live in towns have seen the streets lighted by +e-lec-tric-i-ty. But in Franklin’s time there were no such lights. +People knew very little about this strange thing with a big name. + +But Franklin found out many things about it that nobody had ever known +before. He began to think that the little sparks he got from +e-lec-tric-i-ty were small flashes of lightning. He thought that the +little cracking sound of these sparks was a kind of baby thunder. + +So he thought that he would try to catch a little bit of lightning. +Perhaps he could put it into one of the little bottles used to hold +e-lec-tric-i-ty. Then if it behaved like e-lec-tric-i-ty, he would know +what it was. But catching lightning is not easy. How do you think he +did it? + +First he made a kite. It was not a kite just like a boy’s kite. He +wanted a kite that would fly when it rained. Rain would spoil a paper +kite in a minute. So Franklin used a silk hand-ker-chief to cover his +kite, instead of paper. + +[Illustration: Franklin’s Discovery.] + +He put a little sharp-pointed wire at the top of his kite. This was a +kind of lightning rod to draw the lightning into the kite. His kite +string was a common hemp string. To this he tied a key, because +lightning will follow metal. The end of the string that he held in his +hand was a silk ribbon, which was tied to the hemp string of the kite. +E-lec-tric-ity will not follow silk. + +One night when there was a storm coming, he went out with his son. They +stood under a cow shed, and he sent his kite up in the air. + +[Illustration] + +After a while he held his knuckle to the key. A tiny spark flashed +between the key and his knuckle. It was a little flash of lightning. + +Then he took his little bottle fixed to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. He filled +it with the e-lec-tric-i-ty that came from the key. He carried home a +bottle of lightning. So he found out what made it thunder and lighten. + +After that he used to bring the lightning into his house on rods and +wires. He made the lightning ring bells and do many other strange +things. + + + + +FRANKLIN’S WHISTLE. + + +When Franklin was an old man, he wrote a cu-ri-ous letter. In that +letter he told a story. It was about some-thing that happened to him +when he was a boy. + +[Illustration] + +Here is the story put into verses, so that you will re-member it +better. Some day you can read the story as Franklin told it himself. +You will hear people say, “He paid too much for the whistle.” The +saying came from this story. + + + + +TOO MUCH FOR THE WHISTLE + + + As Ben with pennies in his pocket + Went strolling down the street, + “Toot-toot! toot-toot!” there came a whistle + From a boy he chanced to meet, + + Whistling fit to burst his buttons, + Blowing hard and stepping high. + Then Benny said, “I’ll buy your whistle;” + But “Toot! toot-toot!” was the reply. + + But Benny counted out his pennies, + The whistling boy began to smile; + With one last toot he gave the whistle + To Ben, and took his penny pile. + + Now homeward goes the whistling Benny, + As proud as any foolish boy, + And in his pockets not a penny, + But in his mouth a noisy toy. + + “Ah, Benny, Benny!” cries his mother, + “I cannot stand your ugly noise.” + “Stop, Benny, Benny!” says his father, + “I cannot talk, you drown my voice.” + + At last the whistling boy re-mem-bers + How much his money might have bought + “Too many pennies for a whistle,” + Is little Benny’s ugly thought. + + Too many pennies for a whistle + Is what we all pay, you and I, + Just for a little foolish pleasure + Pay a price that’s quite too high. + + + + +JOHN STARK AND THE INDIANS. + + +John Stark was a famous gen-er-al in the Rev-o-lu-tion. But this story +is not about the Rev-o-lu-tion. It is about Stark before he became a +soldier. + +When he was a young man, Stark went into the woods. His brother and two +other young men were with him. They lived in a camp. It was far away +from any houses. + +The young men set traps for animals in many places. They wanted to +catch the animals that have fur on them. They wanted to get the skins +to sell. + +The Indians were at war with the white people. One day the young men +saw the tracks of Indians. Then they knew that it was not safe for them +to stay in the woods any longer. They began to get ready to go home. + +John Stark went out to bring in the traps set for animals. The Indians +found him, and made him a pris-on-er. They asked him where his friends +were. + +Stark did not wish his friends to be taken. So he pointed the wrong +way. He took the Indians a long way from the other young men. + +But John Stark’s friends did not know that he was a pris-on-er. When he +did not come back, they thought that he had lost his way. They fired +their guns to let him know where they were. + +When the Indians heard the guns, they knew where the other hunters +were. They went down to the river, and waited for them. When one of the +men came down, they caught him. + +Then John Stark’s brother and the other man came down the river in a +boat. The Indians told Stark to call them. They wanted them to come +over where the Indians were. Then they could take them. + +John knew that the Indians were cruel. He knew that if he did not do +what they told him to, they might kill him. But he wished to save his +brother. He called to his brother to row for the other shore. + +When they turned toward the other shore, the Indians fired at them. But +Stark knocked up two of their guns. They did not hit the white men. +Then some of the other Indians fired. Stark knocked up their guns also. +But the man that was with his brother was killed. + +John now called to his brother, “Run! for all the Indians’ guns are +empty.” + +His brother got away. The Indians were very angry with John. They did +not kill him. But they gave him a good beating. These Indians were from +Can-a-da. They took their pris-on-ers to their own village. When they +were coming home, they shouted to let the people know that they had +prisoners. + +[Illustration: Stark running the Gauntlet] + +The young Indian war-ri-ors stood in two rows in the village. Each +prisoner had to run between these two rows of Indians. As he passed, +every one of the Indians hit him as hard as he could with a stick, or a +club, or a stone. + +The young man who was with Stark was badly hurt in running between +these lines. But John Stark knew the Indians. He knew that they liked a +brave man. + +When it came his turn to run, he snatched a club from one of the +Indians. With this club he fought his way down the lines. He hit hard, +now on this side, and now on that. The young Indians got out of his +way. The old Indians who were looking on sat and laughed at the others. +They said that Stark was a brave man. + +One day the Indians gave him a hoe and told him to hoe corn. He knew +that the Indian war-ri-ors would not work. They think it a shame for a +man to work. Their work is left for slaves and women. So Stark +pre-tend-ed that he did not know how to hoe. He dug up the corn instead +of the weeds. Then he threw the hoe into the river. He said, “That is +work for slaves and women.” + +Then the Indians were pleased with him. They called him the young +chief. + +After a while some white men paid the Indians a hundred and three +dollars to let Stark go home. They charged more for him than for the +other man, because they thought that he must be a young chief. Stark +went hunting again. He had to get some furs to pay back the money the +men had paid the Indians for him. He took good care that the Indians +should not catch him again. + +He af-ter-wards became a great fighter against the Indians. He had +learned their ways while he was among them. He knew better how to fight +them than almost any-body else. + +In the Rev-o-lu-tion he was a gen-er-al. He fought the British at +Ben-ning-ton, and won a great vic-to-ry. + + + + +A GREAT GOOD MAN. + + +Some men are great soldiers. Some are great law-makers. Some men write +great books. Some men make great in-ven-tions. Some men are great +speakers. + +Now you are going to read about a man that was great in none of these +things. He was not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. He was never +rich. He was a poor school-teacher. He never held any office. + +And yet he was a great man. He was great for his goodness. + +He was born in France. But most of his life was passed in +Phil-a-del-phi-a before the Rev-o-lu-tion. + +He was twenty-five years old when he became a school-teacher. He +thought that he could do more good in teaching than in any other way. + +School-masters in his time were not like our teachers. Children were +treated like little animals. In old times the school-master was a +little king. He walked and talked as if he knew every-thing. He wanted +all the children to be afraid of him. + +But Ben-e-zet was not that kind of man. He was very gentle. He treated +the children more kindly than their fathers and mothers did. Nobody in +this country had ever seen a teacher like him. + +He built a play-room for the children of his school. He used to take +them to this room during school time for a little a-muse-ment. He +man-aged each child as he found best. Some he could persuade to be +good. Some he shamed into being good. But this was very dif-fer-ent +from the cruel beatings that other teachers of that time gave their +pupils. + +Of course the children came to love him very much. After they grew to +be men and women, they kept their love for the good little +schoolmaster. As long as they lived they listened to his advice. + +There were no good school-books in his time. He wrote some little books +to make learning easier to his pupils. He taught them many things not +in their books. He taught them to be kind to brutes, and gentle with +one another. He taught them to be noble. He made them despise every +kind of meanness. + +He was a great teacher. That is better than being a great soldier. + +Ben-e-zet was a good man in many ways. He was the friend of all poor +people. Once he found a poor man suf-fer-ing with cold for want of a +coat. He took off his own coat in the street and put it on the poor +man, and then went home in his shirt sleeves. + +In those days negroes were stolen from Af-ri-ca to be sold into +A-mer-i-ca. Ben-e-zet wrote little books against this wrong. He sent +these books over all the world almost. He also tried to persuade the +white men of his own country to be honest and kind with the Indians. +Great men in other countries were pleased with his books. They wrote +him letters. When any of them came to this country, they went to see +him. They wanted to see a man that was good to everybody. His house was +a plain one. But great men liked to sit at the table of the good +schoolmaster. + +There was war between the English and French at that time. Can-a-da +belonged to the French. Our country belonged to the English. There was +a country called A-ca-di-a. It was a part of what is now No-va +Sco-ti-a. The people of A-ca-di-a were French. + +[Illustration: Departure of the Acadians] + +The English took the A-ca-di-ans away from their homes. They sent them +to various places. Many families were divided. The poor A-ca-di-ans +lost their homes and all that they had. + +Many hundreds of these people were sent to Phil-a-del-phi-a. Benezet +became their friend. As he was born in France, he could speak their +lan-guage. He got a large house built for some of them to stay in. He +got food and clothing for them. He helped them to get work, and did +them good in many other ways. + +One day Benezet’s wife came to him with a troubled face. She said, +“There have been thieves in the house. Two of my blankets have been +stolen.” + +“Never mind, my dear,” said Benezet, “I gave them to some of the poor +A-ca-di-ans.” + +One old Acadian was afraid of Benezet. He did not see why Benezet +should take so much trouble for other people. He thought that Benezet +was only trying to get a chance to sell the Acadians for slaves. When +Benezet heard this, he had a good laugh. + +Many years after this the Rev-o-lu-tion broke out. It brought trouble +to many people. Benezet helped as many as he could. + +After a while the British army took Phil-a-del-phi-a. They sent their +soldiers to stay in the houses of the people. The people had to take +care of the soldiers. This was very hard for the poor people. + +One day Benezet saw a poor woman. Her face showed that she was in +trouble. + +“Friend, what is the matter?” Benezet said to her. She told him that +six soldiers of the British army had been sent to stay in her house. +She was a washer-woman. But while the soldiers filled up the house she +could not do any washing. She and her children were in want. + +Benezet went right away to see the gen-er-al that was in command of the +soldiers. The good man was in such a hurry that he forgot to get a +pass. The soldiers at the gen-er-al’s door would not let him go in. + +At last some one told the gen-er-al that a queer-looking fellow wanted +to see him. + +“Let him come up,” said the general. + +The odd little man came in. He told the general all about the troubles +of the poor washer-woman. The general sent word that the soldiers must +not stay any longer in her house. + +The general liked the kind little man. He told him to come to see him +again. He told the soldiers at his door to let Benezet come in +when-ever he wished to. + +Soon after the Rev-o-lu-tion was over, Benezet was taken ill. When the +people of Phil-a-del-phi-a heard that he was ill, they gathered in +crowds about his house. Every-body loved him. Every-body wanted to know +whether he was better or not. At last the doctors said he could not get +well. Then the people wished to see the good man once more. The doors +were opened. The rooms and halls of his house were filled with people +coming to say good-bye to Benezet, and going away again. + +When he was buried, it seemed as if all Phil-a-del-phi-a had come to +his fu-ner-al. The rich and the poor, the black and the white, crowded +the streets. The city had never seen so great a fu-ner-al. + +In the company was an A-mer-i-can general. He said, “I would rather be +An-tho-ny Benezet in that coffin than General Wash-ing-ton in all his +glory.” + + + + +PUTNAM AND THE WOLF. + + +Putnam was a brave soldier. He fought many battles against the Indians. +After that he became a general in the Revolution. But this is a story +of his battle with a wolf. It took place when he was a young man, +before he was a soldier. + +Putnam lived in Con-nect-i-cut. In the woods there were still a few +wolves. One old wolf came to Putnam’s neigh-bor-hood every winter. She +always brought a family of young wolves with her. + +The hunters would always kill the young wolves. But they could not find +the old mother wolf. She knew how to keep out of the way. + +The farmers tried to catch her in their traps. But she was too cunning. +She had had one good lesson when she was young. She had put the toes of +one foot into a steel trap. The trap had snipped them off. After that +she was more careful. + +One winter night she went out to get some meat. She came to Putnam’s +flock of sheep and goats. She killed some of them. She found it great +fun. + +There were no dogs about. The poor sheep had nobody to protect them. So +the old wolf kept on killing. One sheep was enough for her supper. But +she killed the rest just for sport. She killed seventy sheep and goats +that night. + +Putnam and his friends set out to find the old sheep killer. There were +six men of them. They agreed that two of them should hunt for her at a +time. Then another two should begin as soon as the first two should +stop. So she would be hunted day and night. + +The hunters found her track in the snow. There could be no mistake +about it. The track made by one of her feet was shorter than those made +by the other feet. That was because one of her feet had been caught in +a trap. + +The hunters found that the old wolf had gone a long way off. Perhaps +she felt guilty. She must have thought that she would be hunted. She +had trotted away for a whole night. + +Then she turned and went back again. She was getting hungry by this +time. She wanted some more sheep. + +The men followed her tracks back again. The dogs drove her into a hole. +It was not far from Putnam’s house. + +All the farmers came to help catch her. They sent the dogs into the +cave where the wolf was. But the wolf bit the dogs, and drove them out +again. + +Then the men put a pile of straw in the mouth of the cave. They set the +straw on fire. It filled the cave with smoke. But Mrs. Wolf did not +come out. + +Then they burned brim-stone in the cave. It must have made the wolf +sneeze. But the cave was deep. She went as far in as she could, and +staid there. She thought that the smell of brimstone was not so bad as +the dogs and men who wanted to kill her. + +Putnam wanted to send his negro into the cave to drive out the wolf. +But the negro thought that he would rather stay out. + +Then Putnam said that he would go in himself. He tied a rope to his +legs. Then he got some pieces of birch-bark. He set fire to these. He +knew that wild animals do not like to face a fire. + +He got down on his hands and knees. He held the blazing bark in his +hand. He crawled through the small hole into the cave. There was not +room for him to stand up. + +At first the cave went downward into the ground. Then it was level a +little way. Then it went upward. At the very back of this part of the +cave was the wolf. Putnam crawled up until he could see the wolf’s +eyes. + +When the wolf saw the fire, she gave a sudden growl. Putnam jerked the +rope that was tied to his leg. The men outside thought that the wolf +had caught him. They pulled on the other end of the rope. + +The men pulled as fast as they could. When they had drawn Putnam out, +his clothes were torn. He was badly scratched by the rocks. + +He now got his gun. He held it in one hand. He held the burning +birch-bark in the other. He crawled into the cave again. + +When the wolf saw him coming again, she was very angry. She snapped her +teeth. She got ready to spring on him. She meant to kill him as she had +killed his sheep. Putnam fired at her head. As soon as his gun went +off, he jerked the rope. His friends pulled him out. + +He waited awhile for the smoke of his gun to clear up. Then he went in +once more. He wanted to see if the wolf was dead. + +He found her lying down. He tapped her nose with his birch-bark. She +did not move. He took hold of her. Then he jerked the rope. + +This time the men saw him come out, bringing the dead wolf. Now the +sheep would have some peace. + +[Illustration] + + + + +WASHINGTON AND HIS HATCHET + + +It was Ar-bor Day in the Mos-sy Hill School, Johnny Little-john had to +speak a piece that had some-thing to do with trees. He thought it would +be a good plan to say some-thing about the little cherry tree that +Washington spoiled with his hatch-et, when he was a little boy. This is +what he said: + +[Illustration] + +He had a hatch-et—little George— + A hatch-et bright and new, +And sharp enough to cut a stick— + A little stick—in two. + +He hacked and whacked and whacked and hacked, + This sturd-y little man; +He hacked a log and hacked a fence, + As round about he ran. + +He hacked his father’s cher-ry tree + And made an ug-ly spot; +The bark was soft, the hatch-et sharp, + And little George forgot. + +You know the rest. The father frowned + And asked the rea-son why; +You know the good old story runs + He could not tell a lie. + +The boy that chopped that cher-ry tree + Soon grew to be a youth; +At work and books he hacked away, + And still he told the truth: + +The youth became a fa-mous man, + Above six feet in height, +And when he had good work to do + He hacked with all his might. + +He fought the ar-mies that the king + Had sent across the sea; +He bat-tled up and down the land + To set his country free. + +For seven long years he, hacked and whacked + With all his might and main +Until the Brit-ish sailed away + And did not come again. + + +[Illustration] + + + + +HOW BENNY WEST LEARNED TO BE A PAINTER. + + +In old times there lived in Penn-syl-va-ni-a a little fellow whose name +was Ben-ja-min West. He lived in a long stone house. + +[Illustration: Painting Baby’s Portrait] + +He had never seen a picture. The country was new, and there were not +many pictures in it. Benny’s father was a Friend or Quaker. The Friends +of that day did not think that pictures were useful things to make or +to have. Before he was seven years old, this little boy began to draw +pictures. One day he was watching the cradle of his sister’s child. The +baby smiled. Benny was so pleased with her beauty, that he made a +picture of her in red and black ink. The picture of the baby pleased +his mother when she saw it. That was very pleasant to the boy. + +He made other pictures. At school he used to draw with a pen before he +could write. He made pictures of birds and of animals. Sometimes he +would draw flowers. + +[Illustration: Flower and Fruit of the Poke-Berry.] + +He liked to draw so well, that sometimes he forgot to do his work. His +father sent him to work in the field one day. The father went out to +see how well he was doing his work. Benny was no-where to be found. At +last his father saw him sitting under a large poke-weed. He was making +pictures. He had squeezed the juice out of some poke-berries. The juice +of poke-berries is deep red. With this the boy had made his pictures. +When the father looked at them, he was surprised. There were portraits +of every member of the family. His father knew every picture. + +Up to this time Benny had no paints nor any brushes. The Indians had +not all gone away from that neigh-bor-hood. The Indians paint their +faces with red and yellow colors. These colors they make them-selves. +Sometimes they prepare them from the juice of some plant. Sometimes +they get them by finding red or yellow earth. Some of the Indians can +make rough pictures with these colors. + +The Indians near the house of Benny’s father must have liked the boy. +They showed him how to make red and yellow colors for himself. He got +some of his mother’s indigo to make blue. He now had red, yellow, and +blue. By mixing these three, the other colors that he wanted could be +made. + +But he had no brush to paint with. He took some long hairs from the +cat’s tail. Of these he made his brushes. He used so many of the cat’s +hairs, that her tail began to look bare. Everybody in the house began +to wonder what was the matter with pussy’s tail. At last Benny told +where he got his brushes. + +[Illustration: Making a Paint Brush.] + +A cousin of Benny’s came from the city on a visit. He saw some of the +boy’s drawings. When he went home, he sent Benny a box of paints. With +the paints were some brushes. And there was some canvas such as +pictures are painted on. And that was not all. There were in the box +six beautiful en-grav-ings. + +The little painter now felt himself rich. He was so happy that he could +hardly sleep at all. At night he put the box that held his treasures on +a chair by his bed. As soon as daylight came, he carried the precious +box to the garret. The garret of the long stone house was his stu-di-o. +Here he worked away all day long. He did not go to school at all. +Perhaps he forgot that there was any school. Perhaps the little artist +could not tear himself away from his work. + +But the schoolmaster missed him. He came to ask if Benny was ill. The +mother was vexed when she found that he had staid away from school. She +went to look for the naughty boy. After a while she found the little +truant. He was hard at work in his garret. She saw what he had been +doing. He had not copied any of his new en-grav-ings. He had made up a +new picture by taking one person out of one en-grav-ing, and another +out of another. He had copied these so that they made a picture that he +had thought of for himself. + +His mother could not find it in her heart to punish him. She was too +much pleased with the picture he was making. This picture was not +finished. But his mother would not let him finish it. She was afraid he +would spoil it if he did anything more on it. + +The good people called Friends did not like the making of pictures, as +I said. But they thought that Benny West had a talent that he ought to +use. So he went to Phil-a-del-phi-a to study his art. After a while he +sailed away to It-a-ly to see the pictures that great artists had +painted. + +At last he settled in England. The King of England was at that time the +king of this country too. The king liked West’s pictures. West became +the king’s painter. He came to be the most famous painter in England. + +He liked to remember his boyish work. He liked to remember the time +when he was a little Quaker boy making his paints of poke-juice and +Indian colors. + + + + +WASHINGTON’S CHRISTMAS GIFT. + + +Washington was fighting to set this country free. But the army that the +King of England sent to fight him was stronger than Washington’s army. +Washington was beaten and driven out of Brook-lyn. Then he had to leave +New York. After that, he marched away into New Jersey to save his army +from being taken. At last he crossed the Del-a-ware River. Here he was +safe for a while. + +Some of the Hes-sian soldiers that the king had hired to fight against +the Americans came to Trenton. Trenton is on the Del-a-ware River. + +Washington and his men were on the other side of the Del-a-ware River +from the Hes-sians. Washington’s men were dis-cour-aged. They had been +driven back all the way from Brook-lyn. It was winter, and they had no +warm houses to stay in. They had not even warm clothes. They were +dressed in old clothes that people had given them. Some of them were +bare-footed in this cold weather. + +The Hes-sians and other soldiers of the king were waiting for the river +to freeze over. Then they would march across on the ice. They meant to +fight Washington once more, and break up his army. But Washington was +thinking about something too. + +He was waiting for Christmas. He knew that the Hessian soldiers on the +other side of the river would eat and drink a great deal on Christmas +Day. + +[Illustration: Marching to Trenton.] + +The afternoon of Christmas came. The Hessians were singing and drinking +in Trenton. But Washington was marching up the river bank. Some of his +bare-foot men left blood marks on the snow as they marched. + +The men and cannons were put into flat boats. These boats were pushed +across the river with poles. There were many great pieces of ice in the +river. But all night long the flat boats were pushed across and then +back again for more men. It was three o’clock on the morning after +Christmas when the last Americans crossed the river. It was hailing and +snowing, and it was very cold. Two or three of the soldiers were frozen +to death. + +It was eight o’clock in the morning when Washington got to Trenton. The +Hessians were sleeping soundly. The sound of the American drums waked +them. They jumped out of their beds. They ran into the streets. They +tried to fight the Americans. + +But it was too late. Washington had already taken their cannons. His +men were firing these at the Hessians. The Hessians ran into the fields +to get away. But the Americans caught them. + +The battle was soon over. Washington had taken nine hundred prisoners. + +This was called the battle of Trenton. It gave great joy to all the +Americans. It was Washington’s Christmas gift to the country. + + + + +HOW WASHINGTON GOT OUT OF A TRAP. + + +After the battle of Trenton, Washington went back across the Delaware +River. He had not men enough to fight the whole British army. + +But the Americans were glad when they heard that he had beaten the +Hessians. They sent him more soldiers. Then he went back across the +river to Trenton again. + +There was a British general named Corn-wal-lis. He marched to Trenton. +He fought against Washington. Corn-wal-lis had more men than Washington +had. Night came, and they could not see to fight. There was a little +creek between the two armies. + +Washington had not boats enough to carry his men across the river. +Corn-wal-lis was sure to beat him if they should fight a battle the +next morning. + +Cornwallis said, “I will catch the fox in the morning.” + +He called Washington a fox. He thought he had him in a trap. Cornwallis +sent for some more soldiers to come from Prince-ton in the morning. He +wanted them to help him catch the fox. + +But foxes sometimes get out of traps. + +When it was dark, Washington had all his camp fires lighted. He put men +to digging where the British could hear them. He made Cornwallis think +that he was throwing up banks of earth and getting ready to fight in +the morning. + +But Washington did not stay in Trenton. He did not wish to be caught +like a fox in a trap. He could not get across the river. But he knew a +road that went round the place where Cornwallis and his army were. He +took that road and got behind the British army. + +It was just like John waiting to catch James. James is in the house. +John is waiting at the front door to catch James when he comes out. But +James slips out by the back way. John hears him call “Hello!” James has +gone round behind him and got away. + +Washington went out of Trenton in the darkness. You might say that he +marched out by the back door. He left Cornwallis watching the front +door. The Americans went away quietly. They left a few men to keep up +the fires, and make a noise like digging. Before morning these slipped +away too. + +When morning came, Cornwallis went to catch his fox. But the fox was +not there. He looked for the Americans. There was the place where they +had been digging. Their camp fires were still burning. But where had +they gone? + +Cornwallis thought that Washington had crossed the river by some means. +But soon he heard guns firing away back toward Princeton. He thought +that it must be thunder. But he found that it was a battle. Then he +knew that Washington had gone to Princeton. + +Washington had marched all night. When he got to Princeton, he met the +British coming out to go to Trenton. They were going to help Cornwallis +to catch Washington. But Washington had come to Princeton to catch +them. He had a hard fight with the British at Princeton. But at last he +beat them. + +When Cornwallis knew that the Americans had gone to Princeton, he +hurried there to help his men. But it was too late. Washington had +beaten the British at Princeton, and had gone on into the hills, where +he was safe. + +The fox had got out of the trap. + + + + +WASHINGTON’S LAST BATTLE. + + +Washington had been fighting for seven years to drive the British +soldiers out of this country. But there were still two strong British +armies in America. + +One of these armies was in New York. It had been there for years. The +other army was far away at Yorktown in Virginia. The British general at +Yorktown was Cornwallis. You have read how Washington got away from him +at Trenton. + +The King of France had sent ships and soldiers to help the Americans. +But still Washington had not enough men to take New York from the +British. Yet he went on getting ready to attack the British in New +York. He had ovens built to bake bread for his men. He bought hay for +his horses. He had roads built to draw his cannons on. + +He knew that the British in New York would hear about what he was +doing. He wanted them to think that he meant to come to New York and +fight them. When the British heard what the Americans were doing, they +got ready for the coming of Washington and the French. All at once they +found that Washington had gone. He and his men had marched away. The +French soldiers that had come to help him had gone with him. + +Nobody knew what it meant. Washington’s own men did not know where they +were going. They went from New Jersey into Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they +marched across Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they went into Mary-land. They +marched across that State, and then they went into Vir-gin-i-a. + +By this time everybody could tell where Washington was going. People +could see that he was going straight to York-town. They knew that +Washington was going to fight his old enemy at York-town. + +But he had kept his secret long enough. The British in New York could +not send help to Cornwallis. It was too late. The French ships sailed +to Vir-gin-i-a, and shut up Yorktown on the side of the sea. +Washington’s men shut it up on the side of the land. They built great +banks of earth round it. On these banks of earth they put cannons. + +The British could not get away. They fought bravely. But the Americans +and French came closer and closer. + +Then the British tried to fight their way out. But they were driven +back. Then Cornwallis tried to get his men across the river. He wanted +to get out by the back door, as Washington had done. But the Americans +on the other side of the river drove them back again. Washington had +now caught Cornwallis in a trap. + +The Americans fired red-hot cannon balls into Yorktown. These set the +houses on fire. At last Cornwallis had to give up. The British marched +out and laid down their guns and swords. + +The British army in New York could not fight the Americans by itself. +So the British gave it up. Then there was peace after the long war. The +British pulled down the British flag and sailed away. The country was +free at last. + + + + +MARION’S TOWER. + + +General Mar-i-on was one of the best fighters in the Revolution. He was +a homely little man. He was also a very good man. Another general said, +“Mar-i-on is good all over.” + +The American army had been beaten in South Car-o-li-na. Mar-i-on was +sent there to keep the British from taking the whole country. + +Marion got to-geth-er a little army. His men had nothing but rough +clothes to wear. They had no guns but the old ones they had used to +shoot wild ducks and deer with. + +Marion’s men wanted swords. There were no swords to be had. But Marion +sent men to take the long saws out of the saw mills. These were taken +to black-smiths. The black-smiths cut the saws into pieces. These +pieces they hammered out into long, sharp swords. + +Marion had not so many men as the British. He had no cannon. He could +not build forts. He could not stay long in one place, for fear the +British should come with a strong army and take him. He and his men hid +in the dark woods. Sometimes he changed his hiding place suddenly. Even +his own friends had hard work to find him. + +From the dark woods he would come out suddenly. He would attack some +party of British soldiers. When the battle was over, he would go back +to the woods again. + +When the British sent a strong army to catch him, he could not be +found. But soon he would be fighting the British in some new place. He +was always playing hide and seek. + +The British called him the Swamp Fox. That was because he was so hard +to catch. They could not conquer the country until they could catch +Marion. And they never could catch the Swamp Fox. At one time Marion +came out of the woods to take a little British fort. This fort was on +the top of a high mound. It was one of the mounds built a long time ago +by the Indians. + +Marion put his men all round the fort, so that the men in the fort +could not get out to get water. He thought that they would have to give +up. But the men in the fort dug a well inside the fort. Then Marion had +to think of another plan. + +Marion’s men went to the woods and cut down stout poles. They got a +great many poles. When night came, they laid a row of poles along-side +one another on the ground. Then they laid another row across these. +Then they laid another row on top of the last ones, and across the +other way again. + +[Illustration: Marion’s Tower.] + +They laid a great many rows of poles one on top of another. They +crossed them this way and that. As the night went on, the pile grew +higher. Still they handed poles to top of the pile. + +Before morning came, they had built a kind of tower. It was higher than +the Indian mound. + +As soon as it was light, the men on Marion’s tower began to shoot. The +British looked out. They saw a great tower with men on it. The men +could shoot down into the fort. The British could not stand it. They +had to give up. They were taken prisoners. + + + + +CLARK AND HIS MEN. + + +At the time of the Revolution there were but few people living on the +north side of the O-hi-o River. But there were many Indians there. +These Indians killed a great many white people in Ken-tuck-y. + +The Indians were sent by British officers to do this killing. There was +a British fort at Vincennes in what is now In-di-an-a. There was +another British fort or post at Kas-kas-ki-a in what is now the State +of Il-li-nois. + +George Rogers Clark was an American colonel. He wanted to stop the +murder of the settlers by the Indians. He thought that he could do it +by taking the British posts. + +He had three hundred men. They went down the O-hi-o River in boats. +They landed near the mouth of the O-hi-o River. Then they marched a +hundred and thirty miles to Kas-kas-ki-a. + +Kas-kas-ki-a was far away from the Americans. The people there did not +think that the Americans would come so far to attack them. When Clark +got there, they were all asleep. He marched in and took the town before +they waked up. + +The people living in Kaskaskia were French. By treating them well, +Clark made them all friendly to the Americans. + +When the British at Vin-cennes heard that Clark had taken Kaskaskia, +they thought that they would take it back again. But it was winter. All +the streams were full of water. They could not march till spring. Then +they would gather the Indians to help them, and take Clark and his men. + +But Clark thought that he would not wait to be taken. He thought that +he would just go and take the British. If he could manage to get to +Vin-cennes in the winter, he would not be expected. + +Clark started with a hundred and seventy men. The country was nearly +all covered with water. The men were in the wet almost all the time. +Clark had hard work to keep his men cheerful. He did everything he +could to amuse them. + +They had to wade through deep rivers. The water was icy cold. But Clark +made a joke of it. He kept them laughing whenever he could. + +At one place the men refused to go through the freezing water. Clark +could not per-suade them to cross the river. He called to him a tall +sol-dier. He was the very tallest man in Clark’s little army. Clark +said to him, “Take the little drummer boy on your shoulders.” + +The little drummer was soon seated high on the shoulders of the tall +man. “Now go ahead!” said Clark. + +The soldier marched into the water. The little drummer beat a march on +his drum. Clark cried out, “Forward!” Then he plunged into the water +after the tall soldier. All the men went in after him. They were soon +safe on the other side. + +[Illustration] + +At another river the little drummer was floated over on the top of his +drum. At last the men drew near to Vin-cennes. They could hear the +morning and evening gun in the British fort. But the worst of the way +was yet to pass. The Wa-bash River had risen over its banks. The water +was five miles wide. The men marched from one high ground to another +through the cold water. They caught an Indian with a canoe. In this +they got across the main river. But there was more water to cross. The +men were so hungry that some of them fell down in the water. They had +to be carried out. + +Clark’s men got frightened at last, and then they had no heart to go +any farther. But Clark remembered what the Indians did when they went +to war. He took a little gun-powder in his hand. He poured water on it. +Then he rubbed it on his face. It made his face black. + +With his face blackened like an Indian’s, he gave an Indian war-whoop. +The men followed him again. + +The men were tired and hungry. But they soon reached dry ground. They +were now in sight of the fort. Clark marched his little army round and +round in such a way as to make it seem that he had many men with him. +He wrote a fierce letter to the British com-mand-er. He behaved like a +general with a large army. + +After some fighting, the British com-mand-er gave up. Clark’s little +army took the British fort. This brave action saved to our country the +land that lies between the Ohio River and the Lakes. It stopped the +sending of Indians to kill the settlers in the West. + + + + +DANIEL BOONE AND HIS GRAPEVINE SWING. + + +Daniel Boone was the first settler of Ken-tuck-y. He knew all about +living in the woods. He knew how to hunt the wild animals. He knew how +to fight Indians, and how to get away from them. + +Nearly all the men that came with him to Kentucky the first time were +killed. One was eaten by wolves. Some of them were killed by Indians. +Some of them went into the woods and never came back. Nobody knows what +killed them. + +Only Boone and his brother were left alive. They needed some powder and +some bullets. They wanted some horses. Boone’s brother went back across +the mountains to get these things. Boone staid in his little cabin all +alone. + +Boone could hear the wolves howl near his cabin at night. He heard the +panthers scream in the woods. But he did not mind being left all alone +in these dark forests. The Indians came to his cabin when he was away. +He did not want to see these vis-it-ors. He did not dare to sleep in +his cabin all the time. Sometimes he slept under a rocky cliff. +Sometimes he slept in a cane-brake. A cane-brake is a large patch of +growing canes such as fishing rods are made of. + +Once a mother bear tried to kill him. He fired his gun at her, but the +bullet did not kill her. The bear ran at him. He held his long knife +out in his hand. The bear ran against it and was killed. + +He made long journeys alone in the woods. One day he looked back +through the trees and saw four Indians. They were fol-low-ing Boone’s +tracks. They did not see him. He turned this way and that. But the +Indians still fol-lowed his tracks. + +He went over a little hill. Here he found a wild grape-vine. It was a +very long vine, reaching to the top of a high tree. There are many such +vines in the Southern woods. Children cut such vines off near the +roots. Then they use them for swings. + +Boone had swung on grape-vines when he was a boy. He now thought of a +way to break his tracks. He cut the wild grape-vine off near the root. +Then he took hold of it. He sprang out into the air with all his might. +The great swing carried him far out as it swung. Then he let go. He +fell to the ground, and then he ran away in a dif-fer-ent di-rec-tion +from that in which he had been going. + +When the Indians came to the place, they could not find his tracks. +They could not tell which way he had gone. He got to his cabin in +safety. + +Boone had now been alone for many months. His brother did not get back +at the time he had set for coming. Boone thought that his brother might +have been killed. Boone had not tasted anything but meat since he left +home. He had to get his food by shooting animals in the woods. By this +time he had hardly any powder or bullets left. + +[Illustration: Boone on the Grapevine Swing] + +One evening he sat by his cabin. He heard some one coming. He thought +that it might be Indians. He heard the steps of horses. He looked +through the trees. He saw his brother riding on one horse, and leading +another. The other horse was loaded with powder and bullets and +clothes, and other things that Boone needed. + + + + +DANIEL BOONE’S DAUGHTER AND HER FRIENDS. + + +Daniel Boone and his brother picked out a good place in Ken-tuck-y to +settle. Then they went home to North Car-o-li-na. They took with them +such things as were cu-ri-ous and val-u-a-ble. These were the skins of +animals they had killed, and no doubt some of the heads and tails. + +Boone was restless. He had seen Kentucky and he did not wish to settle +down to the life of North Carolina. + +In two years Boone sold his farm in North Carolina and set out for +Kentucky. He took with him his wife and children and two brothers. Some +of their neighbors went with them. They trav-eled by pack train. All +their goods were packed on horses. + +When they reached the place on the Kentucky River that Boone had chosen +for a home they built a fort of log houses. These cabins all stood +round a square. The backs of the houses were outward. There was no door +or window in the back of a house. The outer walls were thus shut up. +They made the place a fort. The houses at the four corners were a +little taller and stronger than the others. There were gates leading +into the fort. These gates were kept shut at night. + +In the evening the people danced and amused themselves in the square. +Indians could not creep up and attack them. + +When the men went out to feed the horses and cows they carried their +guns. They walked softly and turned their eyes quickly from point to +point to see if Indians were hiding near. They held their guns so they +could shoot quickly. + +The women and children had to stay very near the fort so they could run +in if an Indian came in sight. + +Daniel Boone had a daughter named Je-mi-ma. She was about fourteen +years old. She had two friends named Frances and Betsey Cal-lo-way. +Frances Galloway was about the same age as Jemima. + +One summer afternoon these three girls went out of the fort. They went +to the river and got into a canoe. It was not far from the fort. They +felt safe. They laughed and talked and splashed the water with their +paddles. + +The cur-rent carried them slowly near the other shore. They could still +see the fort. They did not think of danger. + +Trees and bushes grew thick down to the edge of the river. Five strong +Indians were hiding in the bushes. + +One Indian crept care-ful-ly through the bushes. He made no more noise +than a snake. When he got to the edge of the water he put out his long +arm and caught hold of the rope that hung down from the canoe. In a +moment he had turned the boat around and drawn it out of sight from the +fort. The girls screamed when they saw the Indian. Their friends heard +them but could not cross the river to help them. The girls had taken +the only canoe. + +Boone and Cal-lo-way were both gone from the fort. They got home too +late to start that day. No sleep came to their eyes while they waited +for light to travel by. + +As soon as there was a glim-mer of light they and a party of their +friends set out. It was in July and they could start early. + +They crossed the river and easily found the Indians’ tracks where they +started. The brush was broken down there. + +The Indians were cun-ning. They did not keep close together after they +set out. Each Indian walked by himself through the tall canes. Three of +the Indians took the captives. + +Boone and his friends tried in vain to follow them. Sometimes they +would find a track but it would soon be lost in the thick canes. + +Boone’s party gave up trying to find their path. They noticed which way +the Indians were going. Then they walked as fast as they could the same +way for thirty miles. They thought the Indians would grow careless +about their tracks after traveling so far. + +They turned so as to cross the path they thought the Indians had taken. +They looked carefully at the ground and at the bushes to see if any one +had gone by. + +Before long they found the Indians’ tracks in a buffalo path. Buffaloes +and other animals go often to lick salt from the rocks round salt +springs. They beat down the brush and make great roads. These roads run +to the salt springs. The hunters call them streets. + +The Indians took one of these roads after they got far from the fort. +They could travel more easily in it. They did not take pains to hide +their tracks. + +As fast as their feet could carry them, Boone and his friends traveled +along the trail. When they had gone about ten miles they saw the +Indians. + +The Indians had stopped to rest and to eat. It was very warm and they +had put off their moc-ca-sins and laid down their arms. They were +kindling a fire to cook by. + +In a moment the Indians saw the white men. Boone and Galloway were +afraid the Indians would kill the girls. + +Four of the white men shot at the Indians. Then all rushed at them. + +The Indians ran away as fast as they could. They did not stop to pick +up their guns or knives or hatchets. They had no time to put on their +moccasins. + +The poor worn-out girls were soon safe in their fathers’ arms. + +Back to Boones-bor-ough they went, not minding their tired feet. When +they got to the fort there was great joy to see them alive. + +I do not believe they ever played in the water again. + + + + +DECATUR AND THE PIRATES. + + +Nearly a hundred years have passed since the ship “Phil-a-del-phi-a” +was burned. But the brave sailors who did it will never be for-got-ten. + +The people of Trip-o-li in Af-ri-ca were pirates. They took the ships +of other nations at sea. They made slaves of their prisoners. The +friends of these slaves sometimes sent money to buy their freedom. Some +countries paid money to these pirates to let their ships go safe. + +Our country had trouble with the pirates. This trouble brought on a +war. Our ships were sent to fight against Trip-o-li. + +One of the ships fighting against the pirates was called the +“Phil-a-del-phi-a.” One day she was chasing a ship of Trip-o-li. The +“Phil-a-del-phi-a” ran on the rocks. The sailors could not get her off. +The pirates came and fought her as she lay on the rocks. They took her +men prisoners. Then they went to work to get her off. After a long time +they got her into deep water. They took her to Tripoli. Our ships could +not go there after her, because there were so many great cannons on the +shore near the ship. + +The pirates got the “Philadelphia” ready to go to sea. They loaded her +cannons. They meant to slip out past our ships of war. Then they would +take a great many smaller American ships. + +But the Americans laid a plan to burn the “Philadelphia.” It was a very +dan-ger-ous thing to try to do. The pirates had ships of war near the +“Philadelphia.” They had great guns on the shore. There was no way to +do it in the day-time. It could only be done by stealing into the Bay +of Tripoli at night. + +The Americans had taken a little vessel from the pirates. She was of +the kind that is called a ketch. She had sails. She also had long oars. +When there was no wind to sail with, the sailors could row her with the +oars. + +This little ketch was sent one night to burn the “Philadelphia.” The +captain of this boat was Ste-phen De-ca-tur. He was a young man, and +very brave. + +De-ca-tur made his men lie down, so that the pirates would not know how +many men he had on his ketch. Only about ten men were in sight. The +rest were lying hidden on the boat. + +They came near to the “Philadelphia.” It was about ten o’clock at +night. The pirates called to them. The pilot of the ketch told them +that he was from Mal-ta. He told them that he had come to sell things +to the people of Tripoli. He said that the ketch had lost her anchor. +He asked them to let him tie her to the big ship till morning. + +The pirates sent out a rope to them. But when the ketch came nearer, +the pirates saw that they had been fooled. They cried out, “Americans, +Americans!” + +Then the Americans lying down took hold of the rope and pulled with all +their might, and drew the ketch close to the ship. They were so close, +that the ship’s cannons were over their heads. The pirates could not +fire at them. + +The men who had been lying still now rose up. There were eighty of +them. In a minute they were scram-bling up the sides of the big ship. +Some went in one way, some another. They did not shoot. They fought +with swords and pikes, or short spears. + +Soon they drove the pirates to one side of the ship. Then they could +hear the pirates jumping over into the water. In a few minutes the +pirates had all gone. + +But the Americans could not stay long. They must burn the ship before +the pirates on the shore should find out what they were doing. + +They had brought a lot of kin-dling on the ketch. They built fires in +all parts of the ship. The fire ran so fast, that some of the men had +trouble to get off the ship. + +When the Americans got back on the ketch, they could not untie the rope +that held the ketch to the ship. The big ship was bursting into flames. +The ketch would soon take fire. + +They took swords and hacked the big rope in two. Then they pushed hard +to get away from the fire. The ketch began to move. The sailors took +the large oars and rowed. They were soon safe from the fire. + +All this they had done without any noise. But, now that they had got +away, they looked back. The fire was shooting up toward the sky. The +men stopped rowing, and they gave three cheers. They were so glad, that +they could not help it. + +By this time the pirates on shore had waked up. They began to fire +great cannon balls at the little ketch. One of the balls went through +her sails. Ah! how the sailors rowed! + +The whole sky was now lighted up by the fire. The pirates’ cannons were +thundering. The cannon balls were splashing the water all round the +ketch. But the Americans got away. At last they were safe in their own +ships. + + + + +STORIES ABOUT JEFFERSON. + + +Thomas Jef-fer-son was one of the great men of the Revolution. He was +not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. But he was a great thinker. +And he was a great writer. + +He wrote a paper that was the very beginning of the United States. It +was a paper that said that we would be free from England, and be a +coun-try by our-selves. We call that paper the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence. + +When he was a boy, Jef-fer-son was fond of boyish plays. But when he +was tired of play, he took up a book. It pleased him to learn things. +From the time when he was a boy he never sat down to rest without a +book. + +At school he learned what other boys did. But the dif-fer-ence between +him and most other boys was this: he did not stop with knowing just +what the other boys knew. Most boys want to learn what other boys +learn. Most girls would like to know what their school-mates know. But +Jef-fer-son wanted to know a great deal more. + +As a young man, Jefferson knew Latin and Greek. He also knew French and +Span-ish and I-tal-ian. + +He did not talk to show off what he knew. He tried to learn what other +people knew. When he talked to a wagon maker, he asked him about such +things as a wagon maker knows most about. He would sometimes ask how a +wagon maker would go to work to make a wheel. + +When Jefferson talked to a learn-ed man, he asked him about those +things that this man knew most about. When he talked with Indians, he +got them to tell him about their lan-guage. That is the way he came to +know so much about so many things. Whenever anybody told him anything +worth while, he wrote it down as soon as he could. + +One day Jefferson was trav-el-ing. He went on horse-back. That was a +common way of trav-el-ing at that time. He stopped at a country tavern. +At this tavern he talked with a stranger who was staying there. + +After a while Jefferson rode away. Then the stranger said to the +land-lord, “Who is that man? He knew so much about law, that I was sure +he was a lawyer. But when we talked about med-i-cine, he knew so much +about that, that I thought he must be a doctor. And after a while he +seemed to know so much about re-li-gion, that I was sure he was a +min-is-ter. Who is he?” + +The stranger was very much surprised to hear that the man he had talked +with was Thomas Jefferson. + +Jefferson was a very polite man. One day his grand-son was riding with +him. They met a negro. The negro lifted his cap and bowed. Jefferson +bowed to the negro. But his grand-son did not think it worth while to +bow. + +Then Jefferson said to his grand-son, “Do not let a poor negro be more +of a gen-tle-man than you are.” In the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence, Jefferson wrote these words: “All men are created +equal.” He also said that the poor man had the same right as the rich +man to live, and to be free, and to try to make himself happy. + + + + +A LONG JOURNEY. + + +A long time ago, when Thomas Jefferson was Pres-i-dent, most of the +people in this country lived in the East. Nobody knew anything about +the Far West. The only people that lived there were Indians. Many of +these Indians had never seen a white man. + +[Illustration: An Elk] + +The Pres-i-dent sent men to travel into this wild part of the country. +He told them to go up to the upper end of the Mis-sou-ri River. Then +they were to go across the Rocky Mountains. They were to keep on till +they got to the Pa-cif-ic O-cean. Then they were to come back again. +They were to find out the best way to get through the mountains. And +they were to find out what kind of people the Indians in that country +were. They were also to tell about the animals. + +There were two captains of this company. Their names were Lewis and +Clark. There were forty-five men in the party. + +They were gone two years and four months. For most of that time they +did not see any white men but their own party. They did not hear a word +from home for more than two years. + +They got their food mostly by hunting. They killed a great many +buf-fa-loes and elks and deer. They also shot wild geese and other +large birds. Sometimes they had nothing but fish to eat. Sometimes they +had to eat wolves. When they had no other meat, they were glad to buy +dogs from the Indians and eat them. Sometimes they ate horses. They +became fond of the meat of dogs and horses. + +When they were very hungry, they had to live on roots if they could get +them. Some of the Indians made a kind of bread out of roots. The white +men bought this when they could not get meat. But there were days when +they did not have anything to eat. + +They were very friendly with the Indians. One day some of the men went +to make a visit to an Indian village. The Indians gave them something +to eat. + +In the Indian wig-wam where they were, there was a head of a dead +buffalo. When dinner was over, the Indians filled a bowl full of meat. +They set this down in front of the head. Then they said to the head, +“Eat that.” + +[Illustration: Feeding the Spirit of the Buffalo.] + +The Indians believed, that, if they treated this buffalo head politely, +the live buffaloes would come to their hunting ground. Then they would +have plenty of meat. They think the spirit of the buffalo is a kind of +a god. They are very careful to please this god. + + + + +CAPTAIN CLARK’S BURNING GLASS. + + +The Indians among whom Captain Clark and Captain Lewis traveled had +many strange ways of doing things. They had nothing like our matches +for making fire. One tribe of Indians had this way of lighting a fire. +An Indian would lay down a dry stick. He would rub this stick with the +end of another stick. After a while this rubbing would make something +like saw-dust on the stick that was lying down. The Indian would keep +on rubbing till the wood grew hot. Then the fine wood dust would smoke. +Then it would burn. The Indian would put a little kin-dling wood on it. +Soon he would have a large fire. + +In that time the white people had not yet found out how to make +matches. They lighted a fire by striking a piece of flint against a +piece of steel. This would make a spark of fire. By letting this spark +fall on something that would burn easily, they started a fire. + +White men had another way of lighting a fire when the sun was shining. +They used what was called a burning glass. This was a round piece of +glass. It was thick in the middle, and thin at the edge. When you held +up a burning glass in the sun, it drew the sun’s heat so as to make a +little hot spot. If you put paper under this spot of hot sunshine, it +would burn. Men could light the to-bac-co in their pipes with one of +these glasses. + +Captain Clark had something funny happen to him on account of his +burning glass. He had walked ahead of the rest of his men. He sat down +on a rock. There were some Indians on the other side of the river. They +did not see the captain. Captain Clark saw a large bird called a crane +flying over his head. He raised his gun and shot it. + +[Illustration: Cranes] + +The Indians on the other side of the river had never seen a white man +in their lives. They had never heard a gun. They used bows and arrows. + +They heard the sound of Clark’s gun. They looked up and saw the large +bird falling from the sky. It fell close to where Captain Clark sat. +Just as it fell they caught sight of Captain Clark sitting on the +rocks. They thought they had seen him fall out of the sky. They thought +that the sound of his gun was a sound like thunder that was made when +he came down. + +The Indians all ran away as fast as they could. They went into their +wig-warns and closed them. + +Captain Clark wished to be friendly with them. So he got a canoe and +paddled to the other side of the river. He came to the Indian houses. +He found the flaps which they use for doors shut. He opened one of them +and went in. The Indians were sitting down, and they were all crying +and trembling. + +Among the Indians the sign of peace is to smoke to-geth-er. Captain +Clark held out his pipe to them. That was to say, “I am your friend.” +He shook hands with them and gave some of them presents. Then they were +not so much afraid. + +[Illustration: Lighting a Pipe with a Burning Glass.] + +He wished to light his pipe for them to smoke. So he took out his +burning glass. He held it in the sun. He held his pipe under it. The +sunshine was drawn together into a bright little spot on the tobacco. +Soon the pipe began to smoke. + +Then he held out his pipe for the Indians to smoke with him. That is +their way of making friends. But none of the Indians would touch the +pipe. They thought that he had brought fire down from heaven to light +his pipe. They were now sure that he fell down from the sky. They were +more afraid of him than ever. + +At last Captain Clark’s Indian man came. He told the other Indians that +the white man did not come out of the sky. Then they smoked the pipe, +and were not afraid. + + + + +QUICKSILVER BOB. + + +Robert Fulton was the man who set steam-boats to running on the rivers. +Other men had made such boats before. But Fulton made the first good +one. + +When he was a boy, he lived in the town of Lan-cas-ter in +Penn-syl-van-ia. Many guns were made in Lancaster. The men who made +these guns put little pictures on them. That was to make them sell to +the hunters who liked a gun with pictures. Little Robert Fulton could +draw very well for a boy. He made some pretty little drawings. These +the gun makers put on their guns. + +Fulton went to the gun shops a great deal. He liked to see how things +were made. He tried to make a small air gun for himself. + +He was always trying to make things. He got some quick-sil-ver. He was +trying to do something with it. But he would not tell what he wanted to +do. So the gun-smiths called him Quick-sil-ver Bob. + +He was so much in-ter-est-ed in such things, that he sometimes +neg-lect-ed his lessons. He said that his head was so full of new +notions, that he had not much room left for school learning. + +One morning he came to school late. + +“What makes you so late?” asked the teacher. + +“I went to one of the shops to make myself a lead pencil,” said little +Bob. “Here it is. It is the best one I ever had.” + +The teacher tried it, and found it very good. Lead pencils in that day +were made of a long piece of lead sharpened at the end. + +Quick-sil-ver Bob was a very odd little boy. He said many cu-ri-ous +things. Once the teacher punished him for not getting his lessons. He +rapped Robert on the knuckles with a fer-ule. Robert did not like this +any more than any other boy would. + +“Sir,” said the boy, “I came here to have something beaten into my +head, not into my knuckles.” + +In that day people used to light candles and stand them in the window +on the Fourth of July. These candles in every window lighted up the +whole town. But one year candles were scarce and high. The city asked +the people not to light up their windows on the Fourth. + +Bob did not like to miss the fun of his Fourth of July. He went to work +to make something like rockets or Roman candles. It was a very +dan-ger-ous business for a boy. + +“What are you doing, Bob?” some one asked him. + +“The city does not want us to burn our candles on the Fourth,” he said. +“I am going to shoot mine into the air.” + +[Illustration] + +He used to go fishing with a boy named Chris Gumpf. The father of Chris +went with them. They fished from a flat boat. The two boys had to push +the boat to the fishing place with poles. + +“I am tired of poling that boat,” said Robert to Chris one day when +they came home. + +So he set to work to think out a plan to move the boat in an easier way +than by poles. He whittled out the model of a tiny paddle wheel. Then +he went to work with Chris Gumpf, and they made a larger paddle wheel. +This they set up in the fishing boat. The wheel was turned by the boys +with a crank. They did not use the poles any more. + + + + +THE FIRST STEAMBOAT. + + +The first good steam-boat was built in New York. She was built by +Robert Fulton. Her name was “Clermont.” When the people saw her, they +laughed. They said that such a boat would never go. For thousands of +years boat-men had made their boats go by using sails and oars. People +had never seen any such boat as this. It seemed foolish to believe that +a boat could be pushed along by steam. + +The time came for Fulton to start his boat. A crowd of people were +standing on the shore. The black smoke was coming out of the +smoke-stack. The people were laughing at the boat. They were sure that +it would not go. At last the boat’s wheels began to turn round. Then +the boat began to move. There were no oars. There were no sails. But +still the boat kept moving. Faster and faster she went. All the people +now saw that she could go by steam. They did not laugh any more. They +began to cheer. + +[Illustration: Seeing the First Steam boat] + +The little steam-boat ran up to Al-ba-ny. The people who lived on the +river did not know what to make of it. They had never heard of a +steam-boat. They could not see what made the boat go. + +There were many sailing vessels on the river. Fulton’s boat passed some +of these in the night. The sailors were afraid when they saw the fire +and smoke. The sound of the steam seemed dreadful to them. Some of them +went down-stairs in their ships for fear. Some of them went ashore. +Perhaps they thought it was a living animal that would eat them up. + +But soon there were steam-boats on all the large rivers. + + + + +WASHINGTON IRVING AS A BOY. + + +The Revolution was about over. Americans were very happy. Their country +was to be free. + +At this time a little boy was born in New York. His family was named +Ir-ving. What should this little boy be named? + +His mother said, “Washington’s work is done. Let us name the baby +Washington.” So he was called Washington Ir-ving. + +When this baby grew to be a little boy, he was one day walking with his +nurse. The nurse was a Scotch girl. She saw General Washington go into +a shop. She led the little boy into the shop also. + +The nurse said to General Washington, “Please, your Honor, here is a +bairn that is named for you.” + +“Bairn” is a Scotch word for child. Washington put his hand on the +little boy’s head and gave him his blessing. When Irving became an +author, he wrote a life of Washington. + +Little Irving was a merry, playful boy. He was full of mischief. + +Sometimes he would climb out of a window to the roof of his father’s +house. From this he would go to roofs of other houses. Then the little +rascal would drop a pebble down a neighbor’s chimney. Then he would +hurry back and get into the window again. He would wonder what the +people thought when the pebble came rattling down their chimney. Of +course he was punished when his tricks were found out. But he was a +favorite with his teacher. With all his faults, he would not tell a +lie. The teacher called the little fellow “General.” + +[Illustration: Irving in Mischief.] + +In those days naughty school-boys were whipped. Irving could not bear +to see another boy suffer. When a boy was to be whipped, the girls were +sent out. Irving always asked the schoolmaster to let him go out with +the girls. + +Like other boys, Irving was fond of stories. He liked to read about +Sind-bad the Sailor, and Rob-in-son Cru-soe. But most of all he liked +to read about other countries. He had twenty small volumes called “The +World Dis-played.” They told about the people and countries of the +world. Irving read these little books a great deal. + +One day the schoolmaster caught him reading in school. The master +slipped behind him and grabbed the book. Then he told Irving to stay +after school. + +Irving expected a pun-ish-ment. But the master told him he was pleased +to find that he liked to read such good books. He told him not to read +them in school. + +Reading about other countries made Irving wish to see them. He thought +he would like to travel. Like other wild boys, he thought of running +away. He wanted to go to sea. + +But he knew that sailors had to eat salt pork. He did not like salt +pork. He thought he would learn to like it. When he got a chance, he +ate pork. And sometimes he would sleep all night on the floor. He +wanted to get used to a hard bed. + +But the more he ate pork, the more he disliked it. And the more he +slept on the floor, the more he liked a good bed. So he gave up his +foolish notion of being a sailor boy. + +Some day you will read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” You will find some +famous stories in it. There is the story of Rip Van Win-kle, who slept +twenty years. And there is the funny story of the Head-less Horse-man. +When you read these a-mus-ing stories, you will remember the playful +boy who became a great author. + +[Illustration: Rip Van Winkle wakes up] + + + + +DON’T GIVE UP THE SHIP. + + +Fred was talking to his sister one day. He said,— + +“Alice, what makes people say, ‘Don’t give up the ship’?” + +Alice said, “I don’t know. That’s what the teacher said to me +yes-ter-day when I thought that I could not get my lesson.” + +“Yes,” said Fred, “and that’s what father said to me. I told him I +never could learn to write well.” He only said, “You must not give up +the ship, my boy.” + +“I haven’t any ship to give up,” said Alice. + +“And what has a ship to do with my writing?” said Fred. + +“There must be some story about a ship,” Alice said. + +“Maybe grand-father would know,” said Fred. “Let’s ask him.” + +They found their grand-father writing in the next room. They did not +wish to disturb him. They turned to leave the room. + +But grand-father looked up just then. He smiled, and laid down his pen. + +“Did you want something?” he asked. “We wanted to ask you a question,” +said Alice. “We want to know why people say, ‘Don’t give up the ship.’” + +“We thought maybe there is a story to it,” said Fred. + +“Yes, there is,” said their grandfather. “And I know a little rhyme +that tells the story.” + +“Could you say it to us?” asked Alice. + +“Yes, if I can think of it. Let me see. How does it begin?” + +Grandfather leaned his head back in the chair. He shut his eyes for a +moment. He was trying to remember. + +“Oh, now I remember it!” he said. + +Then he said to them these little verses:— + + + + +GRANDFATHER’S RHYME. + + +When I was but a boy, + I heard the people tell +How gallant Captain Law-rence + So bravely fought and fell. + +The ships lay close together, + I heard the people say, +And many guns were roaring + Upon that battle day. + +A grape-shot struck the captain, + He laid him down to die: +They say the smoke of powder + Made dark the sea and sky. + +The sailors heard a whisper + Upon the captain’s lip: +The last command of Law-rence + Was, “Don’t give up the ship.” + +And ever since that battle + The people like to tell +How gallant Captain Lawrence + So bravely fought and fell. + +When disappointment happens, + And fear your heart annoys, +Be brave, like Captain Lawrence— + And don’t give up, my boys! + + + + +THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER. + + +Everybody in the United States has heard the song about the +star-span-gled banner. Nearly everybody has sung it. It was written by +Francis Scott Key. + +Key was a young lawyer. In the War of 1812 he fought with the American +army. The British landed soldiers in Mary-land. At Bla-dens-burg they +fought and beat the Americans. Key was in this battle on the American +side. + +After the battle the British army took Washington, and burned the +public buildings. Key had a friend who was taken prisoner by the +British. He was on one of the British ships. Key went to the ships with +a flag of truce. A flag of truce is a white flag. It is carried in war +when one side sends a message to the other. + +When Key got to the British ships, they were sailing to Bal-ti-more. +They were going to try to take Bal-ti-more. The British com-mand-er +would not let Key go back. He was afraid that he would let the +Americans know where the ships were going. + +Key was kept a kind of prisoner while the ships attacked Bal-ti-more. +The ships tried to take the city by firing at it from the water. The +British army tried to take the city on the land side. + +The ships did their worst firing at night. They tried to take the +little fort near the city. + +Key could see the battle. He watched the little fort. He was afraid +that the men in it would give up. He was afraid that the fort would be +broken down by the cannon balls. + +The British fired bomb-shells and rockets at the fort. When these +burst, they made a light. By this light Key could see that the little +fort was still standing. He could see the flag still waving over it. He +tells this in his song in these words:— + +“And the rocket’s red glare, the bombs bursting in air +Gave proof through the night that our flag was still there.” + + +[Illustration] + +But after many hours of fighting the British became dis-cour-aged. They +found that they could not take the city. The ships almost ceased to +fire. + +Key did not know whether the fort had been knocked down or not. He +could not see whether the flag was still flying or not. He thought that +the Americans might have given up. He felt what he wrote in the song:— + +“Oh! say, does that star-span-gled banner yet wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave?” + + +When the break of day came, Key looked toward the fort. It was still +standing. There was a flag flying over it. It grew lighter. He could +see that it was the American flag. His feelings are told in two lines +of the song:— + +“’Tis the star spangled banner, oh, long may it wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave!” + + +Key was full of joy. He took an old letter from his pocket. The back of +this letter had no writing on it. Here he wrote the song about the +star-spangled banner. + +The British com-mand-er now let Key go ashore. When he got to +Baltimore, he wrote out his song. He gave it to a friend. This friend +took it to a printing office. But the printers had all turned soldiers. +They had all gone to defend the city. + +[Illustration] + +There was one boy left in the office. He knew how to print. He took the +verses and printed them on a broad sheet of paper. + +The printed song was soon in the hands of the soldiers around +Baltimore. It was sung in the streets. It was sung in the the-a-ters. +It traveled all over the country. Everybody learned to sing:— + +“Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just; +And this be our motto—‘In God is our trust’— +And the star-span-gled banner in triumph shall wave +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave.” + + + + +HOW AUDUBON CAME TO KNOW ABOUT BIRDS. + + +John James Au-du-bon knew more about the birds of this country than any +man had ever known before. He was born in the State of Lou-is-i-a-na. +His father took him to France when he was a boy. He went to school in +France. + +The little John James was fond of stud-y-ing about wild animals. But +most of all he wished to know about birds. Seeing that the boy liked +such things, his father took pains to get birds and flowers for him. + +While he was yet a boy at school, he began to gather birds and other +animals for himself. He learned to skin and stuff them. But his stuffed +birds did not please him. Their feathers did not look bright, like +those of live birds. He wanted living birds to study. + +His father told him that he could not keep so many birds alive. To +please the boy he got him a book with pictures in it. Looking at these +pictures made John James wish to draw. He thought that he could make +pictures that would look like the live birds. + +But when he tried to paint a picture of a bird, it looked worse than +his stuffed birds. The birds he drew were not much like real birds. He +called them a “family of cripples.” As often as his birthday came +round, he made a bon-fire of his bad pictures. Then he would begin over +again. + +All this time he was learning to draw birds. But he was not willing to +make pictures that were not just like the real birds. So when he grew +to be a man he went to a great French painter whose name was David. +David taught him to draw and paint things as they are. + +Then he came back to this country, and lived awhile in Pennsylvania. +Here his chief study was the wild creatures of the woods. + +He gathered many eggs of birds. He made pictures of these eggs. He did +not take birds’ eggs to break up the nests. He was not cruel. He took +only what he needed to study. + +He would make two little holes in each egg. Then he would shake the +egg, or stir it up with a little stick or straw, or a long pin. This +would break up the inside of the egg. Then he would blow into one of +the holes. That would blow the inside of the egg out through the other +hole. + +These egg shells he strung together by running strings through the +holes. He hung these strings of egg shells all over the walls of his +room. On the man-tel-piece he put the stuffed skins of squirrels, +raccoons, o-pos-sums, and other small animals. On the shelves his +friends could see frogs, snakes, and other animals. + +He married a young lady, and brought her to live in this mu-se-um with +his dead snakes, frogs, and strings of birds’ eggs. She liked what he +did, and was sure that he would come to be a great man. + +He made up his mind to write a great book about American birds. He +meant to tell all about the birds in one book. Then in another book he +would print pictures of the birds, just as large as the birds +them-selves. He meant to have them look just like the birds. + +To do this he must travel many thousands of miles. He must live for +years almost all of the time in the woods. He would have to find and +shoot the birds, in order to make pictures of them. And he must see how +the birds lived, and how they built their nests, so that he could tell +all about them. It would take a great deal of work and trouble. But he +was not afraid of trouble. + +That was many years ago. Much of our country was then covered with +great trees. Au-du-bon sometimes went in a boat down a lone-some river. +Sometimes he rode on horse-back. Often he had to travel on foot through +woods where there were no roads. Many a time he had to sleep out of +doors. + +He lost his money and became poor. Sometimes he had to paint portraits +to get money to live on. Once he turned dancing master for a while. But +he did not give up his great idea. He still studied birds, and worked +to make his books about American birds. His wife went to teaching to +help make a living. + +After years of hard work, he made paintings of nearly a thousand birds. +That was almost enough for his books. But, while he was traveling, two +large rats got into the box in which he kept his pictures. They cut up +all his paintings with their teeth, and made a nest of the pieces. This +almost broke his heart for a while. For many nights he could not sleep, +because he had lost all his work. + +But he did not give up. After some days he took his gun, and went into +the woods. He said to himself, “I will begin over again. I can make +better paintings than those that the rats spoiled.” But it took him +four long years and a half to find the birds, and make the pictures +again. + +He was so careful to have his drawings just like the birds, that he +would measure them in every way. Thus he made his pictures just the +size of the birds themselves. + +At last the great books were printed. In this country, in France, and +in England, people praised the won-der-ful books. They knew that +Au-du-bon was indeed a great man. + + + + +AUDUBON IN THE WILD WOODS. + + +When Au-du-bon was making his great book about birds, he had to live +much in the woods. Sometimes he lived among the Indians. He once saw an +Indian go into a hollow tree. There was a bear in the tree. The Indian +had a knife in his hand. He fought with the bear in the tree, and +killed it. + +Au-du-bon could shoot very well. A friend of his one day threw up his +cap in the air. He told Au-du-bon to shoot at it. When the cap came +down, it had a hole in it. + +But the hunters who lived in the woods could shoot better. They would +light a candle. Then one of the hunters would take his gun, and go a +hundred steps away from the candle. He would then shoot at the candle. +He would shoot so as to snuff it. He would not put out the candle. He +would only cut off a bit of the wick with the bullet. But he would +leave the candle burning. + +[Illustration: Snuffing the Candle.] + +Once Audubon came near being killed by some robbers. He stopped at a +cabin where lived an old white woman. He found a young Indian in the +house. The Indian had hurt himself with an arrow. He had come to the +house to spend the night. + +The old woman saw Audubon’s fine gold watch. She asked him to let her +look at it. He put it into her hands for a minute. Then the Indian +passed by Audubon, and pinched him two or three times. That was to let +him know that the woman was bad, and that she might rob him. + +Audubon went and lay down with his hand on his gun. After a while two +men came in. They were the sons of the old woman. Then the old woman +sharpened a large knife. She told the young men to kill the Indian +first, and then to kill Audubon and take his watch. She thought that +Audubon was asleep. But he drew up his gun ready to fire. + +Just then two hunters came to the cabin. Audubon told them what the +robbers were going to do. They took the old woman and her sons, and +tied their hands and feet. The Indian, though he was in pain from his +hurt, danced for joy when he saw that the robbers were caught. The +woman and her sons were afterward punished. + + + + +HUNTING A PANTHER. + + +Audubon was traveling in the woods in Mis-sis-sip-pi. He found the +little cabin of a settler. He staid there for the night. The settler +told him that there was a panther in the swamp near his house. A +panther is a very large and fierce animal. It is large enough to kill a +man. This was a very bad panther. It had killed some of the settler’s +dogs. + +Audubon said, “Let us hunt this panther, and kill it.” + +So the settler sent out for his neigh-bors to come and help kill the +panther. Five men came. Audubon and the settler made seven. They were +all on horse-back. + +When they came to the edge of the swamp, each man went a dif-fer-ent +way. They each took their dogs with them to find the track of the wild +beast. All of the hunters carried horns. Who-ever should find the track +first was to blow his horn to let the others know. + +In about two hours after they had started, they heard the sound of a +horn. It told them that the track had been found. Every man now went +toward the sound of the horn. Soon all the yelping dogs were +fol-low-ing the track of the fierce panther. The panther was running +into the swamp farther and farther. + +I suppose that the panther thought that there were too many dogs and +men for him to fight. All the hunters came after the dogs. They held +their guns ready to shoot if the panther should make up his mind to +fight them. + +After a while the sound of the dogs’ voices changed. The hunters knew +from this that the panther had stopped running, and gone up into a +tree. + +At last the men came to the place where the dogs were. They were all +barking round a tree. Far up in the tree was the dan-ger-ous beast. The +hunters came up care-ful-ly. One of them fired. The bullet hit the +panther, but did not kill him. + +[Illustration] + +The panther sprang to the ground, and ran off again. The dogs ran +after. The men got on their horses, and rode after. + +But the horses were tired, and the men had to get down, and follow the +dogs on foot. + +The hunters now had to wade through little ponds of water. Sometimes +they had to climb over fallen trees. Their clothes were badly torn by +the bushes. After two hours more, they came to a place where the +panther had again gone up into a tree. + +This time three of the hunters shot at him. The fierce panther came +tumbling to the ground. But he was still able to fight. The men fought +the savage beast on all sides. At last they killed him. Then they gave +his skin to the settler. They wanted him to know that his en-e-my was +dead. + + + + +SOME BOYS WHO BECAME AUTHORS. + + +Wil-liam Cul-len Bry-ant was the first great poet in this country. He +was a small man. When he was a baby, his head was too big for his body. +His father used to send the baby to be dipped in a cold spring every +day. The father thought that putting his head into cold water would +keep it from growing. + +Bry-ant knew his letters before he was a year and a half old. He began +to write rhymes when he was a very little fellow. He wanted to be a +poet. He used to pray that he might be a poet. His father printed some +verses of his when he was only ten years old. + +Bry-ant wrote many fine poems. Here are some lines of his about the +bird we call a bob-o-link:— + +Rob-ert of Lin-coln is gayly dressed, + Wearing a bright black wedding coat, +White are his shoulders and white his crest. + Hear him call in his merry note: + Bob-o’-link, bob-o’-link, + Spink, spank, spink; +Look, what a nice new coat is mine, +Sure there was never a bird so fine. + Chee, chee, chee. + + +[Illustration] + +Haw-thorne was one of our greatest writers of stories. He was a pretty +boy with golden curls. He was fond of all the great poets, and he read +Shake-speare and Mil-ton and many other poets as soon as he was old +enough to un-der-stand them. + +Haw-thorne grew up a very hand-some young fellow. One day he was +walking in the woods. He met an old gypsy woman. She had never seen +anybody so fine-looking. + +“Are you a man, or an angel?” she asked him. + +Some of Haw-thorne’s best books are written for girls and boys. One of +these is called “The Won-der Book.” Another of his books for young +people is “Tan-gle-wood Tales.” + + +Pres-cott wrote beautiful his-to-ries. When Pres-cott was a boy, a +school-mate threw a crust of bread at him. It hit him in the eye. He +became almost blind. + +He had to do his writing with a machine. This machine was made for the +use of the blind. There were no type-writ-ers in those days. + +It was hard work to write his-to-ry without good eyes. But Pres-cott +did not give up. He had a man to read to him. It took him ten years to +write his first book. + +When Prescott had finished his book, he was afraid to print it. But his +father said, “The man who writes a book, and is afraid to print it, is +a cow-ard.” + +Then Prescott printed his book. Everybody praised it. When you are +older, you will like to read his his-to-ries. + +Doctor Holmes, the poet, was a boy full of fancies. He lived in an old +house. Soldiers had staid in the house at the time of the Revolution. +The floor of one room was all battered by the butts of the soldiers’ +muskets. + +[Illustration] + +Little Ol-i-ver Holmes used to think he could hear soldiers in the +house. He thought he could hear their spurs rattling in the dark +passages. Sometimes he thought he could hear their swords clanking. + +The little boy was afraid of a sign that hung over the sidewalk. It was +a great, big, wooden hand. It was the sign of a place where gloves were +made. This big hand swung in the air. Little Ol-i-ver Holmes had to +walk under it on his way to school. He thought the great fingers would +grab him some day. Then he thought he would never get home again. He +even thought that his other pair of shoes would be put away till his +little brother grew big enough to wear them. + +But the big wooden hand never caught him. + +Here are some verses that Doctor Holmes wrote about a very old man:— + +“My grand-mam-ma has said— +Poor old lady, she is dead + Long ago— +That he had a Roman nose, +And his cheek was like a rose + In the snow. + +“But now his nose is thin, +And it rests upon his chin + Like a staff; +And a crook is in his back, +And a mel-an-chol-y crack + In his laugh. + +“I know it is a sin +For me to sit and grin + At him here; +But the old three-cor-nered hat, +And the breeches, and all that, + Are so queer! + +“And if I should live to be +The last leaf upon the tree + In the spring, +Let them smile, as I do now, +At the old for-sak-en bough + Where I cling.” + + +[Illustration] + + + + +DANIEL WEBSTER AND HIS BROTHER. + + +Dan-iel Web-ster was a great states-man. As a little boy he was called +“Little Black Dan.” When he grew larger, he was thin and +sickly-looking. But he had large, dark eyes. People called him “All +Eyes.” + +He was very fond of his brother E-ze-ki-el. E-ze-ki-el was a little +older than Dan-iel. Both the boys had fine minds. They wanted to go to +college. But their father was poor. + +Dan-iel had not much strength for work on the farm. So little “All +Eyes” was sent to school, and then to college. E-ze-ki-el staid at +home, and worked on the farm. + +While Daniel was at school, he was unhappy to think that Ezekiel could +not go to college also. He went home on a visit. He talked to Ezekiel +about going to college. The brothers talked about it all night. The +next day Daniel talked to his father about it. The father said he was +too poor to send both of his sons to college. He said he would lose all +his little property if he tried to send Ezekiel to college. But he +said, that, if their mother and sisters were willing to be poor, he +would send the other son to college. + +So the mother and sisters were asked. It seemed hard to risk the loss +of all they had. It seemed hard not to give Ezekiel a chance. They all +shed tears over it. + +The boys promised to take care of their mother and sisters if the +property should be lost. Then they all agreed that Ezekiel should go to +college too. + +Daniel taught school while he was studying. That helped to pay the +expenses. After Daniel was through his studies in college, he taught a +school in order to help his brother. When his school closed, he went +home. On his way he went round to the college to see his brother. +Finding that Ezekiel needed money, he gave him a hundred dollars. He +kept but three dollars to get home with. + +The father’s property was not sold. The two boys helped the family. +Daniel soon began to make money as a lawyer. He knew that his father +was in debt. He went home to see him. He said, “Father, I am going to +pay your debts.” + +The father said, “You cannot do it, Daniel. You have not money enough.” + +“I can do it,” said Daniel; “and I will do it before Monday evening.” + +When Monday evening came round, the father’s debts were all paid. + +When Daniel became a famous man, it made Ezekiel very happy. But +Ezekiel died first. When Daniel Web-ster made his greatest speech, all +the people praised him. + +But Web-ster said, “I wish that my poor brother had lived to this time. +It would have made him very happy.” + + + + +WEBSTER AND THE POOR WOMAN. + + +When Daniel Webster was a young lawyer, he was going home one night. +There was snow on the ground. It was very cold. It was late, and there +was nobody to be seen. + +But after a while he saw a poor woman. She was ahead of him. He +wondered what had brought her out on so cold a night. + +Sometimes she stopped and looked around. Then she would stand and +listen. Then she would go on again. [Illustration: Webster and the Poor +Woman] + +Webster kept out of her sight. But he watched her. After looking +around, she turned down the street in which Webster lived. She stopped +in front of Webster’s house. She looked around and listened. + +Webster had put down some loose boards to walk on. They reached from +the gate to the door of his house. After standing still a minute, the +woman took one of the boards, and went off quickly. + +Webster followed her. But he kept out of her sight. She went to a +distant part of the town. She went into a poor little house. + +Webster went home without saying anything to the woman. He knew that +she had stolen the board for fire-wood. + +The next day the poor woman got a present It was a nice load of wood. + +Can you guess who sent it to her? + + + + +THE INDIA-RUBBER MAN. + + +Many years ago a strange-looking man was sometimes seen in the streets +of New York. His cap was made of In-di-a rubber. So was his coat. He +wore a rubber waist-coat. Even his cravat was of In-di-a rubber. He +wore rubber shoes in dry weather. People called this man “The +In-di-a-rubber man.” + +His name was Charles Good-year. He was very poor. He was trying to find +out how to make India rubber useful. + +India-rubber trees grow in South America. The juice of these trees is +something like milk or cream. By drying this juice, India rubber is +made. + +The Indians in Bra-zil have no glass to make bottles with. A long time +ago they learned to make bottles out of rubber. More than a hundred +years ago some of these rubber bottles were brought to this country. +The people in this country had never seen India rubber before. They +thought the bottles made out of it by the Indians very cu-ri-ous. + +In this country, rubber was used only to rub out pencil marks. That is +why we call it rubber. People in South America learned to make a kind +of heavy shoe out of it. But these shoes were hard to make. They cost a +great deal when they were sold in this country. + +Men tried to make rubber shoes in this country. They got the rubber +from Bra-zil. Rubber shoes made in this country were cheaper than those +brought from South America. But they were not good. They would freeze +till they were as hard as stones in winter. That was not the worst of +it. In summer they would melt. Goodyear was trying to find out a way to +make rubber better. He wanted to get it so that it would not melt in +summer. He wanted to get a rubber that would not get hard in cold +weather. The first rubber coats that were made were so hard in cold +weather, that they would stand alone, and look like a man. + +Goodyear wanted to try his rubber. That is why he wore a rubber coat +and a rubber waist-coat and a rubber cravat. That is why he wore a +rubber cap and rubber shoes when it was not raining. He made paper out +of rubber, and wrote a book on it. He had a door-plate made of it. He +even carried a cane made of India rubber. It is no wonder people called +him the India-rubber man. + +He was very poor. Sometimes he had to borrow money to buy rubber with. +Sometimes his friends gave him money to keep his family from starving. +Sometimes there was no wood and no coal in the house in cold weather. + +But Goodyear kept on trying. He thought that he was just going to find +out. Years went by, and still he kept on trying. + +One day he was mixing some rubber with sulphur. It slipped out of his +hand. It fell on the hot stove. But it did not melt. Goodyear was happy +at last. That night it was cold. Goodyear took the burned piece of +rubber out of doors, and nailed it to the kitchen door. When morning +came, he went and got it. It had not frozen. + +He was now sure that he was on the right track. But he had to find out +how to mix and heat his rubber and sulphur. He was too poor to buy +rubber to try with. Nobody would lend him any more money. His family +had to live by the help of his friends. He had already sold almost +everything that he had. Now he had to sell his children’s school-books +to get money to buy rubber with. + +At last his rubber goods were made and sold. Poor men who had to stand +in the rain could now keep themselves dry. People could walk in the wet +with dry feet. A great many people are alive who would have died if +they had not been kept dry by India rubber. + +You may count up, if you can, how many useful things are made of +rubber. We owe them all to one man. People laughed at Goodyear once. +But at last they praised him. To be “The India-rubber man” was +something to be proud of. + + + + +DOCTOR KANE IN THE FROZEN SEA. + + +[Illustration] + +Kane was a doctor in one of the war ships of the United States. He had +sailed about the world a great deal. + +When he heard that ships were to be sent into the icy seas of the +north, he asked to be sent along. He went the first time as a doctor. +Then he wanted to find out more about the frozen ocean. So he went +again as captain of a ship. His ship was called the “Advance.” + +Kane sailed into the icy seas. His ship was driven far into the ice by +a fu-ri-ous storm. She was crowded by ice-bergs. At one time she was +lifted clear out of the water. The ship seemed ready to fall over on +her side. But the ice let her down again. Then she was squeezed till +the men thought that she would be crushed like an egg shell At last the +storm stopped. Then came the awful cold. The ship was frozen into the +ice. The ice never let go of her. She was farther north than any ship +had ever been before. But she was so fast in the ice that she never +could get away. + +In that part of the world it is night nearly all winter. For months +there was no sun at all. Daylight came again. It was now summer, but it +did not get warm. Doctor Kane took sleds, and went about on the ice to +see what he could see. The sleds were drawn by large dogs. But nearly +all of the dogs died in the long winter night. + +[Illustration: A Dog Sled] + +Doctor Kane thought that the ice would melt. He wanted to get the ship +out. But the ice did not melt at all. + +At last the summer passed away. Another awful winter came. The sun did +not rise any more. It was dark for months and months. The men were ill. +Some of them died. They were much dis-cour-aged. But Kane kept up his +heart, and did the best he could. + +At last the least little streak of light could be seen. It got a little +lighter each day. But the sick men down in the cabin of the ship could +not see the light. + +Doctor Kane said to himself, “If my poor men could see this sunlight, +it would cheer them up. It might save their lives.” But they were too +ill to get out where they could see the sun. It would be many days +before the sun would shine into the cabin of the ship. The men might +die before that time. + +So Doctor Kane took some looking glasses up to the deck or top of the +ship. He fixed one of these so it would catch the light of the sun. +Then he fixed another so that the first one would throw the light on +this one. The last one would throw the sunlight down into the cabin +where the sick men were. + +One day the poor fellows were ready to give up. Then the sun fell on +the looking glasses, and flashed down into the cabin. It was the first +daylight the sick men had seen for months. The long winter night was +over. Think how happy they were! + + + + +A DINNER ON THE ICE. + + +After two winters of cold and darkness, Doctor Kane made up his mind to +leave the ship fast in the ice. He wanted to get to a place in +Green-land where there were people living. Then he might find some way +of getting home again. + +The men started out, drawing the boats on sleds. Whenever they came to +open water, they put the boats into the water, and took the sleds in +the boats. When they came to the ice again, they had to draw out their +boats, and carry them on the sleds. At first they could travel only +about a mile a day. + +It was a hard journey. Some of the men were ill. These had to be drawn +on the sleds by the rest. They had not enough food. At one time they +rested three days in a kind of cave. Here they found many birds’ eggs. +These made very good food for them. At another place they staid a week. +They staid just to eat the eggs of the wild birds. + +After they left this place, they were hungry. The men grew thinner and +thinner. It seemed that they must die for want of food. But one day +they saw a large seal. He was floating on a piece of ice. The hungry +men thought, “What a fine din-ner he would make for us!” If they could +get the seal, they would not die of hunger. + +Every one of the poor fellows trembled for fear the seal would wake up. +A man named Pe-ter-sen took a gun, and got ready to shoot. The men +rowed the boat toward the seal. They rowed slowly and quietly. But the +seal waked up. He raised his head. The men thought that he would jump +off into the water. Then they might all die for want of food. + +Doctor Kane made a motion to Pe-ter-sen. That was to tell him to shoot +quickly. But Peter-sen did not shoot. He was so much afraid that the +seal would get away, that he could not shoot. The seal now raised +himself a little more. He was getting ready to jump into the water. +Just then Petersen fired. The seal fell dead on the ice. + +[Illustration: A Seal] + +The men were wild with joy. They rowed the boats with all their might. +When they got to the seal, they dragged it farther away from the water. +They were so happy, that they danced on the ice. Some of them laughed. +Some were so glad, that they cried. [Illustration: Shooting the Seal.] + +Then they took their knives and began to cut up the seal. They had no +fire on the ice, and they were too hungry to think of lighting one. So +they ate the meat of the seal without waiting to cook it. + + + + +DOCTOR KANE GETS OUT OF THE FROZEN SEA. + + +After they got the seal, Doctor Kane and his men traveled on. Sometimes +they were on the ice. Sometimes they were in the boats. The men were so +weak, that they could hardly row the boats. They were so hungry, that +they could not sleep well at night. + +One day they were rowing, when they heard a sound. It came to them +across the water. It did not sound like the cry of sea birds. It +sounded like people’s voices. + +“Listen!” Doctor Kane said to Pe-ter-sen. + +Petersen spoke the same language as the people of Greenland. He +listened. The sound came again. Pe-ter-sen was so glad, that he could +hardly speak. He told Kane in a half whisper, that it was the voice of +some one speaking his own language. It was some Greenland men in a +boat. + +The next day they got to a Greenland town. Then they got into a little +ship going to England. They knew that they could get home from England. +But the ship stopped at another Green-land town. While they were there, +a steamer was seen. It came nearer. They could see the stars and +stripes flying from her mast. It was an American steamer sent to find +Doctor Kane. + +Doctor Kane and his men were full of joy. They pushed their little boat +into the water once more. This little boat was called the “Faith.” It +had carried Kane and his men hundreds of miles in icy seas. + +Once more the men took their oars, and rowed. This time they rowed with +all their might. They held up the little flag that they had carried +farther north than anybody had ever been before. They rowed straight to +the steamer. + +In the bow of the boat was a little man with a tattered red shirt. He +could see that the captain of the boat was looking at him through a +spy-glass. + +The captain shouted to the little man, “Is that Doctor Kane?” + +The little man in the red shirt shouted back, “Yes!” + +Doctor Kane and his men had been gone more than two years. People had +begun to think that they had all died. This steamer had been sent to +find out what had become of them. When the men on the steamer heard +that this little man in the red shirt was Doctor Kane himself, they +sent up cheer after cheer. In a few minutes more, Doctor Kane and his +men were on the steamer. They were now safe among friends. They were +sailing away toward their homes. + + + + +LONGFELLOW AS A BOY. + + +[Illustration: Longfellow and the Bird] + +Long-fel-low was a noble boy. He always wanted to do right. He could +not bear to see one person do any wrong to another. + +He was very tender-hearted. One day he took a gun and went shooting. He +killed a robin. Then he felt sorry for the robin He came home with +tears in his eyes. He was so grieved, that he never went shooting +again. + +He liked to read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” Its strange stories about +Sleepy Hollow and Rip Van Win-kle pleased his fancy. + +When he was thirteen he wrote a poem. It was about Love-well’s fight +with the Indians. He sent his verses to a news-paper. He wondered if +the ed-i-tor would print them. He could not think of anything else. He +walked up and down in front of the printing office. He thought that his +poem might be in the printer’s hands. + +When the paper came out, there was his poem. It was signed “Henry.” +Long-fel-low read it. He thought it a good poem. + +But a judge who did not know whose poem it was talked about it that +evening. He said to young Long-fel-low, “Did you see that poem in the +paper? It was stiff. And all taken from other poets, too.” + +This made Henry Long-fel-low feel bad. But he kept on trying. After +many years, he became a famous poet. + +For more than fifty years, young people have liked to read his poem +called “A Psalm of Life.” Here are three stanzas of it:— + +“Lives of great men all remind us + We can make our lives sub-lime, +And, de-part-ing, leave behind us + Foot-prints on the sands of time,— + +“Foot-prints, that perhaps another, + Sailing o’er life’s solemn main, +A forlorn and ship-wrecked brother, + Seeing, may take heart again. + +“Let us, then, be up and doing, + With a heart for any fate; +Still a-chiev-ing, still pur-su-ing, + Learn to labor and to wait.” + + + + +KIT CARSON AND THE BEARS. + + +Great men of one kind are known only in new countries like ours. These +men dis-cov-er new regions. They know how to manage the Indians. They +show other people how to live in a wild country. + +One of the most famous of such men was Kit Car-son. He knew all about +the wild animals. He was a great hunter. He learned the languages of +the Indians. The Indians liked him. He was a great guide. He showed +soldiers and settlers how to travel where they wished to go. + +Once he was marching through the wild country with other men. Evening +came. He left the others, and went to shoot something to eat. It was +the only way to get meat for supper. When he had gone about a mile, he +saw the tracks of some elks. He followed these tracks. He came in sight +of the elks. They were eating grass on a hill, as cows do. + +Kit Car-son crept up behind some bushes. But elks are very timid +animals. Before the hunter got very near, they began to run away. So +Carson fired at one of them as it was running. The elk fell dead. + +But just at that moment he heard a roar. He turned to see what made +this ugly noise. Two huge bears were running toward him. They wanted +some meat for supper, too. + +Kit Carson’s gun was empty. He threw it down. Then he ran as fast as he +could. He wanted to find a tree. + +Just as the bears were about to seize him, he got to a tree. He caught +hold of a limb. He swung himself up into the tree. The bears just +missed getting him. + +But bears know how to climb trees. Carson knew that they would soon be +after him. He pulled out his knife, and began to cut off a limb. He +wanted to make a club. + +A bear is much larger and stronger than a man. He cannot be killed with +a club. But every bear has one tender spot. It is his nose. He does not +like to be hit on the nose. A sharp blow on the nose hurts him a great +deal. + +Kit Carson got his club cut just in time. The bears were coming after +him. Kit got up into the very top of the tree. He drew up his feet, and +made himself as small as he could. + +When the bears came near, one of them reached for Kit. Whack! went the +stick on the end of his nose. The bear drew back, and whined with pain. + +First one bear tried to get him, and then the other. But which-ever one +tried, Kit was ready. The bear was sure to get his nose hurt. + +[Illustration] + +The bears grew tired, and rested awhile. But they kept up their +screeching and roaring. When their noses felt better, they tried again. +And then they tried again. But every time they came away with sore +noses. At last they both tried at once. But Carson pounded faster than +ever. One of the bears cried like a baby. The tears ran out of his +eyes. It hurt his feelings to have his nose treated in this rude way. + +After a long time one of the bears got tired. He went away. After +awhile the other went away too. Kit Carson staid in the tree a long +time. Then he came down. The first thing he did was to get his gun. He +loaded it. But the bears did not come back. They were too busy rubbing +noses. + + + + +HORACE GREELEY AS A BOY. + + +Hor-ace Gree-ley was the son of a poor farmer. He was always fond of +books. He learned to read almost as soon as he could talk. He could +read easy books when he was three years old. When he was four, he could +read any book that he could get. + +He went to an old-fashioned school. Twice a day all the children stood +up to spell. They were in two classes. Little Hor-ace was in the class +with the grown-up young people. He was the best speller in the class. +It was funny to see the little midget at the head of this class of +older people. But he was only a little boy in his feelings. If he +missed a word, he would cry. The one that spelled a word that he missed +would have a right to take the head of the class. Sometimes when he +missed, the big boys would not take the head. They did not like to make +the little fellow cry. He was the pet of all the school. + +People in that day were fond of spelling. They used to hold meetings at +night to spell. They called these “spelling schools.” + +At a spelling school two captains were picked out. These chose their +spellers. Then they tried to see which side could beat the other at +spelling. + +Little Hor-ace was always chosen first. The side that got him got the +best speller in the school. Sometimes the little fellow would go to +sleep. When it came his turn to spell, some-body would wake him up. He +would rub his eyes, and spell the word. He would spell it right, too. + +When he was four or five years old, he would lie under a tree, and +read. He would lie there, and forget all about his dinner or his +supper. He would not move until some-body stumbled over him or called +him. + +People had not found out how to burn ker-o-sene oil in lamps then. They +used candles. But poor people like the Gree-leys could not afford to +burn many candles. Hor-ace gathered pine knots to read by at night. + +[Illustration: Greeley Reading] + +He would light a pine knot Then he would throw it on top of the large +log at the back of the fire. This would make a bright flick-er-ing +light. + +Horace would lay all the books he wanted on the hearth. Then he would +lie down by them. His head was toward the fire. His feet were drawn up +out of the way. + +The first thing that he did was to study all his lessons for the next +day. Then he would read other books. He never seemed to know when +anybody came or went. He kept on with his reading. His father did not +want him to read too late. He was afraid that he would hurt his eyes. +And he wanted to have him get up early in the morning to help with the +work. So when nine o’clock came, he would call, “Horace, Horace, +Horace!” But it took many callings to rouse him. + +When he got to bed, he would say his lessons over to his brother. He +would tell his brother what he had been reading. But his brother would +fall asleep while Horace was talking. + +Horace liked to read better than he liked to work. But when he had a +task to do, he did it faith-ful-ly. His brother would say, “Let us go +fishing.” But Horace would answer, “Let us get our work done first.” + +Horace Gree-ley’s father grew poorer and poorer. When Horace was ten +years old, his land was sold. The family were now very poor. They moved +from New Hamp-shire. They settled in Ver-mont. They lived in a poor +little cabin. + +Horace had to work hard like all the rest of the family. But he +borrowed all the books he could get. Sometimes he walked seven miles to +borrow a book. + +A rich man who lived near the Greeleys used to lend books to Horace. +Horace had grown tall. His hair was white. He was poorly dressed. He +was a strange-looking boy. One day he went to the house of the rich man +to borrow books. Some one said to the owner of the house, “Do you lend +books to such a fellow as that?” + +But the gen-tle-man said, “That boy will be a great man some day.” + +This made all the com-pa-ny laugh. It seemed funny that anybody should +think of this poor boy becoming a great man. But it came true. The poor +white-headed boy came to be a great man. + +Horace Greeley learned all that he could learn in the country schools. +When he was thirteen, one teacher said to his father,— + +“Mr. Greeley, Horace knows more than I do. It is not of any use to send +him to school any more.” + + + + +HORACE GREELEY LEARNING TO PRINT. + + +Horace Greeley had always wanted to be a printer. He liked books and +papers. He thought it would be a fine thing to learn to make them. + +One day he heard that the news-paper at East Poult-ney wanted a boy to +learn the printer’s trade. He walked many long miles to see about it. +He went to see Mr. Bliss. Mr. Bliss was one of the owners of the paper. +Horace found him working in his garden. Mr. Bliss looked up. He saw a +big boy coming toward him. The boy had on a white felt hat with a +narrow brim. It looked like a half-peck measure. His hair was white. +His trousers were too short for him. All his clothes were coarse and +poor. He was such a strange-looking boy, that Mr. Bliss wanted to +laugh. + +“I heard that you wanted a boy,” Horace said. + +“Do you want to learn to print?” Mr. Bliss said. + +“Yes,” said Horace. + +“But a printer ought to know a good many things,” said Mr. Bliss. “Have +you been to school much?” + +“No,” said Horace. “I have not had much chance at school. But I have +read some.” + +“What have you read?” asked Mr. Bliss. + +“Well, I have read some his-to-ry, and some travels, and a little of +everything.” + +Mr. Bliss had ex-am-ined a great many schoolteachers. He liked to +puzzle teachers with hard questions. He thought he would try Horace +with these. But the gawky boy answered them all. This tow-headed boy +seemed to know everything. + +Mr. Bliss took a piece of paper from his pocket. He wrote on it, “Guess +we’d better try him.” + +He gave this paper to Horace, and told him to take it to the printing +office. Horace, with his little white hat and strange ways, went into +the printing office. The boys in the office laughed at him. But the +foreman said he would try him. + +That night the boys in the office said to Mr. Bliss, “You are not going +to take that tow head, are you?” + +Mr. Bliss said, “There is something in that tow-head. You boys will +find it out soon.” + +[Illustration: Greeley setting Type] + +A few days after this, Horace came to East Poult-ney to begin his work. +He carried a little bundle of clothes tied up in a hand-ker-chief. + +The fore-man showed him how to begin. From that time he did not once +look around. All day he worked at his type. He learned more in a day +than some boys do in a month. + +Day after day he worked, and said nothing. The other boys joked him. +But he did not seem to hear them. He only kept on at his work. They +threw type at him. But he did not look up. + +The largest boy in the office thought he could find a way to tease him. +One day he said that Horace’s hair was too white. He went and got the +ink ball. He stained Horace’s hair black in four places. This ink stain +would not wash out. But Horace did not once look up. + +After that, the boys did not try to tease him any more. They all liked +the good-hearted Horace. And everybody in the town wondered that the +boy knew so much. + +Horace’s father had moved away to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Horace sent him all +the money he could spare. He soon became a good printer. He started a +paper of his own. He became a famous news-paper man. + + + + +A WONDERFUL WOMAN. + + +Little Dor-o-thy Dix was poor. Her father did not know how to make a +living. Her mother did not know how to bring up her children. + +The father moved from place to place. Sometimes he printed little +tracts to do good. But he let his own children grow up poor and +wretched. + +Dor-o-thy wanted to learn. She wanted to become a teacher. She wanted +to get money to send her little brothers to school. + +Dor-o-thy was a girl of strong will and temper. When she was twelve +years old, she left her wretched home. She went to her grand-mother. +Her grand-mother Dix lived in a large house in Boston. She sent Dorothy +to school. + +Dorothy learned fast. But she wanted to make money. She wanted to help +her brothers. When she was fourteen, she taught a school. She tried to +make herself look like a woman. She made her dresses longer. + +She soon went back to her grand-mother. She went to school again. Then +she taught school. She soon had a school in her grandmother’s house. It +was a very good school. Many girls were sent to her school. Miss Dix +was often ill. But when she was well enough, she worked away. She was +able to send her brothers to school until they grew up. + +Besides helping her brothers, she wanted to help other poor children. +She started a school for poor children in her grandmother’s barn. + +After a while she left off teaching. She was not well. She had made all +the money she needed. + +But she was not idle. She went one day to teach some poor women in an +alms-house. Then she went to see the place where the crazy people were +kept. These insane people had no fire in the coldest weather. + +Miss Dix tried to get the man-a-gers to put up a stove in the room. But +they would not do it. Then she went to the court. She told the judge +about it. The judge said that the insane people ought to have a fire. +He made the man-a-gers put up a stove in the place where they were +kept. + +Then Miss Dix went to other towns. She wanted to see how the insane +people were treated. Some of them were shut up in dark, damp cells. One +young man was chained up with an iron collar about his neck. + +Miss Dix got new laws made about the insane. She per-suad-ed the States +to build large houses for keeping the insane. She spent most of her +life at this work. The Civil War broke out. There were many sick and +wounded soldiers to be taken care of. + +All of the nurses in the hos-pi-tals were put under Miss Dix. She +worked at this as long as the war lasted. Then she spent the rest of +her life doing all that she could for insane people. + + + + +THE AUTHOR OF “LITTLE WOMEN.” + + +Lou-i-sa Al-cott was a wild little girl. When she was very little, she +would run away from home. She liked to play with beggar children. + +One day she wandered so far away from her home, she could not find the +way back again. It was growing dark. The little girl’s feet were tired. +She sat down on a door-step. A big dog was lying on the step. He wagged +his tail. That was his way of saying, “I am glad to see you.” + +Little Lou-i-sa grew sleepy. She laid her head on the curly head of the +big dog. Then she fell asleep. + +Lou-i-sa’s father and mother could not find her. They sent out the town +crier to look for her. + +The town crier went along the street. As he went, he rang his bell. +Every now and then he would tell that a little girl was lost. At last +the man with the bell came to the place where Louisa was asleep. He +rang his bell. That waked her up. She heard him call out in a loud +voice,— + +“Lost, lost! a little girl six years old. She wore a pink frock, a +white hat, and new green shoes.” + +When the crier had said that, he heard a small voice coming out of the +darkness. It said, “Why, dat’s me.” The crier went to the voice, and +found Louisa sitting by the big dog on the door-step. The next day she +was tied to the sofa to punish her for running away. + +She and her sisters learned to sew well. Louisa set up as a doll’s +dress-maker. She was then twelve years old. She hung out a little sign. +She put some pretty dresses in the window to show how well she could +do. + +Other girls liked the little dresses that she made. They came to her to +get dresses made for their dolls. They liked the little doll’s hats she +made better than all. Louisa chased the chickens to get soft feathers +for these hats. + +She turned the old fairy tales into little plays. The children played +these plays in the barn. + +One of these plays was Jack and the Bean-stalk. A squash vine was put +up in the barn. This was the bean-stalk. When it was cut down, the boy +who played giant would come tumbling out of the hay-loft. + +Louisa found it hard to be good and o-be-di-ent. She wrote some verses +about being good. She was fourteen years old when she wrote them. Here +they are:— + + + + +MY KINGDOM. + + +A little kingdom I possess + Where thoughts and feelings dwell, +And very hard I find the task + Of gov-ern-ing it well. + +For passion tempts and troubles me, + A wayward will misleads, +And sel-fish-ness its shadow casts + On all my words and deeds. + +I do not ask for any crown + But that which all may win, +Nor seek to conquer any world + Except the one within. + + +The Al-cott family were very poor. Louisa made up her mind to do +something to make money when she got big. She did not like being so +very poor. + +[Illustration] + +One day she was sitting on a cart-wheel thinking. She was thinking how +poor her father was. There was a crow up in the air over her head. The +crow was cawing. There was nobody to tell her thoughts to but the crow. +She shook her fist at the big bird, and said,— + +“I will do something by and by. Don’t care what. I’ll teach, sew, act, +write, do anything to help the family. And I’ll be rich and famous +before I die. See if I don’t.” + +The crow did not make any answer. But Louisa kept thinking about the +work she was going to do. The other children got work to do that made +money. But Louisa was left at home to do housework. She had to do the +washing. She made a little song about it. Here are some of the verses +of this song:— + +[Illustration] + + + + +A SONG FROM THE SUDS. + + +Queen of my tub, I merrily sing, + While the white foam rises high, +And stur-di-ly wash and rinse and wring, + And fasten the clothes to dry; +Then out in the free fresh air they swing, + Under the sunny sky. + +I am glad a task to me is given, + To labor at day by day; +For it brings me health and strength and hope, + And I cheer-ful-ly learn to say, +“Head you may think, Heart you may feel, + But Hand you shall work alway.” + + +Louisa grew to be a woman at last. She went to nurse soldiers in the +war. She wrote books. When she wrote the book called “Little Women,” +all the young people were de-light-ed. What she had said to the crow +came true at last. She became famous. She had money enough to make the +family com-fort-a-ble. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS FOR LITTLE AMERICANS *** + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will +be renamed. + +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the +United States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. + +START: FULL LICENSE + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the +person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph +1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the +Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when +you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work +on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and + most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no + restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it + under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this + eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the + United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where + you are located before using this eBook. + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format +other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain +Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +provided that: + +* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation." + +* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm + works. + +* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + +* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at +www.gutenberg.org + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without +widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular +state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. + +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: www.gutenberg.org + +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + diff --git a/old/10070-0.zip b/old/10070-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8d1037 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10070-0.zip diff --git a/old/10070-h.zip b/old/10070-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1fc00d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10070-h.zip diff --git a/old/10070-h/10070-h.htm b/old/10070-h/10070-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27090fd --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10070-h/10070-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5599 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans, by Edward Eggleston</title> +<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> +<style type="text/css"> + +body { margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + text-align: justify; } + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight: +normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 300%; + margin-top: 0.6em; + margin-bottom: 0.6em; + letter-spacing: 0.12em; + word-spacing: 0.2em; + text-indent: 0em;} +h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;} +h4 {font-size: 120%;} +h5 {font-size: 110%;} + +.no-break {page-break-before: avoid;} /* for epubs */ + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} + +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + +p {text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: 0.25em; + margin-bottom: 0.25em; } + +p.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: 90%; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +div.fig { display:block; + margin:0 auto; + text-align:center; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em;} + +a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:hover {color:red} + +</style> + +</head> + +<body> + +<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans, by Edward Eggleston</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online +at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you +are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the +country where you are located before using this eBook. +</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Edward Eggleston</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: November 12, 2003 [eBook #10070]<br /> +[Most recently updated: July 26, 2021]</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Juliet Sutherland, Michael Lockey and PG Distributed Proofreaders</div> +<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS FOR LITTLE AMERICANS ***</div> + +<div class="fig" style="width:55%;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" style="width:100%;" alt="[Illustration]" /> +</div> + +<h1>Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans</h1> + +<h2 class="no-break">by Edward Eggleston</h2> + +<h5>AUTHOR OF “TRUE STORIES OF AMERICAN LIFE AND ADVENTURE” +“A FIRST BOOK IN AMERICAN HISTORY” AND “A HISTORY OF THE +UNITED STATES AND ITS PEOPLE FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS”</h5> + +<h4>1895</h4> + +<hr /> + +<h2>Contents</h2> + +<table summary="" style=""> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#pref01">PREFACE</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap01">The First Governor in Boston</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap02">Marquette in Iowa</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap03">Indian Pictures</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap04">William Penn and the Indians</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap05">One Little Bag of Rice</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap06">The Story of a Wise Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap07">Franklin his own Teacher</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap08">How Franklin found out Things</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap09">Franklin asks the Sunshine something</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap10">Franklin and the Kite</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap11">Franklin’s Whistle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap12">Too much for the Whistle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap13">John Stark and the Indians</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap14">A Great Good Man</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap15">Putnam and the Wolf</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap16">Washington and his Hatchet</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap17">How Benny West learned to be a Painter</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap18">Washington’s Christmas Gift</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap19">How Washington got out of a Trap</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap20">Washington’s Last Battle</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap21">Marion’s Tower</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap22">Clark and his Men</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap23">Daniel Boone and his Grapevine Swing</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap24">Daniel Boone’s Daughter and her Friends</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap25">Decatur and the Pirates</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap26">Stories about Jefferson</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap27">A Long Journey</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap28">Captain Clark’s Burning Glass</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap29">Quicksilver Bob</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap30">The First Steamboat</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap31">Washington Irving as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap32">Don’t give up the Ship</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap33">Grandfather’s Rhyme</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap34">The Star-spangled Banner</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap35">How Audubon came to know about Birds</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap36">Audubon in the Wild Woods</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap37">Hunting a Panther</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap38">Some Boys who became Authors</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap39">Daniel Webster and his Brother</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap40">Webster and the Poor Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap41">The India-rubber Man</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap42">Doctor Kane in the Frozen Sea</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap43">A Dinner on the Ice</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap44">Doctor Kane gets out of the Frozen Sea</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap45">Longfellow as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap46">Kit Carson and the Bears</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap47">Horace Greeley as a Boy</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap48">Horace Greeley learning to Print</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap49">A Wonderful Woman</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap50">The Author of “Little Women”</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap51">My Kingdom</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> <a href="#chap52">A Song from the Suds</a></td> +</tr> + +</table> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="pref01"></a>PREFACE.</h2> + +<p> +The primary aim of this book is to furnish the little learner reading matter +that will excite his attention and give him pleasure, and thus make lighter the +difficult task of learning to read. The ruggedness of this task has often been +increased by the use of disconnected sentences, or lessons as dry and +uninteresting as finger exercises on the piano. It is a sign of promise that +the demand for reading matter of interest to the child has come from teachers. +I have endeavored to meet this requirement in the following stories. +</p> + +<p> +As far as possible the words chosen have been such as are not difficult to the +little reader, either from their length or their unfamiliarity. The sentences +and paragraphs are short. Learning to read is like climbing a steep hill, and +it is a great relief to the panting child to find frequent breathing places. +</p> + +<p> +It is one of the purposes of these stories to make the mind of the pupil +familiar with some of the leading figures in the history of our country by +means of personal anecdote. Some of the stories are those that every American +child ought to know, because they have become a kind of national folklore. +Such, for example, are “Putnam and the Wolf” and the story of +“Franklin’s Whistle.” I have thought it important to present +as great a variety of subjects as possible, so that the pupil may learn +something not only of great warriors and patriots, but also of great statesmen. +The exploits of discoverers, the triumphs of American inventors, and the +achievements of men of letters and men of science, find place in these stories. +All the narratives are historical, or at least no stories have been told for +true that are deemed fictitious. Every means which the writer’s literary +experience could suggest has been used to make the stories engaging, in the +hope that the interest of the narrative may prove a sufficient spur to exertion +on the part of the pupil, and that this little book will make green and +pleasant a pathway that has so often been dry and laborious. It will surely +serve to excite an early interest in our national history by giving some of the +great personages of that history a place among the heroes that impress the +susceptible imagination of a child. It is thus that biographical and historical +incidents acquire something of the vitality of folk tales. +</p> + +<p> +The illustrations that accompany the text have been planned with special +reference to the awakening of the child’s attention. To keep the mind +alert and at its best is more than half the battle in teaching. The publishers +and the author of this little book believe that in laying the foundation of a +child’s education the best work is none too good. +</p> + +<p> +The larger words have been divided by hyphens when a separation into syllables +is likely to help the learner. The use of the hyphen has been regulated +entirely with a view to its utility. After a word not too difficult has been +made familiar by its repeated occurrence, the hyphens are omitted. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap01"></a>STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration: THE FIRST GOVERNOR IN BOSTON] +</p> + +<p> +Before the white people came, there were no houses in this country but the +little huts of the In-di-ans. The In-di-an houses were made of bark, or mats, +or skins, spread over poles. +</p> + +<p> +Some people came to one part of the country. Others started set-tle-ments in +other places. When more people came, some of these set-tle-ments grew into +towns. The woods were cut down. Farms were planted. Roads were made. But it +took many years for the country to fill with people. +</p> + +<p> +The first white people that came to live in the woods where Boston is now, +settled there a long time ago. They had a gov-ern-or over them. He was a good +man, and did much for the people. His name was John Win-throp. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing the people had to do was to cut down the trees. After that they +could plant corn. But at first they could not raise any-thing to eat. They had +brought flour and oat-meal from England. But they found that it was not enough +to last till they could raise corn on their new ground. +</p> + +<p> +Win-throp sent a ship to get more food for them. The ship was gone a long time. +The people ate up all their food. They were hungry. They went to the sea-shore, +and found clams and mussels. They were glad to get these to eat. +</p> + +<p> +At last they set a day for every-body to fast and pray for food. The gov-ern-or +had a little flour left. Nearly all of this was made into bread, and put into +the oven to bake. He did not know when he would get any more. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after this a poor man came along. His flour was all gone. His bread had +all been eaten up. His family were hungry. The gov-ern-or gave the poor man the +very last flour that he had in the barrel. +</p> + +<p> +Just then a ship was seen. It sailed up toward Boston. It was loaded with food +for all the people. +</p> + +<p> +The time for the fast day came. But there was now plenty of food. The fast day +was turned into a thanks-giving day. +</p> + +<p> +One day a man sent a very cross letter to Gov-ern-or Win-throp. Win-throp sent +it back to him. He said, “I cannot keep a letter that might make me +angry.” Then the man that had written the cross letter wrote to +Win-throp, “By con-quer-ing yourself, you have con-quered me.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap02"></a>MARQUETTE IN IOWA.</h2> + +<p> +The first white men to go into the middle of our country were French-men. The +French had settled in Can-a-da. They sent mis-sion-a-ries to preach to the +Indians in the West. They also sent traders to buy furs from the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +The French-men heard the Indians talk about a great river in the West. But no +French-man had ever gone far enough to see the Mis-sis-sip-pi. +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette was a priest. Jo-li-et was a trader. These two men were sent to find +the great river that the Indians talked about. +</p> + +<p> +They trav-eled in two birch canoes. They took five men to paddle the canoes. +They took some smoked meat to eat on the way. They also took some Indian corn. +They had trinkets to trade to the Indians. Hatchets, and beads, and bits of +cloth were the money they used to pay the Indians for what they wanted. +</p> + +<p> +The friendly Indians in Wis-con-sin tried to per-suade them not to go. They +told them that the Indians on the great river would kill them. +</p> + +<p> +The friendly Indians also told them that there was a demon in one part of the +river. They said that this demon roared so loud that he could be heard a long +way off. They said that the demon would draw the trav-el-ers down into the +water. Then they told about great monsters that ate up men and their canoes. +</p> + +<p> +But Mar-quette and the men with him thought they would risk the journey. They +would not turn back for fear of the demon or the monsters. +</p> + +<p> +The two little canoes went down the Wis-con-sin River. After some days they +came to the Mis-sis-sip-pi. More than a hundred years before, the Spaniards had +seen the lower part of this river. But no white man had ever seen this part of +the great river. Mar-quette did not know that any white man had ever seen any +part of the Mis-sis-sip-pi. +</p> + +<p> +The two little canoes now turned their bows down the river. Some-times they saw +great herds of buf-fa-loes. Some of these came to the bank of the river to look +at the men in the canoes. They had long, shaggy manes, which hung down over +their eyes. +</p> + +<p> +For two weeks the trav-el-ers paddled down the river. In all this time they did +not see any Indians. After they had gone hundreds of miles in this way, they +came to a place where they saw tracks in the mud. It was in what is now the +State of I-o-wa. +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette and Jo-li-et left the men in their canoes, and followed the tracks. +After walking two hours, they came to an Indian village. The Frenchmen came +near enough to hear the Indians talking. The Indians did not see them. +</p> + +<p> +Jo-li-et and Mar-quette did not know whether the Indians would kill them or +not. They said a short prayer. Then they stood out in full view, and gave a +loud shout. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians came out of their tents like bees. They stared at the strangers. +Then four Indians came toward them. These Indians carried a peace pipe. They +held this up toward the sun. This meant that they were friendly. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians now offered the peace pipe to the French-men. The French-men took +it, and smoked with the Indians. This was the Indian way of saying, “We +are friends.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marquette and Joliet] +</p> + +<p> +Mar-quette asked the Indians what tribe they belonged to. They told him that +they were of the tribe called the Il-li-nois. +</p> + +<p> +They took Jo-li-et and Mar-quette into their village. They came to the door of +a large wig-wam. A chief stood in the door. He shaded his eyes with both hands, +as if the sun were shining in his face. Then he made a little speech. +</p> + +<p> +He said, “French-men, how bright the sun shines when you come to see us! +We are all waiting for you. You shall now come into our houses in peace.” +</p> + +<p> +The Il-li-nois Indians made a feast for their new friends. First they had mush +of corn meal, with fat meat in it. One of the Indians fed the Frenchmen as +though they were babies. He put mush into their mouths with a large spoon. +</p> + +<p> +Then came some fish. The Indian that fed the vis-it-ors picked out the bones +with his fingers. Then he put the pieces of fish into their mouths. After they +had some roasted dog. The French-men did not like this. Last, they were fed +with buf-fa-lo meat. +</p> + +<p> +The next morning six hundred Indians went to the canoes to tell the Frenchmen +good-by. They gave Mar-quette a young Indian slave. And they gave him a peace +pipe to carry with him. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap03"></a>INDIAN PICTURES.</h2> + +<p> +When Mar-quette and his men left the Il-li-nois, they went on down the river. +The friendly Il-li-nois had told them that the Indians they would see were bad, +and that they would kill any one who came into their country. +</p> + +<p> +The Frenchmen had heard before this that there were demons and monsters in the +river. One day they saw some high rocks with pictures painted on them. The ugly +pictures made them think of these monsters. They were painted in red, black, +and green colors. They were pictures of two Indian demons or gods. +</p> + +<p> +Each one of these monsters was about the size of a calf. They had horns as long +as those of a deer. Their eyes were red. Their faces were like a man’s, +but they were ugly and frightful. They had beards like a tiger’s. Their +bodies were covered with scales like those on a fish. Their long tails were +wound round their bodies, and over their heads, and down between their legs. +The end of each tail was like that of a fish. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians prayed to these ugly gods when they passed in their canoes. Even +Mar-quette and his men were a little frightened when they saw such pictures in +a place so lonely. The Frenchmen went down the river about twelve hundred +miles. Some-times the Indians tried to kill them, but by showing the peace pipe +they made friends. At last they turned back. Jo-li-et went to Can-a-da. +Mar-quette preached to the Indians in the West till he died. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap04"></a>WILLIAM PENN AND THE INDIANS.</h2> + +<p> +The King of England gave all the land in Penn-syl-va-ni-a to William Penn. The +King made Penn a kind of king over Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Penn could make the laws +of this new country. But he let the people make their own laws. +</p> + +<p> +Penn wanted to be friendly with the Indians. He paid them for all the land his +people wanted to live on. Before he went to Penn-syl-va-ni-a he wrote a letter +to the Indians. He told them in this letter that he would not let any of his +people do any harm to the Indians. He said he would punish any-body that did +any wrong to an Indian. This letter was read to the Indians in their own +lan-guage. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after this Penn got into a ship and sailed from England. He sailed to +Penn-syl-va-ni-a. When he came there, he sent word to the tribes of Indians to +come to meet him. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians met under a great elm tree on the bank of the river. Indians like +to hold their solemn meetings out of doors. They sit on the ground. They say +that the earth is the Indian’s mother. +</p> + +<p> +When Penn came to the place of meeting, he found the woods full of Indians. As +far as he could see, there were crowds of Indians. Penn’s friends were +few. They had no guns. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had a bright blue sash round his waist. One of the Indian chiefs, who was +the great chief, put on a kind of cap or crown. In the middle of this was a +small horn. The head chief wore this only at such great meetings as this one. +</p> + +<p> +When the great chief had put on his horn, all the other chiefs and great men of +the Indians put down their guns. Then they sat down in front of Penn in the +form of a half-moon. Then the great chief told Penn that the Indians were ready +to hear what he had to say. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had a large paper in which he had written all the things that he and his +friends had promised to the Indians. He had written all the promises that the +Indians were to make to the white people. This was to make them friends. When +Penn had read this to them, it was explained to them in their own lan-guage. +Penn told them that they might stay in the country that they had sold to the +white people. The land would belong to both the Indians and the white people. +</p> + +<p> +Then Penn laid the large paper down on the ground. That was to show them, he +said, that the ground was to belong to the Indians and the white people +to-geth-er. +</p> + +<p> +He said that there might be quarrels between some of the white people and some +of the Indians. But they would settle any quarrels without fighting. When-ever +there should be a quarrel, the Indians were to pick out six Indians. The white +people should also pick out six of their men. These were to meet, and settle +the quarrel. +</p> + +<p> +Penn said, “I will not call you my children, because fathers some-times +whip their children. I will not call you brothers, because brothers sometimes +fall out. But I will call you the same person as the white people. We are the +two parts of the same body.” +</p> + +<p> +The Indians could not write. But they had their way of putting down things that +they wished to have re-mem-bered. They gave Penn a belt of shell beads. These +beads are called wam-pum. Some wam-pum is white. Some is purple. +</p> + +<p> +They made this belt for Penn of white beads. In the middle of the belt they +made a picture of purple beads. It is a picture of a white man and an Indian. +They have hold of each other’s hands. When they gave this belt to Penn, +they said, “We will live with William Penn and his children as long as +the sun and moon shall last.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Penn jumping with the Indians.] +</p> + +<p> +Penn took up the great paper from the ground. He handed it to the great chief +that wore the horn on his head. He told the Indians to keep it and hand it to +their children’s children, that they might know what he had said. Then he +gave them many presents of such things as they liked. They gave Penn a name in +their own language. They named him “O-nas.” That was their word for +a feather. As the white people used a pen made out of a quill or feather, they +called a pen “o-nas.” That is why they called William Penn +“Brother O-nas.” +</p> + +<p> +Penn sometimes went to see the Indians. He talked to them, and gave them +friendly advice. Once he saw some of them jumping. They were trying to see who +could jump the farthest. +</p> + +<p> +Penn had been a very active boy. He knew how to jump very well. He went to the +place where the Indians were jumping. He jumped farther than any of them. +</p> + +<p> +When the great gov-ern-or took part in their sport, the Indians were pleased. +They loved Brother O-nas more than ever. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap05"></a>ONE LITTLE BAG OF RICE</h2> + +<p> +The first white people that came to this country hardly knew how to get their +living here. They did not know what would grow best in this country. +</p> + +<p> +Many of the white people learned to hunt. All the land was covered with trees. +In the woods were many animals whose flesh was good to eat. There were deer, +and bears, and great shaggy buf-fa-loes. There were rabbits and squirrels. And +there were many kinds of birds. The hunters shot wild ducks, wild turkeys, wild +geese, and pigeons. The people also caught many fishes out of the rivers. +</p> + +<p> +Then there were animals with fur on their backs. The people killed these and +sold their skins. In this way many made their living. +</p> + +<p> +Other people spent their time in cutting down the trees. They sawed the trees +into timbers and boards. Some of it they split into staves to make barrels. +They sent the staves and other sorts of timber to other countries to be sold. +In South Car-o-li-na men made tar and pitch out of the pine trees. +</p> + +<p> +But there was a wise man in South Car-o-li-na. He was one of those men that +find out better ways of doing. His name was Thomas Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Thomas Smith had once lived in a large island thousands of miles away from +South Car-o-li-na. In that island he had seen the people raising rice. He saw +that it was planted in wet ground. He said that he would like to try it in +South Car-o-li-na. But he could not get any seed rice to plant. The rice that +people eat is not fit to sow. +</p> + +<p> +One day a ship came to Charles-ton, where Thomas Smith lived. It had been +driven there by storms. The ship came from the large island where Smith had +seen rice grow. The captain of this ship was an old friend of Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The two old friends met once more. Thomas Smith told the captain that he wanted +some rice for seed. The captain called the cook of his ship, and asked him if +he had any. The cook had one little bag of seed rice. The captain gave this to +his friend. +</p> + +<p> +There was some wet ground at the back of Smith’s garden. In this wet +ground he sowed some of the rice. It grew finely. +</p> + +<p> +He gathered a good deal of rice in his garden that year. He gave part of this +to his friends. They all sowed it. The next year there was a great deal of +rice. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the wet land in South Car-o-li-na was turned to rice fields. +Every year many thousands of barrels of rice were sent away to be sold. +</p> + +<p> +All this came from one little bag of rice and one wise man. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Rice Plant.] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap06"></a>THE STORY OF A WISE WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +You have read how Thomas Smith first raised rice in Car-o-li-na. After his +death there lived in South Car-o-li-na a wise young woman. She showed the +people how to raise another plant. Her name was Eliza Lucas. +</p> + +<p> +The father of Miss Lucas did not live in Car-o-li-na. He was gov-ern-or of one +of the islands of the West Indies. Miss Lucas was fond of trying new things. +She often got seeds from her father. These she planted in South Carolina. +</p> + +<p> +Her father sent her some seeds of the in-di-go plant. She sowed some of these +in March. But there came a frost. The in-di-go plant cannot stand frost. Her +plants all died. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas did not give up. She sowed some more seeds in April. These grew +very well until a cut-worm found them. The worm wished to try new things, too. +So he ate off the in-di-go plants. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas was one of the people who try, try again. She had lost her +indigo plants twice. Once more she sowed some of the seed. This time the plants +grew very well. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Lucas wrote to her father about it. He sent her a man who knew how to get +the indigo out of the plant. +</p> + +<p> +The man tried not to show Miss Lucas how to make the indigo. He did not wish +the people in South Carolina to learn how to make it. He was afraid his own +people would not get so much for their indigo. +</p> + +<p> +So he would not explain just how it ought to be done. He spoiled the indigo on +purpose. +</p> + +<p> +But Miss Lucas watched him closely. She found out how the indigo ought to be +made. Some of her father’s land in South Carolina was now planted with +the indigo plants. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Indigo Plant.] +</p> + +<p> +Then Miss Lucas was married. She became Mrs. Pinck-ney. Her father gave her all +the indigo growing on his land in South Carolina. It was all saved for seed. +Some of the seed Mrs. Pinck-ney gave to her friends. Some of it her husband +sowed. It all grew, and was made into that blue dye that we call indigo. When +it is used in washing clothes, it is called bluing. +</p> + +<p> +In a few years, more than a million pounds of indigo were made in South +Carolina every year. Many people got rich by it. And it was all because Miss +Lucas did not give up. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap07"></a>FRANKLIN HIS OWN TEACHER.</h2> + +<p> +Few people ever knew so many things as Franklin. Men said, “How did he +ever learn so many things?” For he had been a poor boy who had to work +for a living. He could not go to school at all after he was ten years old. +</p> + +<p> +His father made soap and candles. Little Ben Frank-lin had to cut wicks for the +candles. He also filled the candle molds. And he sold soap and candles, and ran +on errands. But when he was not at work he spent his time in reading good +books. What little money he got he used to buy books with. +</p> + +<p> +He read the old story of “Pil-grim’s Prog-ress,” and liked it +so well that he bought all the other stories by the same man. But as he wanted +more books, and had not money to buy them, he sold all of these books. The next +he bought were some little his-to-ry books. These were made to sell very cheap, +and they were sold by peddlers. He managed to buy forty or fifty of these +little books of his-to-ry. +</p> + +<p> +Another way that he had of learning was by seeing things with his own eyes. His +father took him to see car-pen-ters at work with their saws and planes. He also +saw masons laying bricks. And he went to see men making brass and copper +kettles. And he saw a man with a turning lathe making the round legs of chairs. +Other men were at work making knives. Some things people learn out of books, +and some things they have to see for them-selves. +</p> + +<p> +As he was fond of books, Ben’s father thought that it would be a good +plan to send him to learn to print them. So the boy went to work in his +brother’s printing office. Here he passed his spare time in reading. He +borrowed some books out of the stores where books were sold. He would sit up a +great part of the night sometimes to read one of these books. He wished to +return it when the book-store opened in the morning. One man who had many books +lent to Ben such of his books as he wanted. +</p> + +<p> +It was part of the bargain that Ben’s brother should pay his board. The +boy offered to board himself if his brother would give him half what it cost to +pay for his board. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Franklin at Study.] +</p> + +<p> +His brother was glad to do this, and Ben saved part of the money and bought +books with it. He was a healthy boy, and it did not hurt him to live mostly on +bread and butter. Sometimes he bought a little pie or a handful of raisins. +</p> + +<p> +Long before he was a man, people said, “How much the boy knows!” +This was because— +</p> + +<p> +He did not waste his time. +</p> + +<p> +He read good books. +</p> + +<p> +He saw things for himself. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap08"></a>HOW FRANKLIN FOUND OUT THINGS.</h2> + +<p> +Frank-lin thought that ants know how to tell things to one another. He thought +that they talk by some kind of signs. When an ant has found a dead fly too big +for him to drag away, he will run off and get some other ant to help him. +Frank-lin thought that ants have some way of telling other ants that there is +work to do. +</p> + +<p> +One day he found some ants eating mo-las-ses out of a little jar in a closet. +He shook them out. Then he tied a string to the jar, and hung it on a nail in +the ceiling. But he had not got all the ants out of the jar. One little ant +liked sweet things so well that he staid in the jar, and kept on eating like a +greedy boy. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Ants talking (magnified)] +</p> + +<p> +At last when this greedy ant had eaten all that he could, he started to go +home. Frank-lin saw him climb over the rim of the jar. Then the ant ran down +the outside of the jar. But when he got to the bottom, he did not find any +shelf there. He went all round the jar. There was no way to get down to the +floor. The ant ran this way and that way, but he could not get down. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: An Ants Feeler (magnified)] +</p> + +<p> +At last the greedy ant thought he would see if he could go up. He climbed up +the string to the ceiling. Then he went down the wall. He came to his own hole +at last, no doubt. +</p> + +<p> +After a while he got hungry again, perhaps. He thought about that jar of sweets +at the end of a string. Then perhaps he told the other ants. Maybe he let them +know that there was a string by which they could get down to the jar. +</p> + +<p> +In about half an hour after the ant had gone up the string, Franklin saw a +swarm of ants going down the string. They marched in a line, one after another. +Soon there were two lines of ants on the string. The ants in one line were +going down to get at the sweet food. The ants in the other line were marching +up the other side of the string to go home. Do you think that the greedy ant +told the other ants about the jar? +</p> + +<p> +And did he tell them that there was a string by which an ant could get there? +</p> + +<p> +And did he tell it by speaking, or by signs that he made with his feelers? +</p> + +<p> +If you watch two ants when they meet, you will see that they touch their +feelers together, as if they said “Good-morning!” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap09"></a>FRANKLIN ASKS THE SUNSHINE SOMETHING.</h2> + +<p> +One day Franklin was eating dinner at the house of a friend. The lady of the +house, when she poured out the coffee, found that it was not hot. +</p> + +<p> +She said, “I am sorry that the coffee is cold. It is because the servant +forgot to scour the coffee-pot. Coffee gets cold more quickly when the +coffee-pot is not bright.” +</p> + +<p> +This set Franklin to thinking. He thought that a black or dull thing would cool +more quickly than a white or bright one. That made him think that a black thing +would take in heat more quickly than a white one. +</p> + +<p> +He wanted to find out if this were true or not. There was no-body who knew, so +there was no-body to ask. But Franklin thought that he would ask the sunshine. +Maybe the sunshine would tell him whether a black thing would heat more quickly +than a white thing. +</p> + +<p> +But how could he ask the sunshine? +</p> + +<p> +There was snow on the ground. Franklin spread a white cloth on the snow. Then +he spread a black cloth on the snow near the white one. When he came to look at +them, he saw that the snow under the black cloth melted away much sooner than +that under the white cloth. +</p> + +<p> +That is the way that the sunshine told him that black would take in heat more +quickly than white. After he had found this out, many people got white hats to +wear in the summer time. A white hat is cooler than a black one. +</p> + +<p> +Some time when there is snow on the ground, you can take a white and a black +cloth and ask the sunshine the same question. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap10"></a>FRANKLIN AND THE KITE.</h2> + +<p> +When Franklin wanted to know whether the ants could talk or not, he asked the +ants, and they told him. When he wanted to know some-thing else, he asked the +sunshine about it, as you have read in another story. That is the way that +Franklin came to know so many things. He knew how to ask questions of +every-thing. +</p> + +<p> +Once he asked the light-ning a question. And the light-ning gave him an answer. +</p> + +<p> +Before the time of Franklin, people did not know what light-ning was. They did +not know what made the thunder. Franklin thought much about it. At last he +proved what it was. He asked the lightning a question, and made it tell what it +was. To tell you this story, I shall have to use one big word. Maybe it is too +big for some of my little friends that will read this book. Let us divide it +into parts. Then you will not be afraid of it. The big word is e-lec-tric-i-ty. +</p> + +<p> +Those of you who live in towns have seen the streets lighted by +e-lec-tric-i-ty. But in Franklin’s time there were no such lights. People +knew very little about this strange thing with a big name. +</p> + +<p> +But Franklin found out many things about it that nobody had ever known before. +He began to think that the little sparks he got from e-lec-tric-i-ty were small +flashes of lightning. He thought that the little cracking sound of these sparks +was a kind of baby thunder. +</p> + +<p> +So he thought that he would try to catch a little bit of lightning. Perhaps he +could put it into one of the little bottles used to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. Then +if it behaved like e-lec-tric-i-ty, he would know what it was. But catching +lightning is not easy. How do you think he did it? +</p> + +<p> +First he made a kite. It was not a kite just like a boy’s kite. He wanted +a kite that would fly when it rained. Rain would spoil a paper kite in a +minute. So Franklin used a silk hand-ker-chief to cover his kite, instead of +paper. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Franklin’s Discovery.] +</p> + +<p> +He put a little sharp-pointed wire at the top of his kite. This was a kind of +lightning rod to draw the lightning into the kite. His kite string was a common +hemp string. To this he tied a key, because lightning will follow metal. The +end of the string that he held in his hand was a silk ribbon, which was tied to +the hemp string of the kite. E-lec-tric-ity will not follow silk. +</p> + +<p> +One night when there was a storm coming, he went out with his son. They stood +under a cow shed, and he sent his kite up in the air. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +After a while he held his knuckle to the key. A tiny spark flashed between the +key and his knuckle. It was a little flash of lightning. +</p> + +<p> +Then he took his little bottle fixed to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. He filled it with +the e-lec-tric-i-ty that came from the key. He carried home a bottle of +lightning. So he found out what made it thunder and lighten. +</p> + +<p> +After that he used to bring the lightning into his house on rods and wires. He +made the lightning ring bells and do many other strange things. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap11"></a>FRANKLIN’S WHISTLE.</h2> + +<p> +When Franklin was an old man, he wrote a cu-ri-ous letter. In that letter he +told a story. It was about some-thing that happened to him when he was a boy. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Here is the story put into verses, so that you will re-member it better. Some +day you can read the story as Franklin told it himself. You will hear people +say, “He paid too much for the whistle.” The saying came from this +story. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap12"></a>TOO MUCH FOR THE WHISTLE</h2> + +<p class="poem"> + As Ben with pennies in his pocket<br/> + Went strolling down the street,<br/> + “Toot-toot! toot-toot!” there came a whistle<br/> + From a boy he chanced to meet,<br/> +<br/> + Whistling fit to burst his buttons,<br/> + Blowing hard and stepping high.<br/> + Then Benny said, “I’ll buy your whistle;”<br/> + But “Toot! toot-toot!” was the reply.<br/> +<br/> + But Benny counted out his pennies,<br/> + The whistling boy began to smile;<br/> + With one last toot he gave the whistle<br/> + To Ben, and took his penny pile.<br/> +<br/> + Now homeward goes the whistling Benny,<br/> + As proud as any foolish boy,<br/> + And in his pockets not a penny,<br/> + But in his mouth a noisy toy.<br/> +<br/> + “Ah, Benny, Benny!” cries his mother,<br/> + “I cannot stand your ugly noise.”<br/> + “Stop, Benny, Benny!” says his father,<br/> + “I cannot talk, you drown my voice.”<br/> +<br/> + At last the whistling boy re-mem-bers<br/> + How much his money might have bought<br/> + “Too many pennies for a whistle,”<br/> + Is little Benny’s ugly thought.<br/> +<br/> + Too many pennies for a whistle<br/> + Is what we all pay, you and I,<br/> + Just for a little foolish pleasure<br/> + Pay a price that’s quite too high. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap13"></a>JOHN STARK AND THE INDIANS.</h2> + +<p> +John Stark was a famous gen-er-al in the Rev-o-lu-tion. But this story is not +about the Rev-o-lu-tion. It is about Stark before he became a soldier. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a young man, Stark went into the woods. His brother and two other +young men were with him. They lived in a camp. It was far away from any houses. +</p> + +<p> +The young men set traps for animals in many places. They wanted to catch the +animals that have fur on them. They wanted to get the skins to sell. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were at war with the white people. One day the young men saw the +tracks of Indians. Then they knew that it was not safe for them to stay in the +woods any longer. They began to get ready to go home. +</p> + +<p> +John Stark went out to bring in the traps set for animals. The Indians found +him, and made him a pris-on-er. They asked him where his friends were. +</p> + +<p> +Stark did not wish his friends to be taken. So he pointed the wrong way. He +took the Indians a long way from the other young men. +</p> + +<p> +But John Stark’s friends did not know that he was a pris-on-er. When he +did not come back, they thought that he had lost his way. They fired their guns +to let him know where they were. +</p> + +<p> +When the Indians heard the guns, they knew where the other hunters were. They +went down to the river, and waited for them. When one of the men came down, +they caught him. +</p> + +<p> +Then John Stark’s brother and the other man came down the river in a +boat. The Indians told Stark to call them. They wanted them to come over where +the Indians were. Then they could take them. +</p> + +<p> +John knew that the Indians were cruel. He knew that if he did not do what they +told him to, they might kill him. But he wished to save his brother. He called +to his brother to row for the other shore. +</p> + +<p> +When they turned toward the other shore, the Indians fired at them. But Stark +knocked up two of their guns. They did not hit the white men. Then some of the +other Indians fired. Stark knocked up their guns also. But the man that was +with his brother was killed. +</p> + +<p> +John now called to his brother, “Run! for all the Indians’ guns are +empty.” +</p> + +<p> +His brother got away. The Indians were very angry with John. They did not kill +him. But they gave him a good beating. These Indians were from Can-a-da. They +took their pris-on-ers to their own village. When they were coming home, they +shouted to let the people know that they had prisoners. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Stark running the Gauntlet] +</p> + +<p> +The young Indian war-ri-ors stood in two rows in the village. Each prisoner had +to run between these two rows of Indians. As he passed, every one of the +Indians hit him as hard as he could with a stick, or a club, or a stone. +</p> + +<p> +The young man who was with Stark was badly hurt in running between these lines. +But John Stark knew the Indians. He knew that they liked a brave man. +</p> + +<p> +When it came his turn to run, he snatched a club from one of the Indians. With +this club he fought his way down the lines. He hit hard, now on this side, and +now on that. The young Indians got out of his way. The old Indians who were +looking on sat and laughed at the others. They said that Stark was a brave man. +</p> + +<p> +One day the Indians gave him a hoe and told him to hoe corn. He knew that the +Indian war-ri-ors would not work. They think it a shame for a man to work. +Their work is left for slaves and women. So Stark pre-tend-ed that he did not +know how to hoe. He dug up the corn instead of the weeds. Then he threw the hoe +into the river. He said, “That is work for slaves and women.” +</p> + +<p> +Then the Indians were pleased with him. They called him the young chief. +</p> + +<p> +After a while some white men paid the Indians a hundred and three dollars to +let Stark go home. They charged more for him than for the other man, because +they thought that he must be a young chief. Stark went hunting again. He had to +get some furs to pay back the money the men had paid the Indians for him. He +took good care that the Indians should not catch him again. +</p> + +<p> +He af-ter-wards became a great fighter against the Indians. He had learned +their ways while he was among them. He knew better how to fight them than +almost any-body else. +</p> + +<p> +In the Rev-o-lu-tion he was a gen-er-al. He fought the British at Ben-ning-ton, +and won a great vic-to-ry. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap14"></a>A GREAT GOOD MAN.</h2> + +<p> +Some men are great soldiers. Some are great law-makers. Some men write great +books. Some men make great in-ven-tions. Some men are great speakers. +</p> + +<p> +Now you are going to read about a man that was great in none of these things. +He was not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. He was never rich. He was a +poor school-teacher. He never held any office. +</p> + +<p> +And yet he was a great man. He was great for his goodness. +</p> + +<p> +He was born in France. But most of his life was passed in Phil-a-del-phi-a +before the Rev-o-lu-tion. +</p> + +<p> +He was twenty-five years old when he became a school-teacher. He thought that +he could do more good in teaching than in any other way. +</p> + +<p> +School-masters in his time were not like our teachers. Children were treated +like little animals. In old times the school-master was a little king. He +walked and talked as if he knew every-thing. He wanted all the children to be +afraid of him. +</p> + +<p> +But Ben-e-zet was not that kind of man. He was very gentle. He treated the +children more kindly than their fathers and mothers did. Nobody in this country +had ever seen a teacher like him. +</p> + +<p> +He built a play-room for the children of his school. He used to take them to +this room during school time for a little a-muse-ment. He man-aged each child +as he found best. Some he could persuade to be good. Some he shamed into being +good. But this was very dif-fer-ent from the cruel beatings that other teachers +of that time gave their pupils. +</p> + +<p> +Of course the children came to love him very much. After they grew to be men +and women, they kept their love for the good little schoolmaster. As long as +they lived they listened to his advice. +</p> + +<p> +There were no good school-books in his time. He wrote some little books to make +learning easier to his pupils. He taught them many things not in their books. +He taught them to be kind to brutes, and gentle with one another. He taught +them to be noble. He made them despise every kind of meanness. +</p> + +<p> +He was a great teacher. That is better than being a great soldier. +</p> + +<p> +Ben-e-zet was a good man in many ways. He was the friend of all poor people. +Once he found a poor man suf-fer-ing with cold for want of a coat. He took off +his own coat in the street and put it on the poor man, and then went home in +his shirt sleeves. +</p> + +<p> +In those days negroes were stolen from Af-ri-ca to be sold into A-mer-i-ca. +Ben-e-zet wrote little books against this wrong. He sent these books over all +the world almost. He also tried to persuade the white men of his own country to +be honest and kind with the Indians. Great men in other countries were pleased +with his books. They wrote him letters. When any of them came to this country, +they went to see him. They wanted to see a man that was good to everybody. His +house was a plain one. But great men liked to sit at the table of the good +schoolmaster. +</p> + +<p> +There was war between the English and French at that time. Can-a-da belonged to +the French. Our country belonged to the English. There was a country called +A-ca-di-a. It was a part of what is now No-va Sco-ti-a. The people of A-ca-di-a +were French. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Departure of the Acadians] +</p> + +<p> +The English took the A-ca-di-ans away from their homes. They sent them to +various places. Many families were divided. The poor A-ca-di-ans lost their +homes and all that they had. +</p> + +<p> +Many hundreds of these people were sent to Phil-a-del-phi-a. Benezet became +their friend. As he was born in France, he could speak their lan-guage. He got +a large house built for some of them to stay in. He got food and clothing for +them. He helped them to get work, and did them good in many other ways. +</p> + +<p> +One day Benezet’s wife came to him with a troubled face. She said, +“There have been thieves in the house. Two of my blankets have been +stolen.” +</p> + +<p> +“Never mind, my dear,” said Benezet, “I gave them to some of +the poor A-ca-di-ans.” +</p> + +<p> +One old Acadian was afraid of Benezet. He did not see why Benezet should take +so much trouble for other people. He thought that Benezet was only trying to +get a chance to sell the Acadians for slaves. When Benezet heard this, he had a +good laugh. +</p> + +<p> +Many years after this the Rev-o-lu-tion broke out. It brought trouble to many +people. Benezet helped as many as he could. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the British army took Phil-a-del-phi-a. They sent their soldiers +to stay in the houses of the people. The people had to take care of the +soldiers. This was very hard for the poor people. +</p> + +<p> +One day Benezet saw a poor woman. Her face showed that she was in trouble. +</p> + +<p> +“Friend, what is the matter?” Benezet said to her. She told him +that six soldiers of the British army had been sent to stay in her house. She +was a washer-woman. But while the soldiers filled up the house she could not do +any washing. She and her children were in want. +</p> + +<p> +Benezet went right away to see the gen-er-al that was in command of the +soldiers. The good man was in such a hurry that he forgot to get a pass. The +soldiers at the gen-er-al’s door would not let him go in. +</p> + +<p> +At last some one told the gen-er-al that a queer-looking fellow wanted to see +him. +</p> + +<p> +“Let him come up,” said the general. +</p> + +<p> +The odd little man came in. He told the general all about the troubles of the +poor washer-woman. The general sent word that the soldiers must not stay any +longer in her house. +</p> + +<p> +The general liked the kind little man. He told him to come to see him again. He +told the soldiers at his door to let Benezet come in when-ever he wished to. +</p> + +<p> +Soon after the Rev-o-lu-tion was over, Benezet was taken ill. When the people +of Phil-a-del-phi-a heard that he was ill, they gathered in crowds about his +house. Every-body loved him. Every-body wanted to know whether he was better or +not. At last the doctors said he could not get well. Then the people wished to +see the good man once more. The doors were opened. The rooms and halls of his +house were filled with people coming to say good-bye to Benezet, and going away +again. +</p> + +<p> +When he was buried, it seemed as if all Phil-a-del-phi-a had come to his +fu-ner-al. The rich and the poor, the black and the white, crowded the streets. +The city had never seen so great a fu-ner-al. +</p> + +<p> +In the company was an A-mer-i-can general. He said, “I would rather be +An-tho-ny Benezet in that coffin than General Wash-ing-ton in all his +glory.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap15"></a>PUTNAM AND THE WOLF.</h2> + +<p> +Putnam was a brave soldier. He fought many battles against the Indians. After +that he became a general in the Revolution. But this is a story of his battle +with a wolf. It took place when he was a young man, before he was a soldier. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam lived in Con-nect-i-cut. In the woods there were still a few wolves. One +old wolf came to Putnam’s neigh-bor-hood every winter. She always brought +a family of young wolves with her. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters would always kill the young wolves. But they could not find the old +mother wolf. She knew how to keep out of the way. +</p> + +<p> +The farmers tried to catch her in their traps. But she was too cunning. She had +had one good lesson when she was young. She had put the toes of one foot into a +steel trap. The trap had snipped them off. After that she was more careful. +</p> + +<p> +One winter night she went out to get some meat. She came to Putnam’s +flock of sheep and goats. She killed some of them. She found it great fun. +</p> + +<p> +There were no dogs about. The poor sheep had nobody to protect them. So the old +wolf kept on killing. One sheep was enough for her supper. But she killed the +rest just for sport. She killed seventy sheep and goats that night. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam and his friends set out to find the old sheep killer. There were six men +of them. They agreed that two of them should hunt for her at a time. Then +another two should begin as soon as the first two should stop. So she would be +hunted day and night. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters found her track in the snow. There could be no mistake about it. +The track made by one of her feet was shorter than those made by the other +feet. That was because one of her feet had been caught in a trap. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters found that the old wolf had gone a long way off. Perhaps she felt +guilty. She must have thought that she would be hunted. She had trotted away +for a whole night. +</p> + +<p> +Then she turned and went back again. She was getting hungry by this time. She +wanted some more sheep. +</p> + +<p> +The men followed her tracks back again. The dogs drove her into a hole. It was +not far from Putnam’s house. +</p> + +<p> +All the farmers came to help catch her. They sent the dogs into the cave where +the wolf was. But the wolf bit the dogs, and drove them out again. +</p> + +<p> +Then the men put a pile of straw in the mouth of the cave. They set the straw +on fire. It filled the cave with smoke. But Mrs. Wolf did not come out. +</p> + +<p> +Then they burned brim-stone in the cave. It must have made the wolf sneeze. But +the cave was deep. She went as far in as she could, and staid there. She +thought that the smell of brimstone was not so bad as the dogs and men who +wanted to kill her. +</p> + +<p> +Putnam wanted to send his negro into the cave to drive out the wolf. But the +negro thought that he would rather stay out. +</p> + +<p> +Then Putnam said that he would go in himself. He tied a rope to his legs. Then +he got some pieces of birch-bark. He set fire to these. He knew that wild +animals do not like to face a fire. +</p> + +<p> +He got down on his hands and knees. He held the blazing bark in his hand. He +crawled through the small hole into the cave. There was not room for him to +stand up. +</p> + +<p> +At first the cave went downward into the ground. Then it was level a little +way. Then it went upward. At the very back of this part of the cave was the +wolf. Putnam crawled up until he could see the wolf’s eyes. +</p> + +<p> +When the wolf saw the fire, she gave a sudden growl. Putnam jerked the rope +that was tied to his leg. The men outside thought that the wolf had caught him. +They pulled on the other end of the rope. +</p> + +<p> +The men pulled as fast as they could. When they had drawn Putnam out, his +clothes were torn. He was badly scratched by the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +He now got his gun. He held it in one hand. He held the burning birch-bark in +the other. He crawled into the cave again. +</p> + +<p> +When the wolf saw him coming again, she was very angry. She snapped her teeth. +She got ready to spring on him. She meant to kill him as she had killed his +sheep. Putnam fired at her head. As soon as his gun went off, he jerked the +rope. His friends pulled him out. +</p> + +<p> +He waited awhile for the smoke of his gun to clear up. Then he went in once +more. He wanted to see if the wolf was dead. +</p> + +<p> +He found her lying down. He tapped her nose with his birch-bark. She did not +move. He took hold of her. Then he jerked the rope. +</p> + +<p> +This time the men saw him come out, bringing the dead wolf. Now the sheep would +have some peace. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap16"></a>WASHINGTON AND HIS HATCHET</h2> + +<p> +It was Ar-bor Day in the Mos-sy Hill School, Johnny Little-john had to speak a +piece that had some-thing to do with trees. He thought it would be a good plan +to say some-thing about the little cherry tree that Washington spoiled with his +hatch-et, when he was a little boy. This is what he said: +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +He had a hatch-et—little George—<br/> + A hatch-et bright and new,<br/> +And sharp enough to cut a stick—<br/> + A little stick—in two.<br/> +<br/> +He hacked and whacked and whacked and hacked,<br/> + This sturd-y little man;<br/> +He hacked a log and hacked a fence,<br/> + As round about he ran.<br/> +<br/> +He hacked his father’s cher-ry tree<br/> + And made an ug-ly spot;<br/> +The bark was soft, the hatch-et sharp,<br/> + And little George forgot.<br/> +<br/> +You know the rest. The father frowned<br/> + And asked the rea-son why;<br/> +You know the good old story runs<br/> + He could not tell a lie.<br/> +<br/> +The boy that chopped that cher-ry tree<br/> + Soon grew to be a youth;<br/> +At work and books he hacked away,<br/> + And still he told the truth:<br/> +<br/> +The youth became a fa-mous man,<br/> + Above six feet in height,<br/> +And when he had good work to do<br/> + He hacked with all his might.<br/> +<br/> +He fought the ar-mies that the king<br/> + Had sent across the sea;<br/> +He bat-tled up and down the land<br/> + To set his country free.<br/> +<br/> +For seven long years he, hacked and whacked<br/> + With all his might and main<br/> +Until the Brit-ish sailed away<br/> + And did not come again. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap17"></a>HOW BENNY WEST LEARNED TO BE A PAINTER.</h2> + +<p> +In old times there lived in Penn-syl-va-ni-a a little fellow whose name was +Ben-ja-min West. He lived in a long stone house. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Painting Baby’s Portrait] +</p> + +<p> +He had never seen a picture. The country was new, and there were not many +pictures in it. Benny’s father was a Friend or Quaker. The Friends of +that day did not think that pictures were useful things to make or to have. +Before he was seven years old, this little boy began to draw pictures. One day +he was watching the cradle of his sister’s child. The baby smiled. Benny +was so pleased with her beauty, that he made a picture of her in red and black +ink. The picture of the baby pleased his mother when she saw it. That was very +pleasant to the boy. +</p> + +<p> +He made other pictures. At school he used to draw with a pen before he could +write. He made pictures of birds and of animals. Sometimes he would draw +flowers. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Flower and Fruit of the Poke-Berry.] +</p> + +<p> +He liked to draw so well, that sometimes he forgot to do his work. His father +sent him to work in the field one day. The father went out to see how well he +was doing his work. Benny was no-where to be found. At last his father saw him +sitting under a large poke-weed. He was making pictures. He had squeezed the +juice out of some poke-berries. The juice of poke-berries is deep red. With +this the boy had made his pictures. When the father looked at them, he was +surprised. There were portraits of every member of the family. His father knew +every picture. +</p> + +<p> +Up to this time Benny had no paints nor any brushes. The Indians had not all +gone away from that neigh-bor-hood. The Indians paint their faces with red and +yellow colors. These colors they make them-selves. Sometimes they prepare them +from the juice of some plant. Sometimes they get them by finding red or yellow +earth. Some of the Indians can make rough pictures with these colors. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians near the house of Benny’s father must have liked the boy. +They showed him how to make red and yellow colors for himself. He got some of +his mother’s indigo to make blue. He now had red, yellow, and blue. By +mixing these three, the other colors that he wanted could be made. +</p> + +<p> +But he had no brush to paint with. He took some long hairs from the cat’s +tail. Of these he made his brushes. He used so many of the cat’s hairs, +that her tail began to look bare. Everybody in the house began to wonder what +was the matter with pussy’s tail. At last Benny told where he got his +brushes. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Making a Paint Brush.] +</p> + +<p> +A cousin of Benny’s came from the city on a visit. He saw some of the +boy’s drawings. When he went home, he sent Benny a box of paints. With +the paints were some brushes. And there was some canvas such as pictures are +painted on. And that was not all. There were in the box six beautiful +en-grav-ings. +</p> + +<p> +The little painter now felt himself rich. He was so happy that he could hardly +sleep at all. At night he put the box that held his treasures on a chair by his +bed. As soon as daylight came, he carried the precious box to the garret. The +garret of the long stone house was his stu-di-o. Here he worked away all day +long. He did not go to school at all. Perhaps he forgot that there was any +school. Perhaps the little artist could not tear himself away from his work. +</p> + +<p> +But the schoolmaster missed him. He came to ask if Benny was ill. The mother +was vexed when she found that he had staid away from school. She went to look +for the naughty boy. After a while she found the little truant. He was hard at +work in his garret. She saw what he had been doing. He had not copied any of +his new en-grav-ings. He had made up a new picture by taking one person out of +one en-grav-ing, and another out of another. He had copied these so that they +made a picture that he had thought of for himself. +</p> + +<p> +His mother could not find it in her heart to punish him. She was too much +pleased with the picture he was making. This picture was not finished. But his +mother would not let him finish it. She was afraid he would spoil it if he did +anything more on it. +</p> + +<p> +The good people called Friends did not like the making of pictures, as I said. +But they thought that Benny West had a talent that he ought to use. So he went +to Phil-a-del-phi-a to study his art. After a while he sailed away to It-a-ly +to see the pictures that great artists had painted. +</p> + +<p> +At last he settled in England. The King of England was at that time the king of +this country too. The king liked West’s pictures. West became the +king’s painter. He came to be the most famous painter in England. +</p> + +<p> +He liked to remember his boyish work. He liked to remember the time when he was +a little Quaker boy making his paints of poke-juice and Indian colors. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap18"></a>WASHINGTON’S CHRISTMAS GIFT.</h2> + +<p> +Washington was fighting to set this country free. But the army that the King of +England sent to fight him was stronger than Washington’s army. Washington +was beaten and driven out of Brook-lyn. Then he had to leave New York. After +that, he marched away into New Jersey to save his army from being taken. At +last he crossed the Del-a-ware River. Here he was safe for a while. +</p> + +<p> +Some of the Hes-sian soldiers that the king had hired to fight against the +Americans came to Trenton. Trenton is on the Del-a-ware River. +</p> + +<p> +Washington and his men were on the other side of the Del-a-ware River from the +Hes-sians. Washington’s men were dis-cour-aged. They had been driven back +all the way from Brook-lyn. It was winter, and they had no warm houses to stay +in. They had not even warm clothes. They were dressed in old clothes that +people had given them. Some of them were bare-footed in this cold weather. +</p> + +<p> +The Hes-sians and other soldiers of the king were waiting for the river to +freeze over. Then they would march across on the ice. They meant to fight +Washington once more, and break up his army. But Washington was thinking about +something too. +</p> + +<p> +He was waiting for Christmas. He knew that the Hessian soldiers on the other +side of the river would eat and drink a great deal on Christmas Day. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marching to Trenton.] +</p> + +<p> +The afternoon of Christmas came. The Hessians were singing and drinking in +Trenton. But Washington was marching up the river bank. Some of his bare-foot +men left blood marks on the snow as they marched. +</p> + +<p> +The men and cannons were put into flat boats. These boats were pushed across +the river with poles. There were many great pieces of ice in the river. But all +night long the flat boats were pushed across and then back again for more men. +It was three o’clock on the morning after Christmas when the last +Americans crossed the river. It was hailing and snowing, and it was very cold. +Two or three of the soldiers were frozen to death. +</p> + +<p> +It was eight o’clock in the morning when Washington got to Trenton. The +Hessians were sleeping soundly. The sound of the American drums waked them. +They jumped out of their beds. They ran into the streets. They tried to fight +the Americans. +</p> + +<p> +But it was too late. Washington had already taken their cannons. His men were +firing these at the Hessians. The Hessians ran into the fields to get away. But +the Americans caught them. +</p> + +<p> +The battle was soon over. Washington had taken nine hundred prisoners. +</p> + +<p> +This was called the battle of Trenton. It gave great joy to all the Americans. +It was Washington’s Christmas gift to the country. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap19"></a>HOW WASHINGTON GOT OUT OF A TRAP.</h2> + +<p> +After the battle of Trenton, Washington went back across the Delaware River. He +had not men enough to fight the whole British army. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans were glad when they heard that he had beaten the Hessians. +They sent him more soldiers. Then he went back across the river to Trenton +again. +</p> + +<p> +There was a British general named Corn-wal-lis. He marched to Trenton. He +fought against Washington. Corn-wal-lis had more men than Washington had. Night +came, and they could not see to fight. There was a little creek between the two +armies. +</p> + +<p> +Washington had not boats enough to carry his men across the river. Corn-wal-lis +was sure to beat him if they should fight a battle the next morning. +</p> + +<p> +Cornwallis said, “I will catch the fox in the morning.” +</p> + +<p> +He called Washington a fox. He thought he had him in a trap. Cornwallis sent +for some more soldiers to come from Prince-ton in the morning. He wanted them +to help him catch the fox. +</p> + +<p> +But foxes sometimes get out of traps. +</p> + +<p> +When it was dark, Washington had all his camp fires lighted. He put men to +digging where the British could hear them. He made Cornwallis think that he was +throwing up banks of earth and getting ready to fight in the morning. +</p> + +<p> +But Washington did not stay in Trenton. He did not wish to be caught like a fox +in a trap. He could not get across the river. But he knew a road that went +round the place where Cornwallis and his army were. He took that road and got +behind the British army. +</p> + +<p> +It was just like John waiting to catch James. James is in the house. John is +waiting at the front door to catch James when he comes out. But James slips out +by the back way. John hears him call “Hello!” James has gone round +behind him and got away. +</p> + +<p> +Washington went out of Trenton in the darkness. You might say that he marched +out by the back door. He left Cornwallis watching the front door. The Americans +went away quietly. They left a few men to keep up the fires, and make a noise +like digging. Before morning these slipped away too. +</p> + +<p> +When morning came, Cornwallis went to catch his fox. But the fox was not there. +He looked for the Americans. There was the place where they had been digging. +Their camp fires were still burning. But where had they gone? +</p> + +<p> +Cornwallis thought that Washington had crossed the river by some means. But +soon he heard guns firing away back toward Princeton. He thought that it must +be thunder. But he found that it was a battle. Then he knew that Washington had +gone to Princeton. +</p> + +<p> +Washington had marched all night. When he got to Princeton, he met the British +coming out to go to Trenton. They were going to help Cornwallis to catch +Washington. But Washington had come to Princeton to catch them. He had a hard +fight with the British at Princeton. But at last he beat them. +</p> + +<p> +When Cornwallis knew that the Americans had gone to Princeton, he hurried there +to help his men. But it was too late. Washington had beaten the British at +Princeton, and had gone on into the hills, where he was safe. +</p> + +<p> +The fox had got out of the trap. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap20"></a>WASHINGTON’S LAST BATTLE.</h2> + +<p> +Washington had been fighting for seven years to drive the British soldiers out +of this country. But there were still two strong British armies in America. +</p> + +<p> +One of these armies was in New York. It had been there for years. The other +army was far away at Yorktown in Virginia. The British general at Yorktown was +Cornwallis. You have read how Washington got away from him at Trenton. +</p> + +<p> +The King of France had sent ships and soldiers to help the Americans. But still +Washington had not enough men to take New York from the British. Yet he went on +getting ready to attack the British in New York. He had ovens built to bake +bread for his men. He bought hay for his horses. He had roads built to draw his +cannons on. +</p> + +<p> +He knew that the British in New York would hear about what he was doing. He +wanted them to think that he meant to come to New York and fight them. When the +British heard what the Americans were doing, they got ready for the coming of +Washington and the French. All at once they found that Washington had gone. He +and his men had marched away. The French soldiers that had come to help him had +gone with him. +</p> + +<p> +Nobody knew what it meant. Washington’s own men did not know where they +were going. They went from New Jersey into Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they marched +across Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they went into Mary-land. They marched across +that State, and then they went into Vir-gin-i-a. +</p> + +<p> +By this time everybody could tell where Washington was going. People could see +that he was going straight to York-town. They knew that Washington was going to +fight his old enemy at York-town. +</p> + +<p> +But he had kept his secret long enough. The British in New York could not send +help to Cornwallis. It was too late. The French ships sailed to Vir-gin-i-a, +and shut up Yorktown on the side of the sea. Washington’s men shut it up +on the side of the land. They built great banks of earth round it. On these +banks of earth they put cannons. +</p> + +<p> +The British could not get away. They fought bravely. But the Americans and +French came closer and closer. +</p> + +<p> +Then the British tried to fight their way out. But they were driven back. Then +Cornwallis tried to get his men across the river. He wanted to get out by the +back door, as Washington had done. But the Americans on the other side of the +river drove them back again. Washington had now caught Cornwallis in a trap. +</p> + +<p> +The Americans fired red-hot cannon balls into Yorktown. These set the houses on +fire. At last Cornwallis had to give up. The British marched out and laid down +their guns and swords. +</p> + +<p> +The British army in New York could not fight the Americans by itself. So the +British gave it up. Then there was peace after the long war. The British pulled +down the British flag and sailed away. The country was free at last. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap21"></a>MARION’S TOWER.</h2> + +<p> +General Mar-i-on was one of the best fighters in the Revolution. He was a +homely little man. He was also a very good man. Another general said, +“Mar-i-on is good all over.” +</p> + +<p> +The American army had been beaten in South Car-o-li-na. Mar-i-on was sent there +to keep the British from taking the whole country. +</p> + +<p> +Marion got to-geth-er a little army. His men had nothing but rough clothes to +wear. They had no guns but the old ones they had used to shoot wild ducks and +deer with. +</p> + +<p> +Marion’s men wanted swords. There were no swords to be had. But Marion +sent men to take the long saws out of the saw mills. These were taken to +black-smiths. The black-smiths cut the saws into pieces. These pieces they +hammered out into long, sharp swords. +</p> + +<p> +Marion had not so many men as the British. He had no cannon. He could not build +forts. He could not stay long in one place, for fear the British should come +with a strong army and take him. He and his men hid in the dark woods. +Sometimes he changed his hiding place suddenly. Even his own friends had hard +work to find him. +</p> + +<p> +From the dark woods he would come out suddenly. He would attack some party of +British soldiers. When the battle was over, he would go back to the woods +again. +</p> + +<p> +When the British sent a strong army to catch him, he could not be found. But +soon he would be fighting the British in some new place. He was always playing +hide and seek. +</p> + +<p> +The British called him the Swamp Fox. That was because he was so hard to catch. +They could not conquer the country until they could catch Marion. And they +never could catch the Swamp Fox. At one time Marion came out of the woods to +take a little British fort. This fort was on the top of a high mound. It was +one of the mounds built a long time ago by the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +Marion put his men all round the fort, so that the men in the fort could not +get out to get water. He thought that they would have to give up. But the men +in the fort dug a well inside the fort. Then Marion had to think of another +plan. +</p> + +<p> +Marion’s men went to the woods and cut down stout poles. They got a great +many poles. When night came, they laid a row of poles along-side one another on +the ground. Then they laid another row across these. Then they laid another row +on top of the last ones, and across the other way again. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Marion’s Tower.] +</p> + +<p> +They laid a great many rows of poles one on top of another. They crossed them +this way and that. As the night went on, the pile grew higher. Still they +handed poles to top of the pile. +</p> + +<p> +Before morning came, they had built a kind of tower. It was higher than the +Indian mound. +</p> + +<p> +As soon as it was light, the men on Marion’s tower began to shoot. The +British looked out. They saw a great tower with men on it. The men could shoot +down into the fort. The British could not stand it. They had to give up. They +were taken prisoners. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap22"></a>CLARK AND HIS MEN.</h2> + +<p> +At the time of the Revolution there were but few people living on the north +side of the O-hi-o River. But there were many Indians there. These Indians +killed a great many white people in Ken-tuck-y. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were sent by British officers to do this killing. There was a +British fort at Vincennes in what is now In-di-an-a. There was another British +fort or post at Kas-kas-ki-a in what is now the State of Il-li-nois. +</p> + +<p> +George Rogers Clark was an American colonel. He wanted to stop the murder of +the settlers by the Indians. He thought that he could do it by taking the +British posts. +</p> + +<p> +He had three hundred men. They went down the O-hi-o River in boats. They landed +near the mouth of the O-hi-o River. Then they marched a hundred and thirty +miles to Kas-kas-ki-a. +</p> + +<p> +Kas-kas-ki-a was far away from the Americans. The people there did not think +that the Americans would come so far to attack them. When Clark got there, they +were all asleep. He marched in and took the town before they waked up. +</p> + +<p> +The people living in Kaskaskia were French. By treating them well, Clark made +them all friendly to the Americans. +</p> + +<p> +When the British at Vin-cennes heard that Clark had taken Kaskaskia, they +thought that they would take it back again. But it was winter. All the streams +were full of water. They could not march till spring. Then they would gather +the Indians to help them, and take Clark and his men. +</p> + +<p> +But Clark thought that he would not wait to be taken. He thought that he would +just go and take the British. If he could manage to get to Vin-cennes in the +winter, he would not be expected. +</p> + +<p> +Clark started with a hundred and seventy men. The country was nearly all +covered with water. The men were in the wet almost all the time. Clark had hard +work to keep his men cheerful. He did everything he could to amuse them. +</p> + +<p> +They had to wade through deep rivers. The water was icy cold. But Clark made a +joke of it. He kept them laughing whenever he could. +</p> + +<p> +At one place the men refused to go through the freezing water. Clark could not +per-suade them to cross the river. He called to him a tall sol-dier. He was the +very tallest man in Clark’s little army. Clark said to him, “Take +the little drummer boy on your shoulders.” +</p> + +<p> +The little drummer was soon seated high on the shoulders of the tall man. +“Now go ahead!” said Clark. +</p> + +<p> +The soldier marched into the water. The little drummer beat a march on his +drum. Clark cried out, “Forward!” Then he plunged into the water +after the tall soldier. All the men went in after him. They were soon safe on +the other side. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +At another river the little drummer was floated over on the top of his drum. At +last the men drew near to Vin-cennes. They could hear the morning and evening +gun in the British fort. But the worst of the way was yet to pass. The Wa-bash +River had risen over its banks. The water was five miles wide. The men marched +from one high ground to another through the cold water. They caught an Indian +with a canoe. In this they got across the main river. But there was more water +to cross. The men were so hungry that some of them fell down in the water. They +had to be carried out. +</p> + +<p> +Clark’s men got frightened at last, and then they had no heart to go any +farther. But Clark remembered what the Indians did when they went to war. He +took a little gun-powder in his hand. He poured water on it. Then he rubbed it +on his face. It made his face black. +</p> + +<p> +With his face blackened like an Indian’s, he gave an Indian war-whoop. +The men followed him again. +</p> + +<p> +The men were tired and hungry. But they soon reached dry ground. They were now +in sight of the fort. Clark marched his little army round and round in such a +way as to make it seem that he had many men with him. He wrote a fierce letter +to the British com-mand-er. He behaved like a general with a large army. +</p> + +<p> +After some fighting, the British com-mand-er gave up. Clark’s little army +took the British fort. This brave action saved to our country the land that +lies between the Ohio River and the Lakes. It stopped the sending of Indians to +kill the settlers in the West. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap23"></a>DANIEL BOONE AND HIS GRAPEVINE SWING.</h2> + +<p> +Daniel Boone was the first settler of Ken-tuck-y. He knew all about living in +the woods. He knew how to hunt the wild animals. He knew how to fight Indians, +and how to get away from them. +</p> + +<p> +Nearly all the men that came with him to Kentucky the first time were killed. +One was eaten by wolves. Some of them were killed by Indians. Some of them went +into the woods and never came back. Nobody knows what killed them. +</p> + +<p> +Only Boone and his brother were left alive. They needed some powder and some +bullets. They wanted some horses. Boone’s brother went back across the +mountains to get these things. Boone staid in his little cabin all alone. +</p> + +<p> +Boone could hear the wolves howl near his cabin at night. He heard the panthers +scream in the woods. But he did not mind being left all alone in these dark +forests. The Indians came to his cabin when he was away. He did not want to see +these vis-it-ors. He did not dare to sleep in his cabin all the time. Sometimes +he slept under a rocky cliff. Sometimes he slept in a cane-brake. A cane-brake +is a large patch of growing canes such as fishing rods are made of. +</p> + +<p> +Once a mother bear tried to kill him. He fired his gun at her, but the bullet +did not kill her. The bear ran at him. He held his long knife out in his hand. +The bear ran against it and was killed. +</p> + +<p> +He made long journeys alone in the woods. One day he looked back through the +trees and saw four Indians. They were fol-low-ing Boone’s tracks. They +did not see him. He turned this way and that. But the Indians still fol-lowed +his tracks. +</p> + +<p> +He went over a little hill. Here he found a wild grape-vine. It was a very long +vine, reaching to the top of a high tree. There are many such vines in the +Southern woods. Children cut such vines off near the roots. Then they use them +for swings. +</p> + +<p> +Boone had swung on grape-vines when he was a boy. He now thought of a way to +break his tracks. He cut the wild grape-vine off near the root. Then he took +hold of it. He sprang out into the air with all his might. The great swing +carried him far out as it swung. Then he let go. He fell to the ground, and +then he ran away in a dif-fer-ent di-rec-tion from that in which he had been +going. +</p> + +<p> +When the Indians came to the place, they could not find his tracks. They could +not tell which way he had gone. He got to his cabin in safety. +</p> + +<p> +Boone had now been alone for many months. His brother did not get back at the +time he had set for coming. Boone thought that his brother might have been +killed. Boone had not tasted anything but meat since he left home. He had to +get his food by shooting animals in the woods. By this time he had hardly any +powder or bullets left. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Boone on the Grapevine Swing] +</p> + +<p> +One evening he sat by his cabin. He heard some one coming. He thought that it +might be Indians. He heard the steps of horses. He looked through the trees. He +saw his brother riding on one horse, and leading another. The other horse was +loaded with powder and bullets and clothes, and other things that Boone needed. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap24"></a>DANIEL BOONE’S DAUGHTER AND HER FRIENDS.</h2> + +<p> +Daniel Boone and his brother picked out a good place in Ken-tuck-y to settle. +Then they went home to North Car-o-li-na. They took with them such things as +were cu-ri-ous and val-u-a-ble. These were the skins of animals they had +killed, and no doubt some of the heads and tails. +</p> + +<p> +Boone was restless. He had seen Kentucky and he did not wish to settle down to +the life of North Carolina. +</p> + +<p> +In two years Boone sold his farm in North Carolina and set out for Kentucky. He +took with him his wife and children and two brothers. Some of their neighbors +went with them. They trav-eled by pack train. All their goods were packed on +horses. +</p> + +<p> +When they reached the place on the Kentucky River that Boone had chosen for a +home they built a fort of log houses. These cabins all stood round a square. +The backs of the houses were outward. There was no door or window in the back +of a house. The outer walls were thus shut up. They made the place a fort. The +houses at the four corners were a little taller and stronger than the others. +There were gates leading into the fort. These gates were kept shut at night. +</p> + +<p> +In the evening the people danced and amused themselves in the square. Indians +could not creep up and attack them. +</p> + +<p> +When the men went out to feed the horses and cows they carried their guns. They +walked softly and turned their eyes quickly from point to point to see if +Indians were hiding near. They held their guns so they could shoot quickly. +</p> + +<p> +The women and children had to stay very near the fort so they could run in if +an Indian came in sight. +</p> + +<p> +Daniel Boone had a daughter named Je-mi-ma. She was about fourteen years old. +She had two friends named Frances and Betsey Cal-lo-way. Frances Galloway was +about the same age as Jemima. +</p> + +<p> +One summer afternoon these three girls went out of the fort. They went to the +river and got into a canoe. It was not far from the fort. They felt safe. They +laughed and talked and splashed the water with their paddles. +</p> + +<p> +The cur-rent carried them slowly near the other shore. They could still see the +fort. They did not think of danger. +</p> + +<p> +Trees and bushes grew thick down to the edge of the river. Five strong Indians +were hiding in the bushes. +</p> + +<p> +One Indian crept care-ful-ly through the bushes. He made no more noise than a +snake. When he got to the edge of the water he put out his long arm and caught +hold of the rope that hung down from the canoe. In a moment he had turned the +boat around and drawn it out of sight from the fort. The girls screamed when +they saw the Indian. Their friends heard them but could not cross the river to +help them. The girls had taken the only canoe. +</p> + +<p> +Boone and Cal-lo-way were both gone from the fort. They got home too late to +start that day. No sleep came to their eyes while they waited for light to +travel by. +</p> + +<p> +As soon as there was a glim-mer of light they and a party of their friends set +out. It was in July and they could start early. +</p> + +<p> +They crossed the river and easily found the Indians’ tracks where they +started. The brush was broken down there. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians were cun-ning. They did not keep close together after they set out. +Each Indian walked by himself through the tall canes. Three of the Indians took +the captives. +</p> + +<p> +Boone and his friends tried in vain to follow them. Sometimes they would find a +track but it would soon be lost in the thick canes. +</p> + +<p> +Boone’s party gave up trying to find their path. They noticed which way +the Indians were going. Then they walked as fast as they could the same way for +thirty miles. They thought the Indians would grow careless about their tracks +after traveling so far. +</p> + +<p> +They turned so as to cross the path they thought the Indians had taken. They +looked carefully at the ground and at the bushes to see if any one had gone by. +</p> + +<p> +Before long they found the Indians’ tracks in a buffalo path. Buffaloes +and other animals go often to lick salt from the rocks round salt springs. They +beat down the brush and make great roads. These roads run to the salt springs. +The hunters call them streets. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians took one of these roads after they got far from the fort. They +could travel more easily in it. They did not take pains to hide their tracks. +</p> + +<p> +As fast as their feet could carry them, Boone and his friends traveled along +the trail. When they had gone about ten miles they saw the Indians. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians had stopped to rest and to eat. It was very warm and they had put +off their moc-ca-sins and laid down their arms. They were kindling a fire to +cook by. +</p> + +<p> +In a moment the Indians saw the white men. Boone and Galloway were afraid the +Indians would kill the girls. +</p> + +<p> +Four of the white men shot at the Indians. Then all rushed at them. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians ran away as fast as they could. They did not stop to pick up their +guns or knives or hatchets. They had no time to put on their moccasins. +</p> + +<p> +The poor worn-out girls were soon safe in their fathers’ arms. +</p> + +<p> +Back to Boones-bor-ough they went, not minding their tired feet. When they got +to the fort there was great joy to see them alive. +</p> + +<p> +I do not believe they ever played in the water again. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap25"></a>DECATUR AND THE PIRATES.</h2> + +<p> +Nearly a hundred years have passed since the ship +“Phil-a-del-phi-a” was burned. But the brave sailors who did it +will never be for-got-ten. +</p> + +<p> +The people of Trip-o-li in Af-ri-ca were pirates. They took the ships of other +nations at sea. They made slaves of their prisoners. The friends of these +slaves sometimes sent money to buy their freedom. Some countries paid money to +these pirates to let their ships go safe. +</p> + +<p> +Our country had trouble with the pirates. This trouble brought on a war. Our +ships were sent to fight against Trip-o-li. +</p> + +<p> +One of the ships fighting against the pirates was called the +“Phil-a-del-phi-a.” One day she was chasing a ship of Trip-o-li. +The “Phil-a-del-phi-a” ran on the rocks. The sailors could not get +her off. The pirates came and fought her as she lay on the rocks. They took her +men prisoners. Then they went to work to get her off. After a long time they +got her into deep water. They took her to Tripoli. Our ships could not go there +after her, because there were so many great cannons on the shore near the ship. +</p> + +<p> +The pirates got the “Philadelphia” ready to go to sea. They loaded +her cannons. They meant to slip out past our ships of war. Then they would take +a great many smaller American ships. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans laid a plan to burn the “Philadelphia.” It was a +very dan-ger-ous thing to try to do. The pirates had ships of war near the +“Philadelphia.” They had great guns on the shore. There was no way +to do it in the day-time. It could only be done by stealing into the Bay of +Tripoli at night. +</p> + +<p> +The Americans had taken a little vessel from the pirates. She was of the kind +that is called a ketch. She had sails. She also had long oars. When there was +no wind to sail with, the sailors could row her with the oars. +</p> + +<p> +This little ketch was sent one night to burn the “Philadelphia.” +The captain of this boat was Ste-phen De-ca-tur. He was a young man, and very +brave. +</p> + +<p> +De-ca-tur made his men lie down, so that the pirates would not know how many +men he had on his ketch. Only about ten men were in sight. The rest were lying +hidden on the boat. +</p> + +<p> +They came near to the “Philadelphia.” It was about ten +o’clock at night. The pirates called to them. The pilot of the ketch told +them that he was from Mal-ta. He told them that he had come to sell things to +the people of Tripoli. He said that the ketch had lost her anchor. He asked +them to let him tie her to the big ship till morning. +</p> + +<p> +The pirates sent out a rope to them. But when the ketch came nearer, the +pirates saw that they had been fooled. They cried out, “Americans, +Americans!” +</p> + +<p> +Then the Americans lying down took hold of the rope and pulled with all their +might, and drew the ketch close to the ship. They were so close, that the +ship’s cannons were over their heads. The pirates could not fire at them. +</p> + +<p> +The men who had been lying still now rose up. There were eighty of them. In a +minute they were scram-bling up the sides of the big ship. Some went in one +way, some another. They did not shoot. They fought with swords and pikes, or +short spears. +</p> + +<p> +Soon they drove the pirates to one side of the ship. Then they could hear the +pirates jumping over into the water. In a few minutes the pirates had all gone. +</p> + +<p> +But the Americans could not stay long. They must burn the ship before the +pirates on the shore should find out what they were doing. +</p> + +<p> +They had brought a lot of kin-dling on the ketch. They built fires in all parts +of the ship. The fire ran so fast, that some of the men had trouble to get off +the ship. +</p> + +<p> +When the Americans got back on the ketch, they could not untie the rope that +held the ketch to the ship. The big ship was bursting into flames. The ketch +would soon take fire. +</p> + +<p> +They took swords and hacked the big rope in two. Then they pushed hard to get +away from the fire. The ketch began to move. The sailors took the large oars +and rowed. They were soon safe from the fire. +</p> + +<p> +All this they had done without any noise. But, now that they had got away, they +looked back. The fire was shooting up toward the sky. The men stopped rowing, +and they gave three cheers. They were so glad, that they could not help it. +</p> + +<p> +By this time the pirates on shore had waked up. They began to fire great cannon +balls at the little ketch. One of the balls went through her sails. Ah! how the +sailors rowed! +</p> + +<p> +The whole sky was now lighted up by the fire. The pirates’ cannons were +thundering. The cannon balls were splashing the water all round the ketch. But +the Americans got away. At last they were safe in their own ships. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap26"></a>STORIES ABOUT JEFFERSON.</h2> + +<p> +Thomas Jef-fer-son was one of the great men of the Revolution. He was not a +soldier. He was not a great speaker. But he was a great thinker. And he was a +great writer. +</p> + +<p> +He wrote a paper that was the very beginning of the United States. It was a +paper that said that we would be free from England, and be a coun-try by +our-selves. We call that paper the Dec-la-ra-tion of In-de-pend-ence. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a boy, Jef-fer-son was fond of boyish plays. But when he was tired +of play, he took up a book. It pleased him to learn things. From the time when +he was a boy he never sat down to rest without a book. +</p> + +<p> +At school he learned what other boys did. But the dif-fer-ence between him and +most other boys was this: he did not stop with knowing just what the other boys +knew. Most boys want to learn what other boys learn. Most girls would like to +know what their school-mates know. But Jef-fer-son wanted to know a great deal +more. +</p> + +<p> +As a young man, Jefferson knew Latin and Greek. He also knew French and +Span-ish and I-tal-ian. +</p> + +<p> +He did not talk to show off what he knew. He tried to learn what other people +knew. When he talked to a wagon maker, he asked him about such things as a +wagon maker knows most about. He would sometimes ask how a wagon maker would go +to work to make a wheel. +</p> + +<p> +When Jefferson talked to a learn-ed man, he asked him about those things that +this man knew most about. When he talked with Indians, he got them to tell him +about their lan-guage. That is the way he came to know so much about so many +things. Whenever anybody told him anything worth while, he wrote it down as +soon as he could. +</p> + +<p> +One day Jefferson was trav-el-ing. He went on horse-back. That was a common way +of trav-el-ing at that time. He stopped at a country tavern. At this tavern he +talked with a stranger who was staying there. +</p> + +<p> +After a while Jefferson rode away. Then the stranger said to the land-lord, +“Who is that man? He knew so much about law, that I was sure he was a +lawyer. But when we talked about med-i-cine, he knew so much about that, that I +thought he must be a doctor. And after a while he seemed to know so much about +re-li-gion, that I was sure he was a min-is-ter. Who is he?” +</p> + +<p> +The stranger was very much surprised to hear that the man he had talked with +was Thomas Jefferson. +</p> + +<p> +Jefferson was a very polite man. One day his grand-son was riding with him. +They met a negro. The negro lifted his cap and bowed. Jefferson bowed to the +negro. But his grand-son did not think it worth while to bow. +</p> + +<p> +Then Jefferson said to his grand-son, “Do not let a poor negro be more of +a gen-tle-man than you are.” In the Dec-la-ra-tion of In-de-pend-ence, +Jefferson wrote these words: “All men are created equal.” He also +said that the poor man had the same right as the rich man to live, and to be +free, and to try to make himself happy. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap27"></a>A LONG JOURNEY.</h2> + +<p> +A long time ago, when Thomas Jefferson was Pres-i-dent, most of the people in +this country lived in the East. Nobody knew anything about the Far West. The +only people that lived there were Indians. Many of these Indians had never seen +a white man. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: An Elk] +</p> + +<p> +The Pres-i-dent sent men to travel into this wild part of the country. He told +them to go up to the upper end of the Mis-sou-ri River. Then they were to go +across the Rocky Mountains. They were to keep on till they got to the Pa-cif-ic +O-cean. Then they were to come back again. They were to find out the best way +to get through the mountains. And they were to find out what kind of people the +Indians in that country were. They were also to tell about the animals. +</p> + +<p> +There were two captains of this company. Their names were Lewis and Clark. +There were forty-five men in the party. +</p> + +<p> +They were gone two years and four months. For most of that time they did not +see any white men but their own party. They did not hear a word from home for +more than two years. +</p> + +<p> +They got their food mostly by hunting. They killed a great many buf-fa-loes and +elks and deer. They also shot wild geese and other large birds. Sometimes they +had nothing but fish to eat. Sometimes they had to eat wolves. When they had no +other meat, they were glad to buy dogs from the Indians and eat them. Sometimes +they ate horses. They became fond of the meat of dogs and horses. +</p> + +<p> +When they were very hungry, they had to live on roots if they could get them. +Some of the Indians made a kind of bread out of roots. The white men bought +this when they could not get meat. But there were days when they did not have +anything to eat. +</p> + +<p> +They were very friendly with the Indians. One day some of the men went to make +a visit to an Indian village. The Indians gave them something to eat. +</p> + +<p> +In the Indian wig-wam where they were, there was a head of a dead buffalo. When +dinner was over, the Indians filled a bowl full of meat. They set this down in +front of the head. Then they said to the head, “Eat that.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Feeding the Spirit of the Buffalo.] +</p> + +<p> +The Indians believed, that, if they treated this buffalo head politely, the +live buffaloes would come to their hunting ground. Then they would have plenty +of meat. They think the spirit of the buffalo is a kind of a god. They are very +careful to please this god. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap28"></a>CAPTAIN CLARK’S BURNING GLASS.</h2> + +<p> +The Indians among whom Captain Clark and Captain Lewis traveled had many +strange ways of doing things. They had nothing like our matches for making +fire. One tribe of Indians had this way of lighting a fire. An Indian would lay +down a dry stick. He would rub this stick with the end of another stick. After +a while this rubbing would make something like saw-dust on the stick that was +lying down. The Indian would keep on rubbing till the wood grew hot. Then the +fine wood dust would smoke. Then it would burn. The Indian would put a little +kin-dling wood on it. Soon he would have a large fire. +</p> + +<p> +In that time the white people had not yet found out how to make matches. They +lighted a fire by striking a piece of flint against a piece of steel. This +would make a spark of fire. By letting this spark fall on something that would +burn easily, they started a fire. +</p> + +<p> +White men had another way of lighting a fire when the sun was shining. They +used what was called a burning glass. This was a round piece of glass. It was +thick in the middle, and thin at the edge. When you held up a burning glass in +the sun, it drew the sun’s heat so as to make a little hot spot. If you +put paper under this spot of hot sunshine, it would burn. Men could light the +to-bac-co in their pipes with one of these glasses. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Clark had something funny happen to him on account of his burning +glass. He had walked ahead of the rest of his men. He sat down on a rock. There +were some Indians on the other side of the river. They did not see the captain. +Captain Clark saw a large bird called a crane flying over his head. He raised +his gun and shot it. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Cranes] +</p> + +<p> +The Indians on the other side of the river had never seen a white man in their +lives. They had never heard a gun. They used bows and arrows. +</p> + +<p> +They heard the sound of Clark’s gun. They looked up and saw the large +bird falling from the sky. It fell close to where Captain Clark sat. Just as it +fell they caught sight of Captain Clark sitting on the rocks. They thought they +had seen him fall out of the sky. They thought that the sound of his gun was a +sound like thunder that was made when he came down. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians all ran away as fast as they could. They went into their wig-warns +and closed them. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Clark wished to be friendly with them. So he got a canoe and paddled to +the other side of the river. He came to the Indian houses. He found the flaps +which they use for doors shut. He opened one of them and went in. The Indians +were sitting down, and they were all crying and trembling. +</p> + +<p> +Among the Indians the sign of peace is to smoke to-geth-er. Captain Clark held +out his pipe to them. That was to say, “I am your friend.” He shook +hands with them and gave some of them presents. Then they were not so much +afraid. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Lighting a Pipe with a Burning Glass.] +</p> + +<p> +He wished to light his pipe for them to smoke. So he took out his burning +glass. He held it in the sun. He held his pipe under it. The sunshine was drawn +together into a bright little spot on the tobacco. Soon the pipe began to +smoke. +</p> + +<p> +Then he held out his pipe for the Indians to smoke with him. That is their way +of making friends. But none of the Indians would touch the pipe. They thought +that he had brought fire down from heaven to light his pipe. They were now sure +that he fell down from the sky. They were more afraid of him than ever. +</p> + +<p> +At last Captain Clark’s Indian man came. He told the other Indians that +the white man did not come out of the sky. Then they smoked the pipe, and were +not afraid. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap29"></a>QUICKSILVER BOB.</h2> + +<p> +Robert Fulton was the man who set steam-boats to running on the rivers. Other +men had made such boats before. But Fulton made the first good one. +</p> + +<p> +When he was a boy, he lived in the town of Lan-cas-ter in Penn-syl-van-ia. Many +guns were made in Lancaster. The men who made these guns put little pictures on +them. That was to make them sell to the hunters who liked a gun with pictures. +Little Robert Fulton could draw very well for a boy. He made some pretty little +drawings. These the gun makers put on their guns. +</p> + +<p> +Fulton went to the gun shops a great deal. He liked to see how things were +made. He tried to make a small air gun for himself. +</p> + +<p> +He was always trying to make things. He got some quick-sil-ver. He was trying +to do something with it. But he would not tell what he wanted to do. So the +gun-smiths called him Quick-sil-ver Bob. +</p> + +<p> +He was so much in-ter-est-ed in such things, that he sometimes neg-lect-ed his +lessons. He said that his head was so full of new notions, that he had not much +room left for school learning. +</p> + +<p> +One morning he came to school late. +</p> + +<p> +“What makes you so late?” asked the teacher. +</p> + +<p> +“I went to one of the shops to make myself a lead pencil,” said +little Bob. “Here it is. It is the best one I ever had.” +</p> + +<p> +The teacher tried it, and found it very good. Lead pencils in that day were +made of a long piece of lead sharpened at the end. +</p> + +<p> +Quick-sil-ver Bob was a very odd little boy. He said many cu-ri-ous things. +Once the teacher punished him for not getting his lessons. He rapped Robert on +the knuckles with a fer-ule. Robert did not like this any more than any other +boy would. +</p> + +<p> +“Sir,” said the boy, “I came here to have something beaten +into my head, not into my knuckles.” +</p> + +<p> +In that day people used to light candles and stand them in the window on the +Fourth of July. These candles in every window lighted up the whole town. But +one year candles were scarce and high. The city asked the people not to light +up their windows on the Fourth. +</p> + +<p> +Bob did not like to miss the fun of his Fourth of July. He went to work to make +something like rockets or Roman candles. It was a very dan-ger-ous business for +a boy. +</p> + +<p> +“What are you doing, Bob?” some one asked him. +</p> + +<p> +“The city does not want us to burn our candles on the Fourth,” he +said. “I am going to shoot mine into the air.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +He used to go fishing with a boy named Chris Gumpf. The father of Chris went +with them. They fished from a flat boat. The two boys had to push the boat to +the fishing place with poles. +</p> + +<p> +“I am tired of poling that boat,” said Robert to Chris one day when +they came home. +</p> + +<p> +So he set to work to think out a plan to move the boat in an easier way than by +poles. He whittled out the model of a tiny paddle wheel. Then he went to work +with Chris Gumpf, and they made a larger paddle wheel. This they set up in the +fishing boat. The wheel was turned by the boys with a crank. They did not use +the poles any more. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap30"></a>THE FIRST STEAMBOAT.</h2> + +<p> +The first good steam-boat was built in New York. She was built by Robert +Fulton. Her name was “Clermont.” When the people saw her, they +laughed. They said that such a boat would never go. For thousands of years +boat-men had made their boats go by using sails and oars. People had never seen +any such boat as this. It seemed foolish to believe that a boat could be pushed +along by steam. +</p> + +<p> +The time came for Fulton to start his boat. A crowd of people were standing on +the shore. The black smoke was coming out of the smoke-stack. The people were +laughing at the boat. They were sure that it would not go. At last the +boat’s wheels began to turn round. Then the boat began to move. There +were no oars. There were no sails. But still the boat kept moving. Faster and +faster she went. All the people now saw that she could go by steam. They did +not laugh any more. They began to cheer. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Seeing the First Steam boat] +</p> + +<p> +The little steam-boat ran up to Al-ba-ny. The people who lived on the river did +not know what to make of it. They had never heard of a steam-boat. They could +not see what made the boat go. +</p> + +<p> +There were many sailing vessels on the river. Fulton’s boat passed some +of these in the night. The sailors were afraid when they saw the fire and +smoke. The sound of the steam seemed dreadful to them. Some of them went +down-stairs in their ships for fear. Some of them went ashore. Perhaps they +thought it was a living animal that would eat them up. +</p> + +<p> +But soon there were steam-boats on all the large rivers. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap31"></a>WASHINGTON IRVING AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +The Revolution was about over. Americans were very happy. Their country was to +be free. +</p> + +<p> +At this time a little boy was born in New York. His family was named Ir-ving. +What should this little boy be named? +</p> + +<p> +His mother said, “Washington’s work is done. Let us name the baby +Washington.” So he was called Washington Ir-ving. +</p> + +<p> +When this baby grew to be a little boy, he was one day walking with his nurse. +The nurse was a Scotch girl. She saw General Washington go into a shop. She led +the little boy into the shop also. +</p> + +<p> +The nurse said to General Washington, “Please, your Honor, here is a +bairn that is named for you.” +</p> + +<p> +“Bairn” is a Scotch word for child. Washington put his hand on the +little boy’s head and gave him his blessing. When Irving became an +author, he wrote a life of Washington. +</p> + +<p> +Little Irving was a merry, playful boy. He was full of mischief. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes he would climb out of a window to the roof of his father’s +house. From this he would go to roofs of other houses. Then the little rascal +would drop a pebble down a neighbor’s chimney. Then he would hurry back +and get into the window again. He would wonder what the people thought when the +pebble came rattling down their chimney. Of course he was punished when his +tricks were found out. But he was a favorite with his teacher. With all his +faults, he would not tell a lie. The teacher called the little fellow +“General.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Irving in Mischief.] +</p> + +<p> +In those days naughty school-boys were whipped. Irving could not bear to see +another boy suffer. When a boy was to be whipped, the girls were sent out. +Irving always asked the schoolmaster to let him go out with the girls. +</p> + +<p> +Like other boys, Irving was fond of stories. He liked to read about Sind-bad +the Sailor, and Rob-in-son Cru-soe. But most of all he liked to read about +other countries. He had twenty small volumes called “The World +Dis-played.” They told about the people and countries of the world. +Irving read these little books a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +One day the schoolmaster caught him reading in school. The master slipped +behind him and grabbed the book. Then he told Irving to stay after school. +</p> + +<p> +Irving expected a pun-ish-ment. But the master told him he was pleased to find +that he liked to read such good books. He told him not to read them in school. +</p> + +<p> +Reading about other countries made Irving wish to see them. He thought he would +like to travel. Like other wild boys, he thought of running away. He wanted to +go to sea. +</p> + +<p> +But he knew that sailors had to eat salt pork. He did not like salt pork. He +thought he would learn to like it. When he got a chance, he ate pork. And +sometimes he would sleep all night on the floor. He wanted to get used to a +hard bed. +</p> + +<p> +But the more he ate pork, the more he disliked it. And the more he slept on the +floor, the more he liked a good bed. So he gave up his foolish notion of being +a sailor boy. +</p> + +<p> +Some day you will read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” You will find +some famous stories in it. There is the story of Rip Van Win-kle, who slept +twenty years. And there is the funny story of the Head-less Horse-man. When you +read these a-mus-ing stories, you will remember the playful boy who became a +great author. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Rip Van Winkle wakes up] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap32"></a>DON’T GIVE UP THE SHIP.</h2> + +<p> +Fred was talking to his sister one day. He said,— +</p> + +<p> +“Alice, what makes people say, ‘Don’t give up the +ship’?” +</p> + +<p> +Alice said, “I don’t know. That’s what the teacher said to me +yes-ter-day when I thought that I could not get my lesson.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Fred, “and that’s what father said to me. I +told him I never could learn to write well.” He only said, “You +must not give up the ship, my boy.” +</p> + +<p> +“I haven’t any ship to give up,” said Alice. +</p> + +<p> +“And what has a ship to do with my writing?” said Fred. +</p> + +<p> +“There must be some story about a ship,” Alice said. +</p> + +<p> +“Maybe grand-father would know,” said Fred. “Let’s ask +him.” +</p> + +<p> +They found their grand-father writing in the next room. They did not wish to +disturb him. They turned to leave the room. +</p> + +<p> +But grand-father looked up just then. He smiled, and laid down his pen. +</p> + +<p> +“Did you want something?” he asked. “We wanted to ask you a +question,” said Alice. “We want to know why people say, +‘Don’t give up the ship.’” +</p> + +<p> +“We thought maybe there is a story to it,” said Fred. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, there is,” said their grandfather. “And I know a little +rhyme that tells the story.” +</p> + +<p> +“Could you say it to us?” asked Alice. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, if I can think of it. Let me see. How does it begin?” +</p> + +<p> +Grandfather leaned his head back in the chair. He shut his eyes for a moment. +He was trying to remember. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, now I remember it!” he said. +</p> + +<p> +Then he said to them these little verses:— +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap33"></a>GRANDFATHER’S RHYME.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +When I was but a boy,<br/> + I heard the people tell<br/> +How gallant Captain Law-rence<br/> + So bravely fought and fell.<br/> +<br/> +The ships lay close together,<br/> + I heard the people say,<br/> +And many guns were roaring<br/> + Upon that battle day.<br/> +<br/> +A grape-shot struck the captain,<br/> + He laid him down to die:<br/> +They say the smoke of powder<br/> + Made dark the sea and sky.<br/> +<br/> +The sailors heard a whisper<br/> + Upon the captain’s lip:<br/> +The last command of Law-rence<br/> + Was, “Don’t give up the ship.”<br/> +<br/> +And ever since that battle<br/> + The people like to tell<br/> +How gallant Captain Lawrence<br/> + So bravely fought and fell.<br/> +<br/> +When disappointment happens,<br/> + And fear your heart annoys,<br/> +Be brave, like Captain Lawrence—<br/> + And don’t give up, my boys! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap34"></a>THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER.</h2> + +<p> +Everybody in the United States has heard the song about the star-span-gled +banner. Nearly everybody has sung it. It was written by Francis Scott Key. +</p> + +<p> +Key was a young lawyer. In the War of 1812 he fought with the American army. +The British landed soldiers in Mary-land. At Bla-dens-burg they fought and beat +the Americans. Key was in this battle on the American side. +</p> + +<p> +After the battle the British army took Washington, and burned the public +buildings. Key had a friend who was taken prisoner by the British. He was on +one of the British ships. Key went to the ships with a flag of truce. A flag of +truce is a white flag. It is carried in war when one side sends a message to +the other. +</p> + +<p> +When Key got to the British ships, they were sailing to Bal-ti-more. They were +going to try to take Bal-ti-more. The British com-mand-er would not let Key go +back. He was afraid that he would let the Americans know where the ships were +going. +</p> + +<p> +Key was kept a kind of prisoner while the ships attacked Bal-ti-more. The ships +tried to take the city by firing at it from the water. The British army tried +to take the city on the land side. +</p> + +<p> +The ships did their worst firing at night. They tried to take the little fort +near the city. +</p> + +<p> +Key could see the battle. He watched the little fort. He was afraid that the +men in it would give up. He was afraid that the fort would be broken down by +the cannon balls. +</p> + +<p> +The British fired bomb-shells and rockets at the fort. When these burst, they +made a light. By this light Key could see that the little fort was still +standing. He could see the flag still waving over it. He tells this in his song +in these words:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“And the rocket’s red glare, the bombs bursting in air<br/> +Gave proof through the night that our flag was still there.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +But after many hours of fighting the British became dis-cour-aged. They found +that they could not take the city. The ships almost ceased to fire. +</p> + +<p> +Key did not know whether the fort had been knocked down or not. He could not +see whether the flag was still flying or not. He thought that the Americans +might have given up. He felt what he wrote in the song:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Oh! say, does that star-span-gled banner yet wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave?” +</p> + +<p> +When the break of day came, Key looked toward the fort. It was still standing. +There was a flag flying over it. It grew lighter. He could see that it was the +American flag. His feelings are told in two lines of the song:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“’Tis the star spangled banner, oh, long may it wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave!” +</p> + +<p> +Key was full of joy. He took an old letter from his pocket. The back of this +letter had no writing on it. Here he wrote the song about the star-spangled +banner. +</p> + +<p> +The British com-mand-er now let Key go ashore. When he got to Baltimore, he +wrote out his song. He gave it to a friend. This friend took it to a printing +office. But the printers had all turned soldiers. They had all gone to defend +the city. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +There was one boy left in the office. He knew how to print. He took the verses +and printed them on a broad sheet of paper. +</p> + +<p> +The printed song was soon in the hands of the soldiers around Baltimore. It was +sung in the streets. It was sung in the the-a-ters. It traveled all over the +country. Everybody learned to sing:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just;<br/> +And this be our motto—‘In God is our trust’—<br/> +And the star-span-gled banner in triumph shall wave<br/> +O’er the land of the free, and the home of the brave.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap35"></a>HOW AUDUBON CAME TO KNOW ABOUT BIRDS.</h2> + +<p> +John James Au-du-bon knew more about the birds of this country than any man had +ever known before. He was born in the State of Lou-is-i-a-na. His father took +him to France when he was a boy. He went to school in France. +</p> + +<p> +The little John James was fond of stud-y-ing about wild animals. But most of +all he wished to know about birds. Seeing that the boy liked such things, his +father took pains to get birds and flowers for him. +</p> + +<p> +While he was yet a boy at school, he began to gather birds and other animals +for himself. He learned to skin and stuff them. But his stuffed birds did not +please him. Their feathers did not look bright, like those of live birds. He +wanted living birds to study. +</p> + +<p> +His father told him that he could not keep so many birds alive. To please the +boy he got him a book with pictures in it. Looking at these pictures made John +James wish to draw. He thought that he could make pictures that would look like +the live birds. +</p> + +<p> +But when he tried to paint a picture of a bird, it looked worse than his +stuffed birds. The birds he drew were not much like real birds. He called them +a “family of cripples.” As often as his birthday came round, he +made a bon-fire of his bad pictures. Then he would begin over again. +</p> + +<p> +All this time he was learning to draw birds. But he was not willing to make +pictures that were not just like the real birds. So when he grew to be a man he +went to a great French painter whose name was David. David taught him to draw +and paint things as they are. +</p> + +<p> +Then he came back to this country, and lived awhile in Pennsylvania. Here his +chief study was the wild creatures of the woods. +</p> + +<p> +He gathered many eggs of birds. He made pictures of these eggs. He did not take +birds’ eggs to break up the nests. He was not cruel. He took only what he +needed to study. +</p> + +<p> +He would make two little holes in each egg. Then he would shake the egg, or +stir it up with a little stick or straw, or a long pin. This would break up the +inside of the egg. Then he would blow into one of the holes. That would blow +the inside of the egg out through the other hole. +</p> + +<p> +These egg shells he strung together by running strings through the holes. He +hung these strings of egg shells all over the walls of his room. On the +man-tel-piece he put the stuffed skins of squirrels, raccoons, o-pos-sums, and +other small animals. On the shelves his friends could see frogs, snakes, and +other animals. +</p> + +<p> +He married a young lady, and brought her to live in this mu-se-um with his dead +snakes, frogs, and strings of birds’ eggs. She liked what he did, and was +sure that he would come to be a great man. +</p> + +<p> +He made up his mind to write a great book about American birds. He meant to +tell all about the birds in one book. Then in another book he would print +pictures of the birds, just as large as the birds them-selves. He meant to have +them look just like the birds. +</p> + +<p> +To do this he must travel many thousands of miles. He must live for years +almost all of the time in the woods. He would have to find and shoot the birds, +in order to make pictures of them. And he must see how the birds lived, and how +they built their nests, so that he could tell all about them. It would take a +great deal of work and trouble. But he was not afraid of trouble. +</p> + +<p> +That was many years ago. Much of our country was then covered with great trees. +Au-du-bon sometimes went in a boat down a lone-some river. Sometimes he rode on +horse-back. Often he had to travel on foot through woods where there were no +roads. Many a time he had to sleep out of doors. +</p> + +<p> +He lost his money and became poor. Sometimes he had to paint portraits to get +money to live on. Once he turned dancing master for a while. But he did not +give up his great idea. He still studied birds, and worked to make his books +about American birds. His wife went to teaching to help make a living. +</p> + +<p> +After years of hard work, he made paintings of nearly a thousand birds. That +was almost enough for his books. But, while he was traveling, two large rats +got into the box in which he kept his pictures. They cut up all his paintings +with their teeth, and made a nest of the pieces. This almost broke his heart +for a while. For many nights he could not sleep, because he had lost all his +work. +</p> + +<p> +But he did not give up. After some days he took his gun, and went into the +woods. He said to himself, “I will begin over again. I can make better +paintings than those that the rats spoiled.” But it took him four long +years and a half to find the birds, and make the pictures again. +</p> + +<p> +He was so careful to have his drawings just like the birds, that he would +measure them in every way. Thus he made his pictures just the size of the birds +themselves. +</p> + +<p> +At last the great books were printed. In this country, in France, and in +England, people praised the won-der-ful books. They knew that Au-du-bon was +indeed a great man. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap36"></a>AUDUBON IN THE WILD WOODS.</h2> + +<p> +When Au-du-bon was making his great book about birds, he had to live much in +the woods. Sometimes he lived among the Indians. He once saw an Indian go into +a hollow tree. There was a bear in the tree. The Indian had a knife in his +hand. He fought with the bear in the tree, and killed it. +</p> + +<p> +Au-du-bon could shoot very well. A friend of his one day threw up his cap in +the air. He told Au-du-bon to shoot at it. When the cap came down, it had a +hole in it. +</p> + +<p> +But the hunters who lived in the woods could shoot better. They would light a +candle. Then one of the hunters would take his gun, and go a hundred steps away +from the candle. He would then shoot at the candle. He would shoot so as to +snuff it. He would not put out the candle. He would only cut off a bit of the +wick with the bullet. But he would leave the candle burning. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Snuffing the Candle.] +</p> + +<p> +Once Audubon came near being killed by some robbers. He stopped at a cabin +where lived an old white woman. He found a young Indian in the house. The +Indian had hurt himself with an arrow. He had come to the house to spend the +night. +</p> + +<p> +The old woman saw Audubon’s fine gold watch. She asked him to let her +look at it. He put it into her hands for a minute. Then the Indian passed by +Audubon, and pinched him two or three times. That was to let him know that the +woman was bad, and that she might rob him. +</p> + +<p> +Audubon went and lay down with his hand on his gun. After a while two men came +in. They were the sons of the old woman. Then the old woman sharpened a large +knife. She told the young men to kill the Indian first, and then to kill +Audubon and take his watch. She thought that Audubon was asleep. But he drew up +his gun ready to fire. +</p> + +<p> +Just then two hunters came to the cabin. Audubon told them what the robbers +were going to do. They took the old woman and her sons, and tied their hands +and feet. The Indian, though he was in pain from his hurt, danced for joy when +he saw that the robbers were caught. The woman and her sons were afterward +punished. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap37"></a>HUNTING A PANTHER.</h2> + +<p> +Audubon was traveling in the woods in Mis-sis-sip-pi. He found the little cabin +of a settler. He staid there for the night. The settler told him that there was +a panther in the swamp near his house. A panther is a very large and fierce +animal. It is large enough to kill a man. This was a very bad panther. It had +killed some of the settler’s dogs. +</p> + +<p> +Audubon said, “Let us hunt this panther, and kill it.” +</p> + +<p> +So the settler sent out for his neigh-bors to come and help kill the panther. +Five men came. Audubon and the settler made seven. They were all on horse-back. +</p> + +<p> +When they came to the edge of the swamp, each man went a dif-fer-ent way. They +each took their dogs with them to find the track of the wild beast. All of the +hunters carried horns. Who-ever should find the track first was to blow his +horn to let the others know. +</p> + +<p> +In about two hours after they had started, they heard the sound of a horn. It +told them that the track had been found. Every man now went toward the sound of +the horn. Soon all the yelping dogs were fol-low-ing the track of the fierce +panther. The panther was running into the swamp farther and farther. +</p> + +<p> +I suppose that the panther thought that there were too many dogs and men for +him to fight. All the hunters came after the dogs. They held their guns ready +to shoot if the panther should make up his mind to fight them. +</p> + +<p> +After a while the sound of the dogs’ voices changed. The hunters knew +from this that the panther had stopped running, and gone up into a tree. +</p> + +<p> +At last the men came to the place where the dogs were. They were all barking +round a tree. Far up in the tree was the dan-ger-ous beast. The hunters came up +care-ful-ly. One of them fired. The bullet hit the panther, but did not kill +him. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +The panther sprang to the ground, and ran off again. The dogs ran after. The +men got on their horses, and rode after. +</p> + +<p> +But the horses were tired, and the men had to get down, and follow the dogs on +foot. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters now had to wade through little ponds of water. Sometimes they had +to climb over fallen trees. Their clothes were badly torn by the bushes. After +two hours more, they came to a place where the panther had again gone up into a +tree. +</p> + +<p> +This time three of the hunters shot at him. The fierce panther came tumbling to +the ground. But he was still able to fight. The men fought the savage beast on +all sides. At last they killed him. Then they gave his skin to the settler. +They wanted him to know that his en-e-my was dead. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap38"></a>SOME BOYS WHO BECAME AUTHORS.</h2> + +<p> +Wil-liam Cul-len Bry-ant was the first great poet in this country. He was a +small man. When he was a baby, his head was too big for his body. His father +used to send the baby to be dipped in a cold spring every day. The father +thought that putting his head into cold water would keep it from growing. +</p> + +<p> +Bry-ant knew his letters before he was a year and a half old. He began to write +rhymes when he was a very little fellow. He wanted to be a poet. He used to +pray that he might be a poet. His father printed some verses of his when he was +only ten years old. +</p> + +<p> +Bry-ant wrote many fine poems. Here are some lines of his about the bird we +call a bob-o-link:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +Rob-ert of Lin-coln is gayly dressed,<br/> + Wearing a bright black wedding coat,<br/> +White are his shoulders and white his crest.<br/> + Hear him call in his merry note:<br/> + Bob-o’-link, bob-o’-link,<br/> + Spink, spank, spink;<br/> +Look, what a nice new coat is mine,<br/> +Sure there was never a bird so fine.<br/> + Chee, chee, chee. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Haw-thorne was one of our greatest writers of stories. He was a pretty boy with +golden curls. He was fond of all the great poets, and he read Shake-speare and +Mil-ton and many other poets as soon as he was old enough to un-der-stand them. +</p> + +<p> +Haw-thorne grew up a very hand-some young fellow. One day he was walking in the +woods. He met an old gypsy woman. She had never seen anybody so fine-looking. +</p> + +<p> +“Are you a man, or an angel?” she asked him. +</p> + +<p> +Some of Haw-thorne’s best books are written for girls and boys. One of +these is called “The Won-der Book.” Another of his books for young +people is “Tan-gle-wood Tales.” +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p> +Pres-cott wrote beautiful his-to-ries. When Pres-cott was a boy, a school-mate +threw a crust of bread at him. It hit him in the eye. He became almost blind. +</p> + +<p> +He had to do his writing with a machine. This machine was made for the use of +the blind. There were no type-writ-ers in those days. +</p> + +<p> +It was hard work to write his-to-ry without good eyes. But Pres-cott did not +give up. He had a man to read to him. It took him ten years to write his first +book. +</p> + +<p> +When Prescott had finished his book, he was afraid to print it. But his father +said, “The man who writes a book, and is afraid to print it, is a +cow-ard.” +</p> + +<p> +Then Prescott printed his book. Everybody praised it. When you are older, you +will like to read his his-to-ries. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Holmes, the poet, was a boy full of fancies. He lived in an old house. +Soldiers had staid in the house at the time of the Revolution. The floor of one +room was all battered by the butts of the soldiers’ muskets. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Little Ol-i-ver Holmes used to think he could hear soldiers in the house. He +thought he could hear their spurs rattling in the dark passages. Sometimes he +thought he could hear their swords clanking. +</p> + +<p> +The little boy was afraid of a sign that hung over the sidewalk. It was a +great, big, wooden hand. It was the sign of a place where gloves were made. +This big hand swung in the air. Little Ol-i-ver Holmes had to walk under it on +his way to school. He thought the great fingers would grab him some day. Then +he thought he would never get home again. He even thought that his other pair +of shoes would be put away till his little brother grew big enough to wear +them. +</p> + +<p> +But the big wooden hand never caught him. +</p> + +<p> +Here are some verses that Doctor Holmes wrote about a very old man:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“My grand-mam-ma has said—<br/> +Poor old lady, she is dead<br/> + Long ago—<br/> +That he had a Roman nose,<br/> +And his cheek was like a rose<br/> + In the snow.<br/> +<br/> +“But now his nose is thin,<br/> +And it rests upon his chin<br/> + Like a staff;<br/> +And a crook is in his back,<br/> +And a mel-an-chol-y crack<br/> + In his laugh.<br/> +<br/> +“I know it is a sin<br/> +For me to sit and grin<br/> + At him here;<br/> +But the old three-cor-nered hat,<br/> +And the breeches, and all that,<br/> + Are so queer!<br/> +<br/> +“And if I should live to be<br/> +The last leaf upon the tree<br/> + In the spring,<br/> +Let them smile, as I do now,<br/> +At the old for-sak-en bough<br/> + Where I cling.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap39"></a>DANIEL WEBSTER AND HIS BROTHER.</h2> + +<p> +Dan-iel Web-ster was a great states-man. As a little boy he was called +“Little Black Dan.” When he grew larger, he was thin and +sickly-looking. But he had large, dark eyes. People called him “All +Eyes.” +</p> + +<p> +He was very fond of his brother E-ze-ki-el. E-ze-ki-el was a little older than +Dan-iel. Both the boys had fine minds. They wanted to go to college. But their +father was poor. +</p> + +<p> +Dan-iel had not much strength for work on the farm. So little “All +Eyes” was sent to school, and then to college. E-ze-ki-el staid at home, +and worked on the farm. +</p> + +<p> +While Daniel was at school, he was unhappy to think that Ezekiel could not go +to college also. He went home on a visit. He talked to Ezekiel about going to +college. The brothers talked about it all night. The next day Daniel talked to +his father about it. The father said he was too poor to send both of his sons +to college. He said he would lose all his little property if he tried to send +Ezekiel to college. But he said, that, if their mother and sisters were willing +to be poor, he would send the other son to college. +</p> + +<p> +So the mother and sisters were asked. It seemed hard to risk the loss of all +they had. It seemed hard not to give Ezekiel a chance. They all shed tears over +it. +</p> + +<p> +The boys promised to take care of their mother and sisters if the property +should be lost. Then they all agreed that Ezekiel should go to college too. +</p> + +<p> +Daniel taught school while he was studying. That helped to pay the expenses. +After Daniel was through his studies in college, he taught a school in order to +help his brother. When his school closed, he went home. On his way he went +round to the college to see his brother. Finding that Ezekiel needed money, he +gave him a hundred dollars. He kept but three dollars to get home with. +</p> + +<p> +The father’s property was not sold. The two boys helped the family. +Daniel soon began to make money as a lawyer. He knew that his father was in +debt. He went home to see him. He said, “Father, I am going to pay your +debts.” +</p> + +<p> +The father said, “You cannot do it, Daniel. You have not money +enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“I can do it,” said Daniel; “and I will do it before Monday +evening.” +</p> + +<p> +When Monday evening came round, the father’s debts were all paid. +</p> + +<p> +When Daniel became a famous man, it made Ezekiel very happy. But Ezekiel died +first. When Daniel Web-ster made his greatest speech, all the people praised +him. +</p> + +<p> +But Web-ster said, “I wish that my poor brother had lived to this time. +It would have made him very happy.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap40"></a>WEBSTER AND THE POOR WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +When Daniel Webster was a young lawyer, he was going home one night. There was +snow on the ground. It was very cold. It was late, and there was nobody to be +seen. +</p> + +<p> +But after a while he saw a poor woman. She was ahead of him. He wondered what +had brought her out on so cold a night. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes she stopped and looked around. Then she would stand and listen. Then +she would go on again. [Illustration: Webster and the Poor Woman] +</p> + +<p> +Webster kept out of her sight. But he watched her. After looking around, she +turned down the street in which Webster lived. She stopped in front of +Webster’s house. She looked around and listened. +</p> + +<p> +Webster had put down some loose boards to walk on. They reached from the gate +to the door of his house. After standing still a minute, the woman took one of +the boards, and went off quickly. +</p> + +<p> +Webster followed her. But he kept out of her sight. She went to a distant part +of the town. She went into a poor little house. +</p> + +<p> +Webster went home without saying anything to the woman. He knew that she had +stolen the board for fire-wood. +</p> + +<p> +The next day the poor woman got a present It was a nice load of wood. +</p> + +<p> +Can you guess who sent it to her? +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap41"></a>THE INDIA-RUBBER MAN.</h2> + +<p> +Many years ago a strange-looking man was sometimes seen in the streets of New +York. His cap was made of In-di-a rubber. So was his coat. He wore a rubber +waist-coat. Even his cravat was of In-di-a rubber. He wore rubber shoes in dry +weather. People called this man “The In-di-a-rubber man.” +</p> + +<p> +His name was Charles Good-year. He was very poor. He was trying to find out how +to make India rubber useful. +</p> + +<p> +India-rubber trees grow in South America. The juice of these trees is something +like milk or cream. By drying this juice, India rubber is made. +</p> + +<p> +The Indians in Bra-zil have no glass to make bottles with. A long time ago they +learned to make bottles out of rubber. More than a hundred years ago some of +these rubber bottles were brought to this country. The people in this country +had never seen India rubber before. They thought the bottles made out of it by +the Indians very cu-ri-ous. +</p> + +<p> +In this country, rubber was used only to rub out pencil marks. That is why we +call it rubber. People in South America learned to make a kind of heavy shoe +out of it. But these shoes were hard to make. They cost a great deal when they +were sold in this country. +</p> + +<p> +Men tried to make rubber shoes in this country. They got the rubber from +Bra-zil. Rubber shoes made in this country were cheaper than those brought from +South America. But they were not good. They would freeze till they were as hard +as stones in winter. That was not the worst of it. In summer they would melt. +Goodyear was trying to find out a way to make rubber better. He wanted to get +it so that it would not melt in summer. He wanted to get a rubber that would +not get hard in cold weather. The first rubber coats that were made were so +hard in cold weather, that they would stand alone, and look like a man. +</p> + +<p> +Goodyear wanted to try his rubber. That is why he wore a rubber coat and a +rubber waist-coat and a rubber cravat. That is why he wore a rubber cap and +rubber shoes when it was not raining. He made paper out of rubber, and wrote a +book on it. He had a door-plate made of it. He even carried a cane made of +India rubber. It is no wonder people called him the India-rubber man. +</p> + +<p> +He was very poor. Sometimes he had to borrow money to buy rubber with. +Sometimes his friends gave him money to keep his family from starving. +Sometimes there was no wood and no coal in the house in cold weather. +</p> + +<p> +But Goodyear kept on trying. He thought that he was just going to find out. +Years went by, and still he kept on trying. +</p> + +<p> +One day he was mixing some rubber with sulphur. It slipped out of his hand. It +fell on the hot stove. But it did not melt. Goodyear was happy at last. That +night it was cold. Goodyear took the burned piece of rubber out of doors, and +nailed it to the kitchen door. When morning came, he went and got it. It had +not frozen. +</p> + +<p> +He was now sure that he was on the right track. But he had to find out how to +mix and heat his rubber and sulphur. He was too poor to buy rubber to try with. +Nobody would lend him any more money. His family had to live by the help of his +friends. He had already sold almost everything that he had. Now he had to sell +his children’s school-books to get money to buy rubber with. +</p> + +<p> +At last his rubber goods were made and sold. Poor men who had to stand in the +rain could now keep themselves dry. People could walk in the wet with dry feet. +A great many people are alive who would have died if they had not been kept dry +by India rubber. +</p> + +<p> +You may count up, if you can, how many useful things are made of rubber. We owe +them all to one man. People laughed at Goodyear once. But at last they praised +him. To be “The India-rubber man” was something to be proud of. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap42"></a>DOCTOR KANE IN THE FROZEN SEA.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +Kane was a doctor in one of the war ships of the United States. He had sailed +about the world a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +When he heard that ships were to be sent into the icy seas of the north, he +asked to be sent along. He went the first time as a doctor. Then he wanted to +find out more about the frozen ocean. So he went again as captain of a ship. +His ship was called the “Advance.” +</p> + +<p> +Kane sailed into the icy seas. His ship was driven far into the ice by a +fu-ri-ous storm. She was crowded by ice-bergs. At one time she was lifted clear +out of the water. The ship seemed ready to fall over on her side. But the ice +let her down again. Then she was squeezed till the men thought that she would +be crushed like an egg shell At last the storm stopped. Then came the awful +cold. The ship was frozen into the ice. The ice never let go of her. She was +farther north than any ship had ever been before. But she was so fast in the +ice that she never could get away. +</p> + +<p> +In that part of the world it is night nearly all winter. For months there was +no sun at all. Daylight came again. It was now summer, but it did not get warm. +Doctor Kane took sleds, and went about on the ice to see what he could see. The +sleds were drawn by large dogs. But nearly all of the dogs died in the long +winter night. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: A Dog Sled] +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane thought that the ice would melt. He wanted to get the ship out. But +the ice did not melt at all. +</p> + +<p> +At last the summer passed away. Another awful winter came. The sun did not rise +any more. It was dark for months and months. The men were ill. Some of them +died. They were much dis-cour-aged. But Kane kept up his heart, and did the +best he could. +</p> + +<p> +At last the least little streak of light could be seen. It got a little lighter +each day. But the sick men down in the cabin of the ship could not see the +light. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane said to himself, “If my poor men could see this sunlight, it +would cheer them up. It might save their lives.” But they were too ill to +get out where they could see the sun. It would be many days before the sun +would shine into the cabin of the ship. The men might die before that time. +</p> + +<p> +So Doctor Kane took some looking glasses up to the deck or top of the ship. He +fixed one of these so it would catch the light of the sun. Then he fixed +another so that the first one would throw the light on this one. The last one +would throw the sunlight down into the cabin where the sick men were. +</p> + +<p> +One day the poor fellows were ready to give up. Then the sun fell on the +looking glasses, and flashed down into the cabin. It was the first daylight the +sick men had seen for months. The long winter night was over. Think how happy +they were! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap43"></a>A DINNER ON THE ICE.</h2> + +<p> +After two winters of cold and darkness, Doctor Kane made up his mind to leave +the ship fast in the ice. He wanted to get to a place in Green-land where there +were people living. Then he might find some way of getting home again. +</p> + +<p> +The men started out, drawing the boats on sleds. Whenever they came to open +water, they put the boats into the water, and took the sleds in the boats. When +they came to the ice again, they had to draw out their boats, and carry them on +the sleds. At first they could travel only about a mile a day. +</p> + +<p> +It was a hard journey. Some of the men were ill. These had to be drawn on the +sleds by the rest. They had not enough food. At one time they rested three days +in a kind of cave. Here they found many birds’ eggs. These made very good +food for them. At another place they staid a week. They staid just to eat the +eggs of the wild birds. +</p> + +<p> +After they left this place, they were hungry. The men grew thinner and thinner. +It seemed that they must die for want of food. But one day they saw a large +seal. He was floating on a piece of ice. The hungry men thought, “What a +fine din-ner he would make for us!” If they could get the seal, they +would not die of hunger. +</p> + +<p> +Every one of the poor fellows trembled for fear the seal would wake up. A man +named Pe-ter-sen took a gun, and got ready to shoot. The men rowed the boat +toward the seal. They rowed slowly and quietly. But the seal waked up. He +raised his head. The men thought that he would jump off into the water. Then +they might all die for want of food. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane made a motion to Pe-ter-sen. That was to tell him to shoot quickly. +But Peter-sen did not shoot. He was so much afraid that the seal would get +away, that he could not shoot. The seal now raised himself a little more. He +was getting ready to jump into the water. Just then Petersen fired. The seal +fell dead on the ice. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: A Seal] +</p> + +<p> +The men were wild with joy. They rowed the boats with all their might. When +they got to the seal, they dragged it farther away from the water. They were so +happy, that they danced on the ice. Some of them laughed. Some were so glad, +that they cried. [Illustration: Shooting the Seal.] +</p> + +<p> +Then they took their knives and began to cut up the seal. They had no fire on +the ice, and they were too hungry to think of lighting one. So they ate the +meat of the seal without waiting to cook it. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap44"></a>DOCTOR KANE GETS OUT OF THE FROZEN SEA.</h2> + +<p> +After they got the seal, Doctor Kane and his men traveled on. Sometimes they +were on the ice. Sometimes they were in the boats. The men were so weak, that +they could hardly row the boats. They were so hungry, that they could not sleep +well at night. +</p> + +<p> +One day they were rowing, when they heard a sound. It came to them across the +water. It did not sound like the cry of sea birds. It sounded like +people’s voices. +</p> + +<p> +“Listen!” Doctor Kane said to Pe-ter-sen. +</p> + +<p> +Petersen spoke the same language as the people of Greenland. He listened. The +sound came again. Pe-ter-sen was so glad, that he could hardly speak. He told +Kane in a half whisper, that it was the voice of some one speaking his own +language. It was some Greenland men in a boat. +</p> + +<p> +The next day they got to a Greenland town. Then they got into a little ship +going to England. They knew that they could get home from England. But the ship +stopped at another Green-land town. While they were there, a steamer was seen. +It came nearer. They could see the stars and stripes flying from her mast. It +was an American steamer sent to find Doctor Kane. +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane and his men were full of joy. They pushed their little boat into +the water once more. This little boat was called the “Faith.” It +had carried Kane and his men hundreds of miles in icy seas. +</p> + +<p> +Once more the men took their oars, and rowed. This time they rowed with all +their might. They held up the little flag that they had carried farther north +than anybody had ever been before. They rowed straight to the steamer. +</p> + +<p> +In the bow of the boat was a little man with a tattered red shirt. He could see +that the captain of the boat was looking at him through a spy-glass. +</p> + +<p> +The captain shouted to the little man, “Is that Doctor Kane?” +</p> + +<p> +The little man in the red shirt shouted back, “Yes!” +</p> + +<p> +Doctor Kane and his men had been gone more than two years. People had begun to +think that they had all died. This steamer had been sent to find out what had +become of them. When the men on the steamer heard that this little man in the +red shirt was Doctor Kane himself, they sent up cheer after cheer. In a few +minutes more, Doctor Kane and his men were on the steamer. They were now safe +among friends. They were sailing away toward their homes. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap45"></a>LONGFELLOW AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +[Illustration: Longfellow and the Bird] +</p> + +<p> +Long-fel-low was a noble boy. He always wanted to do right. He could not bear +to see one person do any wrong to another. +</p> + +<p> +He was very tender-hearted. One day he took a gun and went shooting. He killed +a robin. Then he felt sorry for the robin He came home with tears in his eyes. +He was so grieved, that he never went shooting again. +</p> + +<p> +He liked to read Irving’s “Sketch Book.” Its strange stories +about Sleepy Hollow and Rip Van Win-kle pleased his fancy. +</p> + +<p> +When he was thirteen he wrote a poem. It was about Love-well’s fight with +the Indians. He sent his verses to a news-paper. He wondered if the ed-i-tor +would print them. He could not think of anything else. He walked up and down in +front of the printing office. He thought that his poem might be in the +printer’s hands. +</p> + +<p> +When the paper came out, there was his poem. It was signed “Henry.” +Long-fel-low read it. He thought it a good poem. +</p> + +<p> +But a judge who did not know whose poem it was talked about it that evening. He +said to young Long-fel-low, “Did you see that poem in the paper? It was +stiff. And all taken from other poets, too.” +</p> + +<p> +This made Henry Long-fel-low feel bad. But he kept on trying. After many years, +he became a famous poet. +</p> + +<p> +For more than fifty years, young people have liked to read his poem called +“A Psalm of Life.” Here are three stanzas of it:— +</p> + +<p class="poem"> +“Lives of great men all remind us<br/> + We can make our lives sub-lime,<br/> +And, de-part-ing, leave behind us<br/> + Foot-prints on the sands of time,—<br/> +<br/> +“Foot-prints, that perhaps another,<br/> + Sailing o’er life’s solemn main,<br/> +A forlorn and ship-wrecked brother,<br/> + Seeing, may take heart again.<br/> +<br/> +“Let us, then, be up and doing,<br/> + With a heart for any fate;<br/> +Still a-chiev-ing, still pur-su-ing,<br/> + Learn to labor and to wait.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap46"></a>KIT CARSON AND THE BEARS.</h2> + +<p> +Great men of one kind are known only in new countries like ours. These men +dis-cov-er new regions. They know how to manage the Indians. They show other +people how to live in a wild country. +</p> + +<p> +One of the most famous of such men was Kit Car-son. He knew all about the wild +animals. He was a great hunter. He learned the languages of the Indians. The +Indians liked him. He was a great guide. He showed soldiers and settlers how to +travel where they wished to go. +</p> + +<p> +Once he was marching through the wild country with other men. Evening came. He +left the others, and went to shoot something to eat. It was the only way to get +meat for supper. When he had gone about a mile, he saw the tracks of some elks. +He followed these tracks. He came in sight of the elks. They were eating grass +on a hill, as cows do. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Car-son crept up behind some bushes. But elks are very timid animals. +Before the hunter got very near, they began to run away. So Carson fired at one +of them as it was running. The elk fell dead. +</p> + +<p> +But just at that moment he heard a roar. He turned to see what made this ugly +noise. Two huge bears were running toward him. They wanted some meat for +supper, too. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Carson’s gun was empty. He threw it down. Then he ran as fast as he +could. He wanted to find a tree. +</p> + +<p> +Just as the bears were about to seize him, he got to a tree. He caught hold of +a limb. He swung himself up into the tree. The bears just missed getting him. +</p> + +<p> +But bears know how to climb trees. Carson knew that they would soon be after +him. He pulled out his knife, and began to cut off a limb. He wanted to make a +club. +</p> + +<p> +A bear is much larger and stronger than a man. He cannot be killed with a club. +But every bear has one tender spot. It is his nose. He does not like to be hit +on the nose. A sharp blow on the nose hurts him a great deal. +</p> + +<p> +Kit Carson got his club cut just in time. The bears were coming after him. Kit +got up into the very top of the tree. He drew up his feet, and made himself as +small as he could. +</p> + +<p> +When the bears came near, one of them reached for Kit. Whack! went the stick on +the end of his nose. The bear drew back, and whined with pain. +</p> + +<p> +First one bear tried to get him, and then the other. But which-ever one tried, +Kit was ready. The bear was sure to get his nose hurt. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +The bears grew tired, and rested awhile. But they kept up their screeching and +roaring. When their noses felt better, they tried again. And then they tried +again. But every time they came away with sore noses. At last they both tried +at once. But Carson pounded faster than ever. One of the bears cried like a +baby. The tears ran out of his eyes. It hurt his feelings to have his nose +treated in this rude way. +</p> + +<p> +After a long time one of the bears got tired. He went away. After awhile the +other went away too. Kit Carson staid in the tree a long time. Then he came +down. The first thing he did was to get his gun. He loaded it. But the bears +did not come back. They were too busy rubbing noses. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap47"></a>HORACE GREELEY AS A BOY.</h2> + +<p> +Hor-ace Gree-ley was the son of a poor farmer. He was always fond of books. He +learned to read almost as soon as he could talk. He could read easy books when +he was three years old. When he was four, he could read any book that he could +get. +</p> + +<p> +He went to an old-fashioned school. Twice a day all the children stood up to +spell. They were in two classes. Little Hor-ace was in the class with the +grown-up young people. He was the best speller in the class. It was funny to +see the little midget at the head of this class of older people. But he was +only a little boy in his feelings. If he missed a word, he would cry. The one +that spelled a word that he missed would have a right to take the head of the +class. Sometimes when he missed, the big boys would not take the head. They did +not like to make the little fellow cry. He was the pet of all the school. +</p> + +<p> +People in that day were fond of spelling. They used to hold meetings at night +to spell. They called these “spelling schools.” +</p> + +<p> +At a spelling school two captains were picked out. These chose their spellers. +Then they tried to see which side could beat the other at spelling. +</p> + +<p> +Little Hor-ace was always chosen first. The side that got him got the best +speller in the school. Sometimes the little fellow would go to sleep. When it +came his turn to spell, some-body would wake him up. He would rub his eyes, and +spell the word. He would spell it right, too. +</p> + +<p> +When he was four or five years old, he would lie under a tree, and read. He +would lie there, and forget all about his dinner or his supper. He would not +move until some-body stumbled over him or called him. +</p> + +<p> +People had not found out how to burn ker-o-sene oil in lamps then. They used +candles. But poor people like the Gree-leys could not afford to burn many +candles. Hor-ace gathered pine knots to read by at night. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Greeley Reading] +</p> + +<p> +He would light a pine knot Then he would throw it on top of the large log at +the back of the fire. This would make a bright flick-er-ing light. +</p> + +<p> +Horace would lay all the books he wanted on the hearth. Then he would lie down +by them. His head was toward the fire. His feet were drawn up out of the way. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing that he did was to study all his lessons for the next day. Then +he would read other books. He never seemed to know when anybody came or went. +He kept on with his reading. His father did not want him to read too late. He +was afraid that he would hurt his eyes. And he wanted to have him get up early +in the morning to help with the work. So when nine o’clock came, he would +call, “Horace, Horace, Horace!” But it took many callings to rouse +him. +</p> + +<p> +When he got to bed, he would say his lessons over to his brother. He would tell +his brother what he had been reading. But his brother would fall asleep while +Horace was talking. +</p> + +<p> +Horace liked to read better than he liked to work. But when he had a task to +do, he did it faith-ful-ly. His brother would say, “Let us go +fishing.” But Horace would answer, “Let us get our work done +first.” +</p> + +<p> +Horace Gree-ley’s father grew poorer and poorer. When Horace was ten +years old, his land was sold. The family were now very poor. They moved from +New Hamp-shire. They settled in Ver-mont. They lived in a poor little cabin. +</p> + +<p> +Horace had to work hard like all the rest of the family. But he borrowed all +the books he could get. Sometimes he walked seven miles to borrow a book. +</p> + +<p> +A rich man who lived near the Greeleys used to lend books to Horace. Horace had +grown tall. His hair was white. He was poorly dressed. He was a strange-looking +boy. One day he went to the house of the rich man to borrow books. Some one +said to the owner of the house, “Do you lend books to such a fellow as +that?” +</p> + +<p> +But the gen-tle-man said, “That boy will be a great man some day.” +</p> + +<p> +This made all the com-pa-ny laugh. It seemed funny that anybody should think of +this poor boy becoming a great man. But it came true. The poor white-headed boy +came to be a great man. +</p> + +<p> +Horace Greeley learned all that he could learn in the country schools. When he +was thirteen, one teacher said to his father,— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Greeley, Horace knows more than I do. It is not of any use to send +him to school any more.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap48"></a>HORACE GREELEY LEARNING TO PRINT.</h2> + +<p> +Horace Greeley had always wanted to be a printer. He liked books and papers. He +thought it would be a fine thing to learn to make them. +</p> + +<p> +One day he heard that the news-paper at East Poult-ney wanted a boy to learn +the printer’s trade. He walked many long miles to see about it. He went +to see Mr. Bliss. Mr. Bliss was one of the owners of the paper. Horace found +him working in his garden. Mr. Bliss looked up. He saw a big boy coming toward +him. The boy had on a white felt hat with a narrow brim. It looked like a +half-peck measure. His hair was white. His trousers were too short for him. All +his clothes were coarse and poor. He was such a strange-looking boy, that Mr. +Bliss wanted to laugh. +</p> + +<p> +“I heard that you wanted a boy,” Horace said. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you want to learn to print?” Mr. Bliss said. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Horace. +</p> + +<p> +“But a printer ought to know a good many things,” said Mr. Bliss. +“Have you been to school much?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” said Horace. “I have not had much chance at school. But +I have read some.” +</p> + +<p> +“What have you read?” asked Mr. Bliss. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, I have read some his-to-ry, and some travels, and a little of +everything.” +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss had ex-am-ined a great many schoolteachers. He liked to puzzle +teachers with hard questions. He thought he would try Horace with these. But +the gawky boy answered them all. This tow-headed boy seemed to know everything. +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss took a piece of paper from his pocket. He wrote on it, “Guess +we’d better try him.” +</p> + +<p> +He gave this paper to Horace, and told him to take it to the printing office. +Horace, with his little white hat and strange ways, went into the printing +office. The boys in the office laughed at him. But the foreman said he would +try him. +</p> + +<p> +That night the boys in the office said to Mr. Bliss, “You are not going +to take that tow head, are you?” +</p> + +<p> +Mr. Bliss said, “There is something in that tow-head. You boys will find +it out soon.” +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Greeley setting Type] +</p> + +<p> +A few days after this, Horace came to East Poult-ney to begin his work. He +carried a little bundle of clothes tied up in a hand-ker-chief. +</p> + +<p> +The fore-man showed him how to begin. From that time he did not once look +around. All day he worked at his type. He learned more in a day than some boys +do in a month. +</p> + +<p> +Day after day he worked, and said nothing. The other boys joked him. But he did +not seem to hear them. He only kept on at his work. They threw type at him. But +he did not look up. +</p> + +<p> +The largest boy in the office thought he could find a way to tease him. One day +he said that Horace’s hair was too white. He went and got the ink ball. +He stained Horace’s hair black in four places. This ink stain would not +wash out. But Horace did not once look up. +</p> + +<p> +After that, the boys did not try to tease him any more. They all liked the +good-hearted Horace. And everybody in the town wondered that the boy knew so +much. +</p> + +<p> +Horace’s father had moved away to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Horace sent him all +the money he could spare. He soon became a good printer. He started a paper of +his own. He became a famous news-paper man. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap49"></a>A WONDERFUL WOMAN.</h2> + +<p> +Little Dor-o-thy Dix was poor. Her father did not know how to make a living. +Her mother did not know how to bring up her children. +</p> + +<p> +The father moved from place to place. Sometimes he printed little tracts to do +good. But he let his own children grow up poor and wretched. +</p> + +<p> +Dor-o-thy wanted to learn. She wanted to become a teacher. She wanted to get +money to send her little brothers to school. +</p> + +<p> +Dor-o-thy was a girl of strong will and temper. When she was twelve years old, +she left her wretched home. She went to her grand-mother. Her grand-mother Dix +lived in a large house in Boston. She sent Dorothy to school. +</p> + +<p> +Dorothy learned fast. But she wanted to make money. She wanted to help her +brothers. When she was fourteen, she taught a school. She tried to make herself +look like a woman. She made her dresses longer. +</p> + +<p> +She soon went back to her grand-mother. She went to school again. Then she +taught school. She soon had a school in her grandmother’s house. It was a +very good school. Many girls were sent to her school. Miss Dix was often ill. +But when she was well enough, she worked away. She was able to send her +brothers to school until they grew up. +</p> + +<p> +Besides helping her brothers, she wanted to help other poor children. She +started a school for poor children in her grandmother’s barn. +</p> + +<p> +After a while she left off teaching. She was not well. She had made all the +money she needed. +</p> + +<p> +But she was not idle. She went one day to teach some poor women in an +alms-house. Then she went to see the place where the crazy people were kept. +These insane people had no fire in the coldest weather. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Dix tried to get the man-a-gers to put up a stove in the room. But they +would not do it. Then she went to the court. She told the judge about it. The +judge said that the insane people ought to have a fire. He made the man-a-gers +put up a stove in the place where they were kept. +</p> + +<p> +Then Miss Dix went to other towns. She wanted to see how the insane people were +treated. Some of them were shut up in dark, damp cells. One young man was +chained up with an iron collar about his neck. +</p> + +<p> +Miss Dix got new laws made about the insane. She per-suad-ed the States to +build large houses for keeping the insane. She spent most of her life at this +work. The Civil War broke out. There were many sick and wounded soldiers to be +taken care of. +</p> + +<p> +All of the nurses in the hos-pi-tals were put under Miss Dix. She worked at +this as long as the war lasted. Then she spent the rest of her life doing all +that she could for insane people. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap50"></a>THE AUTHOR OF “LITTLE WOMEN.”</h2> + +<p> +Lou-i-sa Al-cott was a wild little girl. When she was very little, she would +run away from home. She liked to play with beggar children. +</p> + +<p> +One day she wandered so far away from her home, she could not find the way back +again. It was growing dark. The little girl’s feet were tired. She sat +down on a door-step. A big dog was lying on the step. He wagged his tail. That +was his way of saying, “I am glad to see you.” +</p> + +<p> +Little Lou-i-sa grew sleepy. She laid her head on the curly head of the big +dog. Then she fell asleep. +</p> + +<p> +Lou-i-sa’s father and mother could not find her. They sent out the town +crier to look for her. +</p> + +<p> +The town crier went along the street. As he went, he rang his bell. Every now +and then he would tell that a little girl was lost. At last the man with the +bell came to the place where Louisa was asleep. He rang his bell. That waked +her up. She heard him call out in a loud voice,— +</p> + +<p> +“Lost, lost! a little girl six years old. She wore a pink frock, a white +hat, and new green shoes.” +</p> + +<p> +When the crier had said that, he heard a small voice coming out of the +darkness. It said, “Why, dat’s me.” The crier went to the +voice, and found Louisa sitting by the big dog on the door-step. The next day +she was tied to the sofa to punish her for running away. +</p> + +<p> +She and her sisters learned to sew well. Louisa set up as a doll’s +dress-maker. She was then twelve years old. She hung out a little sign. She put +some pretty dresses in the window to show how well she could do. +</p> + +<p> +Other girls liked the little dresses that she made. They came to her to get +dresses made for their dolls. They liked the little doll’s hats she made +better than all. Louisa chased the chickens to get soft feathers for these +hats. +</p> + +<p> +She turned the old fairy tales into little plays. The children played these +plays in the barn. +</p> + +<p> +One of these plays was Jack and the Bean-stalk. A squash vine was put up in the +barn. This was the bean-stalk. When it was cut down, the boy who played giant +would come tumbling out of the hay-loft. +</p> + +<p> +Louisa found it hard to be good and o-be-di-ent. She wrote some verses about +being good. She was fourteen years old when she wrote them. Here they +are:— +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap51"></a>MY KINGDOM.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +A little kingdom I possess<br/> + Where thoughts and feelings dwell,<br/> +And very hard I find the task<br/> + Of gov-ern-ing it well.<br/> +<br/> +For passion tempts and troubles me,<br/> + A wayward will misleads,<br/> +And sel-fish-ness its shadow casts<br/> + On all my words and deeds.<br/> +<br/> +I do not ask for any crown<br/> + But that which all may win,<br/> +Nor seek to conquer any world<br/> + Except the one within. +</p> + +<p> +The Al-cott family were very poor. Louisa made up her mind to do something to +make money when she got big. She did not like being so very poor. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +<p> +One day she was sitting on a cart-wheel thinking. She was thinking how poor her +father was. There was a crow up in the air over her head. The crow was cawing. +There was nobody to tell her thoughts to but the crow. She shook her fist at +the big bird, and said,— +</p> + +<p> +“I will do something by and by. Don’t care what. I’ll teach, +sew, act, write, do anything to help the family. And I’ll be rich and +famous before I die. See if I don’t.” +</p> + +<p> +The crow did not make any answer. But Louisa kept thinking about the work she +was going to do. The other children got work to do that made money. But Louisa +was left at home to do housework. She had to do the washing. She made a little +song about it. Here are some of the verses of this song:— +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="chap52"></a>A SONG FROM THE SUDS.</h2> + +<p class="poem"> +Queen of my tub, I merrily sing,<br/> + While the white foam rises high,<br/> +And stur-di-ly wash and rinse and wring,<br/> + And fasten the clothes to dry;<br/> +Then out in the free fresh air they swing,<br/> + Under the sunny sky.<br/> +<br/> +I am glad a task to me is given,<br/> + To labor at day by day;<br/> +For it brings me health and strength and hope,<br/> + And I cheer-ful-ly learn to say,<br/> +“Head you may think, Heart you may feel,<br/> + But Hand you shall work alway.” +</p> + +<p> +Louisa grew to be a woman at last. She went to nurse soldiers in the war. She +wrote books. When she wrote the book called “Little Women,” all the +young people were de-light-ed. What she had said to the crow came true at last. +She became famous. She had money enough to make the family com-fort-a-ble. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS FOR LITTLE AMERICANS ***</div> +<div style='text-align:left'> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will +be renamed. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United +States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. +</div> + +<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> +<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person +or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the +Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when +you share it without charge with others. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work +on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: +</div> + +<blockquote> + <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most + other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions + whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms + of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online + at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you + are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws + of the country where you are located before using this eBook. + </div> +</blockquote> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg™ License. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format +other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain +Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +provided that: +</div> + +<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation.” + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ + works. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + </div> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state +visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. +</div> + +</div> + +</body> + +</html> + + diff --git a/old/10070-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/10070-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8f85393 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10070-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/old/old/10070.txt b/old/old/10070.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24c5f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/10070.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4169 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little +Americans, by Edward Eggleston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Stories of Great Americans for Little Americans + +Author: Edward Eggleston + +Release Date: November 12, 2003 [EBook #10070] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Michael Lockey and PG Distributed +Proofreaders + + + + +STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS FOR LITTLE AMERICANS + +BY + +EDWARD EGGLESTON + +AUTHOR OF "TRUE STORIES OF AMERICAN LIFE AND ADVENTURE" +"A FIRST BOOK IN AMERICAN HISTORY" AND "A HISTORY +OF THE UNITED STATES AND ITS PEOPLE FOR +THE USE OF SCHOOLS" + + + +1895 + + + + +PREFACE. + +The primary aim of this book is to furnish the little learner reading +matter that will excite his attention and give him pleasure, and thus +make lighter the difficult task of learning to read. The ruggedness of +this task has often been increased by the use of disconnected +sentences, or lessons as dry and uninteresting as finger exercises on +the piano. It is a sign of promise that the demand for reading matter +of interest to the child has come from teachers. I have endeavored to +meet this requirement in the following stories. + +As far as possible the words chosen have been such as are not +difficult to the little reader, either from their length or their +unfamiliarity. The sentences and paragraphs are short. Learning to +read is like climbing a steep hill, and it is a great relief to the +panting child to find frequent breathing places. + +It is one of the purposes of these stories to make the mind of the +pupil familiar with some of the leading figures in the history of our +country by means of personal anecdote. Some of the stories are those +that every American child ought to know, because they have become a +kind of national folklore. Such, for example, are "Putnam and the +Wolf" and the story of "Franklin's Whistle." I have thought it +important to present as great a variety of subjects as possible, so +that the pupil may learn something not only of great warriors and +patriots, but also of great statesmen. The exploits of discoverers, +the triumphs of American inventors, and the achievements of men of +letters and men of science, find place in these stories. All the +narratives are historical, or at least no stories have been told for +true that are deemed fictitious. Every means which the writer's +literary experience could suggest has been used to make the stories +engaging, in the hope that the interest of the narrative may prove a +sufficient spur to exertion on the part of the pupil, and that this +little book will make green and pleasant a pathway that has so often +been dry and laborious. It will surely serve to excite an early +interest in our national history by giving some of the great +personages of that history a place among the heroes that impress the +susceptible imagination of a child. It is thus that biographical and +historical incidents acquire something of the vitality of folk tales. + +The illustrations that accompany the text have been planned with +special reference to the awakening of the child's attention. To keep +the mind alert and at its best is more than half the battle in +teaching. The publishers and the author of this little book believe +that in laying the foundation of a child's education the best work is +none too good. + +The larger words have been divided by hyphens when a separation into +syllables is likely to help the learner. The use of the hyphen has +been regulated entirely with a view to its utility. After a word not +too difficult has been made familiar by its repeated occurrence, the +hyphens are omitted. + + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + + + +The First Governor in Boston +Marquette in Iowa +Indian Pictures +William Penn and the Indians +One Little Bag of Rice +The Story of a Wise Woman +Franklin his own Teacher +How Franklin found out Things +Franklin asks the Sunshine something +Franklin and the Kite +Franklin's Whistle +Too much for the Whistle +John Stark and the Indians +A Great Good Man +Putnam and the Wolf +Washington and his Hatchet +How Benny West learned to be a Painter +Washington's Christmas Gift +How Washington got out of a Trap +Washington's Last Battle +Marion's Tower +Clark and his Men +Daniel Boone and his Grapevine Swing +Daniel Boone's Daughter and her Friends +Decatur and the Pirates +Stories about Jefferson +A Long Journey +Captain Clark's Burning Glass +Quicksilver Bob +The First Steamboat +Washington Irving as a Boy +Don't give up the Ship +Grandfather's Rhyme +The Star-spangled Banner +How Audubon came to know about Birds +Audubon in the Wild Woods +Hunting a Panther +Some Boys who became Authors +Daniel Webster and his Brother +Webster and the Poor Woman +The India-rubber Man +Doctor Kane in the Frozen Sea +A Dinner on the Ice +Doctor Kane gets out of the Frozen Sea +Longfellow as a Boy +Kit Carson and the Bears +Horace Greeley as a Boy +Horace Greeley learning to Print +A Wonderful Woman +The Author of "Little Women" +My Kingdom +A Song from the Suds + + + + + +STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS. + +[Illustration: THE FIRST GOVERNOR IN BOSTON] + +Before the white people came, there were no houses in this country but +the little huts of the In-di-ans. The In-di-an houses were made of +bark, or mats, or skins, spread over poles. + +Some people came to one part of the country. Others started +set-tle-ments in other places. When more people came, some of these +set-tle-ments grew into towns. The woods were cut down. Farms were +planted. Roads were made. But it took many years for the country to +fill with people. + +The first white people that came to live in the woods where Boston is +now, settled there a long time ago. They had a gov-ern-or over them. +He was a good man, and did much for the people. His name was John +Win-throp. + +The first thing the people had to do was to cut down the trees. After +that they could plant corn. But at first they could not raise +any-thing to eat. They had brought flour and oat-meal from England. +But they found that it was not enough to last till they could raise +corn on their new ground. + +Win-throp sent a ship to get more food for them. The ship was gone a +long time. The people ate up all their food. They were hungry. They +went to the sea-shore, and found clams and mussels. They were glad to +get these to eat. + +At last they set a day for every-body to fast and pray for food. The +gov-ern-or had a little flour left. Nearly all of this was made into +bread, and put into the oven to bake. He did not know when he would +get any more. + +Soon after this a poor man came along. His flour was all gone. His +bread had all been eaten up. His family were hungry. The gov-ern-or +gave the poor man the very last flour that he had in the barrel. + +Just then a ship was seen. It sailed up toward Boston. It was loaded +with food for all the people. + +The time for the fast day came. But there was now plenty of food. The +fast day was turned into a thanks-giving day. + +One day a man sent a very cross letter to Gov-ern-or Win-throp. +Win-throp sent it back to him. He said, "I cannot keep a letter that +might make me angry." Then the man that had written the cross letter +wrote to Win-throp, "By con-quer-ing yourself, you have +con-quered me." + + + + + +MARQUETTE IN IOWA. + + +The first white men to go into the middle of our country were +French-men. The French had settled in Can-a-da. They sent +mis-sion-a-ries to preach to the Indians in the West. They also sent +traders to buy furs from the Indians. + +The French-men heard the Indians talk about a great river in the West. +But no French-man had ever gone far enough to see the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +Mar-quette was a priest. Jo-li-et was a trader. These two men were +sent to find the great river that the Indians talked about. + +They trav-eled in two birch canoes. They took five men to paddle the +canoes. They took some smoked meat to eat on the way. They also took +some Indian corn. They had trinkets to trade to the Indians. +Hatchets, and beads, and bits of cloth were the money they used to pay +the Indians for what they wanted. + +The friendly Indians in Wis-con-sin tried to per-suade them not to go. +They told them that the Indians on the great river would kill them. + +The friendly Indians also told them that there was a demon in one part +of the river. They said that this demon roared so loud that he could +be heard a long way off. They said that the demon would draw the +trav-el-ers down into the water. Then they told about great monsters +that ate up men and their canoes. + +But Mar-quette and the men with him thought they would risk the +journey. They would not turn back for fear of the demon or +the monsters. + +The two little canoes went down the Wis-con-sin River. After some days +they came to the Mis-sis-sip-pi. More than a hundred years before, the +Spaniards had seen the lower part of this river. But no white man had +ever seen this part of the great river. Mar-quette did not know that +any white man had ever seen any part of the Mis-sis-sip-pi. + +The two little canoes now turned their bows down the river. Some-times +they saw great herds of buf-fa-loes. Some of these came to the bank of +the river to look at the men in the canoes. They had long, shaggy +manes, which hung down over their eyes. + +For two weeks the trav-el-ers paddled down the river. In all this time +they did not see any Indians. After they had gone hundreds of miles in +this way, they came to a place where they saw tracks in the mud. It +was in what is now the State of I-o-wa. + +Mar-quette and Jo-li-et left the men in their canoes, and followed the +tracks. After walking two hours, they came to an Indian village. The +Frenchmen came near enough to hear the Indians talking. The Indians +did not see them. + +Jo-li-et and Mar-quette did not know whether the Indians would kill +them or not. They said a short prayer. Then they stood out in full +view, and gave a loud shout. + +The Indians came out of their tents like bees. They stared at the +strangers. Then four Indians came toward them. These Indians carried a +peace pipe. They held this up toward the sun. This meant that they +were friendly. + +The Indians now offered the peace pipe to the French-men. The +French-men took it, and smoked with the Indians. This was the Indian +way of saying, "We are friends." + +[Illustration: Marquette and Joliet] + +Mar-quette asked the Indians what tribe they belonged to. +They told him that they were of the tribe called the Il-li-nois. + +They took Jo-li-et and Mar-quette into their village. They came to the +door of a large wig-wam. A chief stood in the door. He shaded his eyes +with both hands, as if the sun were shining in his face. Then he made +a little speech. + +He said, "French-men, how bright the sun shines when you come to see +us! We are all waiting for you. You shall now come into our houses +in peace." + +The Il-li-nois Indians made a feast for their new friends. First they +had mush of corn meal, with fat meat in it. One of the Indians fed the +Frenchmen as though they were babies. He put mush into their mouths +with a large spoon. + +Then came some fish. The Indian that fed the vis-it-ors picked out the +bones with his fingers. Then he put the pieces of fish into their +mouths. After they had some roasted dog. The French-men did not like +this. Last, they were fed with buf-fa-lo meat. + +The next morning six hundred Indians went to the canoes to tell the +Frenchmen good-by. They gave Mar-quette a young Indian slave. And they +gave him a peace pipe to carry with him. + + + + + +INDIAN PICTURES. + + +When Mar-quette and his men left the Il-li-nois, they went on down the +river. The friendly Il-li-nois had told them that the Indians they +would see were bad, and that they would kill any one who came into +their country. + +The Frenchmen had heard before this that there were demons and +monsters in the river. One day they saw some high rocks with pictures +painted on them. The ugly pictures made them think of these monsters. +They were painted in red, black, and green colors. They were pictures +of two Indian demons or gods. + +Each one of these monsters was about the size of a calf. They had +horns as long as those of a deer. Their eyes were red. Their faces +were like a man's, but they were ugly and frightful. They had beards +like a tiger's. Their bodies were covered with scales like those on a +fish. Their long tails were wound round their bodies, and over their +heads, and down between their legs. The end of each tail was like that +of a fish. + +The Indians prayed to these ugly gods when they passed in their +canoes. Even Mar-quette and his men were a little frightened when they +saw such pictures in a place so lonely. The Frenchmen went down the +river about twelve hundred miles. Some-times the Indians tried to kill +them, but by showing the peace pipe they made friends. At last they +turned back. Jo-li-et went to Can-a-da. Mar-quette preached to the +Indians in the West till he died. + + + + + +WILLIAM PENN AND THE INDIANS. + + +The King of England gave all the land in Penn-syl-va-ni-a to William +Penn. The King made Penn a kind of king over Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Penn +could make the laws of this new country. But he let the people make +their own laws. + +Penn wanted to be friendly with the Indians. He paid them for all the +land his people wanted to live on. Before he went to Penn-syl-va-ni-a +he wrote a letter to the Indians. He told them in this letter that he +would not let any of his people do any harm to the Indians. He said he +would punish any-body that did any wrong to an Indian. This letter was +read to the Indians in their own lan-guage. + +Soon after this Penn got into a ship and sailed from England. He +sailed to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. When he came there, he sent word to the +tribes of Indians to come to meet him. + +The Indians met under a great elm tree on the bank of the river. +Indians like to hold their solemn meetings out of doors. They sit on +the ground. They say that the earth is the Indian's mother. + +When Penn came to the place of meeting, he found the woods full of +Indians. As far as he could see, there were crowds of Indians. Penn's +friends were few. They had no guns. + +Penn had a bright blue sash round his waist. One of the Indian chiefs, +who was the great chief, put on a kind of cap or crown. In the middle +of this was a small horn. The head chief wore this only at such great +meetings as this one. + +When the great chief had put on his horn, all the other chiefs and +great men of the Indians put down their guns. Then they sat down in +front of Penn in the form of a half-moon. Then the great chief told +Penn that the Indians were ready to hear what he had to say. + +Penn had a large paper in which he had written all the things that he +and his friends had promised to the Indians. He had written all the +promises that the Indians were to make to the white people. This was +to make them friends. When Penn had read this to them, it was +explained to them in their own lan-guage. Penn told them that they +might stay in the country that they had sold to the white people. The +land would belong to both the Indians and the white people. + +Then Penn laid the large paper down on the ground. That was to show +them, he said, that the ground was to belong to the Indians and the +white people to-geth-er. + +He said that there might be quarrels between some of the white people +and some of the Indians. But they would settle any quarrels without +fighting. When-ever there should be a quarrel, the Indians were to +pick out six Indians. The white people should also pick out six of +their men. These were to meet, and settle the quarrel. + +Penn said, "I will not call you my children, because fathers +some-times whip their children. I will not call you brothers, because +brothers sometimes fall out. But I will call you the same person as +the white people. We are the two parts of the same body." + +The Indians could not write. But they had their way of putting down +things that they wished to have re-mem-bered. They gave Penn a belt of +shell beads. These beads are called wam-pum. Some wam-pum is white. +Some is purple. + +They made this belt for Penn of white beads. In the middle of the belt +they made a picture of purple beads. It is a picture of a white man +and an Indian. They have hold of each other's hands. When they gave +this belt to Penn, they said, "We will live with William Penn and his +children as long as the sun and moon shall last." + +[Illustration: Penn jumping with the Indians.] + +Penn took up the great paper from the ground. He handed it to the +great chief that wore the horn on his head. He told the Indians to +keep it and hand it to their children's children, that they might know +what he had said. Then he gave them many presents of such things as +they liked. They gave Penn a name in their own language. They named +him "O-nas." That was their word for a feather. As the white people +used a pen made out of a quill or feather, they called a pen "o-nas." +That is why they called William Penn "Brother O-nas." + +Penn sometimes went to see the Indians. He talked to them, and gave +them friendly advice. Once he saw some of them jumping. They were +trying to see who could jump the farthest. + +Penn had been a very active boy. He knew how to jump very well. He +went to the place where the Indians were jumping. He jumped farther +than any of them. + +When the great gov-ern-or took part in their sport, the Indians were +pleased. They loved Brother O-nas more than ever. + + + + + +ONE LITTLE BAG OF RICE + + +The first white people that came to this country hardly knew how to +get their living here. They did not know what would grow best in +this country. + +Many of the white people learned to hunt. All the land was covered +with trees. In the woods were many animals whose flesh was good to +eat. There were deer, and bears, and great shaggy buf-fa-loes. There +were rabbits and squirrels. And there were many kinds of birds. The +hunters shot wild ducks, wild turkeys, wild geese, and pigeons. The +people also caught many fishes out of the rivers. + +Then there were animals with fur on their backs. The people killed +these and sold their skins. In this way many made their living. + +Other people spent their time in cutting down the trees. They sawed +the trees into timbers and boards. Some of it they split into staves +to make barrels. They sent the staves and other sorts of timber to +other countries to be sold. In South Car-o-li-na men made tar and +pitch out of the pine trees. + +But there was a wise man in South Car-o-li-na. He was one of those men +that find out better ways of doing. His name was Thomas Smith. + +Thomas Smith had once lived in a large island thousands of miles away +from South Car-o-li-na. In that island he had seen the people raising +rice. He saw that it was planted in wet ground. He said that he would +like to try it in South Car-o-li-na. But he could not get any seed +rice to plant. The rice that people eat is not fit to sow. + +One day a ship came to Charles-ton, where Thomas Smith lived. It had +been driven there by storms. The ship came from the large island +where Smith had seen rice grow. The captain of this ship was an old +friend of Smith. + +The two old friends met once more. Thomas Smith told the captain that +he wanted some rice for seed. The captain called the cook of his ship, +and asked him if he had any. The cook had one little bag of seed rice. +The captain gave this to his friend. + +There was some wet ground at the back of Smith's garden. In this wet +ground he sowed some of the rice. It grew finely. + +He gathered a good deal of rice in his garden that year. He gave part +of this to his friends. They all sowed it. The next year there was a +great deal of rice. + +After a while the wet land in South Car-o-li-na was turned to rice +fields. Every year many thousands of barrels of rice were sent away +to be sold. + +All this came from one little bag of rice and one wise man. + +[Illustration: Rice Plant.] + + + + + +THE STORY OF A WISE WOMAN. + + +You have read how Thomas Smith first raised rice in Car-o-li-na. After +his death there lived in South Car-o-li-na a wise young woman. She +showed the people how to raise another plant. Her name was +Eliza Lucas. + +The father of Miss Lucas did not live in Car-o-li-na. He was +gov-ern-or of one of the islands of the West Indies. Miss Lucas was +fond of trying new things. She often got seeds from her father. These +she planted in South Carolina. + +Her father sent her some seeds of the in-di-go plant. She sowed some +of these in March. But there came a frost. The in-di-go plant cannot +stand frost. Her plants all died. + +But Miss Lucas did not give up. She sowed some more seeds in April. +These grew very well until a cut-worm found them. The worm wished to +try new things, too. So he ate off the in-di-go plants. + +But Miss Lucas was one of the people who try, try again. She had lost +her indigo plants twice. Once more she sowed some of the seed. This +time the plants grew very well. + +Miss Lucas wrote to her father about it. He sent her a man who knew +how to get the indigo out of the plant. + +The man tried not to show Miss Lucas how to make the indigo. He did +not wish the people in South Carolina to learn how to make it. He was +afraid his own people would not get so much for their indigo. + +So he would not explain just how it ought to be done. He spoiled the +indigo on purpose. + +But Miss Lucas watched him closely. She found out how the indigo ought +to be made. Some of her father's land in South Carolina was now +planted with the indigo plants. + +[Illustration: Indigo Plant.] + +Then Miss Lucas was married. She became Mrs. Pinck-ney. Her father +gave her all the indigo growing on his land in South Carolina. It was +all saved for seed. Some of the seed Mrs. Pinck-ney gave to her +friends. Some of it her husband sowed. It all grew, and was made into +that blue dye that we call indigo. When it is used in washing clothes, +it is called bluing. + +In a few years, more than a million pounds of indigo were made in +South Carolina every year. Many people got rich by it. And it was all +because Miss Lucas did not give up. + + + + + +FRANKLIN HIS OWN TEACHER. + + +Few people ever knew so many things as Franklin. Men said, "How did he +ever learn so many things?" For he had been a poor boy who had to work +for a living. He could not go to school at all after he was ten +years old. + +His father made soap and candles. Little Ben Frank-lin had to cut +wicks for the candles. He also filled the candle molds. And he sold +soap and candles, and ran on errands. But when he was not at work he +spent his time in reading good books. What little money he got he used +to buy books with. + +He read the old story of "Pil-grim's Prog-ress," and liked it so well +that he bought all the other stories by the same man. But as he wanted +more books, and had not money to buy them, he sold all of these +books. The next he bought were some little his-to-ry books. These were +made to sell very cheap, and they were sold by peddlers. He managed to +buy forty or fifty of these little books of his-to-ry. + +Another way that he had of learning was by seeing things with his own +eyes. His father took him to see car-pen-ters at work with their saws +and planes. He also saw masons laying bricks. And he went to see men +making brass and copper kettles. And he saw a man with a turning lathe +making the round legs of chairs. Other men were at work making knives. +Some things people learn out of books, and some things they have to +see for them-selves. + +As he was fond of books, Ben's father thought that it would be a good +plan to send him to learn to print them. So the boy went to work in +his brother's printing office. Here he passed his spare time in +reading. He borrowed some books out of the stores where books were +sold. He would sit up a great part of the night sometimes to read one +of these books. He wished to return it when the book-store opened in +the morning. One man who had many books lent to Ben such of his books +as he wanted. + +It was part of the bargain that Ben's brother should pay his board. +The boy offered to board himself if his brother would give him half +what it cost to pay for his board. + +[Illustration: Franklin at Study.] + +His brother was glad to do this, and Ben saved part of the money and +bought books with it. He was a healthy boy, and it did not hurt him +to live mostly on bread and butter. Sometimes he bought a little pie +or a handful of raisins. + +Long before he was a man, people said, "How much the boy knows!" This +was because-- + +He did not waste his time. + +He read good books. + +He saw things for himself. + + + + + +HOW FRANKLIN FOUND OUT THINGS. + + +Frank-lin thought that ants know how to tell things to one another. He +thought that they talk by some kind of signs. When an ant has found a +dead fly too big for him to drag away, he will run off and get some +other ant to help him. Frank-lin thought that ants have some way of +telling other ants that there is work to do. + +One day he found some ants eating mo-las-ses out of a little jar in a +closet. He shook them out. Then he tied a string to the jar, and hung +it on a nail in the ceiling. But he had not got all the ants out of +the jar. One little ant liked sweet things so well that he staid in +the jar, and kept on eating like a greedy boy. + +[Illustration: Ants talking (magnified)] + +At last when this greedy ant had eaten all that he could, he started +to go home. Frank-lin saw him climb over the rim of the jar. Then the +ant ran down the outside of the jar. But when he got to the bottom, he +did not find any shelf there. He went all round the jar. There was no +way to get down to the floor. The ant ran this way and that way, but +he could not get down. + +[Illustration: An Ants Feeler (magnified)] + +At last the greedy ant thought he would see if he could go up. He +climbed up the string to the ceiling. Then he went down the wall. He +came to his own hole at last, no doubt. + +After a while he got hungry again, perhaps. He thought about that jar +of sweets at the end of a string. Then perhaps he told the other ants. +Maybe he let them know that there was a string by which they could get +down to the jar. + +In about half an hour after the ant had gone up the string, Franklin +saw a swarm of ants going down the string. They marched in a line, one +after another. Soon there were two lines of ants on the string. The +ants in one line were going down to get at the sweet food. The ants in +the other line were marching up the other side of the string to go +home. Do you think that the greedy ant told the other ants about +the jar? + +And did he tell them that there was a string by which an ant could get +there? + +And did he tell it by speaking, or by signs that he made with his +feelers? + +If you watch two ants when they meet, you will see that they touch +their feelers together, as if they said "Good-morning!" + +[Illustration: FRANKLIN ASKS THE SUNSHINE SOMETHING.] + +One day Franklin was eating dinner at the house of a friend. The lady +of the house, when she poured out the coffee, found that it was +not hot. + +She said, "I am sorry that the coffee is cold. It is because the +servant forgot to scour the coffee-pot. Coffee gets cold more quickly +when the coffee-pot is not bright." + +This set Franklin to thinking. He thought that a black or dull thing +would cool more quickly than a white or bright one. That made him +think that a black thing would take in heat more quickly than a +white one. + +He wanted to find out if this were true or not. There was no-body who +knew, so there was no-body to ask. But Franklin thought that he would +ask the sunshine. Maybe the sunshine would tell him whether a black +thing would heat more quickly than a white thing. + +But how could he ask the sunshine? + +There was snow on the ground. Franklin spread a white cloth on the +snow. Then he spread a black cloth on the snow near the white one. +When he came to look at them, he saw that the snow under the black +cloth melted away much sooner than that under the white cloth. + +That is the way that the sunshine told him that black would take in +heat more quickly than white. After he had found this out, many people +got white hats to wear in the summer time. A white hat is cooler than +a black one. + +Some time when there is snow on the ground, you can take a white and a +black cloth and ask the sunshine the same question. + + + + + +FRANKLIN AND THE KITE. + + +When Franklin wanted to know whether the ants could talk or not, he +asked the ants, and they told him. When he wanted to know some-thing +else, he asked the sunshine about it, as you have read in another +story. That is the way that Franklin came to know so many things. He +knew how to ask questions of every-thing. + +Once he asked the light-ning a question. And the light-ning gave him +an answer. + +Before the time of Franklin, people did not know what light-ning was. +They did not know what made the thunder. Franklin thought much about +it. At last he proved what it was. He asked the lightning a question, +and made it tell what it was. To tell you this story, I shall have +to use one big word. Maybe it is too big for some of my little friends +that will read this book. Let us divide it into parts. Then you will +not be afraid of it. The big word is e-lec-tric-i-ty. + +Those of you who live in towns have seen the streets lighted by +e-lec-tric-i-ty. But in Franklin's time there were no such lights. +People knew very little about this strange thing with a big name. + +But Franklin found out many things about it that nobody had ever known +before. He began to think that the little sparks he got from +e-lec-tric-i-ty were small flashes of lightning. He thought that the +little cracking sound of these sparks was a kind of baby thunder. + +So he thought that he would try to catch a little bit of lightning. +Perhaps he could put it into one of the little bottles used to hold +e-lec-tric-i-ty. Then if it behaved like e-lec-tric-i-ty, he would +know what it was. But catching lightning is not easy. How do you think +he did it? + +First he made a kite. It was not a kite just like a boy's kite. He +wanted a kite that would fly when it rained. Rain would spoil a paper +kite in a minute. So Franklin used a silk hand-ker-chief to cover his +kite, instead of paper. + +[Illustration: Franklin's Discovery.] + +He put a little sharp-pointed wire at the top of his kite. This was +a kind of lightning rod to draw the lightning into the kite. His kite +string was a common hemp string. To this he tied a key, because +lightning will follow metal. The end of the string that he held in his +hand was a silk ribbon, which was tied to the hemp string of the kite. +E-lec-tric-ity will not follow silk. + +One night when there was a storm coming, he went out with his son. +They stood under a cow shed, and he sent his kite up in the air. + +[Illustration] + +After a while he held his knuckle to the key. A tiny spark flashed +between the key and his knuckle. It was a little flash of lightning. + +Then he took his little bottle fixed to hold e-lec-tric-i-ty. He +filled it with the e-lec-tric-i-ty that came from the key. He carried +home a bottle of lightning. So he found out what made it thunder +and lighten. + +After that he used to bring the lightning into his house on rods and +wires. He made the lightning ring bells and do many other +strange things. + + + + + +FRANKLIN'S WHISTLE. + + +When Franklin was an old man, he wrote a cu-ri-ous letter. In that +letter he told a story. It was about some-thing that happened to him +when he was a boy. + +[Illustration] + +Here is the story put into verses, so that you will re-member it +better. Some day you can read the story as Franklin told it himself. +You will hear people say, "He paid too much for the whistle." The +saying came from this story. + + + TOO MUCH FOR THE WHISTLE + + As Ben with pennies in his pocket + Went strolling down the street, + "Toot-toot! toot-toot!" there came a whistle + From a boy he chanced to meet, + + Whistling fit to burst his buttons, + Blowing hard and stepping high. + Then Benny said, "I'll buy your whistle;" + But "Toot! toot-toot!" was the reply. + + But Benny counted out his pennies, + The whistling boy began to smile; + With one last toot he gave the whistle + To Ben, and took his penny pile. + + Now homeward goes the whistling Benny, + As proud as any foolish boy, + And in his pockets not a penny, + But in his mouth a noisy toy. + + "Ah, Benny, Benny!" cries his mother, + "I cannot stand your ugly noise." + "Stop, Benny, Benny!" says his father, + "I cannot talk, you drown my voice." + + At last the whistling boy re-mem-bers + How much his money might have bought + "Too many pennies for a whistle," + Is little Benny's ugly thought. + + Too many pennies for a whistle + Is what we all pay, you and I, + Just for a little foolish pleasure + Pay a price that's quite too high. + + + + + +JOHN STARK AND THE INDIANS. + + +John Stark was a famous gen-er-al in the Rev-o-lu-tion. But this +story is not about the Rev-o-lu-tion. It is about Stark before he +became a soldier. + +When he was a young man, Stark went into the woods. His brother and +two other young men were with him. They lived in a camp. It was far +away from any houses. + +The young men set traps for animals in many places. They wanted to +catch the animals that have fur on them. They wanted to get the +skins to sell. + +The Indians were at war with the white people. One day the young men +saw the tracks of Indians. Then they knew that it was not safe for +them to stay in the woods any longer. They began to get ready to +go home. + +John Stark went out to bring in the traps set for animals. The Indians +found him, and made him a pris-on-er. They asked him where his +friends were. + +Stark did not wish his friends to be taken. So he pointed the wrong +way. He took the Indians a long way from the other young men. + +But John Stark's friends did not know that he was a pris-on-er. When +he did not come back, they thought that he had lost his way. They +fired their guns to let him know where they were. + +When the Indians heard the guns, they knew where the other hunters +were. They went down to the river, and waited for them. When one of +the men came down, they caught him. + +Then John Stark's brother and the other man came down the river in a +boat. The Indians told Stark to call them. They wanted them to come +over where the Indians were. Then they could take them. + +John knew that the Indians were cruel. He knew that if he did not do +what they told him to, they might kill him. But he wished to save his +brother. He called to his brother to row for the other shore. + +When they turned toward the other shore, the Indians fired at them. +But Stark knocked up two of their guns. They did not hit the white +men. Then some of the other Indians fired. Stark knocked up their guns +also. But the man that was with his brother was killed. + +John now called to his brother, "Run! for all the Indians' guns are +empty." + +His brother got away. The Indians were very angry with John. They did +not kill him. But they gave him a good beating. These Indians were +from Can-a-da. They took their pris-on-ers to their own village. When +they were coming home, they shouted to let the people know that they +had prisoners. + +[Illustration: Stark running the Gauntlet] + +The young Indian war-ri-ors stood in two rows in the village. Each +prisoner had to run between these two rows of Indians. As he passed, +every one of the Indians hit him as hard as he could with a stick, or +a club, or a stone. + +The young man who was with Stark was badly hurt in running between +these lines. But John Stark knew the Indians. He knew that they liked +a brave man. + +When it came his turn to run, he snatched a club from one of the +Indians. With this club he fought his way down the lines. He hit hard, +now on this side, and now on that. The young Indians got out of his +way. The old Indians who were looking on sat and laughed at the +others. They said that Stark was a brave man. + +One day the Indians gave him a hoe and told him to hoe corn. He knew +that the Indian war-ri-ors would not work. They think it a shame for a +man to work. Their work is left for slaves and women. So Stark +pre-tend-ed that he did not know how to hoe. He dug up the corn +instead of the weeds. Then he threw the hoe into the river. He said, +"That is work for slaves and women." + +Then the Indians were pleased with him. They called him the young +chief. + +After a while some white men paid the Indians a hundred and three +dollars to let Stark go home. They charged more for him than for the +other man, because they thought that he must be a young chief. Stark +went hunting again. He had to get some furs to pay back the money the +men had paid the Indians for him. He took good care that the Indians +should not catch him again. + +He af-ter-wards became a great fighter against the Indians. He had +learned their ways while he was among them. He knew better how to +fight them than almost any-body else. + +In the Rev-o-lu-tion he was a gen-er-al. He fought the British at +Ben-ning-ton, and won a great vic-to-ry. + + + + + +A GREAT GOOD MAN. + + +Some men are great soldiers. Some are great law-makers. Some men write +great books. Some men make great in-ven-tions. Some men are +great speakers. + +Now you are going to read about a man that was great in none of these +things. He was not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. He was +never rich. He was a poor school-teacher. He never held any office. + +And yet he was a great man. He was great for his goodness. + +He was born in France. But most of his life was passed in +Phil-a-del-phi-a before the Rev-o-lu-tion. + +He was twenty-five years old when he became a school-teacher. He +thought that he could do more good in teaching than in any other way. + +School-masters in his time were not like our teachers. Children were +treated like little animals. In old times the school-master was a +little king. He walked and talked as if he knew every-thing. He wanted +all the children to be afraid of him. + +But Ben-e-zet was not that kind of man. He was very gentle. He treated +the children more kindly than their fathers and mothers did. Nobody in +this country had ever seen a teacher like him. + +He built a play-room for the children of his school. He used to take +them to this room during school time for a little a-muse-ment. He +man-aged each child as he found best. Some he could persuade to be +good. Some he shamed into being good. But this was very dif-fer-ent +from the cruel beatings that other teachers of that time gave +their pupils. + +Of course the children came to love him very much. After they grew to +be men and women, they kept their love for the good little +schoolmaster. As long as they lived they listened to his advice. + +There were no good school-books in his time. He wrote some little +books to make learning easier to his pupils. He taught them many +things not in their books. He taught them to be kind to brutes, and +gentle with one another. He taught them to be noble. He made them +despise every kind of meanness. + +He was a great teacher. That is better than being a great soldier. + +Ben-e-zet was a good man in many ways. He was the friend of all poor +people. Once he found a poor man suf-fer-ing with cold for want of a +coat. He took off his own coat in the street and put it on the poor +man, and then went home in his shirt sleeves. + +In those days negroes were stolen from Af-ri-ca to be sold into +A-mer-i-ca. Ben-e-zet wrote little books against this wrong. He sent +these books over all the world almost. He also tried to persuade the +white men of his own country to be honest and kind with the Indians. +Great men in other countries were pleased with his books. They wrote +him letters. When any of them came to this country, they went to see +him. They wanted to see a man that was good to everybody. His house +was a plain one. But great men liked to sit at the table of the good +schoolmaster. + +There was war between the English and French at that time. Can-a-da +belonged to the French. Our country belonged to the English. There was +a country called A-ca-di-a. It was a part of what is now No-va +Sco-ti-a. The people of A-ca-di-a were French. + +[Illustration: Departure of the Acadians] + +The English took the A-ca-di-ans away from their homes. They sent them +to various places. Many families were divided. The poor A-ca-di-ans +lost their homes and all that they had. + +Many hundreds of these people were sent to Phil-a-del-phi-a. Benezet +became their friend. As he was born in France, he could speak their +lan-guage. He got a large house built for some of them to stay in. He +got food and clothing for them. He helped them to get work, and did +them good in many other ways. + +One day Benezet's wife came to him with a troubled face. She said, +"There have been thieves in the house. Two of my blankets have +been stolen." + +"Never mind, my dear," said Benezet, "I gave them to some of the poor +A-ca-di-ans." + +One old Acadian was afraid of Benezet. He did not see why Benezet +should take so much trouble for other people. He thought that Benezet +was only trying to get a chance to sell the Acadians for slaves. When +Benezet heard this, he had a good laugh. + +Many years after this the Rev-o-lu-tion broke out. It brought trouble +to many people. Benezet helped as many as he could. + +After a while the British army took Phil-a-del-phi-a. They sent their +soldiers to stay in the houses of the people. The people had to take +care of the soldiers. This was very hard for the poor people. + +One day Benezet saw a poor woman. Her face showed that she was in +trouble. + +"Friend, what is the matter?" Benezet said to her. She told him that +six soldiers of the British army had been sent to stay in her house. +She was a washer-woman. But while the soldiers filled up the house she +could not do any washing. She and her children were in want. + +Benezet went right away to see the gen-er-al that was in command of +the soldiers. The good man was in such a hurry that he forgot to get a +pass. The soldiers at the gen-er-al's door would not let him go in. + +At last some one told the gen-er-al that a queer-looking fellow wanted +to see him. + +"Let him come up," said the general. + +The odd little man came in. He told the general all about the troubles +of the poor washer-woman. The general sent word that the soldiers must +not stay any longer in her house. + +The general liked the kind little man. He told him to come to see him +again. He told the soldiers at his door to let Benezet come in +when-ever he wished to. + +Soon after the Rev-o-lu-tion was over, Benezet was taken ill. When the +people of Phil-a-del-phi-a heard that he was ill, they gathered in +crowds about his house. Every-body loved him. Every-body wanted to +know whether he was better or not. At last the doctors said he could +not get well. Then the people wished to see the good man once more. +The doors were opened. The rooms and halls of his house were filled +with people coming to say good-bye to Benezet, and going away again. + +When he was buried, it seemed as if all Phil-a-del-phi-a had come to +his fu-ner-al. The rich and the poor, the black and the white, crowded +the streets. The city had never seen so great a fu-ner-al. + +In the company was an A-mer-i-can general. He said, "I would rather be +An-tho-ny Benezet in that coffin than General Wash-ing-ton in all +his glory." + + + + + +PUTNAM AND THE WOLF. + + +Putnam was a brave soldier. He fought many battles against the +Indians. After that he became a general in the Revolution. But this is +a story of his battle with a wolf. It took place when he was a young +man, before he was a soldier. + +Putnam lived in Con-nect-i-cut. In the woods there were still a few +wolves. One old wolf came to Putnam's neigh-bor-hood every winter. She +always brought a family of young wolves with her. + +The hunters would always kill the young wolves. But they could not +find the old mother wolf. She knew how to keep out of the way. + +The farmers tried to catch her in their traps. But she was too +cunning. She had had one good lesson when she was young. She had put +the toes of one foot into a steel trap. The trap had snipped them off. +After that she was more careful. + +One winter night she went out to get some meat. She came to Putnam's +flock of sheep and goats. She killed some of them. She found it +great fun. + +There were no dogs about. The poor sheep had nobody to protect them. +So the old wolf kept on killing. One sheep was enough for her supper. +But she killed the rest just for sport. She killed seventy sheep and +goats that night. + +Putnam and his friends set out to find the old sheep killer. There +were six men of them. They agreed that two of them should hunt for her +at a time. Then another two should begin as soon as the first two +should stop. So she would be hunted day and night. + +The hunters found her track in the snow. There could be no mistake +about it. The track made by one of her feet was shorter than those +made by the other feet. That was because one of her feet had been +caught in a trap. + +The hunters found that the old wolf had gone a long way off. Perhaps +she felt guilty. She must have thought that she would be hunted. She +had trotted away for a whole night. + +Then she turned and went back again. She was getting hungry by this +time. She wanted some more sheep. + +The men followed her tracks back again. The dogs drove her into a +hole. It was not far from Putnam's house. + +All the farmers came to help catch her. They sent the dogs into the +cave where the wolf was. But the wolf bit the dogs, and drove them +out again. + +Then the men put a pile of straw in the mouth of the cave. They set +the straw on fire. It filled the cave with smoke. But Mrs. Wolf did +not come out. + +Then they burned brim-stone in the cave. It must have made the wolf +sneeze. But the cave was deep. She went as far in as she could, and +staid there. She thought that the smell of brimstone was not so bad as +the dogs and men who wanted to kill her. + +Putnam wanted to send his negro into the cave to drive out the wolf. +But the negro thought that he would rather stay out. + +Then Putnam said that he would go in himself. He tied a rope to his +legs. Then he got some pieces of birch-bark. He set fire to these. He +knew that wild animals do not like to face a fire. + +He got down on his hands and knees. He held the blazing bark in his +hand. He crawled through the small hole into the cave. There was not +room for him to stand up. + +At first the cave went downward into the ground. Then it was level a +little way. Then it went upward. At the very back of this part of the +cave was the wolf. Putnam crawled up until he could see the +wolf's eyes. + +When the wolf saw the fire, she gave a sudden growl. Putnam jerked the +rope that was tied to his leg. The men outside thought that the wolf +had caught him. They pulled on the other end of the rope. + +The men pulled as fast as they could. When they had drawn Putnam out, +his clothes were torn. He was badly scratched by the rocks. + +He now got his gun. He held it in one hand. He held the burning +birch-bark in the other. He crawled into the cave again. + +When the wolf saw him coming again, she was very angry. She snapped +her teeth. She got ready to spring on him. She meant to kill him as +she had killed his sheep. Putnam fired at her head. As soon as his +gun went off, he jerked the rope. His friends pulled him out. + +He waited awhile for the smoke of his gun to clear up. Then he went in +once more. He wanted to see if the wolf was dead. + +He found her lying down. He tapped her nose with his birch-bark. She +did not move. He took hold of her. Then he jerked the rope. + +This time the men saw him come out, bringing the dead wolf. Now the +sheep would have some peace. + +[Illustration] + + + + + +WASHINGTON AND HIS HATCHET + + +It was Ar-bor Day in the Mos-sy Hill School, Johnny Little-john had to +speak a piece that had some-thing to do with trees. He thought it +would be a good plan to say some-thing about the little cherry tree +that Washington spoiled with his hatch-et, when he was a little boy. +This is what he said: + +[Illustration] + +He had a hatch-et--little George-- + A hatch-et bright and new, +And sharp enough to cut a stick-- + A little stick--in two. + +He hacked and whacked and whacked and hacked, + This sturd-y little man; +He hacked a log and hacked a fence, + As round about he ran. + +He hacked his father's cher-ry tree + And made an ug-ly spot; +The bark was soft, the hatch-et sharp, + And little George forgot. + +You know the rest. The father frowned + And asked the rea-son why; +You know the good old story runs + He could not tell a lie. + +The boy that chopped that cher-ry tree + Soon grew to be a youth; +At work and books he hacked away, + And still he told the truth: + +The youth became a fa-mous man, + Above six feet in height, +And when he had good work to do + He hacked with all his might. + +He fought the ar-mies that the king + Had sent across the sea; +He bat-tled up and down the land + To set his country free. + +For seven long years he, hacked and whacked + With all his might and main +Until the Brit-ish sailed away + And did not come again. + + +[Illustration] + + + + + +HOW BENNY WEST LEARNED TO BE A PAINTER. + + +In old times there lived in Penn-syl-va-ni-a a little +fellow whose name was Ben-ja-min West. He +lived in a long stone house. + +[Illustration: Painting Baby's Portrait] + +He had never seen a picture. The country was new, and there were not many +pictures in it. Benny's father was a Friend or Quaker. The Friends of +that day did not think that pictures were useful things to make or to +have. Before he was seven years old, this little boy began to draw +pictures. One day he was watching the cradle of his sister's child. +The baby smiled. Benny was so pleased with her beauty, that he made a +picture of her in red and black ink. The picture of the baby pleased +his mother when she saw it. That was very pleasant to the boy. + +He made other pictures. At school he used to draw with a pen before he +could write. He made pictures of birds and of animals. Sometimes he +would draw flowers. + +[Illustration: Flower and Fruit of the Poke-Berry.] + +He liked to draw so well, that sometimes he forgot to do his work. His +father sent him to work in the field one day. The father went out to +see how well he was doing his work. Benny was no-where to be found. At +last his father saw him sitting under a large poke-weed. He was making +pictures. He had squeezed the juice out of some poke-berries. The +juice of poke-berries is deep red. With this the boy had made his +pictures. When the father looked at them, he was surprised. There were +portraits of every member of the family. His father knew +every picture. + +Up to this time Benny had no paints nor any brushes. The Indians had +not all gone away from that neigh-bor-hood. The Indians paint their +faces with red and yellow colors. These colors they make them-selves. +Sometimes they prepare them from the juice of some plant. Sometimes +they get them by finding red or yellow earth. Some of the Indians can +make rough pictures with these colors. + +The Indians near the house of Benny's father must have liked the boy. +They showed him how to make red and yellow colors for himself. He got +some of his mother's indigo to make blue. He now had red, yellow, and +blue. By mixing these three, the other colors that he wanted could +be made. + +But he had no brush to paint with. He took some long hairs from the +cat's tail. Of these he made his brushes. He used so many of the cat's +hairs, that her tail began to look bare. Everybody in the house began +to wonder what was the matter with pussy's tail. At last Benny told +where he got his brushes. + +[Illustration: Making a Paint Brush.] + +A cousin of Benny's came from the city on a visit. He saw some of the +boy's drawings. When he went home, he sent Benny a box of paints. With +the paints were some brushes. And there was some canvas such as +pictures are painted on. And that was not all. There were in the box +six beautiful en-grav-ings. + +The little painter now felt himself rich. He was so happy that he +could hardly sleep at all. At night he put the box that held his +treasures on a chair by his bed. As soon as daylight came, he carried +the precious box to the garret. The garret of the long stone house was +his stu-di-o. Here he worked away all day long. He did not go to +school at all. Perhaps he forgot that there was any school. Perhaps +the little artist could not tear himself away from his work. + +But the schoolmaster missed him. He came to ask if Benny was ill. The +mother was vexed when she found that he had staid away from school. +She went to look for the naughty boy. After a while she found the +little truant. He was hard at work in his garret. She saw what he +had been doing. He had not copied any of his new en-grav-ings. He had +made up a new picture by taking one person out of one en-grav-ing, and +another out of another. He had copied these so that they made a +picture that he had thought of for himself. + +His mother could not find it in her heart to punish him. She was too +much pleased with the picture he was making. This picture was not +finished. But his mother would not let him finish it. She was afraid +he would spoil it if he did anything more on it. + +The good people called Friends did not like the making of pictures, as +I said. But they thought that Benny West had a talent that he ought to +use. So he went to Phil-a-del-phi-a to study his art. After a while he +sailed away to It-a-ly to see the pictures that great artists +had painted. + +At last he settled in England. The King of England was at that time +the king of this country too. The king liked West's pictures. West +became the king's painter. He came to be the most famous painter +in England. + +He liked to remember his boyish work. He liked to remember the time +when he was a little Quaker boy making his paints of poke-juice and +Indian colors. + + + + + +WASHINGTON'S CHRISTMAS GIFT. + + +Washington was fighting to set this country free. But the army that +the King of England sent to fight him was stronger than Washington's +army. Washington was beaten and driven out of Brook-lyn. Then he had +to leave New York. After that, he marched away into New Jersey to save +his army from being taken. At last he crossed the Del-a-ware River. +Here he was safe for a while. + +Some of the Hes-sian soldiers that the king had hired to fight against +the Americans came to Trenton. Trenton is on the Del-a-ware River. + +Washington and his men were on the other side of the Del-a-ware River +from the Hes-sians. Washington's men were dis-cour-aged. They had been +driven back all the way from Brook-lyn. It was winter, and they had no +warm houses to stay in. They had not even warm clothes. They were +dressed in old clothes that people had given them. Some of them were +bare-footed in this cold weather. + +The Hes-sians and other soldiers of the king were waiting for the +river to freeze over. Then they would march across on the ice. They +meant to fight Washington once more, and break up his army. But +Washington was thinking about something too. + +He was waiting for Christmas. He knew that the Hessian soldiers on the +other side of the river would eat and drink a great deal on +Christmas Day. + +[Illustration: Marching to Trenton.] + +The afternoon of Christmas came. The Hessians were singing and +drinking in Trenton. But Washington was marching up the river bank. +Some of his bare-foot men left blood marks on the snow as +they marched. + +The men and cannons were put into flat boats. These boats were pushed +across the river with poles. There were many great pieces of ice in +the river. But all night long the flat boats were pushed across and +then back again for more men. It was three o'clock on the morning +after Christmas when the last Americans crossed the river. It was +hailing and snowing, and it was very cold. Two or three of the +soldiers were frozen to death. + +It was eight o'clock in the morning when Washington got to Trenton. +The Hessians were sleeping soundly. The sound of the American drums +waked them. They jumped out of their beds. They ran into the streets. +They tried to fight the Americans. + +But it was too late. Washington had already taken their cannons. His +men were firing these at the Hessians. The Hessians ran into the +fields to get away. But the Americans caught them. + +The battle was soon over. Washington had taken nine hundred prisoners. + +This was called the battle of Trenton. It gave great joy to all the +Americans. It was Washington's Christmas gift to the country. + + + + + +HOW WASHINGTON GOT OUT OF A TRAP. + + +After the battle of Trenton, Washington went back across the Delaware +River. He had not men enough to fight the whole British army. + +But the Americans were glad when they heard that he had beaten the +Hessians. They sent him more soldiers. Then he went back across the +river to Trenton again. + +There was a British general named Corn-wal-lis. He marched to Trenton. +He fought against Washington. Corn-wal-lis had more men than +Washington had. Night came, and they could not see to fight. There was +a little creek between the two armies. + +Washington had not boats enough to carry his men across the river. +Corn-wal-lis was sure to beat him if they should fight a battle the +next morning. + +Cornwallis said, "I will catch the fox in the morning." + +He called Washington a fox. He thought he had him in a trap. +Cornwallis sent for some more soldiers to come from Prince-ton in the +morning. He wanted them to help him catch the fox. + +But foxes sometimes get out of traps. + +When it was dark, Washington had all his camp fires lighted. He put +men to digging where the British could hear them. He made Cornwallis +think that he was throwing up banks of earth and getting ready to +fight in the morning. + +But Washington did not stay in Trenton. He did not wish to be caught +like a fox in a trap. He could not get across the river. But he knew a +road that went round the place where Cornwallis and his army were. He +took that road and got behind the British army. + +It was just like John waiting to catch James. James is in the house. +John is waiting at the front door to catch James when he comes out. +But James slips out by the back way. John hears him call "Hello!" +James has gone round behind him and got away. + +Washington went out of Trenton in the darkness. You might say that he +marched out by the back door. He left Cornwallis watching the front +door. The Americans went away quietly. They left a few men to keep up +the fires, and make a noise like digging. Before morning these +slipped away too. + +When morning came, Cornwallis went to catch his fox. But the fox was +not there. He looked for the Americans. There was the place where +they had been digging. Their camp fires were still burning. But where +had they gone? + +Cornwallis thought that Washington had crossed the river by some +means. But soon he heard guns firing away back toward Princeton. He +thought that it must be thunder. But he found that it was a battle. +Then he knew that Washington had gone to Princeton. + +Washington had marched all night. When he got to Princeton, he met the +British coming out to go to Trenton. They were going to help +Cornwallis to catch Washington. But Washington had come to Princeton +to catch them. He had a hard fight with the British at Princeton. But +at last he beat them. + +When Cornwallis knew that the Americans had gone to Princeton, he +hurried there to help his men. But it was too late. Washington had +beaten the British at Princeton, and had gone on into the hills, where +he was safe. + +The fox had got out of the trap. + + + +WASHINGTON'S LAST BATTLE. + +Washington had been fighting for seven years to drive the British +soldiers out of this country. But there were still two strong British +armies in America. + +One of these armies was in New York. It had been there for years. The +other army was far away at Yorktown in Virginia. The British general +at Yorktown was Cornwallis. You have read how Washington got away from +him at Trenton. + +The King of France had sent ships and soldiers to help the Americans. +But still Washington had not enough men to take New York from the +British. Yet he went on getting ready to attack the British in New +York. He had ovens built to bake bread for his men. He bought hay for +his horses. He had roads built to draw his cannons on. + +He knew that the British in New York would hear about what he was +doing. He wanted them to think that he meant to come to New York and +fight them. When the British heard what the Americans were doing, they +got ready for the coming of Washington and the French. All at once +they found that Washington had gone. He and his men had marched away. +The French soldiers that had come to help him had gone with him. + +Nobody knew what it meant. Washington's own men did not know where +they were going. They went from New Jersey into Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then +they marched across Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Then they went into Mary-land. +They marched across that State, and then they went into Vir-gin-i-a. + +By this time everybody could tell where Washington was going. People +could see that he was going straight to York-town. They knew that +Washington was going to fight his old enemy at York-town. + +But he had kept his secret long enough. The British in New York could +not send help to Cornwallis. It was too late. The French ships sailed +to Vir-gin-i-a, and shut up Yorktown on the side of the sea. +Washington's men shut it up on the side of the land. They built great +banks of earth round it. On these banks of earth they put cannons. + +The British could not get away. They fought bravely. But the Americans +and French came closer and closer. + +Then the British tried to fight their way out. But they were driven +back. Then Cornwallis tried to get his men across the river. He +wanted to get out by the back door, as Washington had done. But the +Americans on the other side of the river drove them back again. +Washington had now caught Cornwallis in a trap. + +The Americans fired red-hot cannon balls into Yorktown. These set the +houses on fire. At last Cornwallis had to give up. The British marched +out and laid down their guns and swords. + +The British army in New York could not fight the Americans by itself. +So the British gave it up. Then there was peace after the long war. +The British pulled down the British flag and sailed away. The country +was free at last. + + + + + +MARION'S TOWER. + + +General Mar-i-on was one of the best fighters in the Revolution. He +was a homely little man. He was also a very good man. Another general +said, "Mar-i-on is good all over." + +The American army had been beaten in South Car-o-li-na. Mar-i-on was +sent there to keep the British from taking the whole country. + +Marion got to-geth-er a little army. His men had nothing but rough +clothes to wear. They had no guns but the old ones they had used to +shoot wild ducks and deer with. + +Marion's men wanted swords. There were no swords to be had. But Marion +sent men to take the long saws out of the saw mills. These were taken +to black-smiths. The black-smiths cut the saws into pieces. These +pieces they hammered out into long, sharp swords. + +Marion had not so many men as the British. He had no cannon. He could +not build forts. He could not stay long in one place, for fear the +British should come with a strong army and take him. He and his men +hid in the dark woods. Sometimes he changed his hiding place suddenly. +Even his own friends had hard work to find him. + +From the dark woods he would come out suddenly. He would attack some +party of British soldiers. When the battle was over, he would go back +to the woods again. + +When the British sent a strong army to catch him, he could not be +found. But soon he would be fighting the British in some new place. He +was always playing hide and seek. + +The British called him the Swamp Fox. That was because he was so hard +to catch. They could not conquer the country until they could catch +Marion. And they never could catch the Swamp Fox. At one time Marion +came out of the woods to take a little British fort. This fort was on +the top of a high mound. It was one of the mounds built a long time +ago by the Indians. + +Marion put his men all round the fort, so that the men in the fort +could not get out to get water. He thought that they would have to +give up. But the men in the fort dug a well inside the fort. Then +Marion had to think of another plan. + +Marion's men went to the woods and cut down stout poles. They got a +great many poles. When night came, they laid a row of poles along-side +one another on the ground. Then they laid another row across these. +Then they laid another row on top of the last ones, and across the +other way again. + +[Illustration: Marion's Tower.] + +They laid a great many rows of poles one on top of another. They +crossed them this way and that. As the night went on, the pile grew +higher. Still they handed poles to top of the pile. + +Before morning came, they had built a kind of tower. It was higher +than the Indian mound. + +As soon as it was light, the men on Marion's tower began to shoot. The +British looked out. They saw a great tower with men on it. The men +could shoot down into the fort. The British could not stand it. They +had to give up. They were taken prisoners. + + + + + +CLARK AND HIS MEN. + + +At the time of the Revolution there were but few people living on the +north side of the O-hi-o River. But there were many Indians there. +These Indians killed a great many white people in Ken-tuck-y. + +The Indians were sent by British officers to do this killing. There +was a British fort at Vincennes in what is now In-di-an-a. There was +another British fort or post at Kas-kas-ki-a in what is now the State +of Il-li-nois. + +George Rogers Clark was an American colonel. He wanted to stop the +murder of the settlers by the Indians. He thought that he could do it +by taking the British posts. + +He had three hundred men. They went down the O-hi-o River in boats. +They landed near the mouth of the O-hi-o River. Then they marched a +hundred and thirty miles to Kas-kas-ki-a. + +Kas-kas-ki-a was far away from the Americans. The people there did not +think that the Americans would come so far to attack them. When Clark +got there, they were all asleep. He marched in and took the town +before they waked up. + +The people living in Kaskaskia were French. By treating them well, +Clark made them all friendly to the Americans. + +When the British at Vin-cennes heard that Clark had taken Kaskaskia, +they thought that they would take it back again. But it was winter. +All the streams were full of water. They could not march till spring. +Then they would gather the Indians to help them, and take Clark +and his men. + +But Clark thought that he would not wait to be taken. He thought that +he would just go and take the British. If he could manage to get to +Vin-cennes in the winter, he would not be expected. + +Clark started with a hundred and seventy men. The country was nearly +all covered with water. The men were in the wet almost all the time. +Clark had hard work to keep his men cheerful. He did everything he +could to amuse them. + +They had to wade through deep rivers. The water was icy cold. But +Clark made a joke of it. He kept them laughing whenever he could. + +At one place the men refused to go through the freezing water. Clark +could not per-suade them to cross the river. He called to him a tall +sol-dier. He was the very tallest man in Clark's little army. Clark +said to him, "Take the little drummer boy on your shoulders." + +The little drummer was soon seated high on the shoulders of the tall +man. "Now go ahead!" said Clark. + +The soldier marched into the water. The little drummer beat a march on +his drum. Clark cried out, "Forward!" Then he plunged into the water +after the tall soldier. All the men went in after him. They were soon +safe on the other side. + +[Illustration] + +At another river the little drummer was floated over on the top of his +drum. At last the men drew near to Vin-cennes. They could hear the +morning and evening gun in the British fort. But the worst of the way +was yet to pass. The Wa-bash River had risen over its banks. The water +was five miles wide. The men marched from one high ground to another +through the cold water. They caught an Indian with a canoe. In this +they got across the main river. But there was more water to cross. The +men were so hungry that some of them fell down in the water. They had +to be carried out. + +Clark's men got frightened at last, and then they had no heart to go +any farther. But Clark remembered what the Indians did when they went +to war. He took a little gun-powder in his hand. He poured water on +it. Then he rubbed it on his face. It made his face black. + +With his face blackened like an Indian's, he gave an Indian war-whoop. +The men followed him again. + +The men were tired and hungry. But they soon reached dry ground. They +were now in sight of the fort. Clark marched his little army round and +round in such a way as to make it seem that he had many men with him. +He wrote a fierce letter to the British com-mand-er. He behaved like a +general with a large army. + +After some fighting, the British com-mand-er gave up. Clark's little +army took the British fort. This brave action saved to our country the +land that lies between the Ohio River and the Lakes. It stopped the +sending of Indians to kill the settlers in the West. + + + + + +DANIEL BOONE AND HIS GRAPEVINE SWING. + + +Daniel Boone was the first settler of Ken-tuck-y. He knew all about +living in the woods. He knew how to hunt the wild animals. He knew how +to fight Indians, and how to get away from them. + +Nearly all the men that came with him to Kentucky the first time were +killed. One was eaten by wolves. Some of them were killed by Indians. +Some of them went into the woods and never came back. Nobody knows +what killed them. + +Only Boone and his brother were left alive. They needed some powder +and some bullets. They wanted some horses. Boone's brother went back +across the mountains to get these things. Boone staid in his little +cabin all alone. + +Boone could hear the wolves howl near his cabin at night. He heard the +panthers scream in the woods. But he did not mind being left all alone +in these dark forests. The Indians came to his cabin when he was +away. He did not want to see these vis-it-ors. He did not dare to +sleep in his cabin all the time. Sometimes he slept under a rocky +cliff. Sometimes he slept in a cane-brake. A cane-brake is a large +patch of growing canes such as fishing rods are made of. + +Once a mother bear tried to kill him. He fired his gun at her, but the +bullet did not kill her. The bear ran at him. He held his long knife +out in his hand. The bear ran against it and was killed. + +He made long journeys alone in the woods. One day he looked back +through the trees and saw four Indians. They were fol-low-ing Boone's +tracks. They did not see him. He turned this way and that. But the +Indians still fol-lowed his tracks. + +He went over a little hill. Here he found a wild grape-vine. It was a +very long vine, reaching to the top of a high tree. There are many +such vines in the Southern woods. Children cut such vines off near the +roots. Then they use them for swings. + +Boone had swung on grape-vines when he was a boy. He now thought of a +way to break his tracks. He cut the wild grape-vine off near the root. +Then he took hold of it. He sprang out into the air with all his +might. The great swing carried him far out as it swung. Then he let +go. He fell to the ground, and then he ran away in a dif-fer-ent +di-rec-tion from that in which he had been going. + +When the Indians came to the place, they could not find his tracks. +They could not tell which way he had gone. He got to his cabin +in safety. + +Boone had now been alone for many months. His brother did not get back +at the time he had set for coming. Boone thought that his brother +might have been killed. Boone had not tasted anything but meat since +he left home. He had to get his food by shooting animals in the woods. +By this time he had hardly any powder or bullets left. + +[Illustration: Boone on the Grapevine Swing] + +One evening he sat by his cabin. He heard some one coming. He thought +that it might be Indians. He heard the steps of horses. He looked +through the trees. He saw his brother riding on one horse, and leading +another. The other horse was loaded with powder and bullets and +clothes, and other things that Boone needed. + + + + + +DANIEL BOONE'S DAUGHTER AND HER FRIENDS. + + +Daniel Boone and his brother picked out a good place in Ken-tuck-y to +settle. Then they went home to North Car-o-li-na. They took with them +such things as were cu-ri-ous and val-u-a-ble. These were the skins of +animals they had killed, and no doubt some of the heads and tails. + +Boone was restless. He had seen Kentucky and he did not wish to settle +down to the life of North Carolina. + +In two years Boone sold his farm in North Carolina and set out for +Kentucky. He took with him his wife and children and two brothers. +Some of their neighbors went with them. They trav-eled by pack train. +All their goods were packed on horses. + +When they reached the place on the Kentucky River that Boone had +chosen for a home they built a fort of log houses. These cabins all +stood round a square. The backs of the houses were outward. There was +no door or window in the back of a house. The outer walls were thus +shut up. They made the place a fort. The houses at the four corners +were a little taller and stronger than the others. There were gates +leading into the fort. These gates were kept shut at night. + +In the evening the people danced and amused themselves in the square. +Indians could not creep up and attack them. + +When the men went out to feed the horses and cows they carried their +guns. They walked softly and turned their eyes quickly from point to +point to see if Indians were hiding near. They held their guns so they +could shoot quickly. + +The women and children had to stay very near the fort so they could +run in if an Indian came in sight. + +Daniel Boone had a daughter named Je-mi-ma. She was about fourteen +years old. She had two friends named Frances and Betsey Cal-lo-way. +Frances Galloway was about the same age as Jemima. + +One summer afternoon these three girls went out of the fort. They went +to the river and got into a canoe. It was not far from the fort. They +felt safe. They laughed and talked and splashed the water with +their paddles. + +The cur-rent carried them slowly near the other shore. They could +still see the fort. They did not think of danger. + +Trees and bushes grew thick down to the edge of the river. Five +strong Indians were hiding in the bushes. + +One Indian crept care-ful-ly through the bushes. He made no more noise +than a snake. When he got to the edge of the water he put out his long +arm and caught hold of the rope that hung down from the canoe. In a +moment he had turned the boat around and drawn it out of sight +from the fort. The girls screamed when they saw the Indian. Their +friends heard them but could not cross the river to help them. The +girls had taken the only canoe. + +Boone and Cal-lo-way were both gone from the fort. They got home too +late to start that day. No sleep came to their eyes while they waited +for light to travel by. + +As soon as there was a glim-mer of light they and a party of their +friends set out. It was in July and they could start early. + +They crossed the river and easily found the Indians' tracks where they +started. The brush was broken down there. + +The Indians were cun-ning. They did not keep close together after they +set out. Each Indian walked by himself through the tall canes. Three +of the Indians took the captives. + +Boone and his friends tried in vain to follow them. Sometimes they +would find a track but it would soon be lost in the thick canes. + +Boone's party gave up trying to find their path. They noticed which +way the Indians were going. Then they walked as fast as they could the +same way for thirty miles. They thought the Indians would grow +careless about their tracks after traveling so far. + +They turned so as to cross the path they thought the Indians had +taken. They looked carefully at the ground and at the bushes to see if +any one had gone by. + +Before long they found the Indians' tracks in a buffalo path. +Buffaloes and other animals go often to lick salt from the rocks round +salt springs. They beat down the brush and make great roads. These +roads run to the salt springs. The hunters call them streets. + +The Indians took one of these roads after they got far from the fort. +They could travel more easily in it. They did not take pains to hide +their tracks. + +As fast as their feet could carry them, Boone and his friends traveled +along the trail. When they had gone about ten miles they saw +the Indians. + +The Indians had stopped to rest and to eat. It was very warm and +they had put off their moc-ca-sins and laid down their arms. They were +kindling a fire to cook by. + +In a moment the Indians saw the white men. Boone and Galloway were +afraid the Indians would kill the girls. + +Four of the white men shot at the Indians. Then all rushed at them. + +The Indians ran away as fast as they could. They did not stop to pick +up their guns or knives or hatchets. They had no time to put on their +moccasins. + +The poor worn-out girls were soon safe in their fathers' arms. + +Back to Boones-bor-ough they went, not minding their tired feet. When +they got to the fort there was great joy to see them alive. + +I do not believe they ever played in the water again. + + + + + +DECATUR AND THE PIRATES. + + +Nearly a hundred years have passed since the ship "Phil-a-del-phi-a" +was burned. But the brave sailors who did it will never be +for-got-ten. + +The people of Trip-o-li in Af-ri-ca were pirates. They took the ships +of other nations at sea. They made slaves of their prisoners. The +friends of these slaves sometimes sent money to buy their freedom. +Some countries paid money to these pirates to let their ships go safe. + +Our country had trouble with the pirates. This trouble brought on a +war. Our ships were sent to fight against Trip-o-li. + +One of the ships fighting against the pirates was called the +"Phil-a-del-phi-a." One day she was chasing a ship of Trip-o-li. The +"Phil-a-del-phi-a" ran on the rocks. The sailors could not get her +off. The pirates came and fought her as she lay on the rocks. They +took her men prisoners. Then they went to work to get her off. After a +long time they got her into deep water. They took her to Tripoli. Our +ships could not go there after her, because there were so many great +cannons on the shore near the ship. + +The pirates got the "Philadelphia" ready to go to sea. They loaded her +cannons. They meant to slip out past our ships of war. Then they would +take a great many smaller American ships. + +But the Americans laid a plan to burn the "Philadelphia." It was a +very dan-ger-ous thing to try to do. The pirates had ships of war near +the "Philadelphia." They had great guns on the shore. There was no way +to do it in the day-time. It could only be done by stealing into the +Bay of Tripoli at night. + +The Americans had taken a little vessel from the pirates. She was of +the kind that is called a ketch. She had sails. She also had long +oars. When there was no wind to sail with, the sailors could row her +with the oars. + +This little ketch was sent one night to burn the "Philadelphia." The +captain of this boat was Ste-phen De-ca-tur. He was a young man, and +very brave. + +De-ca-tur made his men lie down, so that the pirates would not know +how many men he had on his ketch. Only about ten men were in sight. +The rest were lying hidden on the boat. + +They came near to the "Philadelphia." It was about ten o'clock at +night. The pirates called to them. The pilot of the ketch told them +that he was from Mal-ta. He told them that he had come to sell things +to the people of Tripoli. He said that the ketch had lost her anchor. +He asked them to let him tie her to the big ship till morning. + +The pirates sent out a rope to them. But when the ketch came nearer, +the pirates saw that they had been fooled. They cried out, "Americans, +Americans!" + +Then the Americans lying down took hold of the rope and pulled with +all their might, and drew the ketch close to the ship. They were so +close, that the ship's cannons were over their heads. The pirates +could not fire at them. + +The men who had been lying still now rose up. There were eighty of +them. In a minute they were scram-bling up the sides of the big ship. +Some went in one way, some another. They did not shoot. They fought +with swords and pikes, or short spears. + +Soon they drove the pirates to one side of the ship. Then they could +hear the pirates jumping over into the water. In a few minutes the +pirates had all gone. + +But the Americans could not stay long. They must burn the ship before +the pirates on the shore should find out what they were doing. + +They had brought a lot of kin-dling on the ketch. They built fires in +all parts of the ship. The fire ran so fast, that some of the men had +trouble to get off the ship. + +When the Americans got back on the ketch, they could not untie the +rope that held the ketch to the ship. The big ship was bursting into +flames. The ketch would soon take fire. + +They took swords and hacked the big rope in two. Then they pushed hard +to get away from the fire. The ketch began to move. The sailors took +the large oars and rowed. They were soon safe from the fire. + +All this they had done without any noise. But, now that they had got +away, they looked back. The fire was shooting up toward the sky. The +men stopped rowing, and they gave three cheers. They were so glad, +that they could not help it. + +By this time the pirates on shore had waked up. They began to fire +great cannon balls at the little ketch. One of the balls went through +her sails. Ah! how the sailors rowed! + +The whole sky was now lighted up by the fire. The pirates' cannons +were thundering. The cannon balls were splashing the water all round +the ketch. But the Americans got away. At last they were safe in their +own ships. + + + +STORIES ABOUT JEFFERSON. + +Thomas Jef-fer-son was one of the great men of the Revolution. He was +not a soldier. He was not a great speaker. But he was a great thinker. +And he was a great writer. + +He wrote a paper that was the very beginning of the United States. It +was a paper that said that we would be free from England, and be a +coun-try by our-selves. We call that paper the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence. + +When he was a boy, Jef-fer-son was fond of boyish plays. But when he +was tired of play, he took up a book. It pleased him to learn things. +From the time when he was a boy he never sat down to rest without +a book. + +At school he learned what other boys did. But the dif-fer-ence between +him and most other boys was this: he did not stop with knowing just +what the other boys knew. Most boys want to learn what other boys +learn. Most girls would like to know what their school-mates know. But +Jef-fer-son wanted to know a great deal more. + +As a young man, Jefferson knew Latin and Greek. He also knew French +and Span-ish and I-tal-ian. + +He did not talk to show off what he knew. He tried to learn what other +people knew. When he talked to a wagon maker, he asked him about such +things as a wagon maker knows most about. He would sometimes ask how a +wagon maker would go to work to make a wheel. + +When Jefferson talked to a learn-ed man, he asked him about those +things that this man knew most about. When he talked with Indians, he +got them to tell him about their lan-guage. That is the way he came +to know so much about so many things. Whenever anybody told him +anything worth while, he wrote it down as soon as he could. + +One day Jefferson was trav-el-ing. He went on horse-back. That was a +common way of trav-el-ing at that time. He stopped at a country +tavern. At this tavern he talked with a stranger who was +staying there. + +After a while Jefferson rode away. Then the stranger said to the +land-lord, "Who is that man? He knew so much about law, that I was +sure he was a lawyer. But when we talked about med-i-cine, he knew so +much about that, that I thought he must be a doctor. And after a while +he seemed to know so much about re-li-gion, that I was sure he was a +min-is-ter. Who is he?" + +The stranger was very much surprised to hear that the man he had +talked with was Thomas Jefferson. + +Jefferson was a very polite man. One day his grand-son was riding with +him. They met a negro. The negro lifted his cap and bowed. Jefferson +bowed to the negro. But his grand-son did not think it worth while +to bow. + +Then Jefferson said to his grand-son, "Do not let a poor negro be more +of a gen-tle-man than you are." In the Dec-la-ra-tion of +In-de-pend-ence, Jefferson wrote these words: "All men are created +equal." He also said that the poor man had the same right as the rich +man to live, and to be free, and to try to make himself happy. + + + + + +A LONG JOURNEY. + + +A long time ago, when Thomas Jefferson was Pres-i-dent, most of the +people in this country lived in the East. Nobody knew anything about +the Far West. The only people that lived there were Indians. Many of +these Indians had never seen a white man. + +[Illustration: An Elk] + +The Pres-i-dent sent men to travel into this wild part of the country. +He told them to go up to the upper end of the Mis-sou-ri River. Then +they were to go across the Rocky Mountains. They were to keep on till +they got to the Pa-cif-ic O-cean. Then they were to come back again. +They were to find out the best way to get through the mountains. And +they were to find out what kind of people the Indians in that country +were. They were also to tell about the animals. + +There were two captains of this company. Their names were Lewis and +Clark. There were forty-five men in the party. + +They were gone two years and four months. For most of that time they +did not see any white men but their own party. They did not hear a +word from home for more than two years. + +They got their food mostly by hunting. They killed a great many +buf-fa-loes and elks and deer. They also shot wild geese and other +large birds. Sometimes they had nothing but fish to eat. Sometimes +they had to eat wolves. When they had no other meat, they were glad to +buy dogs from the Indians and eat them. Sometimes they ate horses. +They became fond of the meat of dogs and horses. + +When they were very hungry, they had to live on roots if they could +get them. Some of the Indians made a kind of bread out of roots. The +white men bought this when they could not get meat. But there were +days when they did not have anything to eat. + +They were very friendly with the Indians. One day some of the men went +to make a visit to an Indian village. The Indians gave them +something to eat. + +In the Indian wig-wam where they were, there was a head of a dead +buffalo. When dinner was over, the Indians filled a bowl full of meat. +They set this down in front of the head. Then they said to the head, +"Eat that." + +[Illustration: Feeding the Spirit of the Buffalo.] + +The Indians believed, that, if they treated this buffalo head +politely, the live buffaloes would come to their hunting ground. Then +they would have plenty of meat. They think the spirit of the buffalo +is a kind of a god. They are very careful to please this god. + + + + + +CAPTAIN CLARK'S BURNING GLASS. + + +The Indians among whom Captain Clark and Captain Lewis traveled had +many strange ways of doing things. They had nothing like our matches +for making fire. One tribe of Indians had this way of lighting a fire. +An Indian would lay down a dry stick. He would rub this stick with the +end of another stick. After a while this rubbing would make something +like saw-dust on the stick that was lying down. The Indian would keep +on rubbing till the wood grew hot. Then the fine wood dust would +smoke. Then it would burn. The Indian would put a little kin-dling +wood on it. Soon he would have a large fire. + +In that time the white people had not yet found out how to make +matches. They lighted a fire by striking a piece of flint against a +piece of steel. This would make a spark of fire. By letting this spark +fall on something that would burn easily, they started a fire. + +White men had another way of lighting a fire when the sun was shining. +They used what was called a burning glass. This was a round piece of +glass. It was thick in the middle, and thin at the edge. When you held +up a burning glass in the sun, it drew the sun's heat so as to make a +little hot spot. If you put paper under this spot of hot sunshine, it +would burn. Men could light the to-bac-co in their pipes with one of +these glasses. + +Captain Clark had something funny happen to him on account of his +burning glass. He had walked ahead of the rest of his men. He sat down +on a rock. There were some Indians on the other side of the river. +They did not see the captain. Captain Clark saw a large bird called a +crane flying over his head. He raised his gun and shot it. + +[Illustration: Cranes] + +The Indians on the other side of the river had never seen a white man +in their lives. They had never heard a gun. They used bows and arrows. + +They heard the sound of Clark's gun. They looked up and saw the large +bird falling from the sky. It fell close to where Captain Clark sat. +Just as it fell they caught sight of Captain Clark sitting on the +rocks. They thought they had seen him fall out of the sky. They +thought that the sound of his gun was a sound like thunder that was +made when he came down. + +The Indians all ran away as fast as they could. They went into their +wig-warns and closed them. + +Captain Clark wished to be friendly with them. So he got a canoe and +paddled to the other side of the river. He came to the Indian houses. +He found the flaps which they use for doors shut. He opened one of +them and went in. The Indians were sitting down, and they were all +crying and trembling. + +Among the Indians the sign of peace is to smoke to-geth-er. Captain +Clark held out his pipe to them. That was to say, "I am your friend." +He shook hands with them and gave some of them presents. Then they +were not so much afraid. + +[Illustration: Lighting a Pipe with a Burning Glass.] + +He wished to light his pipe for them to smoke. So he took out his +burning glass. He held it in the sun. He held his pipe under it. The +sunshine was drawn together into a bright little spot on the tobacco. +Soon the pipe began to smoke. + +Then he held out his pipe for the Indians to smoke with him. That is +their way of making friends. But none of the Indians would touch the +pipe. They thought that he had brought fire down from heaven to light +his pipe. They were now sure that he fell down from the sky. They were +more afraid of him than ever. + +At last Captain Clark's Indian man came. He told the other Indians +that the white man did not come out of the sky. Then they smoked the +pipe, and were not afraid. + + + + + +QUICKSILVER BOB. + + +Robert Fulton was the man who set steam-boats to running on the +rivers. Other men had made such boats before. But Fulton made the +first good one. + +When he was a boy, he lived in the town of Lan-cas-ter in +Penn-syl-van-ia. Many guns were made in Lancaster. The men who made +these guns put little pictures on them. That was to make them sell to +the hunters who liked a gun with pictures. Little Robert Fulton could +draw very well for a boy. He made some pretty little drawings. These +the gun makers put on their guns. + +Fulton went to the gun shops a great deal. He liked to see how things +were made. He tried to make a small air gun for himself. + +He was always trying to make things. He got some quick-sil-ver. He was +trying to do something with it. But he would not tell what he wanted +to do. So the gun-smiths called him Quick-sil-ver Bob. + +He was so much in-ter-est-ed in such things, that he sometimes +neg-lect-ed his lessons. He said that his head was so full of new +notions, that he had not much room left for school learning. + +One morning he came to school late. + +"What makes you so late?" asked the teacher. + +"I went to one of the shops to make myself a lead pencil," said little +Bob. "Here it is. It is the best one I ever had." + +The teacher tried it, and found it very good. Lead pencils in that day +were made of a long piece of lead sharpened at the end. + +Quick-sil-ver Bob was a very odd little boy. He said many cu-ri-ous +things. Once the teacher punished him for not getting his lessons. He +rapped Robert on the knuckles with a fer-ule. Robert did not like this +any more than any other boy would. + +"Sir," said the boy, "I came here to have something beaten into my +head, not into my knuckles." + +In that day people used to light candles and stand them in the window +on the Fourth of July. These candles in every window lighted up the +whole town. But one year candles were scarce and high. The city asked +the people not to light up their windows on the Fourth. + +Bob did not like to miss the fun of his Fourth of July. He went to +work to make something like rockets or Roman candles. It was a very +dan-ger-ous business for a boy. + +"What are you doing, Bob?" some one asked him. + +"The city does not want us to burn our candles on the Fourth," he +said. "I am going to shoot mine into the air." + +[Illustration] + +He used to go fishing with a boy named Chris Gumpf. The father of +Chris went with them. They fished from a flat boat. The two boys had +to push the boat to the fishing place with poles. + +"I am tired of poling that boat," said Robert to Chris one day when +they came home. + +So he set to work to think out a plan to move the boat in an easier +way than by poles. He whittled out the model of a tiny paddle wheel. +Then he went to work with Chris Gumpf, and they made a larger paddle +wheel. This they set up in the fishing boat. The wheel was turned by +the boys with a crank. They did not use the poles any more. + + + + + +THE FIRST STEAMBOAT. + + +The first good steam-boat was built in New York. She was built by +Robert Fulton. Her name was "Clermont." When the people saw her, they +laughed. They said that such a boat would never go. For thousands of +years boat-men had made their boats go by using sails and oars. People +had never seen any such boat as this. It seemed foolish to believe +that a boat could be pushed along by steam. + +The time came for Fulton to start his boat. A crowd of people were +standing on the shore. The black smoke was coming out of the +smoke-stack. The people were laughing at the boat. They were sure that +it would not go. At last the boat's wheels began to turn round. Then +the boat began to move. There were no oars. There were no sails. But +still the boat kept moving. Faster and faster she went. All the people +now saw that she could go by steam. They did not laugh any more. They +began to cheer. + +[Illustration: Seeing the First Steam boat] + +The little steam-boat ran up to Al-ba-ny. The people who lived on the +river did not know what to make of it. They had never heard of a +steam-boat. They could not see what made the boat go. + +There were many sailing vessels on the river. Fulton's boat passed +some of these in the night. The sailors were afraid when they saw +the fire and smoke. The sound of the steam seemed dreadful to them. +Some of them went down-stairs in their ships for fear. Some of them +went ashore. Perhaps they thought it was a living animal that would +eat them up. + +But soon there were steam-boats on all the large rivers. + + + +WASHINGTON IRVING AS A BOY. + +The Revolution was about over. Americans were very happy. Their +country was to be free. + +At this time a little boy was born in New York. His family was named +Ir-ving. What should this little boy be named? + +His mother said, "Washington's work is done. Let us name the baby +Washington." So he was called Washington Ir-ving. + +When this baby grew to be a little boy, he was one day walking with +his nurse. The nurse was a Scotch girl. She saw General Washington go +into a shop. She led the little boy into the shop also. + +The nurse said to General Washington, "Please, your Honor, here is a +bairn that is named for you." + +"Bairn" is a Scotch word for child. Washington put his hand on the +little boy's head and gave him his blessing. When Irving became an +author, he wrote a life of Washington. + +Little Irving was a merry, playful boy. He was full of mischief. + +Sometimes he would climb out of a window to the roof of his father's +house. From this he would go to roofs of other houses. Then the little +rascal would drop a pebble down a neighbor's chimney. Then he would +hurry back and get into the window again. He would wonder what the +people thought when the pebble came rattling down their chimney. Of +course he was punished when his tricks were found out. But he was a +favorite with his teacher. With all his faults, he would not tell a +lie. The teacher called the little fellow "General." + +[Illustration: Irving in Mischief.] + +In those days naughty school-boys were whipped. Irving could not +bear to see another boy suffer. When a boy was to be whipped, the +girls were sent out. Irving always asked the schoolmaster to let him +go out with the girls. + +Like other boys, Irving was fond of stories. He liked to read about +Sind-bad the Sailor, and Rob-in-son Cru-soe. But most of all he liked +to read about other countries. He had twenty small volumes called "The +World Dis-played." They told about the people and countries of the +world. Irving read these little books a great deal. + +One day the schoolmaster caught him reading in school. The master +slipped behind him and grabbed the book. Then he told Irving to stay +after school. + +Irving expected a pun-ish-ment. But the master told him he was pleased +to find that he liked to read such good books. He told him not to read +them in school. + +Reading about other countries made Irving wish to see them. He thought +he would like to travel. Like other wild boys, he thought of running +away. He wanted to go to sea. + +But he knew that sailors had to eat salt pork. He did not like salt +pork. He thought he would learn to like it. When he got a chance, he +ate pork. And sometimes he would sleep all night on the floor. He +wanted to get used to a hard bed. + +But the more he ate pork, the more he disliked it. And the more he +slept on the floor, the more he liked a good bed. So he gave up his +foolish notion of being a sailor boy. + +Some day you will read Irving's "Sketch Book." You will find some +famous stories in it. There is the story of Rip Van Win-kle, who slept +twenty years. And there is the funny story of the Head-less Horse-man. +When you read these a-mus-ing stories, you will remember the playful +boy who became a great author. + +[Illustration: Rip Van Winkle wakes up] + + + +DON'T GIVE UP THE SHIP. + +Fred was talking to his sister one day. He said,-- + +"Alice, what makes people say, 'Don't give up the ship'?" + +Alice said, "I don't know. That's what the teacher said to me +yes-ter-day when I thought that I could not get my lesson." + +"Yes," said Fred, "and that's what father said to me. I told him I +never could learn to write well." He only said, "You must not give up +the ship, my boy." + +"I haven't any ship to give up," said Alice. + +"And what has a ship to do with my writing?" said Fred. + +"There must be some story about a ship," Alice said. + +"Maybe grand-father would know," said Fred. "Let's ask him." + +They found their grand-father writing in the next room. They did not +wish to disturb him. They turned to leave the room. + +But grand-father looked up just then. He smiled, and laid down his +pen. + +"Did you want something?" he asked. "We wanted to ask you a +question," said Alice. "We want to know why people say, 'Don't give up +the ship.'" + +"We thought maybe there is a story to it," said Fred. + +"Yes, there is," said their grandfather. "And I know a little rhyme +that tells the story." + +"Could you say it to us?" asked Alice. + +"Yes, if I can think of it. Let me see. How does it begin?" + +Grandfather leaned his head back in the chair. He shut his eyes for a +moment. He was trying to remember. + +"Oh, now I remember it!" he said. + +Then he said to them these little verses:-- + + + GRANDFATHER'S RHYME. + + When I was but a boy, + I heard the people tell + How gallant Captain Law-rence + So bravely fought and fell. + + The ships lay close together, + I heard the people say, + And many guns were roaring + Upon that battle day. + + A grape-shot struck the captain, + He laid him down to die: + They say the smoke of powder + Made dark the sea and sky. + + The sailors heard a whisper + Upon the captain's lip: + The last command of Law-rence + Was, "Don't give up the ship." + + And ever since that battle + The people like to tell + How gallant Captain Lawrence + So bravely fought and fell. + + When disappointment happens, + And fear your heart annoys, + Be brave, like Captain Lawrence-- + And don't give up, my boys! + + + + + +THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER. + + +Everybody in the United States has heard the song about the +star-span-gled banner. Nearly everybody has sung it. It was written by +Francis Scott Key. + +Key was a young lawyer. In the War of 1812 he fought with the +American army. The British landed soldiers in Mary-land. At +Bla-dens-burg they fought and beat the Americans. Key was in this +battle on the American side. + +After the battle the British army took Washington, and burned the +public buildings. Key had a friend who was taken prisoner by the +British. He was on one of the British ships. Key went to the ships +with a flag of truce. A flag of truce is a white flag. It is carried +in war when one side sends a message to the other. + +When Key got to the British ships, they were sailing to Bal-ti-more. +They were going to try to take Bal-ti-more. The British com-mand-er +would not let Key go back. He was afraid that he would let the +Americans know where the ships were going. + +Key was kept a kind of prisoner while the ships attacked Bal-ti-more. +The ships tried to take the city by firing at it from the water. The +British army tried to take the city on the land side. + +The ships did their worst firing at night. They tried to take the +little fort near the city. + +Key could see the battle. He watched the little fort. He was afraid +that the men in it would give up. He was afraid that the fort would be +broken down by the cannon balls. + +The British fired bomb-shells and rockets at the fort. When these +burst, they made a light. By this light Key could see that the little +fort was still standing. He could see the flag still waving over it. +He tells this in his song in these words:-- + + + "And the rocket's red glare, the bombs bursting in air + Gave proof through the night that our flag was still there." + + +[Illustration] + +But after many hours of fighting the British became dis-cour-aged. +They found that they could not take the city. The ships almost +ceased to fire. + +Key did not know whether the fort had been knocked down or not. He +could not see whether the flag was still flying or not. He thought +that the Americans might have given up. He felt what he wrote in +the song:-- + + + "Oh! say, does that star-span-gled banner yet wave + O'er the land of the free, and the home of the brave?" + + +When the break of day came, Key looked toward the fort. It was still +standing. There was a flag flying over it. It grew lighter. He could +see that it was the American flag. His feelings are told in two lines +of the song:-- + + + "Tis the star spangled banner, oh, long may it wave + O'er the land of the free, and the home of the brave!" + + +Key was full of joy. He took an old letter from his pocket. The back +of this letter had no writing on it. Here he wrote the song about the +star-spangled banner. + +The British com-mand-er now let Key go ashore. When he got to +Baltimore, he wrote out his song. He gave it to a friend. This friend +took it to a printing office. But the printers had all turned +soldiers. They had all gone to defend the city. + +[Illustration] + +There was one boy left in the office. He knew how to print. He took +the verses and printed them on a broad sheet of paper. + +The printed song was soon in the hands of the soldiers around +Baltimore. It was sung in the streets. It was sung in the +the-a-ters. It traveled all over the country. Everybody learned to +sing:-- + + + "Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just; + And this be our motto--'In God is our trust'-- + And the star-span-gled banner in triumph shall wave + O'er the land of the free, and the home of the brave." + + + + + +HOW AUDUBON CAME TO KNOW ABOUT BIRDS. + + +John James Au-du-bon knew more about the birds of this country than +any man had ever known before. He was born in the State of +Lou-is-i-a-na. His father took him to France when he was a boy. He +went to school in France. + +The little John James was fond of stud-y-ing about wild animals. But +most of all he wished to know about birds. Seeing that the boy liked +such things, his father took pains to get birds and flowers for him. + +While he was yet a boy at school, he began to gather birds and other +animals for himself. He learned to skin and stuff them. But his +stuffed birds did not please him. Their feathers did not look bright, +like those of live birds. He wanted living birds to study. + +His father told him that he could not keep so many birds alive. To +please the boy he got him a book with pictures in it. Looking at these +pictures made John James wish to draw. He thought that he could make +pictures that would look like the live birds. + +But when he tried to paint a picture of a bird, it looked worse than +his stuffed birds. The birds he drew were not much like real birds. He +called them a "family of cripples." As often as his birthday came +round, he made a bon-fire of his bad pictures. Then he would begin +over again. + +All this time he was learning to draw birds. But he was not willing to +make pictures that were not just like the real birds. So when he grew +to be a man he went to a great French painter whose name was David. +David taught him to draw and paint things as they are. + +Then he came back to this country, and lived awhile in Pennsylvania. +Here his chief study was the wild creatures of the woods. + +He gathered many eggs of birds. He made pictures of these eggs. He did +not take birds' eggs to break up the nests. He was not cruel. He took +only what he needed to study. + +He would make two little holes in each egg. Then he would shake the +egg, or stir it up with a little stick or straw, or a long pin. This +would break up the inside of the egg. Then he would blow into one of +the holes. That would blow the inside of the egg out through the +other hole. + +These egg shells he strung together by running strings through the +holes. He hung these strings of egg shells all over the walls of his +room. On the man-tel-piece he put the stuffed skins of squirrels, +raccoons, o-pos-sums, and other small animals. On the shelves his +friends could see frogs, snakes, and other animals. + +He married a young lady, and brought her to live in this mu-se-um with +his dead snakes, frogs, and strings of birds' eggs. She liked what he +did, and was sure that he would come to be a great man. + +He made up his mind to write a great book about American birds. He +meant to tell all about the birds in one book. Then in another book he +would print pictures of the birds, just as large as the birds +them-selves. He meant to have them look just like the birds. + +To do this he must travel many thousands of miles. He must live for +years almost all of the time in the woods. He would have to find and +shoot the birds, in order to make pictures of them. And he must see +how the birds lived, and how they built their nests, so that he could +tell all about them. It would take a great deal of work and trouble. +But he was not afraid of trouble. + +That was many years ago. Much of our country was then covered with +great trees. Au-du-bon sometimes went in a boat down a lone-some +river. Sometimes he rode on horse-back. Often he had to travel on foot +through woods where there were no roads. Many a time he had to sleep +out of doors. + +He lost his money and became poor. Sometimes he had to paint portraits +to get money to live on. Once he turned dancing master for a while. +But he did not give up his great idea. He still studied birds, and +worked to make his books about American birds. His wife went to +teaching to help make a living. + +After years of hard work, he made paintings of nearly a thousand +birds. That was almost enough for his books. But, while he was +traveling, two large rats got into the box in which he kept his +pictures. They cut up all his paintings with their teeth, and made a +nest of the pieces. This almost broke his heart for a while. For many +nights he could not sleep, because he had lost all his work. + +But he did not give up. After some days he took his gun, and went into +the woods. He said to himself, "I will begin over again. I can make +better paintings than those that the rats spoiled." But it took him +four long years and a half to find the birds, and make the +pictures again. + +He was so careful to have his drawings just like the birds, that he +would measure them in every way. Thus he made his pictures just the +size of the birds themselves. + +At last the great books were printed. In this country, in France, and +in England, people praised the won-der-ful books. They knew that +Au-du-bon was indeed a great man. + + + + + +AUDUBON IN THE WILD WOODS. + + +When Au-du-bon was making his great book about birds, he had to live +much in the woods. Sometimes he lived among the Indians. He once saw +an Indian go into a hollow tree. There was a bear in the tree. The +Indian had a knife in his hand. He fought with the bear in the tree, +and killed it. + +Au-du-bon could shoot very well. A friend of his one day threw up his +cap in the air. He told Au-du-bon to shoot at it. When the cap came +down, it had a hole in it. + +But the hunters who lived in the woods could shoot better. They would +light a candle. Then one of the hunters would take his gun, and go a +hundred steps away from the candle. He would then shoot at the candle. +He would shoot so as to snuff it. He would not put out the candle. He +would only cut off a bit of the wick with the bullet. But he would +leave the candle burning. + +[Illustration: Snuffing the Candle.] + +Once Audubon came near being killed by some robbers. He stopped at a +cabin where lived an old white woman. He found a young Indian in the +house. The Indian had hurt himself with an arrow. He had come to the +house to spend the night. + +The old woman saw Audubon's fine gold watch. She asked him to let her +look at it. He put it into her hands for a minute. Then the Indian +passed by Audubon, and pinched him two or three times. That was to let +him know that the woman was bad, and that she might rob him. + +Audubon went and lay down with his hand on his gun. After a while two +men came in. They were the sons of the old woman. Then the old woman +sharpened a large knife. She told the young men to kill the Indian +first, and then to kill Audubon and take his watch. She thought that +Audubon was asleep. But he drew up his gun ready to fire. + +Just then two hunters came to the cabin. Audubon told them what the +robbers were going to do. They took the old woman and her sons, and +tied their hands and feet. The Indian, though he was in pain from his +hurt, danced for joy when he saw that the robbers were caught. The +woman and her sons were afterward punished. + + + + + +HUNTING A PANTHER. + + +Audubon was traveling in the woods in Mis-sis-sip-pi. He found the +little cabin of a settler. He staid there for the night. The settler +told him that there was a panther in the swamp near his house. A +panther is a very large and fierce animal. It is large enough to kill +a man. This was a very bad panther. It had killed some of the +settler's dogs. + +Audubon said, "Let us hunt this panther, and kill it." + +So the settler sent out for his neigh-bors to come and help kill the +panther. Five men came. Audubon and the settler made seven. They were +all on horse-back. + +When they came to the edge of the swamp, each man went a dif-fer-ent +way. They each took their dogs with them to find the track of the wild +beast. All of the hunters carried horns. Who-ever should find the +track first was to blow his horn to let the others know. + +In about two hours after they had started, they heard the sound of a +horn. It told them that the track had been found. Every man now went +toward the sound of the horn. Soon all the yelping dogs were +fol-low-ing the track of the fierce panther. The panther was running +into the swamp farther and farther. + +I suppose that the panther thought that there were too many dogs and +men for him to fight. All the hunters came after the dogs. They held +their guns ready to shoot if the panther should make up his mind to +fight them. + +After a while the sound of the dogs' voices changed. The hunters knew +from this that the panther had stopped running, and gone up into +a tree. + +At last the men came to the place where the dogs were. They were all +barking round a tree. Far up in the tree was the dan-ger-ous beast. +The hunters came up care-ful-ly. One of them fired. The bullet hit the +panther, but did not kill him. + +[Illustration] + +The panther sprang to the ground, and ran off again. The dogs ran +after. The men got on their horses, and rode after. + +But the horses were tired, and the men had to get down, and follow the +dogs on foot. + +The hunters now had to wade through little ponds of water. Sometimes +they had to climb over fallen trees. Their clothes were badly torn by +the bushes. After two hours more, they came to a place where the +panther had again gone up into a tree. + +This time three of the hunters shot at him. The fierce panther came +tumbling to the ground. But he was still able to fight. The men fought +the savage beast on all sides. At last they killed him. Then they gave +his skin to the settler. They wanted him to know that his en-e-my +was dead. + + + + + +SOME BOYS WHO BECAME AUTHORS. + + +Wil-liam Cul-len Bry-ant was the first great poet in this country. He +was a small man. When he was a baby, his head was too big for his +body. His father used to send the baby to be dipped in a cold spring +every day. The father thought that putting his head into cold water +would keep it from growing. + +Bry-ant knew his letters before he was a year and a half old. He began +to write rhymes when he was a very little fellow. He wanted to be a +poet. He used to pray that he might be a poet. His father printed some +verses of his when he was only ten years old. + +Bry-ant wrote many fine poems. Here are some lines of his about the +bird we call a bob-o-link:-- + + + Rob-ert of Lin-coln is gayly dressed, + Wearing a bright black wedding coat, + White are his shoulders and white his crest. + Hear him call in his merry note: + Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, + Spink, spank, spink; + Look, what a nice new coat is mine, + Sure there was never a bird so fine. + Chee, chee, chee. + + +[Illustration] + +Haw-thorne was one of our greatest writers of stories. He was a pretty +boy with golden curls. He was fond of all the great poets, and he read +Shake-speare and Mil-ton and many other poets as soon as he was old +enough to un-der-stand them. + +Haw-thorne grew up a very hand-some young fellow. One day he was +walking in the woods. He met an old gypsy woman. She had never seen +anybody so fine-looking. + +"Are you a man, or an angel?" she asked him. + +Some of Haw-thorne's best books are written for girls and boys. One of +these is called "The Won-der Book." Another of his books for young +people is "Tan-gle-wood Tales." + + * * * * * + +Pres-cott wrote beautiful his-to-ries. When Pres-cott was a boy, a +school-mate threw a crust of bread at him. It hit him in the eye. He +became almost blind. + +He had to do his writing with a machine. This machine was made for the +use of the blind. There were no type-writ-ers in those days. + +It was hard work to write his-to-ry without good eyes. But Pres-cott +did not give up. He had a man to read to him. It took him ten years to +write his first book. + +When Prescott had finished his book, he was afraid to print it. But +his father said, "The man who writes a book, and is afraid to print +it, is a cow-ard." + +Then Prescott printed his book. Everybody praised it. When you are +older, you will like to read his his-to-ries. + +Doctor Holmes, the poet, was a boy full of fancies. He lived in an old +house. Soldiers had staid in the house at the time of the Revolution. +The floor of one room was all battered by the butts of the +soldiers' muskets. + +[Illustration] + +Little Ol-i-ver Holmes used to think he could hear soldiers in the +house. He thought he could hear their spurs rattling in the dark +passages. Sometimes he thought he could hear their swords clanking. + +The little boy was afraid of a sign that hung over the sidewalk. It +was a great, big, wooden hand. It was the sign of a place where gloves +were made. This big hand swung in the air. Little Ol-i-ver Holmes had +to walk under it on his way to school. He thought the great fingers +would grab him some day. Then he thought he would never get home +again. He even thought that his other pair of shoes would be put away +till his little brother grew big enough to wear them. + +But the big wooden hand never caught him. + +Here are some verses that Doctor Holmes wrote about a very old man:-- + + + "My grand-mam-ma has said-- + Poor old lady, she is dead + Long ago-- + That he had a Roman nose, + And his cheek was like a rose + In the snow. + + "But now his nose is thin, + And it rests upon his chin + Like a staff; + And a crook is in his back, + And a mel-an-chol-y crack + In his laugh. + + "I know it is a sin + For me to sit and grin + At him here; + But the old three-cor-nered hat, + And the breeches, and all that, + Are so queer! + + "And if I should live to be + The last leaf upon the tree + In the spring, + Let them smile, as I do now, + At the old for-sak-en bough + Where I cling." + + +[Illustration] + + + + + +DANIEL WEBSTER AND HIS BROTHER. + + +Dan-iel Web-ster was a great states-man. As a little boy he was called +"Little Black Dan." When he grew larger, he was thin and +sickly-looking. But he had large, dark eyes. People called him +"All Eyes." + +He was very fond of his brother E-ze-ki-el. E-ze-ki-el was a little +older than Dan-iel. Both the boys had fine minds. They wanted to go to +college. But their father was poor. + +Dan-iel had not much strength for work on the farm. So little "All +Eyes" was sent to school, and then to college. E-ze-ki-el staid at +home, and worked on the farm. + +While Daniel was at school, he was unhappy to think that Ezekiel could +not go to college also. He went home on a visit. He talked to Ezekiel +about going to college. The brothers talked about it all night. The +next day Daniel talked to his father about it. The father said he was +too poor to send both of his sons to college. He said he would lose +all his little property if he tried to send Ezekiel to college. But he +said, that, if their mother and sisters were willing to be poor, he +would send the other son to college. + +So the mother and sisters were asked. It seemed hard to risk the loss +of all they had. It seemed hard not to give Ezekiel a chance. They all +shed tears over it. + +The boys promised to take care of their mother and sisters if the +property should be lost. Then they all agreed that Ezekiel should go +to college too. + +Daniel taught school while he was studying. That helped to pay the +expenses. After Daniel was through his studies in college, he taught a +school in order to help his brother. When his school closed, he went +home. On his way he went round to the college to see his brother. +Finding that Ezekiel needed money, he gave him a hundred dollars. He +kept but three dollars to get home with. + +The father's property was not sold. The two boys helped the family. +Daniel soon began to make money as a lawyer. He knew that his father +was in debt. He went home to see him. He said, "Father, I am going +to pay your debts." + +The father said, "You cannot do it, Daniel. You have not money +enough." + +"I can do it," said Daniel; "and I will do it before Monday evening." + +When Monday evening came round, the father's debts were all paid. + +When Daniel became a famous man, it made Ezekiel very happy. But +Ezekiel died first. When Daniel Web-ster made his greatest speech, all +the people praised him. + +But Web-ster said, "I wish that my poor brother had lived to this +time. It would have made him very happy." + + + + + +WEBSTER AND THE POOR WOMAN. + + +When Daniel Webster was a young lawyer, he was going home one night. +There was snow on the ground. It was very cold. It was late, and there +was nobody to be seen. + +But after a while he saw a poor woman. She was ahead of him. He +wondered what had brought her out on so cold a night. + +Sometimes she stopped and looked around. Then she would stand and +listen. Then she would go on again. [Illustration: Webster and the +Poor Woman] + +Webster kept out of her sight. But he watched her. After looking +around, she turned down the street in which Webster lived. She stopped +in front of Webster's house. She looked around and listened. + +Webster had put down some loose boards to walk on. They reached from +the gate to the door of his house. After standing still a minute, the +woman took one of the boards, and went off quickly. + +Webster followed her. But he kept out of her sight. She went to a +distant part of the town. She went into a poor little house. + +Webster went home without saying anything to the woman. He knew that +she had stolen the board for fire-wood. + +The next day the poor woman got a present It was a nice load of wood. + +Can you guess who sent it to her? + + + + + +THE INDIA-RUBBER MAN. + + +Many years ago a strange-looking man was sometimes seen in the streets +of New York. His cap was made of In-di-a rubber. So was his coat. He +wore a rubber waist-coat. Even his cravat was of In-di-a rubber. He +wore rubber shoes in dry weather. People called this man "The +In-di-a-rubber man." + +His name was Charles Good-year. He was very poor. He was trying to +find out how to make India rubber useful. + +India-rubber trees grow in South America. The juice of these trees is +something like milk or cream. By drying this juice, India rubber +is made. + +The Indians in Bra-zil have no glass to make bottles with. A long time +ago they learned to make bottles out of rubber. More than a hundred +years ago some of these rubber bottles were brought to this country. +The people in this country had never seen India rubber before. They +thought the bottles made out of it by the Indians very cu-ri-ous. + +In this country, rubber was used only to rub out pencil marks. That is +why we call it rubber. People in South America learned to make a kind +of heavy shoe out of it. But these shoes were hard to make. They cost +a great deal when they were sold in this country. + +Men tried to make rubber shoes in this country. They got the rubber +from Bra-zil. Rubber shoes made in this country were cheaper than +those brought from South America. But they were not good. They would +freeze till they were as hard as stones in winter. That was not the +worst of it. In summer they would melt. Goodyear was trying to find +out a way to make rubber better. He wanted to get it so that it would +not melt in summer. He wanted to get a rubber that would not get hard +in cold weather. The first rubber coats that were made were so hard in +cold weather, that they would stand alone, and look like a man. + +Goodyear wanted to try his rubber. That is why he wore a rubber coat +and a rubber waist-coat and a rubber cravat. That is why he wore a +rubber cap and rubber shoes when it was not raining. He made paper out +of rubber, and wrote a book on it. He had a door-plate made of it. He +even carried a cane made of India rubber. It is no wonder people +called him the India-rubber man. + +He was very poor. Sometimes he had to borrow money to buy rubber with. +Sometimes his friends gave him money to keep his family from starving. +Sometimes there was no wood and no coal in the house in cold weather. + +But Goodyear kept on trying. He thought that he was just going to find +out. Years went by, and still he kept on trying. + +One day he was mixing some rubber with sulphur. It slipped out of his +hand. It fell on the hot stove. But it did not melt. Goodyear was +happy at last. That night it was cold. Goodyear took the burned +piece of rubber out of doors, and nailed it to the kitchen door. When +morning came, he went and got it. It had not frozen. + +He was now sure that he was on the right track. But he had to find out +how to mix and heat his rubber and sulphur. He was too poor to buy +rubber to try with. Nobody would lend him any more money. His family +had to live by the help of his friends. He had already sold almost +everything that he had. Now he had to sell his children's school-books +to get money to buy rubber with. + +At last his rubber goods were made and sold. Poor men who had to stand +in the rain could now keep themselves dry. People could walk in the +wet with dry feet. A great many people are alive who would have died +if they had not been kept dry by India rubber. + +You may count up, if you can, how many useful things are made of +rubber. We owe them all to one man. People laughed at Goodyear once. +But at last they praised him. To be "The India-rubber man" was +something to be proud of. + + + + + +DOCTOR KANE IN THE FROZEN SEA. + + +[Illustration] + +Kane was a doctor in one of the war ships of the United States. He had +sailed about the world a great deal. + +When he heard that ships were to be sent into the icy seas of the +north, he asked to be sent along. He went the first time as a doctor. +Then he wanted to find out more about the frozen ocean. So he went +again as captain of a ship. His ship was called the "Advance." + +Kane sailed into the icy seas. His ship was driven far into the ice by +a fu-ri-ous storm. She was crowded by ice-bergs. At one time she was +lifted clear out of the water. The ship seemed ready to fall over on +her side. But the ice let her down again. Then she was squeezed till +the men thought that she would be crushed like an egg shell At last +the storm stopped. Then came the awful cold. The ship was frozen into +the ice. The ice never let go of her. She was farther north than any +ship had ever been before. But she was so fast in the ice that she +never could get away. + +In that part of the world it is night nearly all winter. For months +there was no sun at all. Daylight came again. It was now summer, but +it did not get warm. Doctor Kane took sleds, and went about on the ice +to see what he could see. The sleds were drawn by large dogs. But +nearly all of the dogs died in the long winter night. + +[Illustration: A Dog Sled] + +Doctor Kane thought that the ice would melt. He wanted to get the ship +out. But the ice did not melt at all. + +At last the summer passed away. Another awful winter came. The sun did +not rise any more. It was dark for months and months. The men were +ill. Some of them died. They were much dis-cour-aged. But Kane kept +up his heart, and did the best he could. + +At last the least little streak of light could be seen. It got a +little lighter each day. But the sick men down in the cabin of the +ship could not see the light. + +Doctor Kane said to himself, "If my poor men could see this sunlight, +it would cheer them up. It might save their lives." But they were too +ill to get out where they could see the sun. It would be many days +before the sun would shine into the cabin of the ship. The men might +die before that time. + +So Doctor Kane took some looking glasses up to the deck or top of the +ship. He fixed one of these so it would catch the light of the sun. +Then he fixed another so that the first one would throw the light on +this one. The last one would throw the sunlight down into the cabin +where the sick men were. + +One day the poor fellows were ready to give up. Then the sun fell on +the looking glasses, and flashed down into the cabin. It was the first +daylight the sick men had seen for months. The long winter night was +over. Think how happy they were! + + + + +A DINNER ON THE ICE. + + +After two winters of cold and darkness, Doctor Kane made up his mind +to leave the ship fast in the ice. He wanted to get to a place in +Green-land where there were people living. Then he might find some way +of getting home again. + +The men started out, drawing the boats on sleds. Whenever they came to +open water, they put the boats into the water, and took the sleds in +the boats. When they came to the ice again, they had to draw out their +boats, and carry them on the sleds. At first they could travel only +about a mile a day. + +It was a hard journey. Some of the men were ill. These had to be drawn +on the sleds by the rest. They had not enough food. At one time they +rested three days in a kind of cave. Here they found many birds' eggs. +These made very good food for them. At another place they staid a +week. They staid just to eat the eggs of the wild birds. + +After they left this place, they were hungry. The men grew thinner and +thinner. It seemed that they must die for want of food. But one day +they saw a large seal. He was floating on a piece of ice. The hungry +men thought, "What a fine din-ner he would make for us!" If they +could get the seal, they would not die of hunger. + +Every one of the poor fellows trembled for fear the seal would wake +up. A man named Pe-ter-sen took a gun, and got ready to shoot. The men +rowed the boat toward the seal. They rowed slowly and quietly. But the +seal waked up. He raised his head. The men thought that he would jump +off into the water. Then they might all die for want of food. + +Doctor Kane made a motion to Pe-ter-sen. That was to tell him to shoot +quickly. But Peter-sen did not shoot. He was so much afraid that the +seal would get away, that he could not shoot. The seal now raised +himself a little more. He was getting ready to jump into the water. +Just then Petersen fired. The seal fell dead on the ice. + +[Illustration: A Seal] + +The men were wild with joy. They rowed the boats with all their might. +When they got to the seal, they dragged it farther away from the +water. They were so happy, that they danced on the ice. Some of them +laughed. Some were so glad, that they cried. [Illustration: Shooting +the Seal.] + +Then they took their knives and began to cut up the seal. They had no +fire on the ice, and they were too hungry to think of lighting one. So +they ate the meat of the seal without waiting to cook it. + + + + + +DOCTOR KANE GETS OUT OF THE FROZEN SEA. + + +After they got the seal, Doctor Kane and his men traveled on. +Sometimes they were on the ice. Sometimes they were in the boats. The +men were so weak, that they could hardly row the boats. They were so +hungry, that they could not sleep well at night. + +One day they were rowing, when they heard a sound. It came to them +across the water. It did not sound like the cry of sea birds. It +sounded like people's voices. + +"Listen!" Doctor Kane said to Pe-ter-sen. + +Petersen spoke the same language as the people of Greenland. He +listened. The sound came again. Pe-ter-sen was so glad, that he could +hardly speak. He told Kane in a half whisper, that it was the voice of +some one speaking his own language. It was some Greenland men in +a boat. + +The next day they got to a Greenland town. Then they got into a little +ship going to England. They knew that they could get home from +England. But the ship stopped at another Green-land town. While they +were there, a steamer was seen. It came nearer. They could see the +stars and stripes flying from her mast. It was an American steamer +sent to find Doctor Kane. + +Doctor Kane and his men were full of joy. They pushed their little +boat into the water once more. This little boat was called the +"Faith." It had carried Kane and his men hundreds of miles in +icy seas. + +Once more the men took their oars, and rowed. This time they rowed +with all their might. They held up the little flag that they had +carried farther north than anybody had ever been before. They rowed +straight to the steamer. + +In the bow of the boat was a little man with a tattered red shirt. He +could see that the captain of the boat was looking at him through a +spy-glass. + +The captain shouted to the little man, "Is that Doctor Kane?" + +The little man in the red shirt shouted back, "Yes!" + +Doctor Kane and his men had been gone more than two years. People had +begun to think that they had all died. This steamer had been sent to +find out what had become of them. When the men on the steamer heard +that this little man in the red shirt was Doctor Kane himself, they +sent up cheer after cheer. In a few minutes more, Doctor Kane and +his men were on the steamer. They were now safe among friends. They +were sailing away toward their homes. + + + + + +LONGFELLOW AS A BOY. + + +[Illustration: Longfellow and the Bird] + +Long-fel-low was a noble boy. He always wanted to do right. He could +not bear to see one person do any wrong to another. + +He was very tender-hearted. One day he took a gun and went shooting. +He killed a robin. Then he felt sorry for the robin He came home with +tears in his eyes. He was so grieved, that he never went +shooting again. + +He liked to read Irving's "Sketch Book." Its strange stories about +Sleepy Hollow and Rip Van Win-kle pleased his fancy. + +When he was thirteen he wrote a poem. It was about Love-well's fight +with the Indians. He sent his verses to a news-paper. He wondered if +the ed-i-tor would print them. He could not think of anything else. He +walked up and down in front of the printing office. He thought that +his poem might be in the printer's hands. + +When the paper came out, there was his poem. It was signed "Henry." +Long-fel-low read it. He thought it a good poem. + +But a judge who did not know whose poem it was talked about it that +evening. He said to young Long-fel-low, "Did you see that poem in the +paper? It was stiff. And all taken from other poets, too." + +This made Henry Long-fel-low feel bad. But he kept on trying. After +many years, he became a famous poet. + +For more than fifty years, young people have liked to read his poem +called "A Psalm of Life." Here are three stanzas of it:-- + + + "Lives of great men all remind us + We can make our lives sub-lime, + And, de-part-ing, leave behind us + Foot-prints on the sands of time,-- + + "Foot-prints, that perhaps another, + Sailing o'er life's solemn main, + A forlorn and ship-wrecked brother, + Seeing, may take heart again. + + "Let us, then, be up and doing, + With a heart for any fate; + Still a-chiev-ing, still pur-su-ing, + Learn to labor and to wait." + + + + + +KIT CARSON AND THE BEARS. + + +Great men of one kind are known only in new countries like ours. These +men dis-cov-er new regions. They know how to manage the Indians. They +show other people how to live in a wild country. + +One of the most famous of such men was Kit Car-son. He knew all about +the wild animals. He was a great hunter. He learned the languages of +the Indians. The Indians liked him. He was a great guide. He showed +soldiers and settlers how to travel where they wished to go. + +Once he was marching through the wild country with other men. Evening +came. He left the others, and went to shoot something to eat. It was +the only way to get meat for supper. When he had gone about a mile, +he saw the tracks of some elks. He followed these tracks. He came in +sight of the elks. They were eating grass on a hill, as cows do. + +Kit Car-son crept up behind some bushes. But elks are very timid +animals. Before the hunter got very near, they began to run away. So +Carson fired at one of them as it was running. The elk fell dead. + +But just at that moment he heard a roar. He turned to see what made +this ugly noise. Two huge bears were running toward him. They wanted +some meat for supper, too. + +Kit Carson's gun was empty. He threw it down. Then he ran as fast as +he could. He wanted to find a tree. + +Just as the bears were about to seize him, he got to a tree. He caught +hold of a limb. He swung himself up into the tree. The bears just +missed getting him. + +But bears know how to climb trees. Carson knew that they would soon be +after him. He pulled out his knife, and began to cut off a limb. He +wanted to make a club. + +A bear is much larger and stronger than a man. He cannot be killed +with a club. But every bear has one tender spot. It is his nose. He +does not like to be hit on the nose. A sharp blow on the nose hurts +him a great deal. + +Kit Carson got his club cut just in time. The bears were coming after +him. Kit got up into the very top of the tree. He drew up his feet, +and made himself as small as he could. + +When the bears came near, one of them reached for Kit. Whack! went the +stick on the end of his nose. The bear drew back, and whined +with pain. + +First one bear tried to get him, and then the other. But which-ever +one tried, Kit was ready. The bear was sure to get his nose hurt. + +[Illustration] + +The bears grew tired, and rested awhile. But they kept up their +screeching and roaring. When their noses felt better, they tried +again. And then they tried again. But every time they came away with +sore noses. At last they both tried at once. But Carson pounded +faster than ever. One of the bears cried like a baby. The tears ran +out of his eyes. It hurt his feelings to have his nose treated in +this rude way. + +After a long time one of the bears got tired. He went away. After +awhile the other went away too. Kit Carson staid in the tree a long +time. Then he came down. The first thing he did was to get his gun. He +loaded it. But the bears did not come back. They were too busy +rubbing noses. + + + + + +HORACE GREELEY AS A BOY. + + +Hor-ace Gree-ley was the son of a poor farmer. He was always fond of +books. He learned to read almost as soon as he could talk. He could +read easy books when he was three years old. When he was four, he +could read any book that he could get. + +He went to an old-fashioned school. Twice a day all the children stood +up to spell. They were in two classes. Little Hor-ace was in the class +with the grown-up young people. He was the best speller in the class. +It was funny to see the little midget at the head of this class of +older people. But he was only a little boy in his feelings. If he +missed a word, he would cry. The one that spelled a word that he +missed would have a right to take the head of the class. Sometimes +when he missed, the big boys would not take the head. They did not +like to make the little fellow cry. He was the pet of all the school. + +People in that day were fond of spelling. They used to hold meetings +at night to spell. They called these "spelling schools." + +At a spelling school two captains were picked out. These chose their +spellers. Then they tried to see which side could beat the other +at spelling. + +Little Hor-ace was always chosen first. The side that got him got the +best speller in the school. Sometimes the little fellow would go to +sleep. When it came his turn to spell, some-body would wake him up. He +would rub his eyes, and spell the word. He would spell it right, too. + +When he was four or five years old, he would lie under a tree, and +read. He would lie there, and forget all about his dinner or his +supper. He would not move until some-body stumbled over him or +called him. + +People had not found out how to burn ker-o-sene oil in lamps then. +They used candles. But poor people like the Gree-leys could not afford +to burn many candles. Hor-ace gathered pine knots to read by +at night. + +[Illustration: Greeley Reading] + +He would light a pine knot Then he would throw it on top of the large +log at the back of the fire. This would make a bright flick-er-ing +light. + +Horace would lay all the books he wanted on the hearth. Then he would +lie down by them. His head was toward the fire. His feet were drawn up +out of the way. + +The first thing that he did was to study all his lessons for the next +day. Then he would read other books. He never seemed to know when +anybody came or went. He kept on with his reading. His father did +not want him to read too late. He was afraid that he would hurt his +eyes. And he wanted to have him get up early in the morning to help +with the work. So when nine o'clock came, he would call, "Horace, +Horace, Horace!" But it took many callings to rouse him. + +When he got to bed, he would say his lessons over to his brother. He +would tell his brother what he had been reading. But his brother would +fall asleep while Horace was talking. + +Horace liked to read better than he liked to work. But when he had a +task to do, he did it faith-ful-ly. His brother would say, "Let us go +fishing." But Horace would answer, "Let us get our work done first." + +Horace Gree-ley's father grew poorer and poorer. When Horace was ten +years old, his land was sold. The family were now very poor. They +moved from New Hamp-shire. They settled in Ver-mont. They lived in a +poor little cabin. + +Horace had to work hard like all the rest of the family. But he +borrowed all the books he could get. Sometimes he walked seven miles +to borrow a book. + +A rich man who lived near the Greeleys used to lend books to Horace. +Horace had grown tall. His hair was white. He was poorly dressed. He +was a strange-looking boy. One day he went to the house of the rich +man to borrow books. Some one said to the owner of the house, "Do you +lend books to such a fellow as that?" + +But the gen-tle-man said, "That boy will be a great man some day." + +This made all the com-pa-ny laugh. It seemed funny that anybody should +think of this poor boy becoming a great man. But it came true. The +poor white-headed boy came to be a great man. + +Horace Greeley learned all that he could learn in the country schools. +When he was thirteen, one teacher said to his father,-- + +"Mr. Greeley, Horace knows more than I do. It is not of any use to +send him to school any more." + + + + + +HORACE GREELEY LEARNING TO PRINT. + + +Horace Greeley had always wanted to be a printer. He liked books and +papers. He thought it would be a fine thing to learn to make them. + +One day he heard that the news-paper at East Poult-ney wanted a boy to +learn the printer's trade. He walked many long miles to see about it. +He went to see Mr. Bliss. Mr. Bliss was one of the owners of the +paper. Horace found him working in his garden. Mr. Bliss looked up. +He saw a big boy coming toward him. The boy had on a white felt hat +with a narrow brim. It looked like a half-peck measure. His hair was +white. His trousers were too short for him. All his clothes were +coarse and poor. He was such a strange-looking boy, that Mr. Bliss +wanted to laugh. + +"I heard that you wanted a boy," Horace said. + +"Do you want to learn to print?" Mr. Bliss said. + +"Yes," said Horace. + +"But a printer ought to know a good many things," said Mr. Bliss. +"Have you been to school much?" + +"No," said Horace. "I have not had much chance at school. But I have +read some." + +"What have you read?" asked Mr. Bliss. + +"Well, I have read some his-to-ry, and some travels, and a little of +everything." + +Mr. Bliss had ex-am-ined a great many schoolteachers. He liked to +puzzle teachers with hard questions. He thought he would try Horace +with these. But the gawky boy answered them all. This tow-headed boy +seemed to know everything. + +Mr. Bliss took a piece of paper from his pocket. He wrote on it, +"Guess we'd better try him." + +He gave this paper to Horace, and told him to take it to the printing +office. Horace, with his little white hat and strange ways, went into +the printing office. The boys in the office laughed at him. But the +foreman said he would try him. + +That night the boys in the office said to Mr. Bliss, "You are not +going to take that tow head, are you?" + +Mr. Bliss said, "There is something in that tow-head. You boys will +find it out soon." + +[Illustration: Greeley setting Type] + +A few days after this, Horace came to East Poult-ney to begin his +work. He carried a little bundle of clothes tied up in a +hand-ker-chief. + +The fore-man showed him how to begin. From that time he did not once +look around. All day he worked at his type. He learned more in a day +than some boys do in a month. + +Day after day he worked, and said nothing. The other boys joked him. +But he did not seem to hear them. He only kept on at his work. They +threw type at him. But he did not look up. + +The largest boy in the office thought he could find a way to tease +him. One day he said that Horace's hair was too white. He went and got +the ink ball. He stained Horace's hair black in four places. This ink +stain would not wash out. But Horace did not once look up. + +After that, the boys did not try to tease him any more. They all liked +the good-hearted Horace. And everybody in the town wondered that the +boy knew so much. + +Horace's father had moved away to Penn-syl-va-ni-a. Horace sent him +all the money he could spare. He soon became a good printer. He +started a paper of his own. He became a famous news-paper man. + + + + + +A WONDERFUL WOMAN. + + +Little Dor-o-thy Dix was poor. Her father did not know how to make a +living. Her mother did not know how to bring up her children. + +The father moved from place to place. Sometimes he printed little +tracts to do good. But he let his own children grow up poor +and wretched. + +Dor-o-thy wanted to learn. She wanted to become a teacher. She wanted +to get money to send her little brothers to school. + +Dor-o-thy was a girl of strong will and temper. When she was twelve +years old, she left her wretched home. She went to her grand-mother. +Her grand-mother Dix lived in a large house in Boston. She sent +Dorothy to school. + +Dorothy learned fast. But she wanted to make money. She wanted to help +her brothers. When she was fourteen, she taught a school. She tried to +make herself look like a woman. She made her dresses longer. + +She soon went back to her grand-mother. She went to school again. Then +she taught school. She soon had a school in her grandmother's house. +It was a very good school. Many girls were sent to her school. Miss +Dix was often ill. But when she was well enough, she worked away. She +was able to send her brothers to school until they grew up. + +Besides helping her brothers, she wanted to help other poor children. +She started a school for poor children in her grandmother's barn. + +After a while she left off teaching. She was not well. She had made +all the money she needed. + +But she was not idle. She went one day to teach some poor women in an +alms-house. Then she went to see the place where the crazy people were +kept. These insane people had no fire in the coldest weather. + +Miss Dix tried to get the man-a-gers to put up a stove in the room. +But they would not do it. Then she went to the court. She told the +judge about it. The judge said that the insane people ought to have a +fire. He made the man-a-gers put up a stove in the place where they +were kept. + +Then Miss Dix went to other towns. She wanted to see how the insane +people were treated. Some of them were shut up in dark, damp cells. +One young man was chained up with an iron collar about his neck. + +Miss Dix got new laws made about the insane. She per-suad-ed the +States to build large houses for keeping the insane. She spent most of +her life at this work. The Civil War broke out. There were many sick +and wounded soldiers to be taken care of. + +All of the nurses in the hos-pi-tals were put under Miss Dix. She +worked at this as long as the war lasted. Then she spent the rest of +her life doing all that she could for insane people. + + + + + +THE AUTHOR OF "LITTLE WOMEN." + + +Lou-i-sa Al-cott was a wild little girl. When she was very little, she +would run away from home. She liked to play with beggar children. + +One day she wandered so far away from her home, she could not find the +way back again. It was growing dark. The little girl's feet were +tired. She sat down on a door-step. A big dog was lying on the step. +He wagged his tail. That was his way of saying, "I am glad to +see you." + +Little Lou-i-sa grew sleepy. She laid her head on the curly head of +the big dog. Then she fell asleep. + +Lou-i-sa's father and mother could not find her. They sent out the +town crier to look for her. + +The town crier went along the street. As he went, he rang his bell. +Every now and then he would tell that a little girl was lost. At +last the man with the bell came to the place where Louisa was asleep. +He rang his bell. That waked her up. She heard him call out in a +loud voice,-- + +"Lost, lost! a little girl six years old. She wore a pink frock, a +white hat, and new green shoes." + +When the crier had said that, he heard a small voice coming out of the +darkness. It said, "Why, dat's me." The crier went to the voice, and +found Louisa sitting by the big dog on the door-step. The next day she +was tied to the sofa to punish her for running away. + +She and her sisters learned to sew well. Louisa set up as a doll's +dress-maker. She was then twelve years old. She hung out a little +sign. She put some pretty dresses in the window to show how well +she could do. + +Other girls liked the little dresses that she made. They came to her +to get dresses made for their dolls. They liked the little doll's hats +she made better than all. Louisa chased the chickens to get soft +feathers for these hats. + +She turned the old fairy tales into little plays. The children played +these plays in the barn. + +One of these plays was Jack and the Bean-stalk. A squash vine was put +up in the barn. This was the bean-stalk. When it was cut down, the +boy who played giant would come tumbling out of the hay-loft. + +Louisa found it hard to be good and o-be-di-ent. She wrote some verses +about being good. She was fourteen years old when she wrote them. Here +they are:-- + + + MY KINGDOM. + + A little kingdom I possess + Where thoughts and feelings dwell, + And very hard I find the task + Of gov-ern-ing it well. + + For passion tempts and troubles me, + A wayward will misleads, + And sel-fish-ness its shadow casts + On all my words and deeds. + + I do not ask for any crown + But that which all may win, + Nor seek to conquer any world + Except the one within. + + +The Al-cott family were very poor. Louisa +made up her mind to do something to make money +when she got big. She did not like +being so very poor. + +[Illustration] + +One day she was sitting on a cart-wheel thinking. She was thinking how +poor her father was. There was a crow up in the air over her head. The +crow was cawing. There was nobody to tell her thoughts to but the +crow. She shook her fist at the big bird, and said,-- + +"I will do something by and by. Don't care what. I'll teach, sew, act, +write, do anything to help the family. And I'll be rich and famous +before I die. See if I don't." + +The crow did not make any answer. But Louisa kept thinking about the +work she was going to do. The other children got work to do that made +money. But Louisa was left at home to do housework. She had to do the +washing. She made a little song about it. Here are some of the verses +of this song:-- + +[Illustration] + + +A SONG FROM THE SUDS. + +Queen of my tub, I merrily sing, + While the white foam rises high, +And stur-di-ly wash and rinse and wring, + And fasten the clothes to dry; +Then out in the free fresh air they swing, + Under the sunny sky. + +I am glad a task to me is given, + To labor at day by day; +For it brings me health and strength and hope, + And I cheer-ful-ly learn to say, +"Head you may think, Heart you may feel, + But Hand you shall work alway." + + +Louisa grew to be a woman at last. She went to nurse soldiers in the +war. She wrote books. When she wrote the book called "Little Women," +all the young people were de-light-ed. What she had said to the crow +came true at last. She became famous. She had money enough to make the +family com-fort-a-ble. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Stories of Great Americans for Little +Americans, by Edward Eggleston + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STORIES OF GREAT AMERICANS *** + +***** This file should be named 10070.txt or 10070.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/0/7/10070/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Michael Lockey and PG Distributed +Proofreaders + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS," WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/old/10070.zip b/old/old/10070.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..17a664b --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/10070.zip |
